Mercedes Eqe Saloon 2024 March v295 Mbux Owners Manual 1

EQE
Owner's Manual +
F295 0075 02
Did you know?
In order to meet all needs, your operator's manual is available to you in various formats.
In addition to this PDF, the following options are open to you:
Digital – in the vehicle Digital – on the Internet

Discover the Owner's Manual in the multimedia system You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz
under Preferences. Begin with Quick Start and discover homepage.
useful tips.
Digital – as an App
Vehicle document wallet The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge
Here you can find comprehensive information about oper‐ in familiar App stores.
ating your vehicle and about services and warranties in
printed form.
Apple® iOS AndroidTM
F295 0075 02
Front passenger airbag warning
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with

an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
F295 0075 02
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INTRODUCE
yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life for the CHANGES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS:
vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notes in this Owner's Manual. Failure
to do so may lead to personal injury or damage to the vehicle. R Design
R Equipment
THE STANDARD EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR VEHI‐
R Technical features
CLE MAY VARY AND DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R Model THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE COMPONENTS OF THE VEHICLE:

R Order
R Digital Owner's Manual
R National version
R Printed Owner's Manual
R Availability
R Service Booklet
R Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
In individual cases, your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations. R Supplementary documents
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. For right-
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in
hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.
the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that
your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version.
Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
COPYRIGHT
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and
used on other websites.
F295 0075 02
EQE - Owner's Manual
Contents
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.
Symbols 6 Opening and closing 174 MBUX multimedia system 520
Quick start and Tips 8 Seats and stowing 217 Maintenance and care 704
At a glance 72 Light and sight 266 Breakdown assistance 725
Digital Owner's Manual 92 Climate control 292 Wheels and tyres 747
General notes 95 Driving and parking 311 Technical data 777
Display messages and warning/indicator

Occupant safety 124 Driver's display 485 855
lamps
Children in the vehicle 145 MBUX Voice Assistant 509 Index 944
F295 0075 02
Symbols
Symbols
F295 0075 02
Symbols
In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols: # Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic

& WARNING
Danger due to not observing the warning notices Display Display in the central display
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia
health or life, or the health or life of others. system
# Observe the warning notices. 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia
system
* Indicates a cause
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental
notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsi‐
ble behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE
Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material
damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your
vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information

that could be helpful to you.
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips
Quick start and Tips

Seats 9 MBUX Voice Assistant 17 New multimedia system features 24
Children in the vehicle 10 ENERGIZING Packages 18 At the filling station 32
DIGITAL LIGHT 11 Driving Assistance package 19 Preparing for a holiday 37
Touch-sensitive controls 12 Parking Package 20 Luggage and loading 43
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

Radio 14 21 Ice and snow 54
or 3)
High-voltage battery direct current charg‐

Wi-Fi hotspot 15 22 Help in the event of a breakdown 60
ing (mode 4)
Connecting a mobile phone 16 Destination entry navigation 23 Expert tips 68
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Seats
Seats
Adjusting the seats
1 Head restraint height

2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion inclination
4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat fore-and-aft position
6 Seat backrest inclination
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 239).
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Children in the vehicle
Children in the vehicle
Safely transporting children in the vehicle R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys‐
tems on the front passenger seat (/ page 152)
# Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 148) R Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 168)
# Important warning stickers (/ page 149)
# Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 152)
# Recommended child restraint systems (/ page 156)
# Child safety locks for the rear side windows (/ page 171)
# Suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system
(/ page 146) # Child safety locks for the rear doors (/ page 169)
# Approval categories for child restraint systems (/ page 155)
# Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

(/ page 160)
R Fitting the ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 165)
# Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems

(/ page 161).
R Fitting the i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 165)
# Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 167)
# Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

(/ page 161)
R Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
(/ page 154)
10
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips DIGITAL LIGHT
DIGITAL LIGHT
Adaptive functions of DIGITAL LIGHT The availability of the assistance functions is country-dependent.
With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It
also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.
THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING ADAPTIVE FUNCTIONS:
R Active headlamps (/ page 271)

R Cornering light (/ page 271)
R Motorway mode (/ page 272)
R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 272)
R Bad weather light (/ page 272)
R City lighting (/ page 272)
R Topographical compensation (/ page 273)
# To activate or deactivate Digital Light:

R Briefly press © on the multimedia system display.
R Select Settings.
R Select Lights.
R Select DIGITAL LIGHT.
R Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
# To activate or deactivate enhanced assistance functions:

R Select Supporting projections.
R Activate or deactivate the desired projection.
11
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Touch-sensitive controls
Touch-sensitive controls
Overview of touch-sensitive controls
1 Control panel: 3 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system

w Switches the seat heating on/off 4 Control panel:
s Switches the seat ventilation on/off c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
V Operates the memory function u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
2 Control panel: ; me button
Driver's display | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter
12
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Touch-sensitive controls
5 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind
6 Control panel:
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT
c Active Parking Assist
û Calls up the EQ menu
\ Quick vehicle access
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off
a Switches sound on/off
ø Adjusts the volume
7 Í Operates the outside mirrors
# Observe the notes on the touch-sensitive controls (/ page 100).
13
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Radio
Radio
Operating radio R Select è.

R Enter a station name or frequency.
# To switch to radio: R Select a station.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
# To store radio stations:
R Tap on Þ.
# To set the frequency band: R Tap on Þ.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. R Select f.
R Tap on Þ.
# To set the traffic information service volume increase:
R Select a frequency band or a favourite.
# To set a radio station: R Tap on Z.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. R Select System.
R Tap on Þ. R Select Audio.
R Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio R Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
station.
R Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
# To call up the radio station list:
R Tap on Þ.
R Select 4.
# To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

R Tap on Þ.
14
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Wi-Fi hotspot
Wi-Fi hotspot
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:
R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communica‐
tion devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC.
The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device
is used for the data connection.
Data volumes must be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in
all countries.
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
multimedia system.
The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Acquired package
is used for the data connection.
OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:
R QR code
The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multi‐
media system.
R Security key
The connection is established by entering the security key displayed on
the multimedia system.
15
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Connecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone

# Activating Bluetooth®:
R Make sure that the mobile phone Bluetooth® is switched on.
R Tap on © on the central display or media display.
R Select Settings.
R Select System.
R Select Internet and Bluetooth.
R Activate Bluetooth®.
# Searching for a mobile phone:

R Tap on © on the central display or media display.
R Select Phone.
R Select Z.
R Select Devices.
R Select Devices.
R Select Connect new device.
# Authorising a mobile phone:

R Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
16
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips MBUX Voice Assistant
MBUX Voice Assistant
Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant

YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT:
R Telephone
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation
R Radio and media
R Vehicle functions
R Online functions
EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:
R To operate the phone: Call my father.

R To manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails.
R To operate the navigation: Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japa-
nese, in South London.
R To operate the radio: Which station am I currently listening to?
R To operate media: Play a similar track.
R To operate climate control: My feet are cold.
R To operate vehicle functions: Open the window.
R To call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomorrow?
R To ask a general knowledge question: Who painted the picture "The
Scream"?
17
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips ENERGIZING Packages
ENERGIZING Packages
Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

# To start an ENERGIZING programme:
R Select Comfort.
R Select ENERGIZING COMFORT.
R Select a programme and start with ;.
# To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

R Select a programme.
R Select Settings.
R Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.
# To start Power Nap:

R Select Power Nap.
R Select ; for the desired seat.
# To start a training programme:

R Select Training.
R Select a programme and start with ;.
R To activate fragrancing for training, select Air freshener.
# To start Tips:
R Select Tips.
R Select an area of the body and start with ;.
18
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Driving Assistance package
Driving Assistance package
Functions of the Driving Assistance Package # Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 428)
# Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 431)

The Driving Assistance Package contains various functions that assist you
when driving. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and radar sensors # Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432)
to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
The following functions are included in the Driving Assistance Package,

depending on country-specific availability:
# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396)
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
# Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 403)
# Route-based speed adaptation (country-dependent) (/ page 403)
# Active Brake Assist (/ page 414)
# Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 405)
# Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 408)
# Active Lane Change Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 409)
# Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 405)
19
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Parking Package
Parking Package
Functions of the Parking Package # Memory Parking Assist: can park your vehicle in, or exit a previously
recorded and stored parking space (/ page 467).
Depending on country-specific availability, your vehicle may be equipped with
various functions to assist you with parking and manoeuvring. For this pur‐ You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
pose, your vehicle uses cameras and ultrasonic sensors to monitor the vehicle
surroundings. # Trailer Manoeuvring Assist: Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you
when reversing with a trailer. The reversing camera monitors the articula‐
Depending on the equipment version, the following systems and functions are tion angle between the vehicle and the trailer and adjusts it to a speci‐
part of your Parking Package: fied value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your speed
(/ page 471).
# Reversing camera: monitors the area to the rear of the vehicle and dis‐
plays this on the driver display (/ page 442).
# 360° camera: a system comprising four cameras which cover the imme‐
diate vehicle surroundings and display this on the driver display
(/ page 444).
# Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic parking assistance system

which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and the distance to
obstacles in the vicinity using ultrasound (/ page 449).
# Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking assistance system which

assists you when parking or exiting a parking space by changing gear,
accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle (/ page 453).
# Remote Parking Assist: can park your vehicle and exit a parking space
while you are outside of your vehicle (/ page 459).
20
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
Starting and ending the charging process (combo 2 socket)
# More notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 342)
# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 350)
21
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)
High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)
Direct current charging (mode 4)

# More notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 342)
# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 350)
22
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Destination entry navigation
Destination entry navigation
Entering a navigation destination R Select POIs.

Select a POI category, e.g. j or enter a POI name or POI category in the
# Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. input line.
The zero layer is shown. If search results are displayed, limit them with Filter, for example by
The zero layer is your own personalised user interface with the digital search position or the desired travel time.
map in the foreground and the applications that you use the most. You R Select Contacts.
can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic Requirements:
menu.
A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and contacts
# Select ª Where to?. have been downloaded.
SELECT THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR DESTINATION ENTRY: The contact contains a navigable address.
R Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and longitude in the input line.
R Enter a POI, an address or a three-word address in the input line.
Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes, seconds and com‐
Online search results for POIs (if available) may contain additional infor‐ pass direction)
mation, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi‐
Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
ded by an online map service.
R Select a destination on the map.
You can find further information about three-word addresses at: https://
+what3words.com R Select Favourites.
R Select a destination suggestion directly on the zero layer. Requirements:
Requirements: The destinations have been saved as favourites.
The Navigation option is switched on in the user settings for Suggestions. R Select Received destinations.
The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show Requirements:
destination suggestions. There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.
R Select Previous destinations. The destinations have been sent to the vehicle.
Select a previous destination.
You can save the destination as a favourite .
23
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features
New multimedia system features
Information about the telephone menu TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

Via the telephone menu you can use the functions in connection with your
mobile phone.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED:
R Call lists
R Contacts
R Messages
R Device manager
USING CALL LISTS

If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists from
the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
mobile phone THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R Making calls from the call list
mobile phone (two phone mode)
R Opening contacts on the call list
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone MESSAGES
5 Options In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send
6 Messages them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can conven‐
iently use the read-aloud function during the journey.
7 Calls up my devices
8 Numerical pad DEVICE MANAGER
9 Starts contact search In the device manager, you can connect your mobile phone with the multime‐
dia system.
24
F295 0075 02
You have the option of using your mobile phone alone in single telephone R Privacy mode to transfer the call to the telephone or headphones
mode or together with another mobile phone in two phone mode.
USING CONTACTS Information about navigation

If you permit the multimedia system to access the contacts in your mobile
phone, you can use these in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 contacts. DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU VIA THE CONTACTS

MENU:
R Making telephone calls (calling a contact)

R Navigation
R Composing messages with the help of the MBUX voice assistant
R Additional options
1 Navigation module (reduced view) or EQ module (reduced view)
The contacts from your mobile phone can be downloaded automatically or Route guidance active:
manually. Reduced view of the navigation module shows information relevant to the
route, e.g. the next charging stop, the destination and a traffic delay
CONDUCTING A CALL £ Ends the current route guidance
When conducting a call, additional functions are available apart from making,
Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route
accepting or rejecting a call. For example, you can switch between calls, con‐
Route guidance not active:
duct a call with several participants or conference calls.
EQ module is shown in the reduced view
It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls. If you receive a call while Tapping opens the EQ module in the expanded view with the charging
already in a call, a message is displayed. functions
2 Enters a destination
DURING A CALL YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
3 Calls up the Control Centre in the status line
R Microphone off 4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
R Fade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones 5 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and
R Add a call suggestions
R Hands-free mode to transfer the call to the front or rear passenger com‐ 6 Searches for POIs, e.g. charging stations w and parking facilities j, as
partment well as setting map orientation and map type
25
F295 0075 02
7 Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the the most. You can switch between the zero layer and the home
route monitor (zoomed in view) screen with a classic menu.
For example, with active route guidance, route sections of the route list,
representations of upcoming driving manoeuvres, lane recommendations The navigation system offers many options for destination entry, route plan‐
. Switches off navigation announcements ning and route guidance. The traffic situation is taken into account during
Ì Switches on navigation announcements route guidance. When using route guidance with augmented reality, additional
information can be shown in a camera image before a turning manoeuvre.
NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW)
Services and apps help you reach the destination quickly, safely and in com‐
fort.
You start the destination entry with ª Where to? or in the home screen
using the quick-access Í beneath the application. You can enter the POI,
address or contact as the destination on-board or search online using a map
service. Or you select a previous destination. The destination can be stored
here as a favourite or be saved as an address for home and work. If the Allow
destination suggestions option is active, destination suggestions are available.
These are determined based on your driving habits and offer a convenient
selection of destinations. If external destinations and routes are received from
apps or services, these are also available.
1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station A destination can be shared by scanning it using the displayed QR code.
2 Charging stop shows the charging time recommended by the Navigation
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR ROUTE PLANNING, FOR
with Electric Intelligence as well as states of charge on arrival and onward
EXAMPLE:
journey for an optimal travel time
3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time R Route options:
4 Searches for an additional charging station e.g. avoid or use toll roads, tunnels, unpaved roads or areas
After calling up © the digital map appears on the Zero Layer. R Intermediate destinations
R Alternative routes
% The zero layer is your own personalised user interface with the R Commuter route
digital map in the foreground and the applications that you use R Automatic service station search
26
F295 0075 02
You can record and save routes then select or share them with a USB device.
Information on radio
Lane recommendations are shown during route guidance on multi-lane roads.
When driving on a motorway, service facilities on the route ahead can be
shown and used for route guidance.
The Live Traffic Information service takes the current traffic situation into
account. The map can show the current traffic flow, traffic incidents or warning
messages, e.g. the end of a traffic jam in a dangerous position.
Hazardous situations on public roads are detected automatically by the vehicle

via Car-to-X-Communication or these can be reported by the driver. The early
warning makes it possible to adapt your driving characteristics in good time.
Broken-down vehicles, accidents, weather hazards or a deployed hazard warn‐
ing light are shown on the map.
1 Active frequency band
The map shows map data from the database or content from an online map 2 Station name or set frequency
service. In small map scales, buildings are shown as realistic images. 3 Settings
4 Additional options
Weather information and data from other services can be integrated in the
map. Multi-storey car parks with the corresponding equipment, deliver data 5 Switches on traffic reports
about the current occupancy and about parking charges, for example. The 6 Station list
online map update service makes possible the updating of the map data. 7 Search
The options offered vary depending on the country, vehicle equipment and Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of radio stations and use the
available services. Internet Radio TuneIn. Search for your preferred stations and save these as
favourites or in station lists.
% The function of TuneIn Internet radio is country-dependent.
Radio text: this function shows you the station name, the track and the artist
for the song currently playing, for example.
27
F295 0075 02
DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted additional information C Media search
about a station can be shown, e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐ D Controls playback
grammes, news or also service information.
E Timeline
Traffic announcements: Traffic messages can be displayed by pressing .. Using the Media application, you can set and use the audio and video func‐
tions of your multimedia system. You can listen to music or look at videos, for
example.
Information on media
USB: Using the USBmenu, you can play back your own audio or video data
from a data storage medium connected by USB.
Bluetooth®: using the Bluetooth menu, you can connect a Bluetooth® audio
device with the multimedia system and play back the available tracks on the
audio device. Connecting the device can be conveniently handled in the
device manager, so you can complete all settings with just a few clicks.
Online music: the Online music menu allows you to access music streaming
services.
Notes on comfort
1 Album cover
2 Active media source The Comfort menu makes all the functions available that contribute to your
3 Track and artist comfort when driving or taking a break.
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback SEAT COMFORT
list The Seat menu allows you to flexibly adjust the contours of the seats to your
5 Random playback needs by adjusting the side bolsters and lumbar support independently. You
6 Repeat can save these settings in your Mercedes me profile, so they can be called up
7 Settings each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics function, you can start a pro‐
8 Additional options gramme that causes slight modifications of the seat position when you are
driving. These modifications promote a healthy back.
9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward
A Additional categories
B Playlists and categories
28
F295 0075 02
MASSAGE DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE THE FOLLOWING MENUS ARE AVAILABLE:

In the Massage menu you will find the massage programmes that are available
for your vehicle. By selecting the desired programme you start it directly and it R Energy flow
runs for a period of approximately ten minutes, depending on the programme Visualisation of the energy flow in the vehicle
selected. With the High intensity function you can increase the effect of the R Consumption
massage programme. Display of the current and average consumption values of the vehicle
AMBIENT LIGHT R Vehicle
In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour and brightness for your ambi‐ Display of vehicle data
ent lighting. Using the Link zones function, the ambience, accent and impres‐ R Engine
sion zones can be regulated separately so that you can set the lighting of your
Display of engine data such as current power and torque
vehicle individually.
R Drive
Display of current data of various drive elements such as current, voltage
Information about smartphone integration and temperature
Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various applications are available that
can bring the functions of your mobile phone to the multimedia system dis‐ Information about vehicle info
play. Operation can by carried out via the touchscreen or voice control, for
example. You can have important vehicle information displayed in the Info menu. At a
glance you will have an overview of vehicle and engine data or current con‐
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration sumption values, for example. In addition, you can call up the Digital Owner's
to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Manual via the Owner's Manual menu item.
Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐
tooth® with the multimedia system. VEHICLE DATA
THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE SHOWN, FOR EXAMPLE:
Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the Android operating system and
use Apple CarPlay® with your iPhone®. The full functionality of Android Auto R Activity of the acceleration and brake pedal
and Apple CarPlay® is only possible with an Internet connection. R Activity of the suspension strut
R wheel angle
Information on AMG Performance R G-force display for the linear and lateral acceleration
Using the AMG Performance menu, you can call up information about the per‐
formance of your vehicle.
29
F295 0075 02
ENGINE DATA R Using the web browser to surf the Internet

THE FOLLOWING DATA IS SHOWN:
You require a user account, and have to connect your vehicle with the user
R Transmission oil temperature
account, in order to be able to use services.
R Engine/coolant temperature
R Performance
% If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehi‐
R Torque cle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.
R Boost pressure
CONSUMPTION DATA Please not that the available features are country-dependent.
Depending on your driving style, this display shows the current and average
fuel consumption. Together with the displays of vehicle and engine data, you
can adapt your driving style to be as efficient and economical as possible. Information on settings
In the Settings you can set the basic configuration for your multimedia system
Information about In-Car Office and the vehicle. You have access to all functions in this menu, from switching
the driver assistance systems on and off to display and language settings.
Using the In-Car Office menu you can connect your online services with the
multimedia system. THE SETTINGS ARE STRUCTURED IN THE FOLLOWING MENUS:
R Assistance
YOU THEN HAVE MULTIPLE OPTIONS AVAILABLE:
R Vehicle
R Organising your meetings and telephone conferences. R Lights
R Managing your e-mails and appointments. R System
R Have navigation to the location for a meeting.
ASSISTANCE MENU
With the Assistance menu you have direct access to the driver assistance sys‐
Information about Mercedes me Apps tems which are installed in your vehicle and can either switch these on or off,
or configure according to your wishes.
VARIOUS SERVICES AND ONLINE FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE
APPS MERCEDES ME MENU: VEHICLE MENU
HERE YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Managing Mercedes me services
R Using the dashcam R Automatic folding in of the outside mirrors when parking the vehicle
30
F295 0075 02
R Automatic adjustment of the seat and steering wheel, for comfortable

entry and exit from the vehicle
R Automatic activation of the 360° camera when selecting reverse gear
LIGHT MENU
All the light settings can be carried out in the Lights menu. You can activate or
deactivate the Intelligent Light System here, set for how long your vehicle
should remain lit after parking or unlocking or switch the function off.
SYSTEM MENU
All important settings for the multimedia system can be carried out in the Sys-
tem menu.
YOU CAN CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Setting the system language

R The configuration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
R Setting of time and date
31
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips At the filling station
At the filling station
Topping up the windscreen washer system # Press on the rear area of washer fluid filler flap 1.
Washer fluid filler flap 1 will open.
& WARNING # Top up the washer fluid.

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate
# Close washer fluid filler flap 1.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable.
# Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks
when using windscreen washer concentrate.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Requirements
& WARNING
R The vehicle is unlocked.
Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before

changing the wiper blades.
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION

# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
32
F295 0075 02
% Depending on the time of production of the vehicle, different

variants of wiper blades may be used.
REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
will go.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal

position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)
will go.
# Press release knob 2.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in direction of arrow 3.
33
F295 0075 02
# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 # Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.
until release knob 2 engages.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
# Press button î on the combination switch.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Switch on the vehicle. # Switch off the vehicle.
# Press button î on the combination switch. MAINTENANCE DISPLAY
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Switch off the vehicle.

FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)
# Remove protective film 1 from the service indicator.
When the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the
wiper blades should be replaced.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow
1.
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking

position.
34
F295 0075 02
Information on washing the vehicle in a car * NOTE

wash Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing # Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the
the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular
# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐ the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH,
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:
* NOTE R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Damage from automatic braking R The HOLD function is switched off.
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐ R The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS: R The vehicle is locked and the door handles retracted.
R Active Brake Assist R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R HOLD function R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
R Active Parking Assist R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
R The key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during wise, the boot lid or a door could open unintentionally.
towing or in the car wash.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R For car washes with conveyor systems:
- Neutral i is engaged.
- The vehicle is locked from the inside.
35
F295 0075 02
% Removing the wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades
after washing the vehicle will help avoid smearing and reduce
wiper noise.
36
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday
Preparing for a holiday
Notes on adjusting the lights when you are ONCE THE HEADLAMPS HAVE BEEN CONVERTED:
driving abroad R Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.

R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the head‐
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives
available.
on the other side of the road.
Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience function, the headlamps will

automatically adjust when you cross the border into countries where traffic Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be tyres
adjusted manually on the Low beam menu (/ page 279).
THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE: & WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
R If automatic is selected on the Low beam menu
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
R If navigation and the navigation position are available
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately.
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND
CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:
R If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only dis‐
play message is shown.
R If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is
shown.
37
F295 0075 02
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres
& WARNING 4 mm.
Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident. Removing the safety vest
On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR
R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm
# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Safety vests can be stored in the door stowage compartments of all doors.
# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for # To remove: open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest.
the minimum tread depth is reached.
# To replace: fold the safety vest, roll it up and insert it into the safety vest
bag 1.
CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT # Then place the safety vest bag 1 back into the door stowage compart‐
LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A ment.
LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 755).

R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
R Check the valve caps.
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across
the entire width.
38
F295 0075 02
Removing the warning triangle
1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach # Remove the warning triangle 1.
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
First-aid bag
6 Do not dry clean
7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty.

R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded. The first-aid bag 1 is located on the right-hand side of the boot in the as-
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to delivered condition.
sunlight.
DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

Map data update overview
As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a
R Please contact your local waste disposal company.
negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-
Benz.
39
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car
DATA: > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage
medium.
R Online map update
R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has
Additional costs can be incurred in this process.
been restarted, the updated map data is used.
ONLINE MAP UPDATE
REQUIREMENTS: Entering a POI or address
R Mercedes me connect is available.
Requirements:
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region. Observe the notes on destination entry (/ page 580).
R The service has been activated. R For the online search:
- There is an Internet connection.
- Mercedes me connect is available.
% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐
tries. - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have
accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update.
- The service is available and has been activated.
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the
European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.
% If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle
the data of the digital map.
is switched on.
UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL

The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/
40
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system:
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
4 © 5 ª Where to?
tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.
THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:
R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
R Contact name
R Geo-coordinates (/ page 584)
Example: entering a POI or address
1 Input line with current entry R Three-word addresses from what3words (/ page 584)
2 Search result Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search .
3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with dou‐
ble arrow # Hide the keyboard with a.
4 Deletes an entry
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
# Select the destination in the list.
6 Deletes the last character entered The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
information and a corresponding map section.
7 Hides the keypad
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
8 Switches to handwriting recognition (/ page 550)
9 Starts the MBUX voice assistant (/ page 511)
A Sets the written language
B Switches to digits and special characters
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
41
F295 0075 02
Searching for radio stations using station

names or frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select è.
# Enter a station name or frequency.
# Select a station.
42
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading
Luggage and loading
Attaching a roof luggage rack * NOTE

Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐
& WARNING ble clearance height
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. # Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as # If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
drive in.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
style.
structures or other carrier systems into account.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
section.
43
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for

Mercedes-Benz.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the

roof luggage rack is fitted, the tailgate can be fully opened.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that
the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE
Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.
* NOTE # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

Damage to panorama sliding sunroof caused by roof luggage rack
If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is
fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof lug‐ # Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direction of the arrow.
gage rack.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.
# Do not open the panorama sliding sunroof if a roof luggage
rack is fitted.
# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manu‐
facturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
44
F295 0075 02
Folding the rear seat backrests forward Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest will not be locked.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
& WARNING
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. Requirements:
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted.
parts in the sweep of the seat. R Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up.
FOLDING THE REAR OUTER SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD

& WARNING You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately.
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre
The seat backrest may fold forwards. seat backrest.
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR: If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold
the backrest back into place.
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional # Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked
injury. to the left seat backrest (/ page 250).
R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
load compartment.
ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐

CIALLY:
R After the seat has been adjusted.

R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards
45
F295 0075 02
# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into marked position 2. # Press release catch 2.
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. # Fold seat backrest 1 forwards.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat.
# Pull release lever 1.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
46
F295 0075 02
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the
The seat backrest may fold forwards. seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR: seat backrest is folded back.
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional the seat backrest.
injury.
load compartment.

CIALLY:

wards
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest will not be locked. # Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐ If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. tion indicator 2 will be visible.
47
F295 0075 02
Opening the stowage space under the boot & WARNING

floor Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
been properly engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!
# Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
structed.
# Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.
* NOTE
# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2. Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
Folding the ball neck out and in hitch, retract the ball neck.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
# Always engage the ball neck as described.
48
F295 0075 02
# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
hitch itself may be damaged in the process. Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
# Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fix‐
ture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is per‐
mitted.
# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the

information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing
eye."
FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check
lock message will appear on the driver display.
# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Keep the swivel range clear.
49
F295 0075 02
FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY:
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 928)

R Display messages (/ page 856)
Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241).
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.

The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
1 Tie-down eyes
% Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehicles equipped with

the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).
# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly
behind the bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will
disappear.
50
F295 0075 02
Overview of the front storage compartments & WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's and front-passenger
& WARNING footwell
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Objects in the driver's and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or travel or block a depressed pedal.
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road safety of the vehicle.
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's or front-passenger footwell.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction. # Always ensure that the pedals have sufficient free space.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
around in such situations.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage top of one another.
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
1 Stowage spaces in the doors

2 Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with multime‐
dia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console, with cup holders, USB
ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones depend‐
ing on the vehicle version
51
F295 0075 02
4 Stowage tray below the central display of the multimedia system with USB Opening and closing the glove compartment
ports
5 Glove compartment
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
% The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre con‐
sole 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 722).
all objects they contain.
% Use the rubber strap to securely store objects in the stowage There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
tray under the central display. sudden change in direction.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage


52
F295 0075 02
# To open: press button 1.

The glove compartment will open.
# To close: fold the glove compartment upwards.

The glove compartment will close.
53
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow
Ice and snow
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and & WARNING

tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to damaged tyres On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any # Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
damaged tyres immediately. surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
R M+S tyres: 4 mm

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT

LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A
54
F295 0075 02

R Check the valve caps. * NOTE
Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fit‐
ted snow chains
the entire width.
If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may
damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.
4 mm.
# Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
Setting the speed limit for winter tyres

Multimedia system: * NOTE
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Winter tyre limit Damage to wheel trims through fitted snow chains
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit. If you fit snow chains on aluminium wheels you could damage the
wheel trims.
SETTING A SPEED
# Select Winter tyre limit. # Remove the wheel trims from the aluminium wheels before fit‐
ting snow chains.
# Selecting a speed.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:

Notes on snow chains
R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.
You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
& WARNING Centre.
Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains of the same
against the vehicle body or chassis components. quality standard.
R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
# Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist
when snow chains are fitted.
55
F295 0075 02
R Vehicles with AIRMATIC: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised
vehicle level (/ page 435). * NOTE
R Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen
with Snow Chain mode active (/ page 753). washer fluid
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of
the exterior lighting.
% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyre # Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
mode (/ page 396). use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
% You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 385). This allows
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power. * NOTE
Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.
Notes on windscreen washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 842). Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.
& WARNING RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
contact with hot components, it may ignite. R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
# Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled

near to the filler opening. For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
tainer.
Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
56
F295 0075 02
WINDSCREEN WASHER SYSTEM # Press on the rear area of washer fluid filler flap 1.
WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR CAPACITY Washer fluid filler flap 1 will open.
Model Filling volume # Top up the washer fluid.

All models Maximum 3.7 l # Close washer fluid filler flap 1.
Topping up the windscreen washer system
& WARNING
& WARNING
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable.
# Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks on while wiper blades are being replaced
when using windscreen washer concentrate. If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
Requirements # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before
changing the wiper blades.

bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

57
F295 0075 02

will go.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it position.
will go.
58
F295 0075 02

1.

position.
59
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown
Help in the event of a breakdown
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning

lights
Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen
# Press button 1.
THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:
Vehicles without MBUX Hyperscreen
R the airbag has been deployed.
R the vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than
70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard
warning light system using the warning lamp button.
60
F295 0075 02
Removing the fire extinguisher
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.
Safety vests can be stored in the door stowage compartments of all doors.
# Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
# To remove: open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest.
# Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.
bag 1.
# Then place the safety vest bag 1 back into the door stowage compart‐
ment.
# Pull the tab 1 upwards.
# Fold tab 1 down.

# Remove fire extinguisher 2. 2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
Removing the safety vest 4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
61
F295 0075 02
6 Do not dry clean First-aid bag

7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded.
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to The first-aid bag 1 is located on the right-hand side of the boot in the as-
sunlight. delivered condition.
DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the socket flap and on the opposite side on the B-
pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
Removing the warning triangle quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the rout‐
ing of the electric lines) in compact form.
You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/
Starting assistance and charging the

12‑V‑battery
# Remove the warning triangle 1. # Only have starting assistance provided by a qualified specialist work‐
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Only have the battery charged at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
62
F295 0075 02
Notes on electrical fuses * NOTE

Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
& WARNING Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to mal‐
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines function.
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.
enter the fuse box.
This could result in a fire. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐ positioned correctly on the fuse box.
ing the correct amperage.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause determined and rectified
at a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:
Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. R All electrical consumers are switched off.
# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R The vehicle is switched off.
tive specified fuse rating.
THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:
Replace blown fuses with equivalent fuses, identifiable by their colour and R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 745)
label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 745)
the fuse assignment diagram.
R Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 745)
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the rear passenger compart‐
ment (/ page 745).
63
F295 0075 02
Notes on flat tyres % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries
(/ page 771).
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to a flat tyre
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
and braking.
With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equip‐
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: ped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find
out which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and approved for a wheel change
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. on your vehicle.
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ WHEEL:
cialist workshop.
R Jack
Run-flat tyres: R Chock
R Wheel wrench
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended
R Centring pin
tyres (run-flat tyres).
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐ % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT: The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the
sticker affixed to the jack.
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of a malfunction,
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
TIREFIT kit (/ page 729).
R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for break‐
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot.
down assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break‐
down (/ page 650).
R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 764). % When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is adequately secured.
64
F295 0075 02
% YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY

(LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE
INFLATION COMPRESSOR:
R LK3 – 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg
AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLA‐

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:
TION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE
R Jack GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY:
R Gloves R Emission sound pressure level LPA 84 dB(A)
R Wheel wrench
R Sound power level LWA 92 dB(A)
R Centring pin
R Folding chock
The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a
R Ratchet wrench for jack malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
TIREFIT kit storage location

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the
The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot floor.
ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 737).
# Make sure that the 12‑V‑battery is connected and charged
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE 12‑V‑BATTERY IS DISCON‐

NECTED OR DISCHARGED
1 Tyre inflation compressor R The drive system cannot be started

2 Tyre sealant bottle R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R The selector lever cannot be put into position i or j.
Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places
under the boot floor.
65
F295 0075 02
TRANSPORT IS ONLY PERMITTED WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE FOLLOW‐

ING CONDITIONS OCCUR: & WARNING
Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
R If the selector lever cannot be put into position i.
IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAV‐
R if the 12‑V‑battery is disconnected or discharged. IER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE
R If the display in the instrument cluster is not working FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:
R If the á Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is dis‐
R the towing eye may become detached.
played
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
R If the + Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual message is displayed
R If the d Stop Switch off the vehicle message is displayed # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be
tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross
mass.
# In such cases, transport the vehicle (/ page 740).
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed, its permissible gross mass must

* NOTE not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over
long distances # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 840).
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
speeds or over long distances. TOWING THE VEHICLE
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 743).
# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
# Fasten the towing device.
# A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.
* NOTE
Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 191).
66
F295 0075 02
# Do not activate the HOLD function.

* NOTE
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 216). Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 419). THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE TOWED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS:
# Put the selector lever into position i.
R The vehicle is switched off.
# Release the electric parking brake. R The start-stop button was pressed after the selector lever was
moved to the i position.
# Remain in the cockpit during towing and observe the display messages.
R The brake system or the power steering is faulty.
# Do not switch off the vehicle while it is being towed. Do not operate the R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is faulty.
start/stop button after moving the selector lever to the i position.
# Do not tow the vehicle in these situations.
# Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, because other‐
wise the selector lever automatically switches to position j.
* NOTE
Damage due to excessive tractive power
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to restricted safety-relevant functions during If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
towing vehicles could be damaged.
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

R The start-stop button was pressed after the selector lever was
R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is faulty.
# Transport the vehicle (/ page 740).
67
F295 0075 02
Quick start and Tips Expert tips
Expert tips
Additional functions of buttons & WARNING

OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOWS USING THE AIR-RECIRCULATION Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
BUTTON (CONVENIENCE CLOSING/OPENING) ence closing
When the air-recirculation mode is activated, the side windows can be closed When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
automatically, e.g. before entering a tunnel. When the air-recirculation mode is could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.
deactivated, the side windows can be moved back to their original position.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor
the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
& WARNING are in the closing area.
Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# To close windows: press and hold the button g in the climate bar in
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
the central display or the air conditioning control panel until the win‐
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
dows move.
sliding sunroof.
The windows close and air-recirculation mode switches on.
the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
68
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS

& WARNING Multimedia system:
Risk of entrapment from the convenience opening feature 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or # Select Radio announcements.
become trapped between the side window and window frame.
The traffic information service is switched on or off.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
windows.
Useful vehicle functions
# If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W
button in the door to open the side windows. STORING THE PARKING POSITION OF THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE
MIRROR USING THE MEMORY BUTTON
The side windows stop.
Requirements
# To continue closing the side windows, pull on the W button.
R Reverse gear has not been engaged.
# To reopen closed windows: press and hold g the button in the cli‐
mate bar in the central display or the air conditioning control panel until
the windows move.
The windows move back to their original position and air-recirculation
mode switches off.
Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof closes or opens simulta‐
neously.
IF BODY PARTS BECOME ENTRAPPED IN THE SLIDING SUNROOF:

# To stop: press the 3 button.
# To open: pull the button 3 back. # Use button 2 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
RESETTING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SETTINGS
# Press and hold the Climate menu entry on the climate bar of the multime‐ # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
dia system for four seconds. tion using button 1.
The climate control settings will be reset to the basic settings. # Press the V button.
69
F295 0075 02
# Confirm immediately using button 1 to store the setting. OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and
% No more than three seconds may pass between the V button
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate
and button 1 being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be can‐
an accident site in places that are difficult to access.
celled after three seconds.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically
(/ page 661) or manually (/ page 662).
Good to know Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make
an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
DEACTIVATING THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS
KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:
the key so that all of its functions are available once again.
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐
system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐
# Press and hold the key button s. mitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the
# With the key button s pressed, immediately press key button Ü availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
twice in quick succession. gency call centre.
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can
longer. be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is
switched on.
% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
KEY:
R Press any button on the key. % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
compartment(/ page 319). faulty.
70
F295 0075 02
YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐

TEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
R A corresponding message appears in the driver display.

R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
EMERGENCY GUIDE
In the event of an accident or breakdown, the emergency guide shows safety
notes on the central display.
THESE INCLUDE, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Recommended actions when leaving the vehicle

R Procedure for safely removing seat belts in the event of an accident
whereby the vehicle comes to rest on its roof
THE EMERGENCY GUIDE IS ACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R Occupant protection system has been triggered

R An emergency call is made
R Certain breakdown situations
% The availability as well as the scope of the emergency guide can

vary depending in the country and vehicle equipment.
Back to Contents 71
F295 0075 02
At a glance
At a glance
Cockpit (central display) 73
Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) 76
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 79
Indicator and warning lamps (with driver

82
camera)
Overhead control panel 85
Door operating unit and seat adjustment 87
Emergencies and breakdowns 90
F295 0075 02
At a glance Cockpit (central display)
Cockpit (central display)
Left-hand-drive vehicles (with central display)
73
F295 0075 02
74
F295 0075 02
1± Increases recuperation 324 c Active Parking Assist 454 Control panel for the MBUX multi‐
B 532
media system
q Reduces recuperation 324 û Calls up the EQ menu 364
CAdjusts the steering wheel 232
2Combination switch 269 \ Quick vehicle access
D! Electric parking brake 373
3Driver's display 489 ú Fingerprint sensor 534
EDiagnostics connection 110
4DIRECT SELECT lever 336 Ü Switches the MBUX multime‐
524
dia system on/off FLight switch 268
5Central display 524
a Switches sound on/off 547 GControl panel:
6Glove compartment 51
ø Adjusts the volume 548 Driver's display 489
7Stowage compartment 51
9£ Hazard warning light system 60 I Active Distance Assist
399
DISTRONIC and variable limiter
8Switch panel for:
AStart/stop button 316
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 333
75
F295 0075 02
At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)
Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)
Left-hand-drive vehicles (with MBUX hyperscreen)
76
F295 0075 02
77
F295 0075 02
1± Increases recuperation 324 7Stowage compartment 51 ø Adjusts the volume 548
q Reduces recuperation 324 8£ Hazard warning light system 60 AStart/stop button 316
2Combination switch 269 9Switch panel for: BAdjusts the steering wheel 232
3DIRECT SELECT lever 336 ÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 333 C! Electric parking brake 373
4MBUX hyperscreen with: c Active Parking Assist 454 DDiagnostics connection 110
Driver's display 486 û Calls up the EQ menu 364 ELight switch 268
Central display 524 \ Quick vehicle access FControl panel:
Front passenger display 524 ú Fingerprint sensor 534 Driver's display 489
Control panel for the MBUX multi‐ Ü Switches the MBUX multime‐ I Active Distance Assist
5 532 524 399
media system dia system on/off DISTRONIC and variable limiter
6Glove compartment 51 a Switches sound on/off 547
78
F295 0075 02
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
Standard driver display
79
F295 0075 02
80
F295 0075 02
1#! Turn signal lights 269 8ü Seat belt 930 G! Electric parking brake (red) 934
2Ú System error 931 9L Distance warning 936 HJ Brakes (red) 934
3ï Trailer hitch 932 A! ABS 936 J Brakes (yellow) 934
4ä Suspension (red) 936 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐ IR Range 493

B 942
tem
ä Suspension (yellow) 936 JState of charge indicator 493
Cå ESP® OFF 936
5# Electrical fault 931 KK High beam 269
÷ ESP® 936
6Ù Power steering (red) 932 L Low beam 268
D_ Reduced power 931
Ù Power steering (yellow) 932 T Side lights 268
õ Operational readiness of
E 316
drive system
Ù Rear-axle steering (red) 932 LR Rear fog light 269
! Electric parking brake (yel‐
Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow) 932
F 934 H Mercedes-Benz emergency
low) M 941
call system
76 Restraint system 930
81
F295 0075 02
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)
Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)
Driver display with driver camera
82
F295 0075 02
83
F295 0075 02
1Ú System error 931 ! Electric parking brake (yel‐ H Mercedes-Benz emergency

B 934 I 941
low) call system
2#! Turn signal lights 269
C! Electric parking brake (red) 934 Jï Trailer hitch 932
3ü Seat belt 930
DJ Brakes (red) 934 K# Electrical fault 931
4L Distance warning 936
J Brakes (yellow) 934 LÙ Power steering (red) 932
56 Restraint system 930
ER Range 493 Ù Power steering (yellow) 932
6_ Reduced power 936
FState of charge indicator 493 Ù Rear-axle steering (red) 932
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
7 942 GR Rear fog light 269 Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow)
tem 932
8å ESP® OFF 936 HK High beam 269 Mä Suspension (red) 936
÷ ESP® 936 L Low beam 268 ä Suspension (yellow) 936
9! ABS 936 T Side lights 268
õ Operational readiness of
A 316
drive system
84
F295 0075 02
At a glance Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
85
F295 0075 02
At a glance Overhead control panel
1Sun visors 6G SOS button 650 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

9 130
lamps
c Switches the front interior Switches the right-hand reading
2 280 7 280
lighting on/off lamp on/off AInside rear-view mirror 287
u Switches the rear interior 3 Opens/closes the panorama Switches the left-hand reading
3 280 8 209 B 280
lighting on/off sliding sunroof lamp on/off
4; me button 650 3 Opens/closes the panorama

209
sliding sunroof roller sunblind
| Switches automatic interior
5 280
lighting control on/off
86
F295 0075 02
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment
Door operating unit and seat adjustment
87
F295 0075 02
88
F295 0075 02
ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehi‐ 7p Opens/closes the boot lid 198 W Opens/closes the left side
1 188 D 205
cle window
8Í Operates the outside mirrors 286
2Opens the door 187 EAdjusts the head restraints 225
W Opens/closes the right side
3Adjusts the seats electrically
9 205 Seat adjustment using the multi‐
222 window F 228
media system
w Switches the seat heating W Opens/closes the rear right
4 230 A 205
on/off side window
s Switches the seat ventilation S Child safety lock for the rear
5 231 B 171
on/off side windows
V Operates the memory func‐ W Opens/closes the rear left

6 239 C 205
tion side window
89
F295 0075 02
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
Emergencies and breakdowns
90
F295 0075 02
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1B-pillar with: 4Towing away 737 QR code for accessing the rescue
62
card
QR code for accessing the rescue 5Flat tyre 64
62
card AFirst-aid kit (soft sided) 39
Operating the high-voltage discon‐
information label on tyre pressure 756 6 313 BTowing away 737
nect device
2Safety vests 38 7£ Hazard warning light system 60 CTIREFIT kit 729
3; me button 650 8Fire extinguisher 61 DWarning triangle 39
G SOS button 650 9Socket flap with:
Back to Contents 91
F295 0075 02
Digital Owner's Manual
Digital Owner's Manual

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual 93
F295 0075 02
Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual
5 Open Digital Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehi‐
cle and the multimedia system.
# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
R Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations
with your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
1 Menu
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driv‐
2 Search
er's display.
3 Back
R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.
4 Contents section
You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be
expanded and collapsed.
quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:
Driver display: call up of brief information on display messages in the driver

display. Pressing Õ will relay brief information in the central display.
MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system
Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Owner's Man‐
ual in the home screen
93
F295 0075 02
Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
% For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated

while driving.
Back to Contents 94
F295 0075 02
General notes
General notes
Declarations of conformity and notes on

Protection of the environment 96 106 Implied warranty 117
driving in different countries
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 97 Diagnostics connection 110 QR code for rescue card 118
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 98 Qualified specialist workshop 112 Data storage 119
Touch-sensitive control elements 100 Vehicle registration 113 Copyright 123
Mercedes me App 101 Correct use of the vehicle 114
Operating safety 102 REACH regulation 115
Fitting the licence plate onto the front Notes for persons with electronic medical
105 116
licence plate bracket aids
F295 0075 02
General notes Protection of the environment
Protection of the environment
# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehi‐

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE cle in front.
Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal
driving style # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help # Drive in a way that conserves energy. Observe the ECO display
protect the environment. Please observe the following recommenda‐
for an economical driving style.
tions on operating conditions and personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks high-voltage battery
once you no longer need them). A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the envi‐
ronment.
# Monitor energy consumption.
# Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified special‐
# Adhere to the service intervals.
ist workshop.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental
protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
96
F295 0075 02
General notes Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU COUNTRIES ONLY:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly
disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles
Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established

for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of
charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle
and conserving resources.
For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehi‐
cles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz
website for your country.
97
F295 0075 02
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE * NOTE

Environmental damage caused by not using recycled recondi‐ Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems
tioned components from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts AIRBAGS AND SEAT BELT TENSIONERS, AS WELL AS CONTROL
with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the UNITS AND SENSORS FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, MAY BE
implied warranty is valid as for new parts. INSTALLED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:
# Recycled reconditioned components and parts from R doors
Mercedes‑Benz AG. R door pillars
R Sill
R Seats
R Cockpit
R Driver's display
R Centre console
R lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these

areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts,
tyres and wheels or accessories relevant to safety that have not been
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system)
98
F295 0075 02
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal

quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts
that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability,
safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibil‐
ity for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been
officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they
comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the
approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the
vehicle's general operating permit.
THIS WILL BE THE CASE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general
operating permit was granted.
R Other road users could be endangered.
R The noise level gets worse.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 840) when
ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.
99
F295 0075 02
General notes Touch-sensitive control elements
Touch-sensitive control elements
In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped WHEN USING TOUCH-SENSITIVE USER INTERFACE SURFACES, OBSERVE
with touch-sensitive control elements. THE FOLLOWING POINTS TO AVOID OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS:
THESE ARE LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE: R Do not affix stickers orsimilar objects on the surfaces
R Do not attach a smartphone‑ or other holders to the surface of the cen‐
R Roof and door operating unit
tral display.
R Climate control
R Protect the surfaces against moisture and wet conditions.
R Steering wheel
R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (/ page 722).
R MBUX multimedia system
In addition to a symbol, some touch-sensitive control elements also feature

The control elements feature touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. These integrated indicator lamps. Ensure that the symbol of the control element is
surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or trigger pressed during use.
functions, forexample.
In the touchscreen area, haptic acknowledgement is relayed through the

touch-sensitive surface, forexample in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or a
change in user interface surface structure.
HAPTIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IS RELAYED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐

TIONS, FOREXAMPLE:
R When pressing a button on the user interface surface

R When scrolling in a list or table
R When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up
window
100
F295 0075 02
General notes Mercedes me App
Mercedes me App
Notes about the on-demand feature # Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle.
The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notifi‐
You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via cation also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.
Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.
Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using

Mercedes me
Requirements
R The vehicle has a wireless connection.

R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
ORDERING AND ACTIVATING ON-DEMAND FEATURE

# Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping bas‐
ket in the Mercedes me Store.
# Complete the order.

The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.
SPEEDING UP ACTIVATION
# Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
101
F295 0075 02
General notes Operating safety
Operating safety
If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is ren‐
& WARNING dered invalid.
Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any
required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system
failures. * NOTE
Impairment of the operating efficiency of the vehicle or individual
# Always have the prescribed service‑ and maintenance work or components due to tampering with the on-board electronics
any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.
The vehicle is equipped by the manufacturer with various safety mecha‐
nisms that interact with each other.
IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS TAMPERING WITH THE ON-BOARD ELEC‐

& WARNING
TRONICS DUE TO AN UNAUTHORISED MODIFICATION OF CONTROL
Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to elec‐
UNITS AND/OR THEIR SOFTWARE/DATA, THIS MAY HAVE THE FOL‐
tronic components
LOWING EFFECTS:
Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can
impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked R Individual vehicle functions are (temporarily) no longer opera‐
components or safety-relevant systems. tional.
R The overall vehicle is (temporarily) no longer operational.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.
# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
# You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or
workshop and, if necessary, reset to factory settings.
their software.
# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.
102
F295 0075 02
* NOTE & DANGER

Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐
to the vehicle underbody and suspension components nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR, THERE IS A The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high volt‐
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE: age. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
road may cause a fire.
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed
bump or pothole In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
the damage is not visible.
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension # Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board
components, wheels or tyres and high-voltage battery components may
electrical system.
not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail
or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force # Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-
as intended. board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. # Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-
board electrical system.
or
# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-
# If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull voltage on-board electrical system.
over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention
to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified special‐ # After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
ist workshop.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and
Electric vehicles have an electric motor. The energy supply for the electric replaced if necessary.
motor comes from the high-voltage onboard electrical system.
103
F295 0075 02
The components of the high-voltage onboard electrical system are marked

with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage onboard electrical
system are orange.
Example
High-voltage components that can become very hot are marked with a sepa‐
rate warning sticker:
Vehicles with an electric motor generate significantly less vehicle noise emis‐
sions than vehicles with combustion engines.
This means that other road users may fail to hear the vehicle owing to its sig‐
nificantly lower driving noise.
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which
serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective measure
is prescribed by law.
This exterior noise by the sound generator (AVAS) is audible in the vehicle
interior at low speeds, and is not a malfunction.
104
F295 0075 02
General notes Fitting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket
Fitting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket
The information label can be found on the licence plate bracket, either
embossed or in sticker form.
* NOTE
Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the
licence plate on the front licence plate holder
If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate
holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction
or fail.
Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the
front licence plate holder:
# Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder

without advertising media or other holders.
# Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above

or to the side of the licence plate adapter.
105
F295 0075 02
General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries
Electromagnetic compatibility texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web
address:
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-
checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation
conformity/en_GB/index.html
UN-R 10.
Country-specific information for regulatory

radio components
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
NOTES WHEN CROSSING NATIONAL BORDERS
You must observe the radio regulatory provisions for the country in which you FOR ISRAEL ONLY:
are currently driving when operating the vehicle. It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component
that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software
WIRELESS VEHICLE COMPONENTS changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognize the EU manu‐ the device to an external antenna, without first obtaining approval from the
facturer's declaration of conformity: Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.
FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle

and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the
vehicle:
The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle
The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless com‐ and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the
ponents installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full vehicle:
106
F295 0075 02
The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is
installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory require‐ permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission
ments. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the fol‐
lowing web address: FOR COUNTRIES OF THE EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION ONLY:
FOR BRAZIL ONLY: The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby
declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the
technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information
from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle: FOR UKRAINE ONLY:
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not
cause interference in properly approved systems.
FOR JAMAICA ONLY:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby
All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.
declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the
FOR NIGERIA ONLY: technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information
from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
107
F295 0075 02
Battery https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-
FOR EU COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE THE EU MANU‐
FACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

For all 48 V and high-voltage vehicle batteries, once the applicable require‐ FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:
ments under regulation (EU) 2023/1542 come into effect, the required infor‐
mation will be available at the following web address:
The following information applies for the jack:
The manufacturer of the jack guarantees that the jack complies with the Sup‐
ply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008. A complete text of the UKCA Dec‐
laration of Conformity can be obtained by visiting the following website:
Jack https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-
ONLY FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE
THE EU MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:
The following information applies for the jack:
The manufacturer of the jack guarantees that the jack complies with the guide‐
line 2006/42/EC. A complete text of the EU Declaration of Conformity can be
obtained by visiting the following website:
108
F295 0075 02
TIREFIT kit https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-

ONLY FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE
THE EU MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:
The following information applies for the TIREFIT kit:
The manufacturer of the TIREFIT KIT guarantees that the TIREFIT KIT complies
with the guideline 2014/30/EU. A complete text of the EU Declaration of Con‐
formity can be obtained by visiting the following website:
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The following information applies for the TIREFIT KIT:
The manufacturer of the TIREFIT KIT guarantees that the TIREFIT KIT complies
with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016. A complete text of
the UKCA Declaration of Conformity can be obtained by visiting the following
website:
109
F295 0075 02
General notes Diagnostics connection
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for

example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out & WARNING
vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
& WARNING This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the into the driver's footwell.
function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and con‐ pedals.
nect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
top of one another.
110
F295 0075 02
General notes Diagnostics connection
* NOTE
Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnos‐
tics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.
# Check the charge level of the battery.
# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a

considerable distance.
CONNECTING AND USING ANOTHER DEVICE WITH THE DIAGNOSTICS

CONNECTION CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system

R Permanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.
111
F295 0075 02
General notes Qualified specialist workshop
Qualified specialist workshop
A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This
particularly applies to safety-critical work.
ALWAYS HAVE THE FOLLOWING WORK CARRIED OUT ON YOUR VEHICLE

AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP:
R Safety-critical work
R Service and maintenance work
R Repair work
R Modifications as well as installations and conversions
R Work on electronic components
R Work on high-voltage components
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service centre.
112
F295 0075 02
General notes Vehicle registration
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections
on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result
of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz

has your registration data.
IT IS POSSIBLE THAT YOUR VEHICLE HAS NOT YET BEEN REGISTERED IN

YOUR NAME IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.

R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or

vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for
example.
113
F295 0075 02
General notes Correct use of the vehicle
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise cer‐
tain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IN PARTICULAR WHEN DRIV‐

ING YOUR VEHICLE:
R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements

and further supplementary documents
R technical data for the vehicle
R Traffic rules and ‑regulations of the country you are currently in
R Motor vehicle laws and safety standards of the country you are currently
in
R Radio regulatory requirements of the country you are currently in
114
F295 0075 02
General notes REACH regulation
REACH regulation
For EU and EFTA countries only:
The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a
duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs

from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances.
According to supplier information and internal product information, there are
SVHCs known to Mercedes‑Benz AG that are found in individual components
of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.
FURTHER INFORMATION CAN BE OBTAINED AT THE FOLLOWING

ADDRESSES:
R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/de/home/
R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/en/home/
115
F295 0075 02
General notes Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Despite meticulous development of their vehicle systems, Mercedes‑Benz AG This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charg‐
cannot completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic ing point, forexample.
medical aids, suchas cardiac pacemakers. R vehicle components carrying live voltage
In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that can generate This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, forexam‐
magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets, regardless of the operating ple.
status of the vehicle. These fields may occur in the area around the multime‐
ALWAYS HAVE REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE WORK IN THE AREA OF THE
dia system and sound system, forexample, or in the area around the seats,
FOLLOWING COMPONENTS CARRIED OUT AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST
depending on the respective vehicle equipment.
WORKSHOP:
IN SOME CASES, THIS COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING, DEPENDING
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
ON THE AIDS USED:
R transmission aerials
R Medical aids malfunctioning R multimedia system and sound system
R Adverse health effects
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in
doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continu‐
ing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning,
Mercedes‑Benz AG recommends using fewer electrical vehicle systems and/or
maintaining a distance from the components.
WHEN CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY, KEEP A DISTANCE OF AT

LEAST AN ARM'S LENGTH BETWEEN THE MEDICAL AID AND THE FOLLOW‐
ING COMPONENTS:
R the power supply equipment
116
F295 0075 02
General notes Implied warranty
Implied warranty
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating
instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating
instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied war‐

ranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
# Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on

proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle
damage.
117
F295 0075 02
General notes QR code for rescue card
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the socket flap and on the opposite side on the B-
pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the rout‐
ing of the electric lines) in compact form.
You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/
118
F295 0075 02
General notes Data storage
Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle LEGAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING THE DISCLOSURE OF DATA
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are generally obliged to provide the
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS authorities with data stored by the manufacturer upon request and to the
Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data extent required. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a
they receive, generate themselves or exchange with each other, forexample criminal offence.
from vehicle sensors. Some control units are required for the safe operation of
State authorities are themselves authorised to read out data from the vehicle
your vehicle. For example, some assist you when driving, suchas driver assis‐
in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework. In the case of an
tance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.
accident, information that can help with an investigation can be taken from the
The following section provides general information about data processing in airbag control unit, forexample.
the vehicle. Additional information regarding which vehicle data is collected,
OPERATIONAL DATA IN THE VEHICLE
saved and transmitted to third parties and for what purpose can be found in
To operate the vehicle, control units process data.
the information directly related to the relevant functional characteristics in the
respective Owner's Manual. This information is available online and digitally, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R Vehicle status information suchas the speed, longitudinal acceleration,
PERSONAL DATA lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat
A unique vehicle identification number identifies every vehicle. Depending on belts display
the country, this vehicle identification number can also be used to determine
R Ambient conditions, suchas temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
the identity of the vehicle keeper, e.g.by the authorities. There are also other
ways of tracing data collected from the vehicle back to the keeper or driver,
suchas the license plate number. Generally, this data is volatile and will not be stored beyond the period of
operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units,
The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be attributa‐ forexample, vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the
ble to a person or, in certain circumstance, become attributable to a person. temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the
Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and
inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, location, route or use technical events or faults.
patterns.
119
F295 0075 02
DEPENDING ON THE TECHNICAL EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your
STORED: request as part of repair or maintenance work.
R Operating status of system components, suchas fill levels, tyre pressure CONVENIENCE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS
or battery status You can store the vehicle's convenience and individual settings and change or
R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, suchas lights or reset them at any time.
brakes
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
R System reactions in special driving situations, suchas an airbag deploy‐ ING SETTINGS, FOREXAMPLE:
ment or the intervention of stability control systems
R Information on events leading to vehicle damage R Seat and steering wheel positions
R State of charge of the high-voltage battery, estimated range R Suspension tuning and climate control settings
R Individual settings, suchas interior lighting
In certain cases, storing data that would have otherwise been temporary may
be required. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle info‐
forexample. tainment functions yourself.
If you make use of services, e.g.repair services, maintenance work,– the stored DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
operating data can be read out and used together with the vehicle identifica‐ ING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
tion number – if necessary. Service network employees suchas workshops and
manufacturers, and third parties suchas breakdown services can read out the R Multimedia data, suchas music, films or photos for playback in an inte‐
data. The same is true in the event of warranty claims and quality assurance grated multimedia system
measures. R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free
system or an integrated navigation system
In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the
R Entered navigation destinations
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The selected operating data document
the vehicle's or individual components' technical conditions, help with fault R Data about the use of Internet services
diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To
that end, these data, particularly information about component loads, techni‐ This data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in
cal events, malfunctions and other faults, may be transmitted to the manufac‐ the vehicle or on a device connected to the vehicle, suchas a smartphone, USB
turer along with the vehicle identification number. Furthermore, the manufac‐ flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered this data yourself, you can
turer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses delete it at any time.
operational data from the vehicle, e.g. for recalls. This data can also be used to
review the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.
120
F295 0075 02
This data is transmitted only from the vehicle to third parties at your request. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
This applies in particular when you use online services per your selected set‐ Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are
tings. described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's
Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (E.G. ANDROID AUTO OR APPLE CARPLAY®) information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of
If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can connect your smartphone or online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, suchas the man‐
another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them using the ufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, pro‐
control elements integrated into the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart‐ cessed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclu‐
phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simul‐ sively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a
taneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integra‐ legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when
tion, thisincludes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle sta‐ consent has been given.
tuses. For more information, please consult the vehicle Owner's Manual/info‐
tainment system. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, acti‐
vated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services,
This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, suchas naviga‐ suchas an emergency call system.
tion or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smart‐
phone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The THIRD PARTY SERVICES
type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services
being used. The settings you can make, if any, depend on the specific app and are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's
your smartphone's operating system. data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐
turer has no influence on the content exchanged.
Online services For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the
service provider in question for information about the type, extent and pur‐
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION pose of the collection and use of personal data.
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be
exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network
connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or Data protection rights
by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a
smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connec‐ Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your
tion. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are enti‐
the manufacturer or by other providers. tled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's
website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and
121
F295 0075 02
service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manu‐
facturer and its data protection officers.
At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a

fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
122
F295 0075 02
General notes Copyright
Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehi‐
cle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with
updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Back to Contents123
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
Brief overview of most important points 125
Information on the automatic functions of

133
the restraint system
Purpose and function of the restraint sys‐

137
tem
Seat belts 143
Airbags 144
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points
Brief overview of most important points
Basic information R Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Owner's
Manual using the keyword directory.
IN PARTICULAR ENSURE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO ENABLE THE
COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO UNFOLD THEIR PROTEC‐ INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING SUBJECTS, AMONG OTHERS, ARE
TIVE POTENTIAL: NOT PROVIDED IN THE CHAPTER "OCCUPANT SAFETY":
R Sit correctly (/ page 126). R Children in the vehicle (/ page 146)
R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 127). R Driving and driving safety systems (/ page 378)
- Function of the ü seat belt warning lamp (/ page 129). R Stowage areas (/ page 241)
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 129).
DEFINING GENERIC TERMS CLEARLY
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp has gone out after the self-test
(/ page 129). IN THIS OWNER'S MANUAL, THE FOLLOWING GENERIC TERMS ARE USED:
R The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of R Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions
the front passenger airbag (/ page 130). which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and conse‐
quences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
FOR CLEAR UNDERSTANDING
R Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the
The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions
vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially com‐
and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.
ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and air‐
THE INFORMATION IS STRUCTURED AS FOLLOWS: bags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
R Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in
R The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provi‐ the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 146).
ded with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system
and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants. BE DILIGENT
R Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of
safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and func‐ protection, it is essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is
tions of the restraint system. correctly fastened.
125
F295 0075 02
Please bear in mind that carelessness regarding the seating position and put‐
ting on the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make & WARNING
sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
seat belts properly before starting every journey (/ page 126). If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide
its intended protective function.
Information on the correct seat position Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following.
The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint # Put the seat in the correct position.
system to provide the intended level of protection.
# Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take partic‐
The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and ular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the
the additional protection provided by the airbag. abdomen.
A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a cor‐ # Observe the following information.
rectly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is
deployed.
IN ORDER FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED
Keep space considerations in mind when choosing a seat. With the seat in the LEVEL OF PROTECTION, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
correct, nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof.
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly (/ page 218).
When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
over the centre of your shoulder.
R Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set the
driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while mak‐
ing sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
R If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should main‐
tain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of
them.
R Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle
occupants and an airbag.
R If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct
position of the driver's seat (/ page 218).
126
F295 0075 02
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the
driver's airbag to fully deploy. & WARNING
R Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended pro‐
backrest. tective function.
Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for
backrest.
example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direc‐
R While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or tion suddenly.
side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air‐
bags. # Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts
R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
supported by the seat cushion
Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐
wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. & WARNING
R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 127). Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not
used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a
Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly suitable additional restraint system.
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can # Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint
only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. system.
Observe the following information on the correct seat position and posture
(/ page 126).
EACH VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES IN

PARTICULAR:
R The seat belt must not be twisted.

R The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
over the centre of your shoulder.
127
F295 0075 02
R The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed
under your arm or behind your back.
R The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible.
In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips
and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt
across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
R After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly
against the body.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile # Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle
objects. 2 of the corresponding seat.
R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
# To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet
R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used
and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a # To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the
person and the seat. seat belt outlet engages.
If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the * NOTE
chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 146) Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, lug‐
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue
gage or loads (/ page 241).
of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side,
Fastening and adjusting seat belts e.g. the seat belt tensioner.
# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The
seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.
128
F295 0075 02
Function of the restraint system warning lamp & DANGER

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It disappears no later than a few emergency shutoff
seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system
are then functional. may not be deactivated as intended.
A MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM IF: You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged compo‐
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up or is lit contin‐
uously when the vehicle is switched on # Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked
R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeat‐ and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
edly during a journey # After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.
If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the 6 restraint

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified
system warning lamp lights up continuously.
specialist workshop.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Function of the seat belt warning lamp
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver display is a reminder that all
not deploy as intended in an accident.
vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver and the front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt
warning goes out.
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high voltage emer‐
gency shutoff may not function.
Function of the rear seat belt status display
The rear seat belt status display in the driver's display is a reminder that all
vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
129
F295 0075 02
In addition, a warning tone may sound.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the tor lamps (front passenger airbag)
vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.
DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs
you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special

YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE REAR SEAT BELT BY THE COL‐
sticker affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front passenger side
OUR OF THE SEAT SYMBOL IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY AS FOLLOWS:
(/ page 151).
R Grey: the rear seat belt is not fastened.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front
R Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt passenger airbag.
buckle of the displayed seat.
R Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt. If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is fitted on
it, you must make sure both before, and also during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the situation.
130
F295 0075 02
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the

& WARNING front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
front passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the % If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the informa‐
system. tion in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 146)
# Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no & WARNING
objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
seat. The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp is lit.
Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into
and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the cockpit.
AFTER THE SELF-TEST, YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG AS FOLLOWS: IF THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT IS OCCUPIED, ALWAYS ENSURE
THAT:
R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up
continuously. R the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is cor‐
The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ rect and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
dent. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
passenger seat. R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger R the person is seated correctly.
seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.
R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of
up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF
the front passenger airbag is correct.
indicator lamps go out.
131
F295 0075 02
MALFUNCTION OF THE AUTOMATIC FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG SHUTOFF NOTES ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system SEAT
warning lamp light up simultaneously.
& WARNING
In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
Disabling or enabling the front passenger air‐ to the CHILD can occur.
bag
Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 152).
passenger airbag according to the situation.
This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or

child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.
Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the
vehicle" (/ page 146).
132
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system
Function of the automatic front passenger air‐

bag shut-off
A PERSON ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT MUST OBSERVE THE FOL‐
LOWING INSTRUCTIONS:
R Sit correctly (/ page 126).

R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 127).
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front
passenger airbag according to the situation.
STATUS OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IN RELATION TO THE STAT‐
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: URE OF THE PERSON:
R The status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps"(/ page 130). continuously.
R When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
the vehicle-specific information (/ page 152). dent. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front
passenger seat.
R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF
indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe
the following information on the correct seat position (/ page 126).
Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.
133
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG MAY OTHERWISE BE DISABLED BY MIS‐
TAKE, E.G. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATION: protection)
R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement
a vehicle armrest. pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that they unload the seat surface.
PRE-SAFE® CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDEPEND‐
ENTLY OF EACH OTHER:
* NOTE R tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front R closing the side windows.
passenger seat is unoccupied R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
IN AN ACCIDENT, THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a
MAY DEPLOY UNNECESSARILY ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SIDE IF: more favourable seat position.
R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by
inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the
front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on,
generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mecha‐
# Stow objects in a suitable place. nism of a person's hearing.
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
* NOTE
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to
front passenger seat is occupied. the seat and/or the object.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
134
F295 0075 02
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY ACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are TIONS:
reversed.
R when reversing
You will need to perform certain settings yourself. or
R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest
slightly backwards.
The seat belt pre-tensioning releases. THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY BRAKE APPLICATION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING SITUATIONS:
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory R whilst driving

or
occupant protection plus) R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear Assist
impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.
Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
PRE-SAFE® PLUS CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDE‐
PENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER: If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emp‐
tively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency. bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated.
This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake
application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE
impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual display message appears.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are
reversed.
135
F295 0075 02
Seat belt adjustment function R Shutting off the drive system and high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
tem
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and back on
seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until (/ page 316). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, the
somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. vehicle might no longer start.
R unlocking the vehicle doors
This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat
belts correctly. R lowering the side windows
R displaying the emergency guide on the central display (/ page 71)
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the
R switching on the interior lighting
multimedia system (/ page 136).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment Function of the post-collision brake after an

via the multimedia system accident
Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the
Multimedia system: severity of a further collision or even avoid it.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic brak‐
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
ing. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is
automatically applied.
Overview of the automatic measures after an THE DRIVER CAN CANCEL AUTOMATIC BRAKING BY TAKING THE FOLLOW‐
accident ING ACTIONS:
DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND SEVERITY OF THE ACCIDENT, AND R braking more strongly than automatic braking
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force
CAN BE IMPLEMENTED, FOR EXAMPLE:
R automatic braking (post-collision brake) (/ page 136)

R activating the hazard warning lights
R triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 70)
136
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system
Purpose and function of the restraint system
Overview of deployment situations (restraint R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact
system)
R
IN PARTICULAR ENSURE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO ENABLE THE The installation location of an airbag is identified by the symbol AIRBAG
COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO DEPLOY THEIR PROTEC‐ (/ page 144).
TIVE POTENTIAL:
Observe the information on how the restraint system works (/ page 137).
R Seat correctly (/ page 126).
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 127).
- Function of the seat belt warning lamp (/ page 129).
Information on the function of the restraint
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 129). system
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up after the self- The function of the restraint system depends on the severity of the impact
check (/ page 129). detected and the apparent type of accident.
R The indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG display the correct status of
the front passenger airbag (/ page 130). For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment
situations" (/ page 137).
DEPENDING ON THE DETECTED DEPLOYMENT SITUATION, THE COMPO‐ The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are
NENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN BE ACTIVATED OR DEPLOYED determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various
INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER: points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering of
the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover start of the impact.
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred
R Knee airbag: frontal impact
cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. They also do not provide an
R Side airbag: side impact indication of airbag deployment.
R Centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest: side impact
137
F295 0075 02
The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. IF THE SEAT BELT TENSIONERS ARE TRIGGERED OR AN AIRBAG IS
This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected DEPLOYED, YOU WILL HEAR A BANG, AND A SMALL AMOUNT OF FINE
and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be POWDER MAY ALSO BE RELEASED:
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If, e.g. very
rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in suf‐ R The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
ficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. R In general, the fine powder released is not hazardous to health but may
cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma
Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment sit‐ or other respiratory problems.
uation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the
by a correctly worn seat belt.
window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective
vehicle occupant.
Information on the limited protection provi‐
POTENTIAL PROTECTION PROVIDED BY EACH AIRBAG: ded by the restraint system
R Knee airbag: thighs, knees and lower legs
RISK DUE TO THE INCORRECT BEHAVIOUR OF VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
R Window airbag: head PARTICULAR:
R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants
R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 126).
R Centre airbag: head and ribcage
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their
clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and
fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag gen‐
erally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the
airbag deploying.

specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a
seat belt tensioner has been triggered or an airbag deployed.
138
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have anchorage
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the
moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. seat belt tensioners.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no
objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
and door.
position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.
& WARNING
RISK DUE TO OBJECTS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag
EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the
PARTICULAR:
correct deployment of the airbag.
R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 126).
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.
or coat hooks.
# Always stow and secure objects correctly.
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their
clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. # Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects
are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG (/ page 144)

symbol.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
R Notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241)
139
F295 0075 02
R Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest RISK DUE TO PETS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
(/ page 144)
& WARNING
RISK DUE TO FITTING ACCESSORIES
Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones
tended in the vehicle
or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on
the door, on the side window or on the side trim. If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could
press buttons or switches, for instance.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must
be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. AN ANIMAL MAY:
Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and,
R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users
& WARNING Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an
Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehi‐
cle occupants.
Due to unsuitable protective covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle
occupants as they are designed to do. # Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# You should only use protective covers that have been # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suit‐
approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz. able animal carrier.
In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could
be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
correct status of the front passenger airbag (/ page 130).
140
F295 0075 02
RISK DUE TO MODIFICATION, DAMAGE OR WEAR TO THE COMPONENTS

OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM & WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
& WARNING SEAT BELTS CANNOT PROVIDE PROTECTION IN THE FOLLOWING

Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system SITUATIONS:
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations R the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty,
are made to the restraint system. bleached or dyed
# Never alter the parts of the restraint system. R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
R modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt
# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component anchorage or seat belt retractor
parts or their software.
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabili‐ glass splinters.
ties, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been accident, for example.
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to func‐
tion as intended.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt,
seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and
seat belt retractor.
# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and
clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an acci‐

dent at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
141
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag Risk of burns from hot airbag components
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.
it, the airbag can no longer function as intended.
# Do not touch the airbag parts.
# Never modify the cover of an airbag.
# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
# Do not attach any objects to the cover. shop as soon as possible.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol

(/ page 144). & WARNING
Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are
damaged.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
& WARNING
# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a
Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt ten‐
qualified specialist workshop.
sioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer
RISK DUE TO COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM WHICH HAVE operational and are unable to perform their intended protective func‐
ALREADY BEEN DEPLOYED tion.
specialist workshop after an accident. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
142
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety Seat belts
Seat belts
Releasing the seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt
back with the seat belt tongue.
* NOTE
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in
the door or in the seat mechanism.
# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.
143
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety Airbags
Airbags
Overview of airbags
Rear seats:
4 Window airbag
Driver's/front passenger seat: 7 Side airbag
1 Knee airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the symbol AIRBAG. An
2 Driver's airbag additional arrow symbol M indicates the installation location for certain air‐
3 Front passenger airbag bags.
4 Window airbag
Observe the information in "Overview of deployment situations"
5 Side airbag
(/ page 137).
6 Centre airbag
Information on the centre airbag in the driv‐

er's seat backrest
When triggered, the centre airbag deploys between the front seats. Do not
stow any objects in the deployment area of the centre airbag.
Back to Contents144
F295 0075 02

Key facts in brief 146
Important safety notes 148
Suitable child restraint systems for the

155
transport of children
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint

160
systems
Securing the child restraint system 164
Child safety locks 169
Occupant presence reminder 173
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Key facts in brief
Key facts in brief
Safely transporting children in the vehicle LEFT/RIGHT REAR SEAT (PREFERRED SEATS)
PREFERRED FASTENING SYSTEM:
® ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 160)
° or i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 161)
¯ and additionally fasten Top Tether if available (/ page 167).
ALTERNATIVE ATTACHMENT SYSTEM:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 168)
¯ Additionally fasten Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN TRANSPORTING CHILDREN: of the child restraint system (/ page 167).
R Never leave children unattended in the vehicle (/ page 149).

The following child restraint systems of the Universal category are approved:
R Secure children younger than twelve or of a height up to 1.50 m on the U, UF, i-U, IUF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 160).
seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child
restraint system (/ page 155) and secure small children in a rearward- FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
facing child restraint system. FASTENING SYSTEM:
R Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions. 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 168)
146
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Key facts in brief
BE SURE TO OBSERVE:
R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the
front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 130).
The following child restraint systems of the Universal category are approved:
U(*), UF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 161).
(*) rearward-facing child restraint systems only in conjunction with automatic

airbag shutoff
REAR CENTRE SEAT

FASTENING SYSTEM:
7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 168)
The following belt-secured child restraint systems of the Universal category

are approved: U, UF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 161).
147
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes
Important safety notes
Basic information THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS USED IN THIS OWN‐
BE DILIGENT ER'S MANUAL. A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS, FOR EXAMPLE:
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint sys‐
tem may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child R a baby car seat
carefully before every journey. R a rearward-facing child seat
R a forward-facing child seat
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle
occupant. R a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster
seat with a seat backrest and seat belt guide.
TO IMPROVE PROTECTION FOR CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN
TWELVE YEARS OLD OR UNDER 1.50 M IN HEIGHT, MERCEDES-BENZ REC‐ OBSERVE LAWS AND LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
OMMENDS YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in
the vehicle.
R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this
Mercedes-Benz vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the
valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at
R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and
a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
size of the child.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fit‐
ted: SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN THE VEHICLE
- ISOFIX mounting bracket: (/ page 160) ONLY USE THE FOLLOWING SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT
- i‑Size mounting bracket: (/ page 161) SYSTEMS:
- Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (/ page 161) R the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting bracket
R the vehicle's seat belt system
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally R the Top Tether anchorages
safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.
148
F295 0075 02
Simply attaching to the ISOFIX mounting brackets or i‑Size mounting brackets - Fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i‑Size child restraint system on the rear
on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incor‐ seat (/ page 165).
rectly. - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 168).
When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-
Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child
for the child and child restraint system (/ page 165). restraint system.
Important warning stickers & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in
ALWAYS SECURE A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CORRECTLY
the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can
& WARNING become detached.
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child
restraint system The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.
The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike
# Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐ vehicle occupants.
tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child transported unused in the vehicle.
restraint system.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover

designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
R Always observe the vehicle-specific information.
149
F295 0075 02
DO NOT MODIFY THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM AVOID DIRECT SUNLIGHT
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts
an increased risk of injury. could heat up.
# Never modify a child restraint system. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic
parts of the child restraint system.
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for
this child restraint system by the child restraint system's man‐ # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not
ufacturer. exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.

ONLY USE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE IN PROPER WORKING
CONDITION
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sun‐
light, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
& WARNING # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child
restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been sub‐ OBSERVE WHEN STOPPING OR PARKING
jected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their inten‐
ded protective function. & WARNING
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. vehicle
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
been damaged or involved in an accident. intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems

# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a vehicle.
child restraint system again.
150
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Overview of warning sticker in the vehicle
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY
CAN BE EXPECTED IN PARTICULAR TO
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLE BY:
1 Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor)
R releasing the parking brake. (/ page 152)
R changing the drive range. 2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff warning (visible
R starting the vehicle. when the front passenger door is open) (/ page 154)
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
151
F295 0075 02
Notes on rear-facing and front-facing child IF IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYS‐
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOW‐
restraint systems on the front passenger seat ING INFORMATION:
R the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 132).

& WARNING R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front
Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint
passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This
system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit con‐
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the tinuously (/ page 130).
front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp R The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be
The child could be struck by the airbag. deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing
child restraint systems.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Information on the automatic front passenger
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
airbag shutoff
#
with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH

of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the
journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current
Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing situation.
child restraint systems (/ page 164).
Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor
152
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint
and the child restraint system system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff. front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
# Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system. The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is # Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co- with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH
driver seat. of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
# It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manu‐

facturer's installation instructions.
% The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child
restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
vehicle-specific information (/ page 152). The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident.
If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing
REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
PASSENGER SEAT Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suita‐
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, ble rear seat.
the front passenger airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp must light up continuously (/ page 130).
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER SEAT
If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and
the stature of the child.
153
F295 0075 02
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is
not lit (/ page 130). Always observe the following information.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag shut-off
& WARNING Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shut-off have a special
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side
restraint system (/ page 151).
IF YOU SECURE A CHILD IN A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
SYSTEM ON THE CO-DRIVER SEAT AND YOU POSITION THE CO-
DRIVER SEAT TOO CLOSE TO THE DASHBOARD, IN THE EVENT OF R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger
AN ACCIDENT, THE CHILD COULD: seat
R come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator the front passenger seat (/ page 152)
lamp is off
# Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In

doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is cor‐
rectly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the
shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder
belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the
seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the co-driver seat accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions.
154
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children
Information on the advantage of a rearward- R Authorisation number

Child restraint size class
facing child restraint system
R
Approval categories under UN-R44

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is
also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child
restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the
direction of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to
the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during
an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Approval categories for child restraint sys‐

tems
ONLY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING UNECE Example of an approval label
STANDARDS ARE PERMITTED FOR USE IN THE VEHICLE: R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are
approved for installation in vehicles. Following overviews of the suitabil‐
R UN-R44 ity of seats for securing child restraint systems, they can be used on
R UN-R129 seats labelled U, UF or IUF.
The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Uni‐
IDENTIFICATION OF THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
versal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, FOR EXAMPLE, IS AVAILABLE ON THE using Top Tether or support points.
APPROVAL LABEL ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM:
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category
R Approval category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
R Child weight group
155
F295 0075 02
R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "Vehicle-specific" cate‐ PLEASE NOTE THE SUITABILITY OF THE VEHICLE SEATS
gory may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the R Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (/ page 160)
R Suitability of seats for securing i‑Size child restraint systems
Approval categories under UN-R129
(/ page 161).
R Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems
(/ page 161)
Overview of recommended child restraint

systems
% Further information on the correct child restraint system can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec‐
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
purpose.
Example of an approval label
R i‑Size child restraint systems and booster seats with backrest: suitable
ATTACHMENT WITH ISOFIX
for attachment to i‑Size mounting brackets. They can be used on seats
marked i‑U. WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS)
Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX Type1 BABY SAFE plus (including base station)
bars if approved by the child restraint system manufacturer. i‑Size boos‐
ter seats with backrest can be used on seats marked U if the seat is Size category E
approved for category B2/B3.
Approval E1 04 301 146
R Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without the
backrest of the Universalcategory are suitable for attachment to seats Order number2 B6 6 86 8224
marked U.
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
R Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISOFIX or belted attachment as
well as child booster seats with and without backrest): suitable for
attachment to seats marked i‑U or U if the child restraint system manu‐
facturer approves this.
156
F295 0075 02
WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size

YEARS)
Order number A000 970 93 02
Type1 DUO plus
Order number A000 970 73 02
Size category B1
FlexBase iSense
Approval E1 04 301 133 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02

WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95 12 YEARS
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
ATTACHMENT WITH I-SIZE (R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS)
WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83 CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO Size category B2
APPROX. 15 MONTHS
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Order number A 000 970 89 02
Size category R2
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
Order number A 000 970 68 02 12 YEARS
Order number A 000 970 73 02 Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
FlexBase iSense
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
WEIGHT UP TO 18 KG, SIZE 61 TO 105 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX.
3 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS
Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size
Size category F2X/R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
157
F295 0075 02
ATTACHMENT WITH THE SEAT BELT OF THE VEHICLE SEAT WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS)
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND APPROX. 6 MONTHS) AND
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 KIDFIX XP
Type1 BABY SAFE plus II Approval E1 04 301 304
Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 49 02
Order number2 A 000 970 38 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS)
R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83
CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP
Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size Approval E1 04 301 304
Size category R2 Order number2 A 000 970 33 02
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4
YEARS) Size category B2
Type1 DUO plus

Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Approval E1 04 301 133 Order number A 000 970 89 02
Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
158
F295 0075 02
R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT

FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)
Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
159
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems
Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ WEIGHT GROUP 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 6 MONTHS)
ing ISOFIX child restraint systems Size class –

Equipment
Left/right rear seat
ISOFIX IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY

E – ISO/R1 IL
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems",
restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 155). or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.
° ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be installed on seats with WEIGHT GROUP 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS)
i‑Size markings (/ page 161).
Size class – Left/right rear seat
Equipment
Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance
E – ISO/R1 IL
with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
CARRY COT C – ISO/R3 IL (1)

Size class – Left/right rear seat
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the rec‐
Equipment ommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
F – ISO/L1 X
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
G – ISO/L2 X
child restraint system.
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight

group and/or size class.
160
F295 0075 02
WEIGHT GROUP 1 (9–18 KG AND APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS) LEFT AND RIGHT REAR SEAT
Size class – Left/right rear seat i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ i‑U
Equipment F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C – ISO/R3 IL (1) FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
B – ISO/F2 IUF i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ X
F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.
A – ISO/F3 IUF
Overview on the suitability of seats for fas‐

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recom‐
mended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint
tening belt-secured child restraint systems

system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight group.
Suitability of seats for fastening belt-secured child restraint systems
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
child restraint system.
REAR SEATS
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ Left/right rear seat U, L
ing i‑Size child restraint systems Rear centre seat1 U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg

I‑SIZE IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS. Left/right rear seat U, L
° i‑Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the Rear centre seat1 U, L
i‑Size marking (/ page 155).
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the fol‐
Left/right rear seat U, L
lowing i‑Size table may be attached.
Rear centre seat1 U, L
161
F295 0075 02
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 130).
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
UN-R129 child restraint systems
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
Left/right rear seat U, L, B2, B3
Rear centre seat1 U, L, B2, B3
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
1 Child restraint systems with a support leg are not suitable for
this seat. Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
this weight category.
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to
the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐ UF, L
Front passenger airbag enabled1
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's vehicle model list.
B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems com‐

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
plying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.
Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L

NOTES ON CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child

UN-R129 child restraint systems
restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 152).
R Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward- Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L, B2, B3
facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied,
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L, B2, B3
162
F295 0075 02
1 Adjust the seat cushion angle so that the front edge of the seat
cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat
cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag

shutoff. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be on.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in

this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to

the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Uni‐

versal" category in this weight category.
B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems com‐

plying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.
163
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system
Securing the child restraint system
Adjusting the seat correctly removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
correctly.
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE LEFT OR RIGHT # The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof
REAR SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where
# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, possible, adjust the seat cushion angle accordingly.
move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is
If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended not put under strain by the head restraint.
when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maxi‐
mum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint 7 WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO
system manufacturer's installation instructions. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
% Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended
and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. # When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it
®° ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING AN ISOFIX OR does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
I‑SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM: respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the seat backrest
of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the back‐
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
rest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated correctly.
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as
does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the seat backrest
of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the back‐
rest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been
164
F295 0075 02
# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where pos‐
possible, adjust the seat cushion angle accordingly. sible, downwards to the child restraint system.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
not put under strain by the head restraint.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat
# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion
move the front seat slightly forwards. is in the lowest position.
7 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE # Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT:
# Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint Fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child
systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 152).
restraint system
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child
seat belt: remove the head restraint from the front passenger seat, if WARNING
&
possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
replace the head restraint and adjust it correctly. are not engaged
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. even while the vehicle is in motion.
# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
intended and could cause additional injury.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
not put under strain by the head restraint.
restrained by the seat backrest.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
system.
backrest are engaged before every trip.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat
into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verifi‐
belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to
cation indicator will be visible.
165
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child
and child restraint system together is exceeded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys‐
tems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an
accident, for example.
# If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐

tem with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and
child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.
1 ISOFIX mounting bracket

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ON THE MASS OF THE CHILD 2 i‑Size mounting brackets
RESTRAINT SYSTEM: # Remove and stow away the covers 1 or 2.
R in the installation instructions and Owner's Manual of the manufacturer
# Before every journey always ensure that the ISOFIX/LATCH child
of the child restraint system used
restraint system or the i‑Size child restraint system is engaged in both
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present mounting brackets on the vehicle.
Regularly check that the permissible total mass of the child and child restraint
system is still being adhered to. * NOTE
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOL‐ Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of
LOWING: the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
O Always observe the area of use and the suitability of the seats for
attaching a child restraint system.
# Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH or i‑Size child restraint system to both mount‐
® ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 160) ing brackets in the vehicle.
or # After removing the child seat, reattach the covers 1 or 2.
° i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 161)
166
F295 0075 02
Fastening a Top Tether
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked
after Top Tether belts are fitted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform

their intended protective function. This may also cause additional inju‐
ries.
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 226).
# Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.
# Observe the lock verification indicator.

# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
# Fit the ISOFIX/LATCH or i‑Size child restraint system with Top Tether.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verifi‐ Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation
cation indicator will be visible. instructions.
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables
an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with
ISOFIX or i‑Size and the vehicle.
# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head
restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchor‐
age 3 without twisting.
167
F295 0075 02
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the child restraint system man‐ # For a child restraint system of the category "Universal" or "Semi-Univer‐
ufacturer's installation instructions. sal" ensure that this is approved for the vehicle seat.
# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. # Fit the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sit‐
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 226). Make ting surface of the seat.
sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt
4. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child
restraint system.
Fastening the child restraint system with the The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt out‐
seat belt let and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
# When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether, if present.
& WARNING
# When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat
Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
belt outlet and the front passenger seat appropriately.
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
even while the vehicle is in motion.
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
backrest are engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verifi‐
cation indicator will be visible.
168
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety # Keep the key out of reach of children.
lock for the rear doors

& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. vehicle.

R releasing the parking brake.

R changing the drive range.
R starting the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
169
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
PARTICULAR:

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
travelling in the vehicle.
# Check the functionality of the child safety lock.
lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The
doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
170
F295 0075 02
Activating and deactivating the child safety & WARNING

lock for the rear side windows Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
& WARNING
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY vehicle.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. & WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN PARTICULAR:
R changing the drive range.
R starting the vehicle.
# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. travelling in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
# Keep the key out of reach of children. lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
171
F295 0075 02
# To activate/deactivate: press the button 2.

THE REAR SIDE WINDOW CAN BE OPENED OR CLOSED AS FOLLOWS:
R The indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door
R The indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding
rear door or driver's door
172
F295 0075 02
Children in the vehicle Occupant presence reminder
Occupant presence reminder
Function of the occupant presence reminder

The occupant presence reminder can help to remind you about a child who
may have been forgotten in the rear compartment of the vehicle. It activates
and deactivates automatically when the rear door is open for an extended
period of time and a child which the system presumes to be present could
enter or exit the vehicle.
When the vehicle is switched off, the Do not leave persons or animals in the vehi-
cle message appears on the driver display if the system was already automati‐
cally activated.
You can permanently deactivate the function in the multimedia system

(/ page 173). When the system is deactivated, the p indicator lamp in the
driver display lights up.
Activating or deactivating the occupant pres‐

ence reminder in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Back to Contents173
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Key 175
Digital Vehicle Key 180
Doors 187
Boot 198
Side windows 205
Sliding sunroof 209
Anti-theft protection 214
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Key
Key
Overview of key functions This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
* NOTE
& WARNING Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐ # Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.
cle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: Vehicle key
1 Indicator lamp
R releasing the parking brake. 2 Locking
R change the gearbox setting. 3 Unlocks (with embossed surface)
R start the vehicle. 4 Opens/closes the boot lid
% If indicator lamp 1 does not light up after pressing the Ü or
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you s button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace
and lock the vehicle. the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 178).
175
F295 0075 02
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regu‐
% Vehicles with comfort doors: If you have switched on the Com- lations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regula‐
fort doors function in the multimedia system (/ page 194), you tions. In countries where the use of this function is prohibited,
can open or close the driver's or front passenger door by press‐ this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be acti‐
ing the Ü or s button. Additional information on the com‐ vated.
fort doors (/ page 191).
THE KEY LOCKS AND UNLOCKS THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS: Changing the unlocking settings
R Doors POSSIBLE UNLOCKING FUNCTIONS OF THE KEY:
R Socket flap
R Central unlocking
R Boot lid
R Unlocking the driver's door and socket flap
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it

locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again. # To switch between settings: press the Ü and s buttons simulta‐
neously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes
Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This twice.
can affect the key's functionality. OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND
SOCKET FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED:
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice.
verification signal R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door
handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the socket flap are
Multimedia system: unlocked.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
# Switch the Acoustic lock on or off.
Deactivating the function of the key
% Please note: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the
The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization via
must comply with the relevant national road traffic rules. In some KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of
countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verifica‐ the key so that all of its functions are available once again.
tion signal is prohibited by traffic laws (in accordance with §16
176
F295 0075 02
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐ INSERTING THE EMERGENCY KEY
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
# Press and hold the key button s.
# With the key button s pressed, immediately press key button Ü

twice in quick succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for
longer.
# Insert the emergency key 2 up to the marking 3 until it engages.
% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE
KEY: % You can use the emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key
R Press any button on the key. ring.
R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage
compartment(/ page 319).
Removing/inserting the emergency key

REMOVING THE EMERGENCY KEY
# Press the release knob 1.

The emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
# Fully remove the emergency key 2.
177
F295 0075 02
Replacing the key battery Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 177).

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swal‐
lowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur
within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
# Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
# If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close # Press emergency key 2 into the opening in the key in the direction of
securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. the arrow until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover 1
closed.
# If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
household rubbish.
# Insert emergency key 2 into the opening and lift up covering 3 and
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible remove it.
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. # Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery 4 falls out of the
key.
Requirements # Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-
free cloth to do so.
R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
178
F295 0075 02
# Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
impurities. R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate sys‐
tems or automatic barriers
# Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the housing and then press on
both sides to close it.
# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the
# Make sure that covering 3 is completely closed. potential source of interference.
# Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press until it YOU HAVE LOST A KEY
is completely closed. # Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 177). # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.
Problems with the key, troubleshooting

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R The key battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 175).
# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 178).
# Use the replacement key.
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 195).
# Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY IS IMPAIRED:
R high voltage power lines

R mobile phones
179
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key
Digital Vehicle Key
Function of the Digital Vehicle Key R Removing the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 183)
R Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle Key
Once you have activated a compatible, mobile end device, e.g. a smartphone, (/ page 184)
as a Digital Vehicle Key, this can then be used in the same way as a conven‐ R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 185)
tional vehicle key.
R Troubleshooting problems with the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 185)
Information on setting up a user account and activating the "Digital Vehicle
Key" function can be found at https://www.mercedes.me.
Setting up the Digital Vehicle Key
THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY CAN THEN BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING
FUNCTIONS: Requirements
R Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 189) R A Mercedes me user account has been created at https://
R HANDS-FREE ACCESS function (/ page 201) www.mercedes.me.
R A compatible end device with the latest operating system version.
R Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) (/ page 207)
R The Mercedes me app is installed on the end device (optional).
R Anti-theft protection (/ page 214)
R You have received an email from Mercedes me connect.
R Starting (/ page 316) or shutting off (/ page 367) the vehicle
If you have selected the "Digital Vehicle Key" equipment, you will receive
R Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the NFC function (emergency an email with information on how to set up the Digital Vehicle Key.
unlocking) (/ page 184)
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device.
R Starting the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle Key in the stowage compart‐
ment (emergency operation mode) (/ page 317)
R The end device is sufficiently charged.
YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP AN END DEVICE

SETTING UP AND MANAGING THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:
AS A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:
R Setting up the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 180)
R via Mercedes me app
R Managing the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 182)
R by email
180
F295 0075 02
R via MBUX multimedia system # Follow the steps on the end device.
When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:
% The power supply must be switched on to set up the end device.

# Place the end device in the stowage compartment (/ page 317).
A key belonging to the vehicle must be detected within the vehi‐
# Follow the steps on the end device.
cle.
Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
SET-UP VIA THE MERCEDES ME APP or

# Start the Mercedes me app.
# Set up the end device on the vehicle.
# Select the "Digital Vehicle Key" menu.
# Follow the steps in the Mercedes me app. "Mercedes-Benz Digital Vehicle Key" is displayed on the end device.
# Press "Enter code".

When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:
The display for entering the code appears.
# Enter the 8-digit code displayed in the email.
# Follow the steps on the end device. When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:
SET-UP BY EMAIL
# Open the email from Mercedes me connect.
SET-UP VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
# Follow the displayed steps as described in the email. # Select the menus Settings, Vehicle, Open/close in the multimedia system.
# Select the menu Digital Vehicle Key.
or
# Follow the steps in the multimedia system.
# Open the link in the email with the end device you want to use as a Digi‐ Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
tal Vehicle Key.
181
F295 0075 02
SWITCHING EXPRESS MODE OFF OR ON

% You can now use the Digital Vehicle Key as you would a conven‐ # Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
tional key (/ page 184).
# Switch express mode off or on.
% Setting up and managing the Digital Vehicle Key: % Express mode is switched on by default. This setting allows you
R Function (/ page 180)
to make the best possible use of the Digital Vehicle Key.
R Managing (/ page 182) If the express mode is switched off and the rechargeable bat‐
R Removing (/ page 183) tery of the end device is at very low capacity, you can no lon‐
ger unlock the vehicle via the NFC function.
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key
Only switch off the express mode if you do not want to use the
(/ page 185)
Digital Vehicle Key function.
SETTING UP OTHER END DEVICES AS DIGITAL VEHICLE KEYS

Managing the Digital Vehicle Key # Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
Requirements: # Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key".
R A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. # Follow the steps on the end device.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key
activated).
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that the shared key be activated
R The end device is sufficiently charged.
immediately after sharing by using it on the vehicle.
YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR MANAGING A DIGITAL VEHI‐

SET UP AUTHORISATIONS FOR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY
CLE KEY:
YOU CAN ASSIGN THE FOLLOWING AUTHORISATIONS TO THE DIGITAL
R Switch express mode (comfort mode) off or on VEHICLE KEYS:
Availability of this function is dependent upon the end device.
R Vehicle access and drive authorisation
R Set up other devices of family members or friends as Digital Vehicle Keys
R Vehicle access authorisation code
R Set up authorisation for the Digital Vehicle Keys
# Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
182
F295 0075 02
# Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key".

% You can remove individual users or your own Digital Vehicle Key
# Select the "Configure car key access" menu. from the end device.

REMOVE VIA WALLET‑APP
# Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
% Further information on the Digital Vehicle Key:
R Function (/ page 180) # Select the user whose Digital Vehicle Key is to be removed.
R Setting up (/ page 180)
R Removing (/ page 183)
The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key
(/ page 185) REMOVE VIA THE DEVICE MANUFACTURER PORTAL
# Log into the device manufacturer portal.
# Follow the steps.

Removing the Digital Vehicle Key The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
Requirements REMOVE VIA MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key R Remove the linked vehicle
activated). R Decline the terms of use and consents
R The end device is sufficiently charged. R Delete the user account
YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR REMOVING A DIGITAL VEHI‐ # Log in to the Mercedes me user account.
CLE KEY:
# Select one of the above options.
R via the Wallet‑app The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
R via the device manufacturer portal
REMOVE VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
R via Mercedes me user account THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R via MBUX multimedia system
R Disconnect all Digital Vehicle Keys
183
F295 0075 02
R Change the Digital Vehicle Key of the main owner R The end device is sufficiently charged.
R Disconnect the owner's Digital Vehicle Key
R Remove a Digital Vehicle Key When the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable battery is at extremely low capa‐
city, it is possible to lock and unlock the vehicle with the NFC function (emer‐
gency unlocking).
# Select the menus Settings, Vehicle, Open/close in the multimedia system.
# Select the menu Digital Vehicle Key.
# Select one of the above options.
# Follow the steps in the multimedia system.

The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
% Further information on the Digital Vehicle Key:

R Function (/ page 180)
R Setting up (/ page 180)
R Managing (/ page 182) # Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the NFC function: hold the
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key Digital Vehicle Key against the door handle in close proximity to the NFC
(/ page 185) antenna 1 for approx. five to ten seconds.
% If the Bluetooth® connection is not working, or the rechargeable

Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the battery for the Digital Vehicle Key is at very low capacity, it is
also possible to start the vehicle via the NFC function
Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 317).
Depending on the end device, you can continue to use the KEY‐
Requirements:
LESS-GO function for a certain amount of time, even if the
R The "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me: https:// rechargeable battery in the Digital Vehicle Key is at very low
www.mercedes.me. capacity.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key
activated).
184
F295 0075 02
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that the key is carried about your Troubleshooting problems with the Digital
person as a security measure against functional restrictions Vehicle Key
(/ page 177).
YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK AND UNLOCK THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGI‐
TAL VEHICLE KEY.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends placing the Digital Vehicle Key in POSSIBLE CAUSES:
the storage compartment while driving (/ page 317).
R Bluetooth® is deactivated on the Digital Vehicle Key.
R The rechargeable battery for the Digital Vehicle Key is at low capacity or
is flat.
Changing the unlocking settings for the Digi‐
tal Vehicle Key # Activate Bluetooth® on the Digital Vehicle Key.
Multimedia system: # Check the state of charge for the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable bat‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close tery.
SET SELECTIVE OR GLOBAL UNLOCKING # If necessary, charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key.
# Activate Unlock driver's door only.
# Using the NFC function of the Digital Vehicle Key for locking or unlocking
Selective unlocking is activated. If this function is deactivated, the owner
the vehicle (emergency unlocking) (/ page 184).
key unlocks the entire vehicle.
# Use the vehicle key.
% The entire vehicle is always unlocked whenever the NFC function
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 195).
is used to unlock the vehicle. It is not possible to activate selec‐
tive unlocking in this case. # Have the vehicle and the Digital Vehicle Key checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE.
% Additional information regarding locking and unlocking with the
Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 184). POSSIBLE CAUSES OF DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IMPAIRMENT:
R high-voltage power lines

R mobile phones
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
185
F295 0075 02
R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate sys‐
tems or automatic barriers
# Ensure sufficient distance between the Digital Vehicle Key and a poten‐
tial source of interference.
YOU HAVE LOST A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY.
# Remove the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 183).
186
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Doors
Doors
Notes on the additional door lock If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.
% After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.
& WARNING
Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating
door lock is activated interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 216).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be
opened from the inside.
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
# Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the
vehicle. # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock
(/ page 187).
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the addi‐
tional door lock.
THE ADDITIONAL DOOR LOCK IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED IN THE

FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle is locked using the key.

R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
# Pull the door 1 handle.
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door
lock is not activated (/ page 655).
187
F295 0075 02
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle Recessed door handles extend or retract
from the inside THE DOOR HANDLES EXTEND AUTOMATICALLY:
R when you unlock the vehicle with the key

R if you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces of the door handle
(when the vehicle is unlocked)
THE DOOR HANDLES RETRACT AUTOMATICALLY:
R when you lock the vehicle with the key

R when pulling away
R after waiting for a time
# To unlock: press the button 1.
# To lock: press the button 2.

The red indicator lamp on the button 2 lights up when the vehicle is
locked.
The socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap can be opened
even if a key is detected in the vehicle.
THE VEHICLE IS NOT UNLOCKED WHEN THE BUTTON 1 IS PRESSED:
R If you have locked the vehicle using the key

R If you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO # To extend the door handle: Touch the external sensor surface 1 or 2.
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
# If the vehicle has been locked automatically and another person
wants to get in: To unlock the vehicle, press the button on the driver's
door (/ page 188).
The door handles extend.
188
F295 0075 02
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS- * NOTE

GO Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot
lid or a door
Requirements:
R when using an automatic car wash
R The key is outside the vehicle. R when using a high pressure cleaner
R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. # Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
R The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are
closed. or
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high-

% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: You can use the Digital Vehi‐ pressure cleaner) or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the
cle Key in the same way as the conventional vehicle key. vehicle.
THE DOOR HANDLES EXTEND AUTOMATICALLY: Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:
R when a vehicle key is detected (the vehicle is then not yet unlocked)
R when you unlock the vehicle with the key * NOTE
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the boot lid or
R when you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces of the door handle
one of the doors
(when the vehicle is unlocked)
R when using a car wash
R when using a high-pressure cleaner
THE DOOR HANDLES RETRACT AUTOMATICALLY:
# In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key.
R when you lock the vehicle with the key
R when you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces of the door handle or
to lock it
R after convenience closing (/ page 207)
# Ensure that the Digital Vehicle Key is at least 3 m (high-pres‐
sure cleaner) or 6 m (car wash) away from the vehicle.
R when pulling away
R after a short delay
189
F295 0075 02
OBSERVE THE INFORMATION: # When the vehicle is unlocked: touch the sensor surface 2 or 3 to
extend the door handle.
R on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 35)
R on using a high-pressure cleaner (/ page 717) # When the vehicle is locked: touch the sensor surface 2 or 3 to
unlock.
# To lock the vehicle: touch the sensor surfaces 2 or 3.
# Convenience closing: touch the recessed sensor surface 3 for a pro‐

longed period.
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 207).
# To unlock the vehicle: with the door handle extended, touch the inside
Troubleshooting problems with KEYLESS-GO
surface of the door handle 1. YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE USING KEYLESS-GO
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R The function of the key has been deactivated.

R The key battery's charge level is low or depleted.
Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: depending on the respective end
device, you can continue to use the KEYLESS-GO function for a certain
amount of time even when the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable battery
charge level is extremely low .
# Activate the function of the key (/ page 70).
# Check the battery via the indicator lamp (/ page 175).
190
F295 0075 02
# If necessary, replace the key battery (/ page 178). IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A DANGER OF BEING LOCKED
OUT WHEN THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED:
# Use the replacement key.
R The vehicle is being towed or pushed.
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 195). R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.
# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE. Opening and closing the front comfort doors
POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF KEYLESS-GO IS IMPAIRED:
R high-voltage power lines & WARNING

R mobile phones Risk of entrapment when automatically closing the comfort doors
at the front
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Parts of the body could get trapped. People or animals may be in the
R shielding due to metallic objects or induction loops for electrical gate
locking area.
systems or automatic barriers
# Ensure that no one is near the closing area.
# Ensure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the poten‐ # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
tial source of interference.
R Press the button Ü or s on the key.
R Driver's door: Step on the brake pedal.
Activating/deactivating automatic locking in R Pull the inner or outer door handles.
the MBUX multimedia system R Push against the door or pull on the door.
R Select the Cancel operation display in the multimedia
Multimedia system:
system's Comfort menu.
% The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched

on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.
# Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.
191
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR OPENING OR CLOSING

* NOTE THE FRONT COMFORT DOORS:
Risk of an accident when automatically opening and closing the
comfort doors at the front R the key (to open and close)
The view of the surroundings may be limited. R depressing the brake pedal (to close the driver's door)
R the inner front door handles (to close)
# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the
R the outer front door handles (to close)
swing area of the comfort doors when opening or closing
them. R the multimedia system (/ page 194)
# When opening, pay particular attention to low objects and

SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE FRONT COMFORT DOORS:
obstacles in the swing range of the comfort doors.
R If, when closing, the front door has reached the first detent position, the
# When opening, pay particular attention to objects and obsta‐
power closing function (/ page 195) will automatically draw the door
cles in the area of the side windows.
into the lock.
R When the doors are closed via the comfort function, they are not auto‐
OPENING OR CLOSING THE FRONT COMFORT DOORS matically locked.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO AUTOMATICALLY OPEN R A door arrested in the intermediate position can be opened or closed
AND CLOSE THE FRONT COMFORT DOORS: manually.
R KEYLESS-GO (/ page 189)

# To open with the key: press and hold the Ü button on the key.
R Power closing function (/ page 195)
R Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 428)
% In the multimedia system, you can set whether the driver's door,
The comfort doors can then be opened and closed automatically. the front passenger door or no doors open when you press the
Ü button on the key (/ page 194).
The vehicle occupants are always responsible for opening and closing the The convenience opening function is carried out if no front doors
doors safely. open when the Ü button is pressed. Convenience opening can
involve opening of the side windows and the panoramic sliding
% If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or unavailable, the func‐ sunroof, forexample. Further information on convenience open‐
tion of the comfort doors is still available. ing (/ page 207).
192
F295 0075 02
# To close with the key: Press and hold the button s on the key until
the door starts to close.
All open front doors close.
# Convenience closing with the key: press and hold the s button on
the key.
All open front doors, side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof
close.
% Press the s button on the key again to lock the vehicle.

# Touch the recessed sensor surface 1 on the door handle.
To close the driver's door with the brake pedal: EXIT WARNING WHEN OPENING THE FRONT DOORS FROM INSIDE
The exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is used as an additional safeguard.
# Depress the brake pedal until the door starts to close. If an obstacle is detected, the comfort function is deactivated and the moving
door will be stopped.
To close the front comfort doors from inside: # Manually open a door stopped in an intermediate position.
# Pull and hold the door handle until the door starts to close
(/ page 187). & WARNING
Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or
% The closing procedure stops if the door handle is pulled during road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed.
the automatic process. Pulling on the door handle again will
resume the closing procedure. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.
# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when

To close the front comfort doors from outside: opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.
The exit warning serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for attentive‐
ness of the vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening the doors and
exiting the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants at all times.
193
F295 0075 02
% Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning & WARNING
(/ page 428). Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:
BLOCKAGE DETECTION WHEN OPENING THE FRONT DOORS
Blockage detection will stop a door obstructed by an obstacle during the auto‐ R on soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
matic opening process. The automatic blockage detection function serves R towards the end of the closing process
solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
In particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone from being
# Manually open a door stopped in an intermediate position. trapped.
# Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.

* NOTE
Damage to the convenience doors despite blockage detection # If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:
Blockage detection may not be able to stop the automatic opening R Press the button Ü or s on the key.
process of the doors in all cases. This can be the case in particular with R Driver's door: Step on the brake pedal.
light, soft objects.
R Pull the inner or outer door handles.
# Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance next to R Push against the door or pull on the door.
the vehicle. R Select the Cancel operation display in the multimedia
system's Comfort menu.
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION WHEN CLOSING THE FRONT DOORS
The doors are equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing
function. If an obstacle stops a door during the automatic closing process, the
door will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function serves
Setting comfort doors
solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Multimedia system:
# During the closing process, ensure that no body parts remain within the 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort
closing area. # Activate or deactivate Comfort doors.
OPERATING COMFORT DOORS
# Select ´.
194
F295 0075 02
# Select Open door control.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer‐
The menu for operating the doors opens. The doors can be opened or
closed by sliding the control element on the central display. gency key
# Select Cancel process. UNLOCKING A LEFT-HAND VEHICLE DOOR WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY
The process is interrupted and the door remains in the position it has
reached. % If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key,
this triggers the Anti-Theft Alarm system.
# Press and hold Close all.
All doors are closed simultaneously.
% If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the boot
lid will not be unlocked.
Power closing function
& WARNING % Information regarding starting the vehicle with the key in the
Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically storage compartment (emergency operation mode)
(/ page 319).
Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.
Information regarding starting the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle
# Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. Key in the storage compartment (emergency operation mode)
(/ page 317).
# Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the
outer or inner door handle.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power clos‐
ing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.
% If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or while pulling away, an

automatic closing of the doors can be triggered.
195
F295 0075 02
# Pull and hold the door handle. If the door handle is retracted:
# Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder. # Insert a flat, non-metallic object behind the retracted door handle 1
from above and pry it slightly outward.
# Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
# Reach behind the door handle 1 from below, pull it outward to the
# Turn the emergency key back to its starting position. pressure point and hold it there.
# Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
If the door handle is extended:
196
F295 0075 02
# Pull the door handle 1 outward to the pressure point and hold it there. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.
# Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
# Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1.
# Forcefully pull the door handle 1 outward past the pressure point.
# Turn the emergency key back to its starting position.
# Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.
LOCKING THE DOORS
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into the opening 1 on
the door lock.
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key
clockwise as far as it will go.
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key
anti-clockwise as far as it will go.
197
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Boot
Boot
Opening the boot lid VEHICLES WITH BOOT LID CONVENIENCE CLOSING
* NOTE
Damage to the boot lid by obstacles above the vehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.
# Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above

the boot lid.
# With the boot lid unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star and fold
the Mercedes star in until the boot lid opens.
# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid opens.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with
your foot below the bumper (/ page 201). or
# Press and hold the H button on the key.

# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards.
Release it as soon as it begins to open.
# With the boot lid opening limiter activated, manually pull the stopped
boot lid upwards.
If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic opening process,
blockage detection will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage detection
function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
198
F295 0075 02
Closing the boot lid # Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is
outside the vehicle.
# To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle
& WARNING
recess and push it closed.
Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently,
they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle % Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing: if you lightly push
occupants. the boot lid closed, the power closing function will automatically
pull the boot lid into the lock.
sudden change in direction.
VEHICLES WITH BOOT LID CONVENIENCE CLOSING
around. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over. Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the
closing area.

# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
recognition.
R Press the H button on the key.
NOTE THAT THE BOOT LID WILL NOT BE LOCKED AND WILL POP BACK R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's
OPEN IF THE FOLLOWING SITUATION OCCURS: door.
R You have locked the vehicle and closed the boot lid while a key belong‐ R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.
ing to the vehicle is inside the vehicle and is detected. R Pull the boot lid handle.
and
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehi‐ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing
cle. process by making a kicking motion below the rear bumper.
# Pull the boot lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten‐
tiveness.
199
F295 0075 02
# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. VEHICLES WITH KEYLESS-GO
The boot lid will continue to close. # Press locking button 2 on the boot lid.
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the
vehicle will be locked.
% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: this also applies to the Digital
Vehicle Key if the function is activated and the Digital Vehicle Key
is connected to the vehicle.
# With the boot lid completely open, press and hold the H button on
the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE ACCESS
# Push remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid is fully closed.
# With the boot lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your
foot below the bumper (/ page 201).
BOOT LID AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION
The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing
function. If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing
process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function
serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, ensure that no body parts remain within the
closing area.
# Press closing button 1 on the boot lid.
200
F295 0075 02
HANDS-FREE ACCESS allows you to open and close the boot lid, or even stop
& WARNING the opening and closing process at any point, by performing a kicking motion
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function under the bumper. The transmission must be in position j for this function.
THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:
THE KICKING MOTION TRIGGERS THE OPENING OR CLOSING PROCESS
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers ALTERNATELY.
R towards the end of the closing procedure R If you stop the boot lid opening process with a kicking motion, the boot
lid is closed with the next kicking motion.
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent
someone being trapped. R If you stop the boot lid closing process with a kicking motion, the boot
lid is opened with the next kicking motion.
# Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE BOOT LID CAN ONLY BE CLOSED WITH
HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
R Press the H button on the key.
R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R If the vehicle is switched on and the key's unlock function has been set
R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid. so that only the driver's door is unlocked when activated (/ page 176).
R Pull the boot lid handle. R If the vehicle has been centrally locked from the inside (/ page 188).
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 198) and closing (/ page 199) the
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function boot lid.
% A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is opening or closing.
201
F295 0075 02
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot R The key is behind the vehicle.
lid or a door If the key is not recognised:
R when using an automatic car wash - Take the key in your hand.
R when using a high pressure cleaner or
- Ensure that the function of the key is activated (/ page 70).
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: The Digital Vehicle Key is behind the
or vehicle.
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle when performing the kicking
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high- motion.
pressure cleaner) or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the
R Do not come into contact with the bumper when performing the kicking
vehicle.
motion.
R Do not carry out the kicking motion too slowly.
Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: R The kicking motion must be towards the vehicle and back again.
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Perform the kicking motion to the left or
NOTE right of the ball head.
*
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the boot lid or
one of the doors
R when using a car wash
R when using a high-pressure cleaner
# In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key.
or
# Ensure that the Digital Vehicle Key is at least 3 m (high-pres‐ 1 Detection range of the sensors
sure cleaner) or 6 m (car wash) away from the vehicle. If several consecutive kicking motions are not successful, wait ten seconds.
Ensure that you are standing firmly on the ground when performing the kicking
motion. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
202
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS
Switching separate boot locking on and off
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking function
R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
R The kicking motion is performed with a prosthetic leg. SWITCHING SEPARATE BOOT LOCKING ON
# Select Block boot.
THE BOOT LID COULD BE OPENED OR CLOSED UNINTENTIONALLY IN THE # Create a PIN.
# Confirm the PIN with OK.
R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g.
when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it.
R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. a charging cable or The boot will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.
luggage.
R Tension belts, tarps or other covers are pulled over the bumper. % If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if
R A protective mat with a length reaching over the loading sill down into separate locking is switched on.
the detection range of the sensors is used.
R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
SWITCHING SEPARATE BOOT LOCKING OFF
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Work is being carried out on the trailer # Select Block boot.
hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.
# Enter the PIN.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 70) or do not carry the key about If the PIN is correct, separate boot locking will be switched off and the
your person in such situations. PIN deleted.
Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening

limiter
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other functions
# Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter.
203
F295 0075 02
This function prevents the boot lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for exam‐
ple.
204
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Side windows
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
& WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, par‐
Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window ticularly when unattended.
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or # Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
lock the vehicle.
window.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull
it in order to close the side window again.
Requirements
R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing
area in the process.
# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing
area.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or

press the button in order to reopen the side window.
205
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

R during resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped

in these situations.
1 Closing # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
2 Opening in the closing area.
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open
the side window again.
# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point
of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

Automatic function of the side windows
#
When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side win‐
dows. IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE SIDE WINDOWS WILL BE CLOSED AUTO‐
MATICALLY WHEN THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:
The function will also be available until the doors are closed again.
R if it starts to rain
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SIDE WINDOWS Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side win‐ R in extreme temperatures
dow will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐
aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
age)
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the clos‐ R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
ing area.
The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.
206
F295 0075 02
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed R The panoramic sliding sunroof opens.
completely if the sliding sunroof is open. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window
concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process,
the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed,
active again the next time the vehicle is started. the roller sunblind is opened first.
Interrupt convenience opening: Release the button Ü.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
#
before starting a journey) # Continue convenience opening: Press the button Ü again and hold
pressed.
& WARNING
Risk of entrapment when opening a side window Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or outside)
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side & WARNING
window. Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trap‐
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
ped.
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
Requirements
R The key is near the vehicle. the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: Requirements
R The vehicle is unlocked. R The key is near the vehicle.

R The side windows are open.
207
F295 0075 02
# Press and hold the s button on the key. A SIDE WINDOW CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE CAUSE.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
R The vehicle is locked. # Adjust the side windows.

R The side windows are closed.
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed. Adjusting the side windows
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the s button # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
again. until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO
(/ page 189).
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
# Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
Resolving problems with the side windows until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (follow-up adjustment).
WARNING The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
&
Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection THE SIDE WINDOWS CANNOT BE OPENED OR CLOSED USING THE CONVE‐
is not activated NIENCE OPENING FEATURE.
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, POSSIBLE CAUSES:
the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The
reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trap‐ R The key battery is weak or discharged.
ped.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the
button again to reopen the side window.
208
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof & WARNING

Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving
parts, particularly if unattended.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
opened and closed lock the vehicle.
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.
# During the opening and closing process, make sure that no

body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. & WARNING
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being
opened and closed
or
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame
or sliding roof.
# Touch the control panel during automatic operation.
The opening/closing process will be stopped. # During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body
parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
or
# Touch the control panel during automatic operation.

The opening/closing process will be stopped.
209
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.
* NOTE
Damage caused by moisture ingress
# Do not open the sliding sunroof if it has just rained.
The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are operated using control panel
# Do not open the sliding sunroof immediately after washing the 1.
vehicle in a car wash.
The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind
is open.
NOTE
# To open: swipe rearwards across control panel 1 and hold.
*
Damage caused by protruding objects # To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold.
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.
# To raise or lower: press control panel 1 briefly.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
# To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across con‐
trol panel 1.
* NOTE # To cancel automatic operation: press control panel 1 again.

The opening/closing process will be stopped.
fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof lug‐ AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SLIDING SUNROOF
gage rack. If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the
sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function
# Do not open the panorama sliding sunroof if a roof luggage serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
rack is fitted.
210
F295 0075 02
# Keep the opening area and the guide rails free of debris, e.g. ice, snow or
leaves. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
# When closing the sliding sunroof, make sure that no body parts or
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin
objects are in the closing area.
objects, e.g. fingers.
& WARNING # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function are in the range of movement.
THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:
or
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
R towards the end of the closing procedure. # Touch the control panel during automatic closing.
R during resetting. The closing process will be stopped.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
in the closing area.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
or
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
# Touch the control panel during automatic closing.
The closing process will be stopped.
THE SLIDING SUNROOF WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE
VEHICLE HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ROLLER SUNBLIND
R if it starts to rain
If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the
roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. R in extreme temperatures
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐
# Keep the opening area and the guide rails free of debris, e.g. ice, snow or
age)
leaves.
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts or
objects are in the range of movement.
211
F295 0075 02
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the
vehicle interior.
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, it
& WARNING
will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof
Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof
and the side windows will then be deactivated.
is closed again
RAIN CLOSING FUNCTION WHEN DRIVING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised slid‐ blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maxi‐
ing sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. mum force.
AUTOMATIC LOWERING FUNCTION There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries!
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at
the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
or
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding
# Touch the control panel during automatic closing.
sunroof The closing process will be stopped.
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be low‐
ered slightly at the rear.
THE SLIDING SUNROOF CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE
# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range CAUSE.
of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panoramic sliding sun‐
# If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel.
roof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
# Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control

panel (/ page 209) and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
212
F295 0075 02
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:
# Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
THE SLIDING SUNROOF OR THE ROLLER SUNBLIND IS NOT OPERATING
SMOOTHLY.
# Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind
# Swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 209) and hold it
repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.
# Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.
# Swipe across and hold the control panel until the roller sunblind is com‐
pletely closed.
# Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
213
F295 0075 02
Opening and closing Anti-theft protection
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobiliser THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROXIMATELY
TEN SECONDS IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct
R After locking the vehicle with the key
key.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off,
and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

FUNCTION OF THE ATA SYSTEM
IF THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED, A VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARM IS TRIG‐
GERED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R when a door is opened

R when the boot lid is opened
R when the interior protection is triggered (/ page 216) Example: with MBUX hyperscreen
R when the tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 215)
The indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is primed.
THE ATA SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING

% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: The ATA works with the Digi‐ SITUATIONS:
tal Vehicle Key in the same way as with the conventional vehicle
key. R After unlocking the vehicle with the key
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
214
F295 0075 02
R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
Key) R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
R After pressing the Start/Stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
ment (/ page 319)
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COM‐
DEACTIVATING THE ATA PONENTS ARE CLOSED:
# Press the Ü, s or H button on the key.
R Doors
or R Boot lid
# Press the Start/Stop button with the key in the storage compartment TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:
(/ page 319)
R After pressing the Ü or H button on the key
# Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: Press the Start/Stop button with the
R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
Digital Vehicle Key in the storage compartment (/ page 317).
ment (/ page 319)
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM USING KEYLESS-GO: R After pressing the start/stop button with the Digital Vehicle Key in the
# With the key outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door storage compartment (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key) (/ page 317)
handle.
The distance between key and vehicle here should not be greater than
1 m.
R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle
Key)
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Function of tow-away protection
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 376).
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of
inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY PRIMED AFTER ABOUT

60 SECONDS:
R After locking the vehicle with the key

215
F295 0075 02
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection INTERIOR PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:
R After pressing the Ü or H button on the key

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
ment (/ page 319)
5 Vehicle protection
R After pressing the start/stop button with the Digital Vehicle Key in the
# Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
storage compartment (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key) (/ page 317)
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R The vehicle is unlocked again. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R A door is opened. R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle
R The vehicle is locked again. Key)
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Function of interior protection THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO A FALSE ALARM:
When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if
R When there are moving objects suchas mascots in the vehicle interior
movement is detected in the vehicle interior.
R If a side window is open
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROX‐ R If the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
IMATELY TEN SECONDS:
R After locking the vehicle with the key Priming/deactivating interior protection
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. Multimedia system:
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:) 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
5 Vehicle protection
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COMPO‐

# Prime or deactivate Interior protection.
NENTS ARE CLOSED: INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R Doors R The vehicle is unlocked again.

R Boot lid R A door is opened.
R The vehicle is locked again.
Back to Contents216
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing
Seats and stowing

Notes on the correct driver's seat position 218 Cup holders 253
Notes on grab handles 219 Sockets 258
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and

Seats 220 260
connection with the exterior aerial
Steering wheel 232 Fitting and removing floor mats 265
Easy entry and exit feature 235
Memory function 238
Stowage areas 241
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING WHEN ADJUSTING STEERING WHEEL 1, SEAT

& WARNING BELT 2 AND DRIVER'S SEAT 3:
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING following points into consideration:
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
head restraint
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your R You can move your legs freely
seat belt.
R You can see all the indicators on the driver's display clearly
R You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
R Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 127).
218
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Notes on grab handles
Notes on grab handles
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly,
the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage.
This may result in injuries.
# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or

to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
219
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Seats
Seats
Adjusting the front seat manually and electri‐ & WARNING

cally Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
& WARNING This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before
when unattended. starting the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
& WARNING
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
& WARNING R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
When adjusting a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant, e.g. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
on the seat guide rail.
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
# Make sure that no part of the body is within the seat's range of seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
motion when adjusting a seat. seat belt.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
220
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
could be trapped and thereby injured. not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐ In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
ment buttons and become trapped.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
ment system. position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being & WARNING
adjusted incorrectly Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system.
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no
at about eye level. objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible

to the back of your head.
221
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Adjusting the front seat electrically
Damage to the seats when adjusting
The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
# When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly
in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
when unattended.
lock the vehicle.
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted
When adjusting a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant, e.g.
on the seat guide rail.
1 Seat backrest inclination
# Make sure that no part of the body is within the seat's range of
2 Seat height
motion when adjusting a seat.
3 Seat fore-and-aft position
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 3 and slide the
seat into the desired position. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
222
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
vehicle is in motion adjusted incorrectly
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion # Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your at about eye level.
seat belt.
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly & WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
could be trapped and thereby injured. The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐
ment buttons and become trapped. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body # Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
ment system. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
223
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system.
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no

objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat. 1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion inclination
NOTE 4 Seat cushion length
*
Damage to the seats when adjusting 5 Seat fore-and-aft position
The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats. 6 Seat backrest inclination
# When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects
in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
% The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when
you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no
direct feedback on the switch while pressing it. Feedback is provided only by
the movement of the seat.
224
F295 0075 02
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints

ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS MANUALLY
& WARNING
1 Higher
2 Softer
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
3 Lower
seat belt.
4 Firmer
# Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
225
F295 0075 02
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible # To move forwards or backwards: take hold of the head restraint on
to the back of your head. both sides and press release knob 1.
ADJUSTING MANUALLY # Pull the headrest forwards or push it backwards.
# Let go of release knob 1.

ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINTS OF THE REAR SEATS MANUALLY
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints
If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
# Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1. increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
The head restraint will be unlocked in all directions of movement simul‐ accident or sudden braking.
taneously. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
# To raise or lower: pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards. the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
# To move forwards or backwards: pull the head restraint forwards or
push it backwards.
# Let go of release knob 1. to the back of your head.
ADJUSTING PARTIALLY ELECTRICALLY
# To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint using the buttons on the
door operating unit (/ page 222).
226
F295 0075 02
# To set the centre head restraint in the first position: pull the head REMOVING
restraint up until it engages.
# To raise: push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull the
head restraint up until it engages.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push
the head restraint down until it engages.
FITTING/REMOVING THE REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 45).
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, # Press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint upwards as far as it
will go.
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Release knob 1 will extend.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that # Push both release knobs 1 and 2 at the same time in the direction of
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head the arrow and pull out the head restraint.
at about eye level.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
FITTING
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 45).
# Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it engages.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
227
F295 0075 02
Configuring the seat settings Setting automatic seat adjustment

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
ADJUSTING THE AIR CUSHIONS after calling up a driver profile
# On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Should- Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to
ers or Side bolsters. the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
SETTING THE SEAT HEATING BALANCE pants could be injured in the process.
# Select Heating settings. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being
adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body
# Select Seat heating balance.
parts are in the seat's range of movement.
# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the
adjustment process by:
% The seat heating balance can be set in the rear on the Seat cli-
mate control menu.
# a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
COUPLING NECK WARMER TO SEAT HEATING
# Select Additional neck warmer.
# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat
adjustment switch in the driver's door.
# Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. The adjustment process is stopped.
If the function is active, the neck warmer of the additional cushion has
been coupled to the seat heating.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Position seat automatically
MANUALLY ADJUSTING DRIVER'S SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL POSITION

TO BODY SIZE
The vehicle will calculate suitable driver's seat and steering wheel positions on
the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly.
228
F295 0075 02
# To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. R Hot relaxing for back: Based on hot stone massage, the programme com‐
bines heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, you
# Set the size using the scale. will start to notice warm pressure points, beginning in the pelvic area.
# Select Start positioning. R Hot relaxing shoulders Combination of heat and massage. It starts by
massaging the shoulders. In addition, you will start to notice warm pres‐
The driver's seat and steering wheel positions will be adjusted to the
sure points, beginning in the pelvic area.
body size that has been set.
R Wave massage Regenerating massage programme via soothing waves
across the back and in the seat cushion.
% You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user
R Depth waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood
account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the
flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs.
vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry
over these settings for your vehicle. R Deep workout: Connect the Workout, backrest to the Workout, cushion. The
Further information about synchronising user profiles vibrations in the cushion intensify the effectiveness of tensing and
(/ page 540). releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This sup‐
ports metabolic processes and blood flow in the buttocks and legs.
R Workout, backrest and Workout, cushion These programmes require your
% If the driver's seat and steering wheel positions calculated by the cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve
vehicle are not practical or comfortable, they can be manually blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as
adapted at any time via the control buttons. you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles.
The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they
have to be set manually via the operating switches.
Selecting the massage programme for the
front seats
Overview of massage programmes Multimedia system:
R Classic massage Relaxing back massage programme. 4 © 5 Comfort
R Mobilizing massage Mobilising massage programme with upward-moving # Select Massage.
massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can
# Select a massage programme (/ page 229).
improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
R Activating massage Invigorating massage programme with upward-moving # Start the programme for the desired seat ;.
massage waves.
# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off.
229
F295 0075 02
# To stop the massage: select É.

* NOTE
Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the
% The availability of this function is equipment-dependent. seat heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to
objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child
Resetting seat settings seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.
Multimedia system: # Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat when the seat heater is switched on.
# Select Reset.
Requirements
# Select ß for the desired seat.
The settings for the selected seat will be reset. R The power supply is switched on.
Switching the seat heating on/off
& WARNING
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion
and seat backrest padding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity

or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
Seat heating in the door operating unit in the cockpit (example)
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
# Press button 1 for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired
heating level is reached.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up.
ted after it has been switched on repeatedly.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
230
F295 0075 02
# Press button 1 for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three blower setting is reached.
heating levels after around 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat
Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light
heating is switched off.
up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
% If you switch the power supply off and on again within % If you switch the power supply off and on again within
20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driv‐ 20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's
er's seat will remain active. seat will remain active.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements
R The power supply is switched on.
Seat ventilation in the door operating unit in the cockpit (example)
231
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Steering wheel
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually UNLOCKING
& WARNING
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's # Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
seat belt. # Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.
& WARNING
Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
lock the vehicle.
232
F295 0075 02
LOCKING
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
& WARNING
# Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
# Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the seat belt.
steering wheel.
& WARNING
Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
lock the vehicle.
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.
233
F295 0075 02
# Tap on Additional steering wheel heater.

The steering wheel heater will be decoupled from the seat heating.
% The steering wheel heater can also be deactivated via the MBUX
voice assistant.
1 To move up
2 To move back
3 To move down
4 To move forward
Decoupling the steering wheel heater from

the seat heating
Requirements:

R The steering wheel heater and the seat heating are linked.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating settings
The function is active by default and the steering wheel heater is automatically
activated and deactivated when the seat heating is switched on and off.
234
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit
& WARNING feature
Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become
of the easy entry and exit feature trapped.
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the
# Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.
driving off.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:
# Move the steering wheel adjustment lever.

The adjustment process is stopped.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:
# Press the switch for seat adjustment.

lock the vehicle.
Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by
pressing one of the memory function position switches.
235
F295 0075 02
THE STEERING WHEEL AND THE DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE BACK TO THE
& WARNING LAST DRIVING POSITION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and
exit feature R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is
closed.
Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit
feature, particularly when unattended. R you close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

THE LAST DRIVE POSITION WILL BE SAVED WHEN:
R If you switch off the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the
memory function.
In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the
function must have been switched on (/ page 228). memory function.
WHEN THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE IS ACTIVE, THE STEERING
WHEEL AND DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE AS FOLLOWS: Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position
switches to stop the adjustment process.
R The steering wheel will move upwards.
R The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a position suitable for
getting in or out of the vehicle. Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Requirements:
THIS WILL OCCUR IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 228).
R you switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.
Multimedia system:
% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort
already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will move forwards 5 Easy entry and exit feature
or backwards only if it is not already in the ideal position for get‐ SETTING THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE
ting in or out of the vehicle. # Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.
236
F295 0075 02
% If you are using a custom user profile, this information will be

used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driv‐
er's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position
automatically (/ page 537).
237
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Memory function
Memory function
Function of the memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.
vehicle is stationary.
You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the
& WARNING
memory function.
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion YOU CAN SAVE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS FOR THE FRONT SEAT:
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest
in the lumbar region
# During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and
that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or seat backrest
the steering wheel.
R Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button on the driver's and front passenger sides
or seat adjustment switch immediately. R Head-up display
238
F295 0075 02
Operating the memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.

& WARNING You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion STORING
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.
# During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure

that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or
the steering wheel.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button

or seat adjustment switch immediately.
# Set the front seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the out‐
side mirror to the desired position.
# Press the V button and then release it.
239
F295 0075 02
# Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three

seconds.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.
# To call up: press the preset position button 4, T or U.

The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the
front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column continue
to move into the stored position automatically.
240
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Stowage areas
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle & WARNING

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from func‐ Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
tioning correctly. Observe the notes on airbags (/ page 144). If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
& WARNING all objects they contain.
Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres
they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle or abrupt changes in direction.
occupants. # Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a such situations.
sudden change in direction. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
around. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-
slipping or tipping over.
edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.
241
F295 0075 02
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's and front-passenger Damage to the vehicle caused by spilled liquids
footwell If liquids are spilled in the vehicle, parts of the vehicle may be dam‐
Objects in the driver's and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal aged.
travel or block a depressed pedal.
# Always securely close containers containing liquids that you
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road safety of the vehicle. have brought with you.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get # Clean the vehicle as soon as possible if liquids are spilled.
into the driver's or front-passenger footwell.
# If larger quantities of liquids are spilled, have the vehicle
# Always ensure that the pedals have sufficient free space. checked in a qualified specialist workshop.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on * NOTE
top of one another. Damage to the load compartment floor caused by uneven loading
or sudden stresses
Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shut-off: objects trapped The load compartment floor can be damaged by unevenly distributed
under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the auto‐ loads or sudden stresses.
matic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Therefore please # Distribute the load evenly.
observe the notes on the function of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
(/ page 132). # Drive with due care when the vehicle is carrying a load. Avoid
sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres or fast cor‐
nering.
242
F295 0075 02
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐ % Further information on storage compartments and stowage facili‐
tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth ties can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface character‐
istics are particular to leather, and are not material defects.
Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which
changes the surface characteristics. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
OVERVIEW OF THE FRONT STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
THE HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE DEPENDENT
ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE LOAD WITHIN THE VEHICLE. YOU SHOULD WARNING
&
BEAR THE FOLLOWING IN MIND WHEN LOADING THE VEHICLE: Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
R Never allow the payload including occupants to exceed the maximum If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle. be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
These are shown on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 840). open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the tension sudden change in direction.
evenly. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
NOTES ON CARRYING A ROOF LOAD:
R Distribute the roof load and vehicle load evenly, and place heavy objects spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
at the bottom. Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
R Drive with care. Avoid sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres
or fast cornering. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
R When carrying a roof load or when the vehicle is fully loaded or occu‐ fragile or bulky objects in the boot.
pied, select drive program ; or A. These are configured for good
stability (/ page 331).
243
F295 0075 02
4 Stowage tray below the central display of the multimedia system with USB
& WARNING ports
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's and front-passenger 5 Glove compartment
footwell
Objects in the driver's and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal
% The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre con‐
travel or block a depressed pedal.
sole 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water.
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road safety of the vehicle. Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 722).
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's or front-passenger footwell. % Use the rubber strap to securely store objects in the stowage
# Always ensure that the pedals have sufficient free space. tray under the central display.
top of one another.
1 Stowage spaces in the doors

2 Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with multime‐
dia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console, with cup holders, USB
ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones depend‐
ing on the vehicle version
244
F295 0075 02
OPENING AND CLOSING THE STOWAGE COMPARTMENT IN THE FRONT # To open: slide the cover of the stowage compartment in the front centre
CENTRE CONSOLE console all the way forwards in the direction of the arrow using handle
1.
& WARNING # To close: briefly push handle 1 of the open cover of the stowage com‐
partment in the front centre console forwards.
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
The cover will automatically close the stowage compartment in the front
centre console.
all objects they contain. OPENING AND CLOSING THE STORAGE COMPARTMENT IN THE FRONT
ARMREST
& WARNING
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
around in such situations. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. all objects they contain.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
fragile or bulky objects in the boot. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage

245
F295 0075 02
OPENING AND CLOSING THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT
& WARNING
# To open: press release catch 1 downwards. all objects they contain.
The covers of the storage compartment in front armrest 2 will open
automatically in the direction of the arrow.
# To close: move the covers of the storage compartment in front armrest
2 inwards in the direction of the arrow.
The storage compartment in the front armrest is now closed.

246
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
# To open: press button 1.
The glove compartment will open. load compartment.
# To close: fold the glove compartment upwards. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐
The glove compartment will close. CIALLY:

Through-loading feature in the rear bench R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) wards
FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Requirements:
parts in the sweep of the seat. R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted.
R Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up.
247
F295 0075 02
FOLDING THE REAR OUTER SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD

You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately.
The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre
seat backrest.
If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold
# Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked
to the left seat backrest (/ page 250).
# Pull release lever 1.
# Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into marked position 2.
# Press release catch 2.
# Fold seat backrest 1 forwards.
248
F295 0075 02
FOLDING BACK THE REAR SEAT BACKREST Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
& WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body * NOTE
parts in the sweep of the seat. Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the
seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the
seat backrest is folded back.
& WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back
The seat backrest may fold forwards. the seat backrest.
injury.
load compartment.

CIALLY:
R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐ # Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages.
wards
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
tion indicator 2 will be visible.
249
F295 0075 02
LOCKING AND RELEASING THE RELEASE CATCH OF THE CENTRE REAR Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
SEAT BACKREST visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.
& WARNING
You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. boot against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded
forwards only together with the left seat backrest.
parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
injury. # To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards.
R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or Overview of the tie-down eyes
load compartment.
CIALLY:

wards
250
F295 0075 02
# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2.
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as

1 Tie-down eyes well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving
% Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehicles equipped with style.
the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
section.
Opening the stowage space under the boot

NOTE
floor *
ble clearance height
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not

drive in.
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐

251
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for

Mercedes-Benz.
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the

roof luggage rack is fitted, the tailgate can be fully opened.
# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that
the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE
Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.
* NOTE # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof lug‐ # Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direction of the arrow.
gage rack.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.
# Do not open the panorama sliding sunroof if a roof luggage
rack is fitted.
# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manu‐
facturer.
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
252
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Cup holders
Cup holders
Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from & WARNING

the centre console Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
& WARNING
‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
motion. sudden change in direction.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may around in such situations.
come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.
You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose con‐ # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
trol of the vehicle. spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
Requirements:
R For installation: the locking catch is pushed in the direction of the cup
holder.
253
F295 0075 02
TO FIT # Slide locking catch 1 toward the side wall of the centre console.
The cup holder will be locked.
TO REMOVE
# Insert cup holder housing 1 into the stowage compartment at a slight

angle.
# Place cup holder housing 1 in the stowage compartment, aligning the # Slide locking catch 1 toward the cup holder.
recesses with the two hubs 2 so that they fit. The cup holder will be unlocked.
# Push the cup holder down. # First pull the cup holder up in the direction of arrow 2 and then tilt it
TO LOCK slightly to remove it from the stowage compartment.
254
F295 0075 02
Using the cup holder ORIGINAL POSITION

When the cup holder is not in use, the side walls of the cup holder can be
retracted manually. The bracket arms of the cup holder will automatically be
retracted as well, and the cup holder's holding function will then no longer be
available.
# Place a beverage container in the cup holder.

Bottom 2 of the cup holder will lower automatically and side walls 1
of the cup holder will move forward automatically.
# Manually push back the side walls of cup holder 2 in the direction of
% The cup holder will automatically adjust to the size of the con‐ the arrow.
tainer placed in it.
THE SIDE WALLS OF THE CUP HOLDER CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED MAN‐
UALLY IN DIFFERENT WAYS:
R Press the bottom down slightly with the beverage container.

R Press on the grooved surface on the side wall of the cup holder.
% Check whether the beverage container is held firmly by the cup

holder. Some beverage containers will not be secured adequately
in the cup holder due to their shape or size.
255
F295 0075 02
Opening or closing the cup holder and small * NOTE

stowage compartment in the rear armrest Damage to the cup holder
The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat arm‐
rest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.
& WARNING
‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the # The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup
vehicle is in motion holder is closed.
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in
motion. # Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is
open.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may
be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may
come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. OPENING THE MOBILE PHONE HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST
You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose con‐
trol of the vehicle.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
# Press cover trim 1 once.

The mobile phone holder will open in the direction of the arrow.
* NOTE
Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight # Place the mobile phone in or remove it from the holder.
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. CLOSING THE MOBILE PHONE HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST
# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.
# Press cover trim 1.
The mobile phone holder and the cup holder will both open.
# Press cover trim 1 a second time.

The mobile phone holder will be closed.
256
F295 0075 02
% The mobile phone holder is designed for two mobile phones or

one tablet. You can also charge the devices in the holder by
inserting the charging cable into the devices through the opening
on the underside of the holder.
% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241).
OPENING OR CLOSING THE CUP HOLDERS IN THE REAR ARMREST
# To open: press cover trim 1 twice.

The cup holder will open in the direction of the arrow.
# Place a container in or remove a container from the cup holder.
# To close: slide the cup holder back into the rear armrest.
257
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Sockets
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket # Make sure that no cables are running through or secured in the airbag
deployment area when using the socket. Observe the notes on the air‐
Requirements bags (/ page 144).
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A).

USB ports
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has 12 V sockets in the front DEPENDING ON THE LEVEL OF EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOL‐
passenger footwell and in the load compartment. LOWING USB PORTS:
R in the stowage compartment in the front of the centre console

R in the stowage compartment below the front armrest
R in front of the stowage tray below the central display of the multimedia
system
R in the rear centre console
Example: 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell
# Fold up the cover on socket 1.
# Insert the plug of the device.
258
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Sockets
USB ports in the electronics compartment in the rear centre console (example)
You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, via the USB ports using a
suitable charging cable. Depending on the level of equipment, devices can be
charged at up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on.
259
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exte‐
rior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone & WARNING
Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage
& WARNING compartment
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or constitute a fire hazard.
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in
open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always
the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those
retain all objects within.
made of metal.
# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in * NOTE

such situations. Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone
stowage compartment
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other
objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone
stowage compartment.
fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.
260
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the
Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liq‐ front
uids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compart‐
& WARNING
ment may be damaged.
# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage com‐ If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
partment. be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids
(/ page 116). There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to
the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to around in such situations.
the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
on.
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of
the mobile phone stowage compartment. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehi‐
cle's exterior aerial.
R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may
also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
R To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exte‐ Requirements
rior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protec‐
tive covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception. R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
261
F295 0075 02
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOL‐

LOWING OPTIONS FOR WIRELESSLY CHARGING A MOBILE PHONE IN THE % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
COCKPIT: water.
R In the front stowage compartment of the centre console

RADIO EQUIPMENT APPROVAL NUMBERS FOR BRAZIL
This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection
against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and
must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Direc‐

tive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets
the applicable technical requirements.
Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment (with central display)
# Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle compo‐
nents which receive and/or transmit radio waves.
Wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the front stowage compartment (with MBUX hyperscreen)
# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 1 as possible with
the display facing upwards.
When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile
phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's
charging process are shown in the multimedia system display.
262
F295 0075 02
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the

rear passenger compartment
& WARNING
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or Wireless charging in the rear passenger compartment in vehicles without MBUX rear tablet
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain # Fold down the rear armrest.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a the display facing upwards.
When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during
around in such situations. the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp
flashing three times.


Wireless charging in the rear passenger compartment in vehicles with MBUX rear tablet
Requirements:
# Fold down the rear armrest.
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.
# Open the stowage compartment in rear armrest 1 (/ page 256).
A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://
263
F295 0075 02
the display facing upwards.
When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights
up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during
the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp
flashing three times.
% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241).
264
F295 0075 02
Seats and stowing Fitting and removing floor mats
Fitting and removing floor mats
FITTING FLOOR MATS

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.
This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's footwell.
# Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the

pedals.
# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed. # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the
footwell such that it fits.
top of one another. # Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.

REMOVING FLOOR MATS
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off hold‐
ers 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.
Back to Contents265
F295 0075 02
Light and sight
Light and sight

Exterior lighting 267
Interior lighting 280
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer

283
system
Mirrors 286
Area permeable to radio waves on the

290
windscreen
Infrared-reflective windscreen function 291
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Exterior lighting
Exterior lighting
Notes on adjusting the lights when you are ONCE THE HEADLAMPS HAVE BEEN CONVERTED:
driving abroad R Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.

R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the head‐
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives
available.
on the other side of the road.
Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience function, the headlamps will

automatically adjust when you cross the border into countries where traffic Information about lighting systems and your
drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be responsibility
adjusted manually on the Low beam menu (/ page 279).
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the
THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE: vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the
prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situa‐
R If automatic is selected on the Low beam menu tion.
R If navigation and the navigation position are available
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND

CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:
R If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only dis‐
play message is shown.
R If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is
shown.
267
F295 0075 02
Light switch For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking
lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are
OPERATING THE LIGHT SWITCH also switched on in the parking lights position.
If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will
be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING (EXCEPT STANDING AND PARKING LIGHTS)

WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS
OPENED.
R Observe the notes on locator lighting (/ page 279).
SWITCHING ON ACCIDENT SCENE LIGHTING

# Switch on the hazard warning lights (/ page 60).

1 W Left-hand parking lights
2 X Right-hand parking lights # Turn the light switch from the Ã position to the L position.
3 T Standing lights and licence plate lighting The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off.
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) THE ACCIDENT SCENE LIGHTING WILL BE SWITCHED OFF IF:
5 L Low beam/high beam
6 R Activates or deactivates the rear fog light. R you switch off the hazard warning lights.
R you turn the light switch back to Ã.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights
will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. R the battery is insufficiently charged.
# Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance AUTOMATIC DRIVING LIGHTS FUNCTION
with the relevant legal stipulations. When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime
running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light condi‐
tions.
* NOTE
Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several
hours.
268
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Operating the combination switch for the
Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor vis‐ lights
ibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be
switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle
lighting.
SWITCHING THE REAR FOG LIGHT ON/OFF
Requirements
1 High beam
R The light switch is in the L or Ã position. 2 Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
# Press button R. 4 Turn signal light, left
Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
# Use the combination switch to select the desired function.
SWITCHING ON HIGH BEAM
# Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1.

When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will
be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
SWITCHING OFF HIGH BEAM
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the
direction of arrow 3.
269
F295 0075 02
HEADLAMP FLASHING
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.
lights
#
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS

# To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the

point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
VEHICLES WITH ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST:
R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to

operate for the duration of the lane change.
R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was
not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate Vehicles without MBUX Hyperscreen
automatically.
# Press button 1.
THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:
R the airbag has been deployed.
270
F295 0075 02
R the vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than ACTIVE HEADLAMPS FUNCTION
70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard
warning light system using the warning lamp button.
DIGITAL LIGHT adaptive functions

R The headlamps will follow your steering movements.
FUNCTION OF DYNAMIC LOW BEAM R Relevant areas will be better illuminated during a journey.
With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It The functions will be active when low beam is switched on.
also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are
THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the
light in advance.
R Active Headlamps (/ page 271)
R Cornering Light (/ page 271) CORNERING LIGHT FUNCTION
R Motorway mode (/ page 272)

R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 272)
R Bad weather light (/ page 272)
R City lighting (/ page 272)
R Topographical compensation (/ page 273)
The system will be active only when it is dark. The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide
angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for
example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched
on.
271
F295 0075 02
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: ENHANCED FOG LIGHT FUNCTION
The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumi‐
R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the nation of the edge of the carriageway.
steering wheel is turned
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is
turned
Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on

both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position.
It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.
MOTORWAY MODE FUNCTION THE FUNCTION IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOWING
Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, ena‐ CONDITIONS:
bling better visibility.
R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.
THE FUNCTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOW‐

ING CONDITIONS:
R When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached.

R When the rear fog light is switched off.
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IF A MOTORWAY JOURNEY IS DETECTED FUNCTION OF THE BAD WEATHER LIGHT
BY MEANS OF: The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming indi‐
vidual areas of the headlamps. There will be less glare for the driver and other
R the vehicle's speed road users as a result.
R the multifunction camera
THE CITY LIGHTING FUNCTION
R the navigation system City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a
broad distribution of light.
THE FUNCTION WILL NOT BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R at speeds below 80 km/h
R At low speeds
272
F295 0075 02
R In illuminated parts of urban areas you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the
applicable requirements.
FUNCTION OF THE TOPOGRAPHICAL COMPENSATION
Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to
different road heights. This means that the headlamp range will remain virtu‐ SPOTLIGHT
ally constant when you are driving uphill or downhill.
% Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this

function.
ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS OF DIGITAL LIGHT

DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting
the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in
LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will also
be made aware of the position of the person by a projected symbol.
% The availability of the functions is country-dependent. THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:
R You are driving outside illuminated areas.

% The assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT may be an on- R The system detects a lane marking.
demand feature (/ page 101).
WARNINGS
THE SYSTEM WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R The light switch is in the Ã position.

R High beam is switched on.
% Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, cer‐

tain functions may be disabled due to different legal require‐
ments, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When
273
F295 0075 02
IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A CORRESPONDING SITUATION, A TRI‐

ANGLE WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD IN THE FOLLOWING CASES
AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H:
R You are driving in the opposite direction to the permissible direction of

travel, e.g. on a motorway slip road.
R You are driving towards a stop sign without reducing your speed.
R You are driving towards a red traffic light without reducing your speed. Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 423).
COLLISION WARNING
Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 423).
NOTES
If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at least 30 km/h, a collision
warning symbol will be projected onto the road.
IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A ROADWORKS ZONE, THE SYSTEM
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist (/ page 414).
WILL PROVIDE SUPPORT AS FOLLOWS:
LANE CHANGE WARNING
R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter
a roadworks zone.
R When you drive through a roadworks zone, guide lines that roughly
match the width of the vehicle will be projected onto the road. The guide
lines will be switched off temporarily on tight bends.
274
F295 0075 02
During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least 30 km/h, the course of the Multimedia system:
lane change as displayed will be brighter. This enables you to identify possible 4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT
dangers in the new lane at an early stage.
# Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 409). ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ENHANCED ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS
LANE KEEPING AND BLIND SPOT WARNING
% The availability of the functions is country-dependent.
% This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 101).
% Depending on the country, the spotlight function can also be

switched on or off directly on the DIGITAL Light menu.
AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H, A TRIANGLE THAT INDICATES A LANE
CORRECTION AND ITS DIRECTION WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Select Supporting projections.
R You leave the lane unintentionally. # Activate or deactivate the desired projections.
Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch Projection for greeting/farewell on or off.
(/ page 432).
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a
R You switch on the turn signal light while an object or obstacle is in your high-resolution greeting or farewell will be played back for a short period
blind spot. of time when the vehicle is opened or switched off. You can choose
Observe the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 428). between the Digital Rain and Pixel Impact sequences.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING DYNAMIC LOW BEAM

% More information on locator lighting (/ page 279).
Requirements:
More information on the exterior switch-off delay time
R The vehicle is switched on. (/ page 279).
275
F295 0075 02
Adaptive Highbeam Assist % Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available on demand (/ page 101).
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST FUNCTION
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians

R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise

other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES BETWEEN
THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road R Low beam
users. R High beam
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time. AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:
R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automati‐
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic cally.
conditions.
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: HIGH BEAM WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES:
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R At speeds below 25 km/h
R If other road users are detected
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the
R If street lighting is sufficient
vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
276
F295 0075 02
SWITCHING OFF
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen # Switch off high beam using the combination switch.
near the overhead control panel.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST ON/OFF Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS FUNCTION
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
& WARNING
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO: Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise
other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to rec‐
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be ognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road too late.
users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
switch off the high beam in good time. users.
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and

SWITCHING ON switch off the high beam in good time.
# Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
# Switch on high beam using the combination switch. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traf‐
fic conditions.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will
light up on the driver's display. DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
277
F295 0075 02
R if there is soiling on the sensors or the sensors are obscured AT SPEEDS ABOVE 30 KM/H:
R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting automatically.
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will be switched on
automatically.
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen

near the overhead control panel.
SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS ON/OFF
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:
BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT: R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R Low beam R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R Partial high beam R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
R High beam
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to rec‐
Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It ognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them
does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver too late.
apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated
with reduced brightness.
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
AT SPEEDS BELOW 25 KM/H OR WHEN THERE IS SUFFICIENT STREET users.
LIGHTING: # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
R Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically. switch off the high beam in good time.
278
F295 0075 02
SWITCHING ON
Activating/deactivating locator lighting
Multimedia system:
# Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the _ indicator lamp
# Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.
will light up on the driver's display. When partial high beam or high beam
is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up. When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds
SWITCHING OFF after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is
# Switch off high beam using the combination switch. parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be
deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.
Setting low beam

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT 5 Low beam
# Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay

time
Multimedia system:
5 Exterior lighting switch-off delay
# Set a switch-off delay time.
After parking and locking the vehicle, the exterior lighting will be activa‐
ted for the set time.
279
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Interior lighting
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient light
SETTING THE COLOUR

# Select Colour.
# Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
1 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off. # Set the desired colour or colour scheme.
2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off. ENERGY SHINE
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off.
R The interactive Energy Shine colour scheme shows the different phases
# To switch reading lamps on/off: touch respective reading lamp 4 or during a journey. Depending on the type of driving condition (speed,
5. boost effect or recuperation), this will be shown in colour by the active
ambient lighting.
OPERATING UNIT IN THE REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS
# Select Brightness.
# Adjust the brightness.
% Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting

will automatically switch between day and night modes.
1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press button 1.
280
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING THE BRIGHTNESS FOR ZONES

% Different effects will be available depending on the vehicle
# Select Brightness.
equipment.
# Switch off Link zones .
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately. OPERATING FEEDBACK EFFECTS
R Climate: If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle,

% The Light strip zone can also be set in vehicles with active ambi‐ the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
ent lighting. R Voice assistant: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assis‐
tant will be visually animated.
ACTIVATING EFFECTS R Greeting: When you get into the vehicle, a special colour animation will
play.
& WARNING R Charging animation: The ambient lighting provides visual feedback on the
Risk of accident if ambient lighting and active ambient lighting different states of charge when the vehicle is connected to or disconnec‐
effects are not switched on ted from the charging station.
The warning support effects are fully active only if the respective driv‐
ing or driving safety systems are switched on on the driving assistance WARNING ASSISTANCE EFFECTS
menu.
R Warning when exiting: If an object is detected in the blind spot while you
# Ensure that the respective driving or driving safety systems are
are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting on the affected door
switched on.
will flash red.
Further information on the exit warning (/ page 428).
R Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping
% Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility;
Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red.
you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 378).
Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432).
R Active Brake Assist: If there is a warning from Active Brake Assist, the
# Select Effects.
active ambient lighting in the centre of the cockpit will flash bright red.
# Activate the desired effect. Further information on Active Brake Assist (/ page 414).
R Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambi‐
ent lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from
Active Blind Spot Assist.
281
F295 0075 02
Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 428).

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information from the parking sensors
R
during parking manoeuvres will be displayed in colour.
time on/off
Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449) Multimedia system:
MULTI-COLOUR ANIMATION 5 Interior lighting switch-off delay
# Activate or deactivate Interior lighting switch-off delay.
R The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.
If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a
short time after the end of the journey.
% In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be
played.
% The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be

activated or deactivated via the Z symbol. Depending on the
equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance
effects are available.
% If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be

displayed at a higher basic brightness.
282
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system
Switching the windscreen wipers on/off % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 35).
& WARNING
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
1 g Windscreen wipers off # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before
2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal changing the wiper blades.
3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
# í Single wipe: press button 1 as far as the point of resistance. bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 283).
# î Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
resistance.
283
F295 0075 02

will go.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it position.
will go.
284
F295 0075 02

1.

position.
285
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Mirrors
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING

Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the
& WARNING outside mirror
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in
vehicle is in motion view are in fact closer than they appear.
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING # Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure
that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering road users driving behind you.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion ADJUSTING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS
seat belt.
# Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mirror.
# Use button 1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror.
286
F295 0075 02
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS IN/OUT (VEHICLES WITH ELECTRI‐

CALLY FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS)
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
# Briefly press button 3.
& WARNING
Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror
% If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the out‐ electrolyte
side mirrors must be moved briefly using button 3. Only then
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror
will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
breaks.
ENGAGING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows. come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or
be swallowed.
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the
outside mirror into the correct position until it audibly engages. # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the follow‐
ing:
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with
3. water and seek medical attention.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mir‐ R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immedi‐
ror will now be set to the correct position. ately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek
medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your
mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.
R Immediately change out of clothing which has been con‐
taminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention
immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will auto‐
matically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on
the inside rearview mirror.
287
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS
Storing the parking position of the front-
THE SYSTEM WILL NOT GO INTO ANTI-DAZZLE MODE IF:
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
STORING
R Reverse gear is engaged.
R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐

tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.
THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL SWIVEL DOWNWARDS

IN THE DIRECTION OF THE REAR WHEEL ON THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE WHEN:
R the parking position is stored (/ page 288). # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
R the front-passenger mirror is selected. # Engage reverse gear.
R reverse gear is engaged.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
tion using button 1.
THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL MOVE BACK TO ITS
ORIGINAL POSITION WHEN: CALLING UP
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
R you shift the transmission to another transmission position.
R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h. # Engage reverse gear.
R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking
position.
288
F295 0075 02
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror

folding function
Multimedia system:
# Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.
289
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen
Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen
Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on

areas 1 of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves.
Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visible from outside the vehicle
when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.
NOTE THIS POSITION FOR VEHICLES WITH:
R Windscreen heater
R Infra-red reflective windscreen
290
F295 0075 02
Light and sight Infrared-reflective windscreen function
Infrared-reflective windscreen function
The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat

in the vehicle interior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.
Back to Contents291
F295 0075 02
Climate control
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems 293
Operating the climate control system 296
F295 0075 02
Climate control Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of j switching
climate control on/off (/ page 296) and 0 synchronisation function
An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment (/ page 301)
must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level moni‐ 3 ¬ Defrosts the windscreen (/ page 297)
toring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and 4 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 301) or
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a
¯ Fine particulate status display (/ page 297)
5 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
6 r Reduces the temperature
Overview of the THERMATIC climate bar 7 Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, dis‐
play for the demist function, airflow, pre-entry climate control or climate
The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated. mode
8 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 298)
9 ± Calls up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 297)
A Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 298)
B J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 296)
C I Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(/ page 296)
% The climate bar will remain visible even when the vehicle is
parked or the air conditioning is switched off (/ page 296).
% The availability of individual functions depends on country and

Front climate bar on the central display (example)
equipment.
1 s Increases the temperature
293
F295 0075 02
Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar 9 Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 298)
A ± Calls up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 297)
The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated. B Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 298)
C I Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(/ page 296)
% The airflow will automatically be reduced in the event of an

incoming call to keep noise sources to a minimum. The airflow
can be adjusted again via 7 or C .
% The climate bar is visible even when the vehicle is parked or the
air conditioning is switched off (/ page 296).
Front climate bar on the central display (example) % The availability of individual functions depends on country and
1 s Increases the temperature equipment.
2 0 Synchronisation function (/ page 301)
j Switches off climate control (/ page 296)
¿ Activates/deactivates the A/C function (/ page 298) Overview of the rear operating unit
3 ¬ Demists the windscreen
4 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 301) or The rear operating unit is available only for vehicles with the THERMOTRONIC
air conditioning control panel.
¯ Fine particulate status display (/ page 297)
5 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
6 Depending on vehicle equipment and settings:
Temperature display
¬ Display for the defrost function
J Airflow
& Pre-entry climate control
7 J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 296)
8 r Reduces the temperature
294
F295 0075 02
R on an MBUX high-end rear entertainment system display

R on the rear tablet
R on the front passenger display (CDD co-driver display)
R on the central display
1 Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger com‐
partment, left
2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left
3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, left, or switches cli‐
mate control on/off (/ page 296)
4 Switches climate control on/off (/ page 296)
5 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches cli‐
mate control on/off (/ page 296)
6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right
7 Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger com‐
partment, right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 298)
9 Sets the air distribution to the right rear footwell vents
A Synchronisation is activated (/ page 301)
B Sets the air distribution to the rear left footwell vents
C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 298)
DEPENDING ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE SETTINGS FOR THE SECOND ROW
OF SEATS CAN BE ADJUSTED ON THE FOLLOWING DEVICES:
R on the rear operating unit
295
F295 0075 02
Climate control Operating the climate control system
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off tivate the climate control functions, press the ¬ button on the
climate bar on the central display.
SWITCHING ON CLIMATE CONTROL
# Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the
central display.
Switching climate control on/off via the rear
or operating unit
# Press Ã, s, r or ±. SWITCHING ON
SWITCHING OFF CLIMATE CONTROL
# Set the airflow to level 0 via I on the climate bar on the central dis‐
play
or
# Press j.
If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly.
Switch climate control off only briefly.
% If climate control is switched off via j, OFF will be shown on

the climate bar.
# Press button 4.
or
% When the range maximisation function is activated, certain cli‐
mate control functions are restricted and the window and mirror # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using buttons 3 and 5.
heaters are switched off. This can lead to windows misting up
and reduced visibility due to weather conditions. To quickly reac‐ or
296
F295 0075 02
# Press buttons 2, 6, 1 or 7.
Calling up the air conditioning menu using the
SWITCHING OFF
# Press button 4.
climate bar
The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar
or
is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.
# Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 and 5. # Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar.
The First row of seats menu is opened.
% If rear climate control is switched off via button 4, OFF will be JUMPING DIRECTLY TO THE AIR QUALITY MENU
shown on the displays.
# Select the ¯ fine particle status display in the air conditioning bar.
The Air quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air clean‐
ing taking place is shown.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the climate bar % The fine particle status display is on the home screen next to the
temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current
Requirements
particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle.
R THERMATIC automatic climate control is fitted. The measurement values are shown with the µg/m3 units (micro‐
grammes per cubic metre).
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.
# Press ¿ on the climate bar on the central display. Demisting the windscreen via the climate bar
SWITCHING ON
% Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows
may mist up more quickly.
# Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when SWITCHING OFF
cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault. # Press ¬, Ã or j on the climate bar on the central display.
or
# Set the airflow to 0.
297
F295 0075 02
# To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust

% When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the the air distribution, e.g. P.
temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated.
% You can manually increase or reduce the airflow by pressing K

on the climate bar on the central display.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the air-conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
Setting climate control to automatic mode via
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats the rear operating unit
Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehu‐ In automatic mode, the temperature is automatically regulated by the temper‐
midification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activa‐ ature of the dispensed air and the airflow.
ted. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the
central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central
display.
# Select A/C (A/C).
Switch off the A/C function only briefly, otherwise the windows may mist up
more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode
is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
Setting climate control to automatic mode via

Press button 1.
the climate bar
#
In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automati‐

cally and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.
# PressAUTO on the climate bar on the central display.
298
F295 0075 02
Selecting climate modes via the air condition‐ when ECO or ECO+ mode is active. The climate mode can be
changed by pressing the ECO button.
ing menu
Multimedia system:
% The vehicle's climate control automatically detects seat occu‐
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats pancy. If the vehicle detects unoccupied seats, the climate con‐
It is possible to switch between different climate modes on the Climate menu. trol functions will be restricted. If you activate ¬, the climate
control will automatically switch to Comfort mode.
If ECO or ECO+ mode is activated, certain climate control functions will be
restricted to conserve energy and extend the vehicle's range.
THE FOLLOWING MODES ARE AVAILABLE ON THE CLIMATE MENU: % If the vehicle is parked in the ECO or ECO+ mode for a short
period, the previously selected mode will still be activated the
R Comfort: maximum climate comfort next time the vehicle is started. If the vehicle is parked in ECO or
R ECO: while heating and cooling output are limited, it remains possible to ECO+ mode for a longer period of time, the system will automati‐
operate climate control without restriction. If you activate ¬, the sys‐ cally switch to Comfort mode the next time the vehicle is started.
tem will automatically switch to Comfort mode.
R ECO+: mode using only the blower and waste heat, if applicable. The # Tap on ECO.
temperature can no longer be adjusted. If you activate ¬, the system
will automatically switch to Comfort mode. # Select Comfort, ECO or ECO+.
If an ECO mode is selected via the air conditioning menu, two LEDs will appear
on the temperature display on the climate bar. When ECO mode is switched
% The windows may mist up more when ECO or ECO+ mode is acti‐ on, one LED will light up green on the temperature display. When ECO+ mode
vated. is switched on, both LEDs will light up green and the ECO+ display will appear.
% ECO+ climate mode can also be switched on and off via the Overview of the air distribution settings
range maximisation button in the EQ menu under Range. When
the range maximisation function is deactivated, the system will THE SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY INDICATE THE VENTS
automatically switch to the last selected climate mode. Pressing THROUGH WHICH THE AIRFLOW IS BEING DIRECTED:
the temperature or blower display on the climate bar of the cen‐
¯ Demister vents
tral display allows direct access to the air conditioning menu
299
F295 0075 02
P Centre air vents

Setting rear climate control using the air con‐
O Footwell vents ditioning menu
Multimedia system:
Setting air distribution using the air condi‐ 4 Climate menu
tioning menu SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

# Select Second row of seats.
Multimedia system:
# Set the temperature.
4 Climate menu
# Select First row of seats or Second row of seats. SETTING THE AIRFLOW
# Select Second row of seats.
# To set air distribution: select ¯, P or O.
# Set the air flow with s or r.
# Set the airflow.
CONTROLLING THE REAR CLIMATE CONTROL AUTOMATICALLY
# Select AUTO.
% When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one
zone is always active. However, several air distribution options
can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate % When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the
control for the vehicle interior and the footwells simultaneously. temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deacti‐
The ¯ climate control for the windscreen can only be selected vate the defrost function, press either ¬, Ã or j set the
for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the but‐ air flow to level 0 (/ page 297).
tons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated.
When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons
remain operable and the last setting is saved.
300
F295 0075 02
Switching the synchronisation function on/off # Press g on the climate bar on the central display.
The interior air will be recirculated.
via the air-conditioning menu
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while.
Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist
The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driv‐ up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
er's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically
adopted for each climate zone.
# Select SYNC (SYNC). Switching air-recirculation mode on/off via

the air-conditioning menu
Demisting the windows Requirements:
WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE INSIDE
R A fine particle prefilter is installed in the vehicle.
# Press Ã on the climate bar on the central display.
# If the windows remain misted up: press ¬ on the climate bar on the Multimedia system:
central display. 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE OUTSIDE # Press g in the upper display area of the climate bar.
# Switch on the windscreen wipers. The interior air will be recirculated.
# Press Ã on the climate bar on the central display. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off via % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist
up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
the climate bar
Requirements:
% By selecting the fine particle status display ¯ on the climate
R No fine particle prefilter is installed in the vehicle. bar, you can jump directly to the air quality menu.
301
F295 0075 02
Activating or deactivating ionisation via the # Navigate down until the climate control bar is active.
air conditioning menu # Select Air freshener.
Multimedia system: # Activate or deactivate fragrancing.

4 Climate menu 5 Air quality SETTING THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
When ionisation is activated, the air in the vehicle interior is enriched with Requirements
negatively charged oxygen ions. These can promote the well-being of the vehi‐
cle occupants. R A flacon is inserted.
R The glove compartment is closed.
# Select Ionisation.
R Climate control is activated.
% The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activa‐

Multimedia system:
ted or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function
is restricted if the side air vent on the driver's side is closed. 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle
interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment.
Fragrance system # Select Air freshener.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM USING THE MUL‐ # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.
TIMEDIA SYSTEM
Requirements
R Automatic climate control is activated.

R The glove compartment is closed.
R A flacon is inserted.
Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle
interior from a flacon located in the glove box.
302
F295 0075 02
INSERTING OR REMOVING THE FLACON OF THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM
& WARNING
Risk of injury from liquid perfume
If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it
could come into contact with their eyes.
# Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been

drunk.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, 1 Cap
rinse your eyes with clean water. 2 Flacon
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
# To remove: After opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven
seconds and pull out the flacon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the man‐
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons
ufacturers' safety notes on the perfume packaging.
: Full flacons may not be disposed of with household waste.
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is
#
Full flacons must be handed in at a pollutant collection empty and do not refill it.
point. REFILLABLE FLACON
# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.
# Screw the cap back onto the flacon.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the
separate information sheet attached to the flacon.
303
F295 0075 02
Information on the windscreen heater Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is
unlocked
& WARNING
FUNCTION OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS
Risk of burns from touching the windscreen when the windscreen
UNLOCKED
heater is switched on
The windscreen can become very hot when the windscreen heater is
switched on. The seats can be briefly pre-heated or pre-cooled before you get into the vehi‐
cle.
The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
suffer burn-like injuries. TIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-COOLING:
# Do not touch the windscreen while the windscreen heater is R Automatic climate control
switched on. R Blower
# Allow the windscreen to cool down before touching it. R Seat ventilation
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐

The windscreen heater will be enabled automatically if ¬ is activated on
TIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-HEATING:
the climate bar on the central display.
R Automatic climate control
After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater will be switched on auto‐
matically as required. R Blower
R Seat heating
% If the on-board electrical system voltage is low, the function of
R Steering wheel heater
the windscreen heater may be impaired. R Mirror heater
R Rear window heater
R Windscreen heater
R Wiper park position heater
304
F295 0075 02
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐ # To switch on: unlock the vehicle.
TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for
IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE pre-heating and pre-cooling.
OPERATION:
R Fragrancing Pre-entry climate control via unlocking cannot be activated more than three
R Ionisation times in succession when the vehicle is switched off.
SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS

# To switch off: press & on the climate bar on the central display.
UNLOCKED IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE
Multimedia system: HAS BEEN STARTED:
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
R Seat heating
R Seat ventilation
SELECTING SEATS
# Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control (e.g. seat heat‐ TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL
ing) will be performed for the selected seats. IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE
OPERATION:
When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar on the
central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehi‐ R Fragrancing
cle. R Ionisation
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE
VEHICLE IS UNLOCKED
Requirements
R The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.

R The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
305
F295 0075 02
Pre-entry climate control for departure time When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be
given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum state of
PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME FUNCTION charge.
THE RUNNING TIME OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL MAY BE REDUCED

& WARNING IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to R The high-voltage battery is not fully charged
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the With active pre-entry climate control, the state of charge of the high-voltage
vehicle. battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
If available, seat ventilation will be activated in the cooling and ventilation

modes.
& WARNING
IF PRESENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED IN HEAT‐
ING MODE:
and seat backrest padding to become very hot. R Seat heating
R Steering wheel heater
or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
R Mirror heater
they may even suffer burn-like injuries. R Rear window heater
R Windscreen heater
R Wiper park position heater
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐ When the set temperature is changed, the climate control mode will automati‐
ted after it has been switched on repeatedly. cally be updated. It will be switched from heating mode to ventilation or cool‐
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: ing mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventila‐
tion mode to heating or cooling mode.
The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set tem‐
perature when the vehicle is parked.
306
F295 0075 02
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐ SETTING REPEAT DAYS
TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL # Select Edit departure time u .
IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE
OPERATION: # Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding days on
which this departure time is to apply.
R Fragrancing
R Ionisation # Press OK to confirm.
SELECTING SEATS
SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME VIA THE
CLIMATE BAR
# Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.
Multimedia system: Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
If a departure time is set, a yellow LED will appear on the climate bar of the
SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME central display. In addition, an LED on the climate bar will indicate when pre-
entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being
cooled and red when it is being heated.
% The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry cli‐
mate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPAR‐
of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information TURE TIME
on the charging settings (/ page 364).
& WARNING
# Select Edit departure time u . Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
# Select a departure time or set a new departure time.
% If the range maximisation function is activated, an approximate
time for reaching the desired state of charge will be determined # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
automatically during a charging stop. This will be used as an vehicle.
approximate departure time for pre-entry climate control and will
be set automatically. Previously set departure times cannot be
changed when the function is active. The automatically deter‐
mined departure time can be activated or deactivated via the air
conditioning menu.
307
F295 0075 02
R Seat ventilation
& WARNING
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL
and seat backrest padding to become very hot. IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE
OPERATION:
or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or R Fragrancing
R Ionisation
Operating immediate pre-entry climate con‐

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
trol via the climate bar
Requirements
& WARNING
R The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently. Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
R The function has been activated via the multimedia system. vehicle
# To activate: set the departure time (/ page 307).
Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for vehicle.
another five minutes if departure is delayed.
# To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early:

press & on the climate bar on the central display or switch off the
preselection of the time in the climate menu.
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS
WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN STARTED:
R Seat heating
308
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Air vents
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating ADJUSTING THE FRONT AIR VENTS
and seat backrest padding to become very hot. WARNING
&
In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. cient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐ interior.
Requirements TO GUARANTEE THE FLOW OF FRESH AIR THROUGH THE AIR VENTS INTO
THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, NOTE THE FOLLOWING:
R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if R Keep the air inlet grilles free of residue build-up (/ page 712).
the journey is interrupted.
# Press the & button on the climate bar on the central display.
# Set the temperature using the s and r arrows on the climate bar
on the central display.
An LED on the climate bar on the central display indicates when pre-entry cli‐
mate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled
and red when it is being heated.
# To open or close the side air vents: hold the outer ring of side air
vent 1 and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
309
F295 0075 02
# To open or close the centre air vents: move controller 2 inwards or

outwards as far as it will go.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold the centre of
side air vent 1 and move it up or down or to the left or right.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the centre air vents: hold the con‐
troller of centre air vent 2 and move it up or down or to the left or right.
ADJUSTING THE REAR AIR VENTS
& WARNING
Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐

cient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle

interior.
# To open or close the rear air vents: hold the controller of rear air
vent 1 and move it inwards or outwards as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction of the rear air vents: hold controller 1
and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Back to Contents310
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking
Driving and parking

Driving 312 Trailer hitch 474
DYNAMIC SELECT 331 Bicycle rack function 481
Transmission 336 Vehicle towing instructions 484
Function of 4MATIC 341
Charging the high-voltage battery 342
Parking 367
Driving and driving safety systems 378
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Driving
Driving
Notes on electric mode OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON VEHICLE NOISE EMISSIONS AND
THE ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING SYSTEM:
R The vehicle is equipped with an all-electric drive system and produces

& WARNING
considerably lower vehicle noise emissions than a vehicle with a com‐
Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage
bustion engine.
battery
For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electro‐
serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety device
lyte and gases may leak out.
is prescribed by law.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. The external noise of the sound generator is perceptible in the vehicle
interior at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek
R The sound generator generates a stationary noise and speed-dependent
medical attention straight away.
vehicle noise emissions at a speed of up to around 30 km/h when the
vehicle is driving both forwards and in reverse.
This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear
& DANGER your vehicle better.
Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the R When you drive at speeds above 20 km/h the acoustic vehicle alerting
high-voltage battery system will gradually switch off.
In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite. R Despite the sound generator, the vehicle still may not be heard by other
road users. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual
odours, smoke or burn marks. R The sound generator will be off when the vehicle is stationary.
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at

a sufficient distance.
# Call the fire service.
312
F295 0075 02
Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on- # Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and
board electrical system replaced if necessary.
& DANGER Requirements

Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system ONLY DISCONNECT THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high volt‐ MANUALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
age. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up on the driver display,
board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
e.g. after an accident.
be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
may cause a fire. R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and restraint system
components have not been triggered.
In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although
OPERATING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE DISCONNECT DEVICE
the damage is not visible.
Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the
# Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board above-mentioned situations.
electrical system. # Switch off the vehicle.
# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on- # Shift the transmission to position j.
board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged. # Apply the electric parking brake.
# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on- # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
board electrical system.
# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-

voltage on-board electrical system.
# After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.
313
F295 0075 02
All work on the drive system (including after disconnecting the high-voltage
on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out in a qualified
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐
cle
# Carefully remove cover 1 of the fuse box in the front passenger foot‐
IN PARTICULAR
well.
High-voltage disconnect device 3 is on the rear side of the cover 1. R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

R change the gearbox setting.
R start the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
# Press release tab 2 on high-voltage disconnect device 3 in the direc‐
and lock the vehicle.
tion of the arrow and pull it out.
# Pull plug4 in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off.
314
F295 0075 02
Requirements: # To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once.

You can, for example, switch on the windscreen wipers.
R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive THE POWER SUPPLY WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF THE FOLLOWING
authorisation is detected. CONDITIONS ARE MET:
R The brake pedal is not depressed.
R You open the driver's door.
R You press button 1 twice more.
# To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice.

Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver display.
THE VEHICLE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS IS MET:
R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in
position j or the electric parking brake is applied.
R You press button 1 once.
Vehicles with central display
315
F295 0075 02
Starting the vehicle R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive
authorisation is detected.
STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE START/STOP BUTTON
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR

Vehicles with central display



This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. # Shift the transmission to position j or i.
Requirements: # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R The vehicle will be started.
316
F295 0075 02
R The õ indicator appears on the driver display: the vehicle is STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IN THE STOR‐
ready to drive. AGE COMPARTMENT (EMERGENCY OPERATION MODE)
# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential electrical consum‐
& WARNING
ers and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked cle
space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver display: IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation IN PARTICULAR
mode) (/ page 319).
% You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and
hold button 1 for about three seconds or press button 1 three
times within three seconds. The transmission will shift to neutral
i automatically. When you press button 1 again, the vehicle IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
will start again and you can engage drive position h again. Be MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving
tips" (/ page 320). R releasing the parking brake.
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on
the driver display. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements:
R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehicle Key" pre-installation.
317
F295 0075 02
R A Digital Vehicle Key with drive authorisation is detected. # Place vehicle key 1 in marked space 2.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop but‐
ton.
% Alternatively, you can use the vehicle key for emergency opera‐
tion mode. It may take a few seconds until the engine starts.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle key is carried
# When the Key not detected display message appears on the driver's dis‐
about your person as a security measure in the event of func‐
play, press the Start/Stop button again.
tional restrictions.
When the õ indicator appears on the driver display, the vehicle is ready to
If the vehicle does not start and the Searching for key in stowage tray or Digital drive.
Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket… See Owner's Manual display message
appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency opera‐
tion mode.
# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in marked space 1.
or
318
F295 0075 02
STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE KEY IN THE MARKED SPACE (EMER‐ Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: If the vehicle does not start and the
GENCY OPERATION MODE) Searching for key in stowage tray or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging
bracket… See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display,
WARNING you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
&
cle
IN PARTICULAR

R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample. # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.

# Remove key 1 from the key ring.
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: # Place key 1 in marked space 2 on the symbol.
R releasing the parking brake. The vehicle will start after a short time.
R change the gearbox setting. If you remove key 1 from marked space 2, it will still be possible to
R start the vehicle. continue driving the vehicle. For further engine starts, however, key 1
must be located on the symbol in marked space 2 during the entire
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. journey.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you # Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
IF THE VEHICLE DOES NOT START:
# Keep the key out of reach of children. # Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop but‐
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. ton.
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Own-
er's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the
vehicle in emergency operation mode.
% You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/
stop button (/ page 314).
319
F295 0075 02
Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on

the driver display.
Notes on driving
WARNING
Running-in notes &
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
R In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust auto‐ Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has depressed pedal.
been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached
This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
when this teaching-in process has concluded.
R Brake pads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving sev‐ into the driver's footwell.
eral hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
# Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
pedals.
top of one another.
320
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
INCORRECT FOOTWEAR INCLUDES, FOR EXAMPLE: If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake sys‐
tem may overheat.
R shoes with platform soles
R shoes with high heels This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.
R slippers # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
There is a risk of an accident. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at
the same time while driving.
# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the
pedals safely.
* NOTE
& WARNING
ble clearance height
Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted
or no longer available.
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boost‐
ing, for example. # If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
drive in.
You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for
example. # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
# Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.
% Please bear in mind that all speed values stated in this Owner's
Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.
321
F295 0075 02
OBSERVE THE NOTES ON DRIVING WITH A ROOF LOAD, TRAILER OR NOTES ON BRAKE CARE MODE IN CASE OF CORROSION ON THE BRAKE
FULLY LADEN VEHICLE. DISCS
Driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer, or with the vehicle fully laden Corrosion may occur on a vehicle's brake discs, for example as a result of
or occupied, changes the handling and steering characteristics of your vehicle. extended idle time, temperature and high humidity or wetness. Aggressive
cleaning agents or de-icing salt can also lead to increased corrosion on the
THEREFORE PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES: brake discs.
R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and trailer load. Also observe REMOVE THE CORROSION AS FOLLOWS:
the information in the technical data in this respect.
R Distribute the roof load and vehicle load evenly, and place heavy objects R Activate brake care mode in the multimedia system (/ page 717).
at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 241).
R Drive carefully, avoiding abrupt starting, braking and steering as well as % Further information on brake care mode (/ page 716).
fast cornering. Brake care mode is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
R If trailer operation is permitted, observe the notes on trailer operation
(/ page 474). NOTES ON AQUAPLANING
Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road
NOTES ON DRIVING ON ROADS TREATED WITH DE-ICING SALT surface.
The braking effect is limited on road surfaces treated with de-icing salt.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES DURING HEAVY PRECIPITATION OR IN
PLEASE THEREFORE BEAR IN MIND THE FOLLOWING NOTES: CONDITIONS IN WHICH AQUAPLANING MAY OCCUR:
R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brake linings, the braking dis‐ R Reduce speed.
tance can increase considerably or braking may be one-sided.
R Avoid tyre ruts.
R Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.
R Avoid sudden steering movements.
R Brake carefully.
REMOVE SALT BUILD-UP AS FOLLOWS:
R Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres
R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when
(/ page 37).
starting the next journey
322
F295 0075 02
NOTES ON DRIVING THROUGH WATER ON THE ROAD

Water ingress can damage the drive system, electrics and transmission.
ECO display function
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU NEED TO DRIVE THROUGH WATER:
R The water, when calm, should reach no higher than the lower edge of the
vehicle body.
R Drive at a walking pace at most, otherwise water may enter the vehicle.
R Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which
may exceed the maximum permissible depth of water.
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's dis‐
play depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of
The service brakes have a reduced braking effect after driving through water. your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball
The regenerative brake system is not adversely affected. Brake carefully, pay‐ 2 that will roll forwards or backwards in the direction of travel on a stylised
ing attention to the traffic conditions, until braking power has been fully road according to the driving characteristics.
restored.
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3.
Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines,
Function of rear axle steering the ball will light up in orange.
The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear THE ECO DISPLAY ASSESSES THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA FOR AN ECO‐
axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of NOMICAL DRIVING STYLE:
the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater mobility and
improved driving stability for the vehicle. R Coasting at the right times
R consistent speed
REAR AXLE STEERING HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:
R moderate acceleration
R reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking
effort
The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using
R more direct steering resulting in improved control of the vehicle stars 1. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if
R improved cornering of the vehicle you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the
background.
Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode (/ page 753).
323
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS
% You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic menu
WITH RECUPERATION IN OVERRUN MODE, THE BRAKING EFFECT OF THE
(/ page 491).
ELECTRIC MOTOR IS ONLY REDUCED OR NON-EXISTENT IN THE FOLLOW‐
ING SITUATIONS:
Recuperative brake system R when the high-voltage battery state of charge increases
R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature
FUNCTION OF THE REGENERATIVE BRAKE SYSTEM
The recuperative brake system converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec‐ You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
trical energy during overrun mode and braking. MANUALLY SETTING RECUPERATIVE DECELERATION
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motors are oper‐ In transmission position h, you can use the steering wheel shift paddles to
ated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode.
charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal while driving in transmission position h or k, recuper‐
ation starts in overrun mode.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when
coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.
The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the

driving situation. Also brake with the service brake if necessary. Always adapt
your speed to the driving situation and keep sufficient distance.
% If you brake heavily, the mechanical brake is also used. This

means that the maximum recuperation energy cannot be recov‐ THE FOLLOWING RECUPERATION LEVELS ARE AVAILABLE:
ered. The more proactively you accelerate and brake, the more
R hÃ Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist
efficiently energy can be recuperated.
(/ page 325)
R hq No recuperation: the vehicle glides, rolls freely
R h Normal recuperation (standard setting)
R h± Increased recuperation: increased deceleration in overrun mode
324
F295 0075 02
# Select transmission position h.

& WARNING
# Increase recuperation: Pull the shift paddle 1 briefly. Risk of accident if ECO Assist does not provide sufficient decelera‐
tion
# Reduce recuperation: Pull the shift paddle 2 briefly.
ECO Assist only brakes your vehicle when you take your foot off the gas
# Select hÃ : Pull the shift paddle 1 or 2. pedal. If vehicles are detected late, e.g. after tight curves, or if you do
not react immediately to the ECO Assist display, the deceleration may
When changing to transmission position k, the current recuperation level is not be sufficient.
adopted with the exception of hÃ. If hÃ was previously selected, the
vehicle deceleration of the recuperation stage h is set in transmission posi‐
# React promptly to the ECO Assist recommendation and take
tion k. With a subsequent change to transmission position h, the previously your foot off the gas pedal.
selected variable recuperation hÃ is set again. # Adjust your speed to the driving conditions and maintain a
suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
% After restarting the vehicle, h is automatically set as the recu‐
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.
peration level.
The driver display shows the currently set recuperation level next to the trans‐ ECO Assist is active only in hÃ (/ page 324).
mission position indicator.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, ECO Assist analyses data for the vehi‐
cle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving
ECO Assist style for the route ahead, use minimal energy and recuperate as much as pos‐
sible. If the system has detected an event ahead or a vehicle in front and the
ECO ASSIST FUNCTION vehicle is approaching the event, ECO Assist will calculate an optimised speed
ECO Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to your profile based on the distance, speed and available route information.
surroundings and does not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road
If you release the accelerator pedal in this case, intelligent recuperation will
traffic law. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehi‐
start in overrun mode. If ECO Assist has detected a vehicle travelling in front
cle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
or a stationary vehicle ahead, it can apply the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
standstill. This may be the case, for example, at the end of a traffic jam or if
the detected vehicle ahead stops in front of you.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you will also need
to brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for exam‐
325
F295 0075 02
ple, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY WILL BE HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING
in front is very short. CASES:
Depending on the vehicle equipment and at low speeds, e.g. in a multi-storey R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
car park or on play streets, no adjustment will be made for stationary vehicles R You depress the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening
and therefore there will be no display. because of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a
vehicle in front.
R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route
ahead.
IN ADDITION TO A VEHICLE IN FRONT ¥, ECO ASSIST CAN DETECT THE

FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS 2 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIP‐
MENT:
1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
~ Roundabout
2 Route event ahead
¢ Sharp bend
% ECO Assist can also be shown on the head-up display. & Junction
£ T-junction
If a route event that requires an adjustment of your driving style is detected
ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý symbol (grey) will be displayed. ¤ Downhill gradient
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recu‐ ¦ Speed limit
peration in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient,
also apply the service brake.
ECO Assist can also react to other intersections or junctions if you activate the
If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator turn signal indicator in good time.
pedal, you will end control by ECO Assist. This does not apply in the case of a
vehicle in front. % On roads with an obligation to drive in a lane as far to the right as
possible, vehicles driving in the lane to your left will also be rec‐
ognised as vehicles ahead of you.
326
F295 0075 02
To enable ECO Assist to react to future route events, the equipment-depend‐

ent speed adaptation functions of Active Distance Assist must be active
Function of the haptic accelerator pedal
(/ page 404). The haptic accelerator pedal features an additional point of resistance to help
you drive as efficiently as possible in drive program ;.
SYSTEM LIMITS
If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist
will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available when
route guidance is not active. Not all information and traffic situations can be
Range maximisation
foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. RANGE MAXIMISATION FUNCTION
The range maximisation function enables a maximum range gain. To achieve
% ECO Assist will be available after you drive off, as soon as the this, the function partially or completely switches off convenience systems
sensor check is completed. that are not relevant to driving and activates efficiency-enhancing driving
functions.
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐ THE RANGE MAXIMISATION FUNCTION CONTROLS THE RESTRICTIONS
ING SITUATIONS: OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTION GROUPS:
R if there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient road illumination, R Climate control
highly variable shadows, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray - Restricting climate control functions and deactivating front wind‐
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections screen, rear window and mirror heaters
R if the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera R Interior
R if the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured - Switching off ambient lighting, displays and certain charging func‐
R if road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient light‐ tions
ing, or because they are obscured R Seating comfort
R if the digital road map of the navigation system has incorrect or outdated - Deactivating the steering wheel heater, seat heating, ventilation
information and massage programs
R if signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes R ECO drive functions
R if the radar sensors are dirty or obscured - Changing to the ; drive program, activating ECO Assist and the
R when you drive on roads with steep gradients hÃ recuperation level
R if there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles
327
F295 0075 02
If necessary, you can deactivate the restrictions of individual function groups

again. This will reduce the maximum range gain by the value specified for the
AMG Active Sound
function group. SELECTING SUPPORTING SOUND CHARACTERISTIC WITH THE STEERING-
WHEEL BUTTON
If you switch on a deactivated function while range maximisation is activated,
all restrictions of the corresponding function group will be removed and the
maximum range gain will be reduced accordingly. For example, if you switch on % You can select a comfortable (Balanced), a sporty (Sport) or a
the seat heating again, all restrictions on the "Seating comfort" function group very sporty (Powerful) supporting sound characteristic for inte‐
will be deactivated. rior and drive noises using the steering-wheel button or the mul‐
timedia system (/ page 335).
This does not apply to the "ECO driving functions" group, as the range gain in
this case depends mainly on your personal driving style. The activated ECO
driving functions help you to drive in an energy-efficient manner. The specified
range gain for the ECO drive functions can be achieved only if you observe the
driving instructions and recommendations displayed and drive without kick‐
down.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING RANGE MAXIMISATION

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 EQ 5 Range # Press the upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until it displays
# Activate or deactivate Maximum range. the N symbol.
All function groups concerned will be activated or deactivated.
or % If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are dis‐
# Individually activate or deactivate the individual subsystems of the four played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 329).
Climate control, Interior, Seat comfort and ECO drive functions function
groups.
# Press the corresponding button 2.
THE COLOUR OF THE SYMBOL N INDICATES THE SUPPORTING
SOUND CHARACTERISTIC CURRENTLY SELECTED:
R Blue: Balanced – comfortable

R Orange: Sport – sporty
328
F295 0075 02
R Red: Powerful – very sporty g AMG DYNAMICS (/ page 332)
N AMG Active Sound (/ page 328)

% If you select one of the sporty sound characteristics (Sport or
Powerful), the vehicle also produces a corresponding sound
when stationary. In addition, all the functions you have saved as favourites in the multimedia
system are available for selection. Information on favourites (/ page 540).
Function of the AMG steering wheel buttons % Individual functions may be hidden. How functions are displayed
and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multi‐
media system (/ page 329).
If you have assigned a specific function to one of the display buttons 1, you
can operate this function with the corresponding button 2.
The assignment of the display buttons 1 remains stored even after a vehicle
restart. But the operating status of the respective function is reset to the
The AMG steering wheel buttons are an additional control element with two default.
buttons on the steering wheel.
You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the control element. Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons
You can change between the available functions for the corresponding button
1 by pressing the upper or lower part of the display buttons 2 repeatedly. Multimedia system:
The display buttons 1 show each function selected. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
5 AMG steering-wheel buttons
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE EQUIP‐
MENT: OVERVIEW OF THE AMG SETTINGS SELECT MENU
The left display buttons on the steering wheel can be set in the SETTINGS
å ESP® (/ page 383) SELECT menu.
ä AMG RIDE CONTROL + (/ page 437)
e Camera views (/ page 444)
329
F295 0075 02
# Press q in selection area 1 and select the desired function from the
list.
The selected function is assigned to selection area 1 and can be selec‐
ted from there for the steering wheel buttons.
DELETING BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
# Select the upper or lower display button in the central display.
(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content # Press ´.

equipment-dependent.
1 Selection area for the available functions # Press £ for the respective function in selection area 1 to delete the
2 Adjustable steering wheel buttons selected assignment of the display button.
3 Calls up setting mode
# Select the appropriate steering wheel button.
SETTING THE STEERING WHEEL BUTTONS
% The SETTINGS SELECT menu can also be called up using the AMG
button in the centre console or by pressing and holding the
respective display button.
# Press 3 and select the desired function for assignment from 1.
% The setting mode can also be called up by pressing and holding

the current assignment in selection area 1.
ADDING NEW FUNCTIONS FOR SELECTION

330
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT
DYNAMIC SELECT
Function of DYNAMIC SELECT AVAILABLE DRIVE PROGRAMS

= INDIVIDUAL
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics. R Individual settings for the following vehicle characteristics
(/ page 334):
DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐ - Drive
CLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:
- Suspension
R Drive - Steering
R Vehicles with AIRMATIC: suspension (/ page 435) - ESP®
- Suspension and damping
- Vehicle level (speed-dependent) C SPORT
R Steering
R Sporty and dynamic driving characteristics
R ESP®
R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch
R Point of resistance in the haptic accelerator pedal of road
% In drive program ;, an additional point of resistance is activa‐ A COMFORT

ted in the haptic accelerator pedal. R Comfortable driving style
R First point of resistance: at approximately 60% of pedal
R Recommended for all road conditions
travel (only in ;)
R Best balance between efficiency and performance for all driving condi‐
R Second point of resistance: transition to kick-down (always
tions
available)
; ECO
R Economical setting of vehicle functions
331
F295 0075 02
R Recommended for all road conditions - Power level 3

R Additional first point of resistance in the haptic accelerator pedal indi‐ - With somewhat limited power release for sporty driving
cates an efficient, economical driving style R B Sport+
- Power level 4
The ESP® settings in drive programs ; and A are designed for stability. - Maximum power availability for particularly sporty driving
Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting
roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully laden or fully occu‐ DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐
pied. CLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:
R Drive and power availability

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes- - Power release for the drive system will be selected automatically
depending on the drive program.
AMG vehicles) - The four power levels are designed to provide constant power over
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to as long a period as possible in the respective drive program.
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics. R AMG DYNAMICS
- The three agility functions, Basic, Advanced and Pro, will be selec‐
YOU CAN SELECT THE FOLLOWING DRIVE PROGRAMS:
ted automatically depending on the drive program.
R o Slippery - The steering, all-wheel drive and stabilisation functions will be
- Power level 1 adapted to the selected drive program.
- With limited power release for optimised pulling away and driving R Suspension
characteristics in wintry and slippery road conditions R Steering
- Kickdown not available R AMG Active Sound sound characteristic
R A Comfort
The ESP® settings in drive programs o and A are designed for stability.
- Power level 2 Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting
- With moderate power release for comfortable driving and maxi‐ roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully laden or fully occu‐
mum range pied.
R = Individual
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick‐
- For custom settings for drive system, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension down), the maximum power will always be available in all drive programs with
and sound in the vehicle interior the exception of the drive program o. Kickdown is not available in the drive
R C Sport program o.
332
F295 0075 02
% You can set the vehicle characteristics using the multimedia sys‐ Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG
tem (/ page 335). vehicles)
SELECTION WITH RIGHT-HAND STEERING-WHEEL BUTTON
% You can also adjust the agility functions of AMG Dynamics using
the AMG steering-wheel buttons.
Selecting the drive programme
# Turn rotary switch 2.

The selected drive program will appear on display button 1 and on the
driver's display.
% Individual drive programs may not be shown. How drive pro‐

grams are displayed and the order in which they are displayed
can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 335).
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right. # To select the = drive program directly: press display button 1.
The drive program selected appears on the driver's display.
333
F295 0075 02
SELECTION VIA THE CENTRAL DISPLAY (MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)

% This function must be activated for each user profile separately.
The drive program for the respective user profile of the last
driver is only stored if this function is activated.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking
whether the last active drive program should be restored.
% The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate

from the standard settings.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the A drive program is set
# Press button 3 and select the drive program via the central display automatically.
(/ page 335).
Displaying vehicle data

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multi‐
Multimedia system:
media system 4 © 5 Info
Multimedia system: # Select Vehicle.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT The vehicle data is displayed.
SETTING THE I DRIVE PROGRAM
# Select = Individual. Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
# Select and set a category. Multimedia system:
SWITCHING THE RESET DISPLAY ON/OFF 4 © 5 EQ
# Activate or deactivate Ask when starting. # Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.
334
F295 0075 02
Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX The settings of the drive programs can be adjusted individually. The setting
mode for the drive programs can also be called up by pressing and holding the
multimedia system current configuration in selection area 2.
Multimedia system: # Select the desired tab on the left and make the relevant setting.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE DRIVE PROGRAMS (EQUIPMENT-DEPEND‐
ENT):
OVERVIEW OF THE AMG DYNAMIC SELECT MENU
R AMG DYNAMICS:
Basic/Advanced/Pro
R Sound:
Balanced/Sport/Powerful
R Drive (can only be set in the = drive program):
Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic
R Suspension:
Comfort/Sport/Sport+
SETTING THE I DRIVE PROGRAM

# Select = Individual.
(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content
equipment-dependent. # Select and set a category.
1 AMG drive program settings
2 Drive programs
% A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty sus‐
3 ESP® (/ page 383)
pension mode.
% Depending on the equipment, the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu

can also be called up using the AMG button in the centre con‐
sole.
# Select the appropriate drive program.
335
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Transmission
Transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever # Keep the key out of reach of children.
FUNCTION OF THE DIRECT SELECT LEVER

& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR



336
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury when the transmission position is not
engaged
The current transmission position will be highlighted on the driver's dis‐
play.
If the selected transmission position is not highlighted, the vehicle may

pull away in the wrong direction or roll away.
# After changing the transmission position, always check the

transmission position display on the driver's display.
j Park position
k Reverse gear
If the transmission position is not highlighted on the driver's display
even after a short time: i Neutral
h Drive position
# Pay attention to the display messages.
ENGAGING REVERSE GEAR R
# Pull away carefully and check the engaged transmission posi‐
tion.
# When parking, engage the parking brake and secure the vehi‐
cle against rolling away.
# Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current
transmission position will be highlighted on the driver display.
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards
past the first point of resistance.
337
F295 0075 02
ENGAGING NEUTRAL N Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: Make sure that a vehicle key
or Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle and that the automatic
transmission remains in neutral i.
IF THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DOES NOT STAY IN NEU‐
TRAL I:
R Restart the vehicle and repeat the procedure.
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance, holding it there until transmission posi‐
tion i is shown on the driver display.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle
freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
IF YOU WANT THE TRANSMISSION TO REMAIN IN NEUTRAL N EVEN IF

THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:
# Start the vehicle.
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i.
# Release the brake pedal.
% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the
transmission will remain in neutral i.
338
F295 0075 02
ENGAGING PARK POSITION P

* NOTE
Damage due to engaging park position j while the vehicle is roll‐
& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehi‐ ing
cle If you shift the transmission into park position j while the vehicle is
rolling, the transmission may be damaged.
IN PARTICULAR # If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. # Only engage the park position j when the vehicle is station‐
R get out of the car and are hit by traffic. ary.


# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 367).
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
# When the vehicle is stationary, press button 1.

When the j transmission position display is shown, park position is
engaged. If the j transmission position display is not shown, apply the
parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
339
F295 0075 02
ENGAGING DRIVE POSITION D

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is
engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission
position display.
PARK POSITION J WILL BE ENGAGED AUTOMATICALLY IF ONE OF THE

FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:
R You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position h or k.

R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission
position h or k.
R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position h
or k and bring it to a standstill.
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
R When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position i, bring the first point of resistance.
the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary.
R Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle.
% To manoeuvre with the driver's door open, open the driver's door
while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position
h or k again.
340
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Function of 4MATIC
Function of 4MATIC
The flexible all-wheel distribution of the 4MATIC means the drive is always
ideally distributed between both axles. Depending on the situation, only the
front axle or only the rear axle can be driven, or the drive can be distributed
continuously between both axles.
This means that recuperation can be used even more effectively and the range
of the vehicle can be increased (/ page 324).
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road,
weather or traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
% In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of the flexible all-

wheel distribution can be achieved only if you use winter tyres
(M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.
341
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery
Charging the high-voltage battery
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery * NOTE

Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observ‐
& DANGER ing the following recommendations
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of, and the
Charging System Pro amount of energy available from, the high-voltage battery decreases
If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result over the course of its life. As a result, the maximum electrical range that
e.g. in fires or an electric shock. can be achieved by the vehicle is reduced and its maximum electrical
output can be impaired.
# Observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the Flexible
Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected. THE FOLLOWING FACTORS COULD ACCELERATE THE AGEING OF
THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:
R frequently fully charging (charge level 100%) the high-voltage bat‐

* NOTE tery, especially when this process is not directly followed by a
High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for journey
lengthy periods of time R frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge. R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient tem‐
peratures
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for sev‐
eral months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. # To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following rec‐
ommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.
# To avoid damage, please observe the following recommenda‐
tions when handling the high-voltage battery.
342
F295 0075 02
R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a
* NOTE long period. Otherwise the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery
Damage to the drive system when charging the high-voltage bat‐ cannot be monitored.
tery at extreme altitudes
The drive system may be damaged if the high-voltage battery is charged YOU CAN CONTRIBUTE TO REDUCING THE VEHICLE'S ENERGY CONSUMP‐
at elevations greater than 4,000 m above sea level. TION IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:
It may then no longer be possible to continue the journey. R An anticipatory driving style (/ page 323)
# Avoid charging processes at extreme altitudes. R Reduced use of electrical consumers
R Having the vehicle regularly serviced
RECOMMENDATIONS WHEN HANDLING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:

During the battery service life the charge time of the high-voltage battery may
R If the outside temperature is above 10 °C, park the vehicle overnight change.
with a state of charge below 20 % every six months.
R Rapid-charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) only % Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with
when required. one of the following vehicle sockets.
R Charge the high-voltage battery on average up to a state of charge of You can charge the high-voltage battery with both alternating
80 %. From a state of charge of 80 % the charge time increases signifi‐ current (mode 2/3) and direct current (mode 4).
cantly.
R In case of longer idle times, switch off the vehicle with a state of charge
of the high-voltage battery between 30 % and 50 %. Do not permanently
connect the high-voltage battery to a power supply.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for long periods, avoid high outside tempera‐
tures wherever possible.
R Check the high-voltage battery's state of charge every six weeks
(/ page 363).
R Make sure to charge the high-voltage battery if the state of charge is
below 20 %.
Combo 1 vehicle socket
343
F295 0075 02
Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's

charging cable, single-phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the different mains requirements of your current location when charg‐
ing. Only use charging cables which conform to the mains requirements. Con‐
sult a qualified electrician or your local mains operator if you have any ques‐
tions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or

charging station due to the higher charging capacity and better charging effi‐
ciency offered.
Combo 2 vehicle socket SYSTEM LIMITS

THE PERFORMANCE OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY MAY BE IMPAIRED
1 AC charging connection type 1 or type 2
BY THE FOLLOWING:
2 Socket extension for DC charging R high or low outside temperatures
R electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. oper‐
ating the air conditioning system
% When using a CCS charging cable (Combined Charging System)
for charging with direct current at a vehicle socket type Combo,
R extended idle periods without charging
both connections on the vehicle socket 1 and 2 are used for
charging. THE CHARGING TIME OR THE CHARGING POWER OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE
BATTERY MAY BE INCREASED BY THE FOLLOWING:
CHARGING OPTIONS FOR THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY (MODE 2, 3 OR 4): R high or low outside temperatures
R while driving by means of recuperation R a low or high state of charge of the high-voltage battery
R stationary AC charging: R the maximum available charging current of the charging device
- at a mains socket (mode 2) R the charging process settings in the multimedia system (/ page 364)
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
R Stationary DC charging:
- at a rapid-charging station (mode 4)
344
F295 0075 02
Storing the charging cable # Feed the loop end of retaining strap 2 through tie-down eye 3 in the
boot or load compartment.
Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided,
# Feed the end with the snap hook through the loop of retaining strap 2.
and secure the charging cable bag in the boot or load compartment with the
included retaining strap. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging
cable is not sufficiently secured.
# Tighten retaining strap 2 so that the knot around tie-down eye 3 is

Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load compartment
tight and secure.
# Hook the snap hook of retaining strap 2 in a tie-down eye of charging

As delivered, charging cable bag 1 with retaining strap 2 is located in the
cable bag 1.
boot or load compartment. To secure the charging cable bag, the retaining
strap must be attached to tie-down eye 3. Do not use bag hooks to attach
the retaining strap.
345
F295 0075 02
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at & DANGER

a mains socket (Mode 2) Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly
installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for
& DANGER
example.
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible
Charging System Pro # Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that:
If you use the Flexible Charing System Pro improperly, this may result
e.g. in fires or an electric shock. R Has been properly installed and
R Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
Charging Systems Pro. Otherwise risks may not be detected.
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with
the vehicle or an original Mercedes‑Benz charging cable.
# Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and

obtain advice there.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their

suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.
# Never use a damaged charging cable.
# Do not use:
R Extension cables
R Extension reels
R Multiple sockets
# Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to

the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has
346
F295 0075 02
been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at
the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle.
a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the
socket adapter.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
ONLY THE FOLLOWING CHARGING CABLES MAY BE USED: Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed
component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example.
R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
R A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle. # Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that:
R Has been properly installed and

The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The
R Has been inspected by a qualified electrician
charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket are
considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station.
# For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been
When doing so, always observe the local information. tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the
high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.
# Never use damaged charging cables.
DO NOT LIFT THE CONTROLS BY THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT PARTS:
# Do not extend the charging cable.
R the charging cable connector
R the mains plug # Do not use adapters.
# Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the

When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive wallbox.
heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise the charging process may be aborted.
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally availa‐

ble charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging
cable is stowed in a bag in the load compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufac‐
turer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
347
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at
Risk of fatal injury if damaged component parts are used a quick charging station (mode 4)
If you use a damaged component part to connect the vehicle to a
charging station, this may lead to e.g. a fire or electrocution.
& DANGER
# Visually inspect the charging station for obvious signs of dam‐ Risk of fatal injury if damaged component parts are used
age, e.g. serious damage to the housing or charging cable con‐ If you use a damaged component part to connect the vehicle to a
nection. charging station, this may lead to e.g. a fire or electrocution.
# Never use damaged charging cables. # Visually inspect the charging station for obvious signs of dam‐
age, e.g. serious damage to the housing or charging cable con‐
# Do not extend the charging cable. nection.
# Do not use adapters. The only exception is if the adapter has # Never use damaged charging cables.
been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not extend the charging cable.
# Be sure to observe the safety instructions on the charging sta‐
tion. # Do not use adapters. The only exception is if the adapter has
been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. # Be sure to observe the safety instructions on the charging sta‐
using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the operator's on-site tion.
instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge
(/ page 591).
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the & DANGER
charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐ the charging process
ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, e.g. owing During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
to heat build-up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that tem is under high voltage.
are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at
a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
process.
348
F295 0075 02
Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g.
using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the operator's on-site * NOTE
instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current
(/ page 591). If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the
external mains supply could overheat.
The charging cable for the vehicle must be no longer than 30 m due to the
legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of sig‐ # Ensure that the external mains supply has been designed to
nals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close handle the charging current provided.
proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable
may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if # For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with
this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery. the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle.
charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed
by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐ # Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and
ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, e.g. owing obtain advice there.
to heat build-up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that
are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at # Check the maximum charging current using the charging capa‐
a qualified specialist workshop. city shown in the driver's display.
Maximum permissible charging current for The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging
current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the per‐
charging at a mains socket mitted value for that country.
If you use the Mercedes-Benz Flexible Charging System Pro, the maximum
& DANGER charge current can be set for a specific country (see Owner's Manual for the
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible charging system).
Charging System Pro
# Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charg‐
e.g. in fires or an electric shock. ing current for the relevant mains socket or the building checked by a
qualified electrician.
# When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charging.
349
F295 0075 02
If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunc‐ 5 Temperature monitor display
tion, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Safety system display
MAINS CURRENT DISPLAY 3 POWER
Overview of the charging cable control panel Display Meaning
Lights up white There is supply voltage.

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible CHARGING PROCESS DISPLAY 4 CHARGING
Charging System Pro
Display Meaning
e.g. in fires or an electric shock. Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.
# Observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the Flexible TEMPERATURE MONITOR DISPLAY 5 TEMPERATURE
Display Meaning
Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over‐

Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following two mode 2 charging temperature – the charging power is reduced.
cables. The control panel of the respective mode 2 charging cable shows the The green LED does not flash: overtempera‐
current status of the charging process. ture – the charging process is stopped.
Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug – the

charging process is stopped.
1 Gen5 charging cable

2 Gen4 charging cable
3 Supply voltage indicator
4 Charging process display
350
F295 0075 02
SAFETY SYSTEM DISPLAY 6 FAULT replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist work‐
shop, depending on the readout.
Display Meaning
Flashes red Charging cable or internal malfunction –

Charging not possible Functions of the indicator lamp on the vehicle
Reset charging cable control panel (Gen5
charging cable 1) socket
Lights up red White LED is off: power supply malfunction – The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.
(Gen5 charging cable 1) charging process not possible, use a different
mains socket.
White LED is on: vehicle malfunction – charg‐
ing process not possible, reset the charging
cable control panel.
Lights up red Infrastructure malfunction – Charging process

(Gen4 charging cable 2) not possible, use a different mains socket
If the temperature monitor 5 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect

the charging cable from direct sunlight.
GEN4 CHARGING CABLE 2

If the charging cable control panel detects residual current or a malfunction,
Example: type Combo 2 vehicle socket
the charging process is interrupted. The charging process is resumed automat‐
ically when the malfunction has been rectified. The colour and signalling of status display 1 have the following meanings:
GEN5 CHARGING CABLE 1 LOCKING STATUS
When all four displays light up, the charging cable control panel is performing
a self-test. R Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked; insert or remove charging cable
R Flashes white: malfunction during locking or unlocking
Reset the Gen5 charging cable control panel: if the safety system 6 indi‐
cates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset the
charging cable control panel. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from CHARGING STATUS
the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five sec‐
onds. If the malfunction persists after the charging cable is reconnected, R Lights up blue (for approx. 90 s): charging process completed
charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be R Flashes blue: charging; active energy flow
351
F295 0075 02
R Lights up orange (for approx. 90 s): charging break

R Flashes orange: connection is being established & DANGER
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
R Flashes red (for approx. 90 s): malfunction in vehicle; charging not possi‐
ble The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: when the charging
orchestration is activated, the state of charge is also accentuated # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
by the ambient lighting (/ page 280).
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
ing over the cable.
Starting the alternating current charging proc‐ # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
ist workshop as soon as possible.
ess (mode 2/3)
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
socket.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries in case of improper handling of the Flexible
Charging System Pro
e.g. in fires or an electric shock.

352
F295 0075 02
* NOTE * NOTE
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐ to incorrect handling
ble limiting values during the charging process. Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging
R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact. cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on
the charging cable were observed.
Requirements
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked. R The transmission is in position j.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The vehicle has not been started. The õ symbol on the driver display
* NOTE
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open is off.
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
R The charging cable is not under tension.
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
socket from dirt and damage.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐ one of the following vehicle sockets.
ing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which
may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.
353
F295 0075 02
# Press on the centre rear of the socket flap 1.

The socket flap 1 swings open and the status display 2 lights up
white.
Vehicles with electric socket flap: If an obstacle stops the socket flap during
opening, the socket flap closes again automatically.
% When the vehicle is started (symbol õ on the driver display

lights up), the socket flap 1 cannot be opened.
Combo 1 vehicle socket % Only the upper connection 3 is required for the charging cable
plug.
# For charging at a mains socket insert the mains plug into the mains
socket of the external power source right to the stop.
# Flexible Charging System Pro: if necessary switch off protective earth

conductor detection and set maximum charging current (see the charg‐
ing system's operating instructions).
# Fully insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 3. If the
wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert
the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station
Combo 2 vehicle socket socket right to the stop.
Make sure that the inserted charging cable is not under tension.
# Open the socket flap 1 via the EQ module of the multimedia system
The status display 2 flashes orange, and blue as soon as the high-volt‐
(/ page 529).
age battery is being charged.
or
% If the charging orchestration for the ambient lighting is activated,
the ambient lighting lights up for about 30 seconds analogous to
the status display 2 (/ page 280).
354
F295 0075 02
When the Sound Experience is switched on, various situations,

such as plugging in the charging cable or the start of the charging
Ending the alternating current charging proc‐
process, are accentuated by selected sounds (/ page 702). ess (mode 2/3)
Vehicles with electric socket flap: If no charging cable is connected to the & DANGER
vehicle after opening the socket flap, the socket flap closes automatically after Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
about 60 seconds. The charging process uses high voltage.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
started or moved. aged, you could receive an electric shock.
At the start of the charging process, the state of charge indicator is shown on # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
the driver display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction is the
point in time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
ing over the cable.
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐ # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
tem may audibly switch on during the charging process. ist workshop as soon as possible.

% If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the socket.
mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged auto‐
matically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated
(e.g. pre-entry climate control).
355
F295 0075 02
* NOTE % Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with

Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port one of the following vehicle sockets.
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
ble limiting values during the charging process. COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE

R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact.

heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.
* NOTE # Press charging interruption button 2.

Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when vehicle socket is unlocked.
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐ % Alternatively, it is possible to unlock the vehicle with the vehicle
ing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which key in order to end the charging process, but only if charging
may prevent the socket flap from being opened again. interruption button 2 is not functioning. To do so, press the
Ü button once on the vehicle key. When status display 1
lights up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for approx. 30 sec‐
Requirements onds.

between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. # Press and hold button 3 on the charging cable plug and remove the
charging cable plug from the vehicle socket.
356
F295 0075 02
interruption button 2 is not functioning. To do so, press the

% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, repeat the unlock‐ Ü button once on the vehicle key. When status display 1
ing procedure. If the charging cable plug is still locked, contact a lights up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for approx. 30 sec‐
qualified specialist workshop. onds.
# Close the socket flap. # Remove the charging cable plug3 from the vehicle socket.
For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the notes at the end of
the section.
# Remove the charging cable plug from the mains socket, or from the % If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, repeat the unlock‐
socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging ing procedure. If the charging cable plug is still locked, contact a
cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 345). qualified specialist workshop.
COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET

% Status display 1 remains lit for some time after the charging
cable plug has been removed and then goes out.
# Close the socket flap.

For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the following notes on
closing the socket flap.
# Remove the charging cable plug from the mains socket, or from the
socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging
cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 345).
THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOW‐
# Press charging interruption button 2. ING SITUATIONS:
The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The
R shortly after the charging cable plug has been removed
vehicle socket is unlocked.
R after the socket flap has been tapped in the closing direction
R after transmission position i, h or k has been engaged
% Alternatively, it is possible to unlock the vehicle with the vehicle
key in order to end the charging process, but only if charging
357
F295 0075 02
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP

If an obstacle impedes the electrical socket flap while it is closing, the socket * NOTE
flap will open again automatically. Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
# When closing the socket flap, make sure that no body parts or objects
ble limiting values during the charging process.
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE
Starting the direct current charging process
(mode 4) R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact.
& DANGER
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket # If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
* NOTE
# Only use an undamaged charging cable. Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐ there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
ing over the cable. socket from dirt and damage.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐ # Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐
ist workshop as soon as possible. ing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which
socket.
358
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
to incorrect handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging

cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements
R The transmission is in position j.

R The vehicle has not been started. The õ symbol on the driver display
is off.
R The charging cable is not under tension.
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with

one of the following vehicle sockets.
# Open the socket flap 1 via the EQ module of the multimedia system
(/ page 529).
or
359
F295 0075 02
# Press on the centre rear of the socket flap 1. Vehicles with electric socket flap: If no charging cable is connected to the
The socket flap 1 swings open and the status display 2 lights up vehicle after opening the socket flap, the socket flap closes automatically after
white. about 60 seconds.
Vehicles with electric socket flap: If an obstacle stops the socket flap during
When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be
opening, the socket flap closes again automatically.
started or moved.
% When the vehicle is started (symbol õ on the driver display At the start of the charging process, the state of charge indicator is shown on
the driver display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction is the
lights up), the socket flap 1 cannot be opened.
point in time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.
# Open the socket cover 4 from the lower connection of the vehicle
% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐
socket 3 until it clicks into place.
tem may audibly switch on during the charging process.
% For the CCS charging cable plug, both connections of the vehicle % If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the
socket 3 are required.
mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged auto‐
matically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated
# Fully insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket 3. (e.g. pre-entry climate control).
Make sure that the inserted charging cable is not under tension.
The status display 2 flashes orange, and blue as soon as the high-volt‐
age battery is being charged.
% If the charging orchestration for the ambient lighting is activated,

the ambient lighting lights up for about 30 seconds analogous to
the status display 2 (/ page 280).
When the Sound Experience is switched on, various situations,
such as plugging in the charging cable or the start of the charging
process, are accentuated by selected sounds (/ page 702).
360
F295 0075 02
Ending the direct current charging process * NOTE

(mode 4) Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
ble limiting values during the charging process.
& DANGER
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE
The charging process uses high voltage. PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐ R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact.
aged, you could receive an electric shock. R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on
# Only use an undamaged charging cable.
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
ing over the cable.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐

ist workshop as soon as possible.
* NOTE
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
socket. # Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before clos‐
ing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which
Requirements

361
F295 0075 02
# Press and hold button 3 on the charging cable plug and remove the
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with charging cable plug from the vehicle socket.
one of the following vehicle sockets.
The hinged socket cover swings up and seals the lower connection on
the vehicle socket.
COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET
% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, unlock the vehicle
and repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable plug is
still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the notes at the end of
# Press charging interruption button 2. the section.
The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET
vehicle socket is unlocked.

Ü button once on the vehicle key. When status display 1
lights up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for approx. 30 sec‐
onds.
362
F295 0075 02
# Press charging interruption button 2. THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOW‐
The charging process is ended. Status display 1 lights up white. The ING SITUATIONS:
vehicle socket is unlocked. R shortly after the charging cable plug has been removed
R after the socket flap has been tapped in the closing direction
R after transmission position i, h or k has been engaged
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP
If an obstacle impedes the electrical socket flap while it is closing, the socket
Ü button once on the vehicle key. When status display 1 flap will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function serves
lights up white, the vehicle socket is unlocked for approx. 30 sec‐ solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
onds.
# When closing the socket flap, make sure that no body parts or objects
# Remove the charging cable plug 3 from the vehicle socket.
The hinged socket cover swings up and seals the lower connection on
the vehicle socket. Function of the charge level display in the
driver display
% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, unlock the vehicle
and repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable plug is % The data in the illustration is shown as an example.
still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the following notes on
closing the socket flap. 1 Remaining range at current state of charge
2 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
3 Maximum state of charge (as per the setting)
363
F295 0075 02
4 Expected end of charge or remaining time until fully charged (up to the OPENING AND CLOSING THE SOCKET FLAP USING THE MBUX MULTIME‐
selected maximum state of charge). DIA SYSTEM
5 State of charge recommended by the range assistant to reach the next # Open socket flap to open the socket flap.
destination
6 Dynamic charge level display
# Press Cancel charging to end the charging process and unlock the charg‐
ing cable.
7 Current charging power
# Press Close socket flap to close the socket flap. The socket flap also
% The indicated remaining range 1 may vary due to various fac‐ closes automatically when the transmission is shifted out of position j.
tors, e.g.driving style or topography. The socket flap also closes automatically after one minute if it has been
opened, but no plug has been inserted, and ten to fifteen seconds after
the plug has been removed.
When the vehicle is switched off and connected to the mains supply, the
driver display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.
% Closing the socket flap via the MBUX multimedia system is only
available on vehicles with an electric socket flap.
% The value of current charging power 7 can differ from the dis‐
play on the charging station. At a charging power of 10 kW or
higher, the value in the charge level display is rounded off and % Further notes on charging with alternating current: (/ page 352)
shown without a decimal place.
or direct current: (/ page 358).
The value in 4 varies depending on the setting of the charging process. It dis‐
UNLOCKING THE CHARGING CABLE (MODE 3 OR 4)
plays the charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge level
will be reached or the state of charge at the pre-selected departure time.
% When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when
the maximum state of charge is reached.
Configuring the charging settings
Multimedia system:
# Select Home or Work.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Charging # Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
SETTING THE CHARGING PROGRAMME ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING LOCATION-BASED CHARGING
# Select Home, Work or Standard. # Select Charging program, home or Charging program, work.
364
F295 0075 02
# Activate or deactivate Select based on location. SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME

The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control
When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the
of the selected options. The charging programme is automatically switched time selected.
when arriving at the address again.
DC charging: the charging process always starts without delay.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ECO CHARGING
# Activate or deactivate the function. AC charging: if the ECO charging function is activated, the charging process
pauses and is resumed as late as possible depending on the set state of
The ECO charge function limits the charging current at charging stations to charge. The charging process is time-based.
conserve the vehicle's battery.
# Select Departure time.
SWITCHING THE BATTERY PRETEMPERING ON OR OFF THE FOLLOWING CHARGING TIMES CAN BE SELECTED:
# Select Battery pretempering.
R individual charging times
# Activate or deactivate the function. R a Week profile
When driving to a charging station guided by the navigation system, the tem‐ SETTING AN INDIVIDUAL DEPARTURE TIME
perature of the high-voltage battery is controlled in advance so that an opti‐ # Select Add new time and set a new departure time.
mum charging experience can be realised. In the central display the active
advance temperature control of the battery is displayed with . The display or
disappears when the temperature level is reached, when the driver interrupts
navigation guidance or when the charging plug is inserted.
# Select ´ and adapt an existing departure time.
SETTING REPEAT DAYS
% If the battery has to be pretempered, this has consequences for
# Select Add new time and set a new departure time.
the remaining range of the vehicle. When using the Electric Intel‐ # Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time should apply
ligence Navigation the pretempering is taken into account in the
and confirm with a.
energy prognosis. Further information on Navigation with Electric
Intelligence(/ page 588) or
# Select ´ and edit existing repeat days.
365
F295 0075 02
SETTING A BREAK IN THE CHARGING PROCESS (ALTERNATING CURRENT

ONLY)
Up to four interruptions in the charging process can be set during which the
vehicle is not charged, even if it is connected to a charging station.
# Select Charging interruptions.
# Select Add new time and then set and save the times for the beginning
and end of the interruption.
# Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that have been set.
Set charging breaks can be edited with the ´ button or deleted with the
E button.
366
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Parking
Parking
Parking the vehicle & WARNING

& WARNING cle
Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
vehicle rolling away IN PARTICULAR
If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an
uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.
# apply the parking brake. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
# Switch the transmission to position j.
367
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
* NOTE
Damage caused by vehicle being lowered
Vehicles AIRMATIC: The vehicle can be lowered due to differences in
temperature or extended non-operational times. This can cause damage
to parts of the body. Vehicles with central display
# When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure
that there are no obstacles such as kerbs under or in the
immediate vicinity of the body.
% IF YOU PARK THE VEHICLE FOR A LONG PERIOD, OBSERVE

THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R Make sure the high-voltage battery has a sufficient state of

charge, especially at very low outside temperatures. That
way, you can avoid any problems when you subsequently
start the vehicle. Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen
R If possible, avoid parking spaces in direct sunlight.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery # On inclines, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the
(/ page 342). kerb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake.
368
F295 0075 02
# Engage transmission position j when the vehicle is stationary and the Requirements
brake pedal is depressed (/ page 339).
R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of
# Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1. movement of the door.
R The vehicle is switched on.
# Release the service brake slowly.
R The vehicle is not in õ (/ page 316).
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
% The garage door opener is always available when the vehicle is

% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side win‐
switched on.
dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four
minutes if the driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener

PROGRAMMING BUTTONS FOR THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER
& WARNING
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program.
if they stand within its range of movement.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the
garage door's movement.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes
yellow.
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the
garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
369
F295 0075 02
# Release the previously pressed button. SYNCHRONISING THE ROLLING CODE

Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
& WARNING
# Point the remote control 5 from a distance of between 1 cm and 8 cm Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
towards button 1, 2 or 3. garage door
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
signals appears: door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is
complete. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the
R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Programming was successful. garage door's movement.
Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door sys‐
tem must be carried out.
# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the process. garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
Requirements
# Release all of the buttons.
R The door system uses a rolling code.
% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.
scope of delivery for the garage door opener. R The vehicle, as well as persons and objects are located outside the range
of movement of the door.

switched on.
370
F295 0075 02
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

switched on.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit.

Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the # Check whether the transmitter frequency of the remote control 5 is
door closes. supported.
When the door closes, programming is completed. # Replace the batteries in the remote control 5.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Hold the remote control 5 at various angles in front of the inside mirror
from a distance of between 1 cm and 8 cm. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL
# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front
& WARNING of the inside mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 sec‐
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a onds before trying another position.
garage door
# Press the button 6 on the remote control 5 again before transmission
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
ends on remote controls that transmit only for a limited period.
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement. # Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote
control.
371
F295 0075 02
% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using % The garage door opener is always available when the vehicle is
the remote control in the inside mirror, even after you have suc‐ switched on.
cessfully performed the measures described above. In this case,
contact the HomeLink® Hotline.
% SUPPORT AND ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING INFORMATION:
R from the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 0800 046 635 465 or

+49 (0) 7132 3455 733 (chargeable)
R online at https://www.homelink.com
OPENING OR CLOSING THE GARAGE DOOR
& WARNING # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
# If the indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press
garage door
the previously pressed button again and hold pressed until the door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage opens or closes.
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement. CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER MEMORY
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the WARNING
&
garage door's movement. Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
Requirements
R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.
372
F295 0075 02
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
Electric parking brake
FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (AUTOMATIC APPLICA‐
% The garage door opener is always available when the vehicle is TION)
switched on.
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR


# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. R start the vehicle.
The entire memory has been deleted.
373
F295 0075 02
THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED IF THE TRANSMISSION IS IN R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator
POSITION J AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED: pedal, or you shift from transmission position j to h or k on level
R The vehicle is switched off. ground.
R The driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is opened. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed.
R The driver's seat belt is not properly fastened.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened, the following condition must be
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking met:
brake (/ page 375).
- You shift from transmission position j.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS

When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the
ALSO APPLIED:
driver display goes out.
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- The vehicle is switched off.
- The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
- There is a system malfunction.
- The power supply is insufficient.
- The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the red indicator lamp ! lights
up on the driver display.
FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (AUTOMATIC RELEASE)

THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED WHEN THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED:
R The driver's door is closed.

R The vehicle has been started.
374
F295 0075 02
APPLYING/RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE MANUALLY APPLYING
& WARNING
cle
IN PARTICULAR

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN # Push handle 1.
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver display.
R change the gearbox setting. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red !
indicator lamp is lit continuously.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. RELEASING

375
F295 0075 02
# Switch on the vehicle. YOU WILL RECEIVE INFORMATION ABOUT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:
# Pull handle 1. R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
The red ! indicator lamp in the driver display goes out. R The force of the impact.
EMERGENCY BRAKING
THE FOLLOWING SITUATION CAN LEAD TO INADVERTENT ACTIVATION:
R For example, the parked vehicle is moved to a two-storey garage.
% Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent accidental activation.

If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will
also be deactivated.
You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multi‐
SYSTEM LIMITS
# Press and hold handle 1.
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is
displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. R the vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp lights up on the driver dis‐ R an impact occurs at low speed
play. R the electric parking brake is not applied
Information on collision detection for a % You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your
parked vehicle vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.
Suppose a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection

is switched on, and the collision detection is switched on. In that case, when
the vehicle is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia sys‐
tem.
376
F295 0075 02
Setting collision detection for a parked vehi‐ COPYING THE COLLISION PHOTOS TO A USB FLASH DRIVE
Connect a USB flash drive (/ page 679).
cle
#
# Select Manage collision photos.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection # Select Copy (USB).
# Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification. All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.
% A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos % Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices to
are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the ensure secure operation.
photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not
been deleted already. DELETING COLLISION PHOTOS
# Select Manage collision photos.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE COLLISION PHOTOS FUNCTION
Please note that legal restrictions regarding automatic recording of the vehicle
# Select Delete.
surroundings may be in place in certain countries. All collision photos are deleted.
# Activate or deactivate Collision photos.

TRANSFERRING THE COLLISION PHOTOS WITH THE MERCEDES ME APP
# Select Upload collision photos.
or
# Select Upload automatically.
# Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes
me app.
The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.
% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the colli‐
sion photos in the Mercedes me app.
377
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, park‐
ing and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are
not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not
relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is
always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to
the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of
the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your
driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
% Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previ‐ 1 Multifunction camera
ously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when chang‐ 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors
ing drivers. 3 Front radar
4 Front camera
5 Corner radars
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras 6 Ultrasonic sensors
7 Reversing camera
Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultra‐
sonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.
378
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Overview of driving systems and driving
Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi‐ safety systems
cle sensors and cameras
R ABS (/ page 381)
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or
dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. R BAS (/ page 381)
There is a risk of an accident. R ESP® (/ page 382)
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any R ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (/ page 383)
obstructions and clean. R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 385)
# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 385)
in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a quali‐ R EBD (/ page 387)
fied specialist workshop. R STEER CONTROL steering assistance system (/ page 387)
R HOLD function (/ page 387)
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or R Hill Start Assist (/ page 389)
slush (/ page 720). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 389)
detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
R Valet Service Mode (/ page 389)
number plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, car foils or rock chip protec‐
tion films in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure there R Beginner Driver Mode (/ page 390)
are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 391)
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have R Cruise control (/ page 393)
the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have R Limiter (/ page 393)
damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win‐ R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 419)
dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 423)
R Traffic light view (/ page 428)
% The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for
R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 435)
the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image
on the display. R AIRMATIC (/ page 435)
R AMG RIDE CONTROL + (/ page 437)
R RACE START (/ page 440)
379
F295 0075 02
DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE R Reversing camera (/ page 442)

R 360° camera (/ page 444)
% The availability of some functions or partial functions of the Driv‐ R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)
ing Assistance Package depends on the equipment or country. R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453)
The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from
the functions listed here.
R Remote Parking Assist (/ page 459)
The functions Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, Active Blind R Memory Parking Assist (/ page 467)
Spot Assist, Active Brake Assist, Active Lane Keeping Assist and R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (/ page 471)
Active Emergency Stop Assist are, with restricted functions, also
available without Driving Assistance Package.
Information about the AMG DYNAMIC PLUS
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396) package
R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 403)
R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 403) % The AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package is on-demand equipment
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 414) (/ page 101).
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 405)
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 408)
* NOTE
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 409)
Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 405)
Driving at increased maximum design speed is only approved for a spe‐
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning cific types of tyres.
(/ page 428)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432)
# Before using the functions, observe the information on
approved tyre types. You could otherwise fail to recognise
R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 135) dangers.
PARKING PACKAGE
You will find the information on the approved tyre types in the "Wheels and
% The availability of individual functions depends on country and tyres" section“ (/ page 759).
equipment.
380
F295 0075 02
THE AMG DYNAMIC PLUS PACKAGE INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐

TIONS:
Function of BAS
R Raising of the maximum design speeds (/ page 848)
& WARNING
R RACE START with boost function (/ page 440) Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist
R Additional Performance Sound Experience for a particularly sporty driv‐ System)
ing experience(/ page 703) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking
situation is increased.
Function of ABS # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking
situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) REGULATES THE BRAKE PRESSURE
IN CRITICAL DRIVING SITUATIONS:
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with
R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is additional brake force.
insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. IF YOU DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL QUICKLY, BAS IS ACTIVATED:
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
SYSTEM LIMITS The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is
R ABS is active from speeds of approximately 5 km/h. deactivated.
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred
and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the
vehicle is started.
381
F295 0075 02
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:
FUNCTION OF ESP® R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
R Do not deactivate ESP®.
& WARNING
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when starting
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
off.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.
TO IMPROVE TRACTION, ESP® CAN BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. SITUATIONS:
R When using snow chains.

THE ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®) CAN MONITOR AND R In deep snow.
IMPROVE DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
R On sand or gravel.
TIONS WITHIN PHYSICAL LIMITS:
R When starting off on wet or slippery roads.

R When braking. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction.
IF THE VEHICLE DEVIATES FROM THE DIRECTION DESIRED BY THE

DRIVER, ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOL‐ If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a
LOWING WAYS: malfunction.
R One or more wheels are braked. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

R The drive system output is adapted according to the situation. R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 928)
WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED, THE Å WARNING LAMP LIGHTS UP CON‐ R Display messages (/ page 856)
TINUOUSLY:
ETS/4ETS
R Driving stability will no longer be improved. ETS/4ETS traction control (Electronic Traction System) is part of ESP® and
R The drive wheels could spin. makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
382
F295 0075 02
ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING
THE FOLLOWING WAYS: WAYS:
R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R One or more wheels are braked.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. R The drive system output is adapted according to the situation.
INFLUENCE OF DRIVE PROGRAMMES ON ESP®

The drive programmes enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road ESP® is activated every time the vehicle is started regardless of whether ESP®
conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. SPORT or ESP® OFF was selected before the engine was switched off.
(/ page 333)Depending on the selected drive programme, the appropriate
WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS
ESP® mode will be activated.
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:
FUNCTION OF ESP® (MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES) R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather condi‐
YOU CAN SELECT BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING MODES OF THE ELEC‐ tions.
TRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®): R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances.
R ESP® ON R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when starting off.
R ESP® SPORT CHARACTERISTICS OF ESP® SPORT
R ESP® OFF
& WARNING
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS ACTIVATED
Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
ESP® MONITORS AND IMPROVES DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION,
PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding
and having an accident.
R When starting off on wet or slippery carriageways.
# Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described
R When braking.
below.
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer operation from speeds of 65 km/h,
if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to side.
R When there is a strong crosswind from 80 km/h When ESP® SPORT is selected, the warning lamps å and Æ light up con‐
tinuously.
Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned-off roads.
383
F295 0075 02
Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactivated requires an extremely quali‐ DEACTIVATING ESP® HAS THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:
fied and experienced driver.
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
If ESP® SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ R The drive wheels could spin.
warning lamp flashes. ESP® then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
ESP® SPORT ALSO HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS: R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combina‐
tion is no longer active.
R ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
R The power of the drive system is only slightly limited according to the
situation and the drive wheels can spin. % Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP®
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction when braking hard.
on loose surfaces.
R ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied. IT MAY BE BEST TO ACTIVATE ESP® SPORT OR DEACTIVATE ESP® IN THE
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combina‐ FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
tion is no longer active.
R When using snow chains.
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
R In deep snow.
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED R On sand or gravel.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

% Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no lon‐
ger apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
When ESP® is switched off, the warning lamps å and ¤ light up continu‐ if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
ously.
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a

malfunction.
384
F295 0075 02
OBSERVE THE DISPLAY MESSAGES AND INDICATOR AND WARNING FUNCTION OF ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION
LAMPS WHICH ARE DISPLAYED:
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 928) & WARNING

Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot
ETS/4ETS (ELECTRONIC TRACTION SYSTEM) prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this.
ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN # Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and
THE FOLLOWING WAYS: weather conditions.
R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.

R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. WHEN DRIVING WITH A TRAILER, ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION CAN STA‐
BILISE YOUR VEHICLE IF THE TRAILER BEGINS TO SWERVE FROM SIDE
FUNCTION OF ESP® CROSSWIND ASSIST TO SIDE:
ESP® CROSSWIND ASSIST DETECTS SUDDEN GUSTS OF SIDE WIND AND R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h .
HELPS THE DRIVER TO KEEP THE VEHICLE IN THE LANE:
R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake appli‐
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. cation on one side.
80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R In the event of severe swerving, the drive system output is also reduced
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one and all wheels are braked.
side.
ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNC‐
TION IF:
R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the

vehicle.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ESP® (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)

Multimedia system:
4© 5ß 5y
# Select ESP.
385
F295 0075 02
# Select On or Off. R å (yellow): ESP® SPORT

R å (red): ESP® OFF
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously
on the driver display.
# To set ESP® SPORT: briefly press button 2 when ESP® is activated.
Observe the information on the warning lamps and the display messages
which may be shown on the driver display. The road in the å button symbol lights up yellow.
The å and Æ warning lamps appear on the driver display.
ADJUSTING ESP® WITH THE STEERING- WHEEL BUTTON
# To deactivate ESP® : set ESP® SPORT then press and hold the button 2.
% You can also adjust ESP® via the multimedia system The road in the å button symbol lights up red.
(/ page 386). The å and ¤ warning lamps appear on the driver display.
# To activate® ESP: briefly press button 2 when ESP® SPORT is selected

or ESP® is deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up blue.
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out.
When the ÷ symbol is shown with a red ! on the display button, ESP® is
malfunctioning. Observe the information on warning lamps and display mes‐
sages which are shown on the driver display.
# To adjust ESP®: press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until
it displays the å symbol. ADJUSTING ESP® IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM (MERCEDES-AMG VEHI‐
CLES)
Multimedia system:
% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 329).
% Depending on the equipment, the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu
can also be accessed via the AMG button in the centre console.
THE ROAD COLOUR OF THE Å BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CUR‐
RENT SETTING:
ESP is always activate when the engine is started. The road in the å button
R å (blue): ESP® ON symbol lights up blue.
386
F295 0075 02
# To engage ESP® SPORT: when ESP® is activated, briefly press å to THIS STEERING RECOMMENDATION IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
change to the Sport programme. TIONS:
The road in the å button symbol lights up yellow. R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road sur‐
face when you brake
# Switch off ESP® : engage the programme ESP® SPORT and press and hold
å to switch off ESP®. R the vehicle starts to skid
The road in the å button symbol lights up red. The å and ¤ SYSTEM LIMITS
warning lamps appear on the driver display. STEER CONTROL MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING SITUATIONS:
# Switch onESP® : in ESP® SPORT or when ESP® is switched off, briefly
press å. R ESP® is deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up blue. R ESP® is malfunctioning.
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out. R The steering is malfunctioning.
% You can also set ESP® via the steering-wheel buttons If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the power steering.
(/ page 386).
HOLD function
Function of EBD HOLD FUNCTION
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to
ELECTRONIC BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) IS CHARACTERISED BY
depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
THE FOLLOWING:
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
standing still remains with the driver.
R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.
SYSTEM LIMITS
The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is
Function of STEER CONTROL not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when
stationary.
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the
steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. R The gradient must not be greater than 30 %.
387
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION or
WARNING
# Depress the brake pedal until ë disappears from the driver display.
&
Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when THE HOLD FUNCTION IS ALSO DEACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
you leave the vehicle TIONS:
IF THE VEHICLE IS ONLY BRAKED WITH THE HOLD FUNCTION IT R The parking position j is engaged.
COULD, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ROLL AWAY:
R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE VEHICLE IS HELD BY THE PARKING
pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. POSITION J AND/OR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE:
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
leave it. R The vehicle is switched off.
R There is a system malfunction.
Requirements R The power supply is insufficient.
R The vehicle is stationary. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly.

R The driver's door is closed or the driver is correctly belted. The HOLD function is deactivated.
# Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.
R The electric parking brake has been released.
R The transmission position h, k or i is engaged.
ACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

# Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further
until the ë display appears on the driver display.
# Release the brake pedal.

DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION
# Depress the accelerator pedal to start off.
388
F295 0075 02
Function of Hill Start Assist Valet service mode

FUNCTION OF THE VALET SERVICE MODE
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.
# Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator In valet service mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to reduce the risk of
pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill damage to and improper use of the vehicle when it is handed over to third par‐
Start Assist. ties.
VALET SERVICE MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:

HILL START ASSIST HOLDS THE VEHICLE FOR A SHORT TIME WHEN
STARTING OFF UPHILL UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: R Power output is reduced.
R In principle, a maximum speed of 80 km/h can be reached.
R The transmission position h or k for starting off uphill is selected.
R The sporty drive programs and the drive program = are not available.
R The electric parking brake has been released.
R ESP® cannot be deactivated.
R Profiles that are still logged in are logged out and unprotected profiles
This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the are secured.
accelerator pedal and depress it without the vehicle rolling away immediately.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING VALET SERVICE MODE
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights Requirements:
R For activation: the vehicle is at a standstill.

ADAPTIVE BRAKE LIGHTS WARN FOLLOWING TRAFFIC IN AN EMER‐
GENCY BRAKING SITUATION WITH THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS: R For deactivation: the park position j is selected.
R flashing the brake lamps

Multimedia system:
R activating the hazard warning lights (/ page 60)
4 © 5 Apps 5 Valet service mode
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps
flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more
noticeable warning.
389
F295 0075 02
# Activate or deactivate the function. ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BEGINNER DRIVER MODE

If the valet service mode is activated, an indicator lamp lights up on the Requirements:
driver display.
R For activation: the vehicle is at a standstill.
% The valet service mode is protected against deactivation by a R For deactivation: the park position j is selected.
third party only in conjunction with Mercedes me connect. If the
vehicle is linked to Mercedes me connect, only the profile that Multimedia system:
has activated the mode or the specified main user can deactivate 4 © 5 Apps 5 Beginner driver mode
it again.

% The valet service mode remains active in case of a profile change
or if the vehicle is switched on or off and must be consciously # Activate or deactivate the function.
switched off by the authorised users.
If the beginner driver mode is activated, an indicator lamp lights up on
the driver display.
Beginner driver mode % The beginner driver mode is protected against deactivation by a
third party only in conjunction with Mercedes me connect. If the
FUNCTION OF THE BEGINNER DRIVER MODE
vehicle is linked to Mercedes me connect, only the profile that
has activated the mode or the specified main user can deactivate
% This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 101). it again.
In beginner driver mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to increase safety

for inexperienced drivers. % The beginner driver mode remains active in case of a profile
change or if the vehicle is switched on or off and must be con‐
BEGINNER DRIVER MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING: sciously switched off by the authorised users.
R Power output is reduced.

R In principle, a maximum speed of 120 km/h can be reached.
R The sporty drive programs and drive program = are not available.
R ESP® cannot be deactivated.
390
F295 0075 02
ATTENTION ASSIST If the driver display shows a warning, the multimedia system offers to search
for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area.
FUNCTION OF ATTENTION ASSIST
When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched
on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
% Depending on the respective country and equipment, ATTEN‐
TION ASSIST features a microsleep detection sub-function. This
function is only available in conjunction with the driver camera
on the driver display (/ page 553).
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motor‐

ways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break.
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
ATTENTION ASSIST serves solely as an aid. It cannot always promptly detect
fatigue or lapses in concentration. The system is not a substitute for a well- R journey time since the last break
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular, timely breaks to R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:
allow for adequate recovery. - The more segments 2 of the circle displayed, the higher the
detected attention level.
YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN TWO SETTINGS:
- Fewer segments 2 are displayed in the circle as the attention
R Standard: normal system sensitivity. level decreases.
R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the R Microsleep detection status 1 P:
attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. - Grey: Switched on, but will not issue a warning.
- Green: Switched on and will issue a warning.
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the driver display - Deactivated: Display is hidden.
shows the warning: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!. You can acknowledge the
message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTEN‐ MICROSLEEP DETECTION
TION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will If the system detects signs of microsleep using the driver camera, the warning
be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. message ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! appears on the driver dis‐
play and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warning message must
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and therefore be confirmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break
cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. immediately.
391
F295 0075 02
If the driver does not react to the microsleep warning, an emergency stop can MICROSLEEP DETECTION WILL ALSO NOT FUNCTION IF THE DRIVER
be initiated by the system (/ page 408). CAMERA CANNOT DETECT THE DRIVER'S EYES, FOREXAMPLE AS A
RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
SYSTEM LIMITS
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. R The driver's eyes are covered due to the steering column position,
forexample.
The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 20 km/h and R Poor lighting conditions.
above.
R Certain types of spectacles or sunglasses.
If the system is unavailable due to a fault, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision.
lamp Û lights up continuously on the driver display.
FUNCTIONALITY OF ATTENTION ASSIST IS RESTRICTED, AND WARNINGS Observe also the information pertaining to display messages shown on the
MAY BE DELAYED OR NOT ISSUED AT ALL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐ driver display.
TIONS IN PARTICULAR:
THE ATTENTION ASSIST DROWSINESS OR ALERTNESS ASSESSMENT IS
R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes RESET AND RESTARTED WHEN CONTINUING THE JOURNEY IN THE FOL‐
LOWING SITUATIONS:
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes)
R If there is a strong side wind R You switch off the vehicle.
R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of R You unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change
acceleration) drivers or take a break).
R If the Active Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is active SETTING ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
R If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance
R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving sit‐
5 ATTENTION ASSIST
uations.
R If ESP® is not available SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
# Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
# Select Standard or Sensitive.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE MICROSLEEP WARNING
# Activate or deactivate Microsleep warning.
392
F295 0075 02
Cruise control and limiter This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
FUNCTION OF CRUISE CONTROL
DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.
R in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in
Forexample, the stored speed is not deleted if you accelerate to overtake. If
heavy traffic, on winding roads
you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise con‐
trol will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose trac‐
tion and the vehicle could then begin skidding.
You can set any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed, up to R when visibility is poor
the speed recommended by range monitoring or up to the set winter tyre limit.
FUNCTION OF THE LIMITER
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 378). speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed YOU CAN LIMIT THE SPEED AS FOLLOWS:
of 250 km/h.
R Variable: for short-term limitation of the driving speed, e.g. in built-up
DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY areas
h Grey: cruise control is selected but not yet active or temporarily in R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode
passive mode.
h Green: cruise control is active. You can set any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up
to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is
A stored speed is shown below the display h and is indicated in the speed‐ stationary if the vehicle has been started.
ometer. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 378).
SYSTEM LIMITS
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: The limiter is available up to a maximum speed of
The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. 250 km/h.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you must increase recuperation in good DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
time. This is particularly important when driving a laden vehicle. The electric M Grey: variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.
motor's braking effect can thus be used to charge the high-voltage battery.
393
F295 0075 02
M Flashing grey: variable limiter is temporarily in passive mode. R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
M Green: variable limiter is activated.
R Cruise control is selected.
A stored speed is shown below the display M and is indicated in the speed‐
ometer. VARIABLE LIMITER
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the R The variable limiter is selected.
variable limiter switches to passive mode. The M passive message appears
in the driver display and the indicator M starts flashing.
THE VARIABLE LIMITER IS REACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐

TIONS:
R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.

R If the stored speed is called up.
R If you store a new speed.
OPERATING CRUISE CONTROL OR THE VARIABLE LIMITER
& WARNING Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter
Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current J Adopts the stored/detected speed
speed, the vehicle decelerates. ± Deactivates cruise control/variable limiter
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease speed
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the
stored speed. h Selects cruise control
M Selects the variable limiter
Requirements Operating cruise control and the variable limiter:
CRUISE CONTROL
# Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe across the
control panel.
R The transmission is in position h.
394
F295 0075 02
Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter: # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of the
control panel 1.
# To select cruise control: press h.
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
# To select the variable limiter: press M. # To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of the
control panel 1.
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable lim‐
iter is selected by a different button (/ page 399). or
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter:

# Briefly press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten
# Press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1. (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h).
The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle via
cruise control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. or
or # Press and hold ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.

The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten,
# Press J. and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h.
The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle via
cruise control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. or
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
speed is stored.
# Press ® on the control panel 1.
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist % When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you can‐
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is not increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of
deleted. 1 km/h.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed: Adopting a detected speed:
395
F295 0075 02
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detec‐ The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown
ted a traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in and the driven speed remains below the set speed.
the driver display:
SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT FOR WINTER TYRES
# Press J. Multimedia system:
The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Winter tyre limit
the vehicle maintains, or does not exceed this speed. # Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
SETTING A SPEED
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter: # Select Winter tyre limit.
# Press ±. # Selecting a speed.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control

is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist % The Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC described for vehicles
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is without the Driving Assistance Package is an on-demand feature
deleted. (country-dependent) (/ page 101).
INFORMATION ON THE PERMANENT LIMITER Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing
If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter roads. If vehicles are detected ahead the set distance is maintained, if neces‐
tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. sary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes
depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed.
You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the mul‐
timedia system (/ page 55). The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the
steering wheel.
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears on the driver's display.
When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you AVAILABLE SPEED RANGE:
switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle
R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 160 km/h
has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.
396
F295 0075 02
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can
automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 sec‐
% The adjustable set speed may differ if a speed limit (e.g. winter onds if the system detects that the driver is touching the steering wheel. If a
tyre limit) is stored . critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, suchas a
person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning indicates that the
driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any
further.
% If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the range mon‐
itor recommends a lower driving speed, this is automatically Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
adopted as the new set speed. If necessary, the set speed can wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 378).
be increased again manually.
OTHER FEATURES OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:
R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program

R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is
switched on to change to the overtaking lane
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
Notification on the driver display in the Assistance menu
- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges
(except bicycles and motorcycles) 1 Vehicle in front
- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways 2 Distance indicator
or multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-depend‐
3 Set specified distance
ent)
The vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the
lane to the right of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to over‐
% In the Active Distance Assist menu, it is possible to set the driv‐ take on the left, for example, on UK motorways.
ing mode of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on
PERMANENT STATUS DISPLAY
the selected drive program, the driving behaviour is energy-sav‐
ç Grey: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active
ing, comfortable or dynamic (/ page 404).
ç Green speedometer, grey vehicle: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC active, speed set
397
F295 0075 02
ç Green: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detec‐ R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi‐
ted ents.
R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highligh‐
ted in the speedometer. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC's status display is In addition, one or more wheels may lose grip due to braking or acceleration
greyed out when in passive mode. on smooth or slippery roads, and the vehicle may begin skidding. If ESP® inter‐
venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the ascertained target speed due to the
route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the speed‐ Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
ometer light up.
If you increase or decrease the set specified distance 3, the h display & WARNING
appears briefly. Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
% The green vehicle symbol ç is displayed cyclically when the ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR
vehicle is ready to pull away. BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If the accelerator pedal is depressed while Active Distance Assist R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or
DISTRONIC is operational, the system can be switched to passive slower than the currently driven speed.
mode. The ç suspended message appears briefly on the R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
driver display. front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to

SYSTEM LIMITS brake at all times.
INSTANCES, FOREXAMPLE:
stored speed.
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in
greatly varying light conditions.
R The windscreen in the camera's area is dirty, misted up, damaged or cov‐
ered.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
398
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐ OPERATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC AND THE VARIABLE
tance Assist DISTRONIC LIMITER
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50%
of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active & WARNING
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐ Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
ing. DISTRONIC is impaired
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the
LIMITED REACTION:
vehicle in front.
R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
pected obstacles
R to complex traffic conditions
& WARNING
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A ings nor intervene in such situations.
LIMITED REACTION:
# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react
R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes accordingly.
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
pected obstacles
R to complex traffic conditions
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐

ings nor intervene in such situations.
# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react

accordingly.
399
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Risk of accident due to adjustment of speed by the Active Speed
Assist DISTRONIC Limit Assistant
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit Assistant may be too high
BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE: or incorrect in individual cases:
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. R For speed limits below 20 km/h
R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or R In wet or foggy conditions
slower than the currently driven speed.
# Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
regulations.
front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather con‐
# Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to
ditions.
brake at all times.

Requirements
stored speed.
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:
R The electric parking brake is released.

& WARNING
R ESP® is switched on and is not intervening.
Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC R Transmission position h is engaged.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% R All the doors are closed.
of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐ R Snow chain mode is not active (/ page 753).
ing.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the VARIABLE LIMITER:
vehicle in front.
R The variable limiter is selected.
400
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE

LIMITER
# To activate without a stored speed: press ®, ¯ or J. Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle via
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter.
or
# To activate with a stored speed: press J. Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle via
± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/the variable lim‐
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter.
iter
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease speed If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is
stored.
K Increases/decreases the specified distance
I Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC % When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted.
When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the speed
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
press the respective button with only one finger or swipe across the
control panel.
INCREASING OR DECREASING THE SPEED
SWITCHES BETWEEN THE VARIABLE LIMITER AND ACTIVE DISTANCE # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of the
ASSIST DISTRONIC
control panel 1.
# Press I.
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of the
control panel 1.
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
or
401
F295 0075 02
# Briefly press the top ® or bottom ¯ of the control panel 1. # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly.
The stored speed is increased or decreased by 10 km/h. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remain active.
or INCREASING OR DECREASING THE SPECIFIED DISTANCE FROM THE VEHI‐

CLE IN FRONT
# Press the top ® or bottom ¯ of the control panel 1 and hold # Press K.
pressed. The h display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one
The stored speed is increased or decreased in 10 km/h increments. level.
If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest
or
level.
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. DEACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE
LIMITER
# Press the top ® of the control panel 1.
ADOPTING THE SPEED RESTRICTION SHOWN ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY & WARNING
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
®, ¯ or J. active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active
# Adopt the displayed speed restriction: press J. Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
The speed restriction displayed on the driver display is adopted as the
stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front,
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and
but only up to the stored speed, or restricts its speed accordingly. secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you
leave the driver's seat.
% A speed restriction shown on the driver display is only adopted

while driving, not when stationary. # Press ±.
PULLING AWAY WITH ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Dis‐
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not
the brake pedal. deactivated.
# Press J.
or
402
F295 0075 02
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed lim‐ & WARNING
its is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed Risk of accident due to adjustment of speed by the Active Speed
(/ page 404). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not accepted. Limit Assistant
The speed adopted by the Active Speed Limit Assistant may be too high
Adjustment of travel speed is initiated no later than when the vehicle is level or incorrect in individual cases:
with the traffic sign. For signs indicating entry into an urban zone, the speed is
adapted according to that permitted within the built-up area. The speed R For speed limits below 20 km/h
restriction indicator on the driver display is always refreshed when the vehicle R In wet or foggy conditions
is level with the traffic sign.
# Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic
If you are driving on German motorways with no speed limit, the system uses regulations.
the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If
you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the # Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather con‐
recommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted. ditions.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been switched to passive mode by

pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set FUNCTION OF ROUTE-BASED SPEED ADAPTATION
speed are adopted. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be
adapted to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected,
The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or
weather and traffic conditions into consideration. Adjust your speed accord‐ dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle acceler‐
ingly when necessary. ates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehi‐
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ cles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 378). Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system
(/ page 404).
SYSTEM LIMITS
The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs THE FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS ARE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT:
(/ page 423).
R Bends
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as
R Roundabouts
the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a specific time or due
to weather conditions) cannot be unequivocally detected by the system. R T-junctions
R Turns and exits
Adjust your speed in these situations.
403
F295 0075 02
R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic (/ page 608)) R Road narrowing
R Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, for example, at
ALSO, THE SPEED IS REDUCED IF THE TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR IS toll stations
SWITCHED ON AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IS DETECTED: R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice
R If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached
R Turning off at junctions to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly
R Driving on slowing-down lanes established
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other
road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic
& WARNING
lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐
Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
still.
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily
When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out auto‐ unavailable in the following situations:
matically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is con‐
firmed and further speed adaptation is activated. R If the driver does not follow the calculated route
R If map data is not up-to-date or available
SPEED ADAPTATION IS CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R In the event of roadworks
R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is R In bad weather or road conditions
presumed that the route event is not deemed relevant by the driver R If the accelerator pedal is depressed
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations
SYSTEM LIMITS # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into
account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations
and driving at a suitable speed. SETTING THE DRIVING STYLE OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
IN DIFFICULT CONDITIONS, THE SPEED SELECTION MADE BY THE SYS‐ Requirements:

TEM MAY NOT ALWAYS BE SUITABLE. THIS APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R The road's course is not clearly visible
404
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist the steering wheel at all times so that you can intervene at any time to correct
the course of the vehicle and keep it in the lane.
SELECTING A DRIVING STYLE
# Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
% Additional information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC IF ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET, ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO
(/ page 396). ASSIST ACTIVATES AUTOMATICALLY:
R You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or major high-speed road.

SETTING SPEED ADAPTATION
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 399).
# Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based speed adjustment.
R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 414).
When these functions are active, the travel speed is adapted depending
R Active Steering Assist is switched on and active (/ page 407).
on the route events ahead or in accordance with a speed restriction.
R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.
% IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE

DETECTED SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAX‐ When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active, the ¬ status display appears in
IMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED: the driver display.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC SYSTEM LIMITS

R Variable limiter The system limits of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering
Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist.
% Additional information on speed adaptation (/ page 403). Active Steering Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO ASSIST FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with Active Steering Assist is available up to a speed of 210 km/h.
separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate
and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in steering interventions. Depending on the vehicle speed, Active Steering Assist
front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.
safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.
405
F295 0075 02
STEERING AND TOUCH DETECTION

% Depending on the respective country, Active Steering Assist can The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times to
use the surrounding traffic as a reference in the lower speed ensure that they can intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle
range. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can also assist when and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive
driving outside the centre of the lane, forexample, to form an mode or vice versa at any time.
emergency corridor.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steer‐
ing Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this
case.
STATUS DISPLAY OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST

Ø Grey: activated and in passive mode
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a consid‐
Ø Green: activated and active
erable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an
Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition initial visual warning is issued. The notification 1 appears on the driver dis‐
from active to passive mode, system limits detected play. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to
the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.
Ø White, red hands: "hands on the steering wheel" prompt
(/ page 408)If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable
period, an emergency stop may be initiated.
% During the transition from active to passive mode, the Ø sym‐ The warning is not issued or stops as soon as the system detects the driver
bol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is in pas‐ touching or steering the steering wheel.
sive mode, the Ø symbol is shown as grey on the driver dis‐
play. The touch detection may be limited or inoperative if there is no direct contact
between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there
is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual
Assist may be unavailable.
warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
406
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS R At roundabouts or toll stations.

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In R When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indica‐
some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in tor.
the lane or to drive through exits.
R When the tyre pressure is too low.
SITUATIONS:
& WARNING
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
varying light conditions or dense shadows on the carriageway. tioning
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no
R Insufficient road illumination. guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of lane.
the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe
R There are no lane markings in a given lane, or the markings are not easily
the traffic carefully.
discernible or change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or at
junctions. # Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings
& WARNING
can therefore not be detected.
Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
R The roadway is narrow and winding.
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause
R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, suchas unexpected steering interventions.
object markers.
R If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the # Steer according to traffic conditions.
trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.
THE SYSTEM DOES NOT PROVIDE ASSISTANCE IN THE FOLLOWING CON‐
DITIONS: ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
Requirements:
R On very tight bends and when turning.
R When crossing junctions. R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
407
F295 0075 02
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. for a certain while, a warning may be issued despite pedal actua‐
tion.
Observe also the instructions on the touch detection of Active
Multimedia system:
Steering Assist (/ page 405).
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
# Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Active Emergency Stop Assist monitors the steering wheel, as well as the
accelerator and brake pedals. If the system detects a lack of driver activity or
the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane, a warning can be issued and an
emergency stop initiated. ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST ISSUES THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS
IN ORDER:
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: The system is available from a
speed of approx. 60 km/h. R Display message 1 appears on the driver display.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If Active Steering Assist is R In addition to the display 1, a warning tone sounds.
switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h. R The Beginning emergency stop message appears on the driver display, a
continuous warning tone sounds and the vehicle will no longer acceler‐
IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT THE VEHICLE IS IN DANGER OF LEAVING ate. Additionally, a slight tensioning of the belt will be generated as
THE LANE, A WARNING CAN BE ISSUED AND AN EMERGENCY STOP INITI‐ required.
ATED.
R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until the vehicle comes to a
R The driver has not touched the steering wheel for a certain while, or no standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also effected.
steering movement is detected for a lengthy period (depending on the
vehicle equipment).
R Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed. % Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens the seat belt
and opens the driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated
immediately.
% Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: if Active Steering
Assist is switched on and active, the system only monitors the
steering wheel. If the driver has not touched the steering wheel
408
F295 0075 02
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If possible, a lane change to the SYSTEM LIMITS
adjacent lane is performed (country-dependent). It is possible to change lanes FOR THE DETECTION OF VEHICLES AND OTHER OBSTACLES, OBSERVE
across one lane and only to the outside lane, not to the hard shoulder. THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396)
deactivated. Depending on the respective country, the hazard warning light
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 405)
system is also switched on.
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 409)
WHEN THE VEHICLE HAS COME TO A STANDSTILL: R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432)
R the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. R Active Brake Assist (/ page 414)
R the vehicle is unlocked.
R if possible, an emergency call is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
call centre.
ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST IS INACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES:
Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop
Assist by turning the steering wheel. R Active Lane Keeping Assist has reached a system limit.
R ï Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched off (white status display).
YOU CAN CANCEL AN INTERVENTION BY ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP
ASSIST AFTER AUTOMATIC BRAKING IS INITIATED BY PERFORMING ONE R ð Active Lane Keeping Assist is not ready (grey status display).
OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:
R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is cancelled, but the warn‐ Active Lane Change Assist
ing message, warning tone and electric power steering remain active
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST
R Steering: electric power steering is cancelled, the warning message and
Active Lane Change Assist is activated via the turn signal indicator, and sup‐
warning tone remain active, and the vehicle continues to be braked
ports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque.
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET FOR THIS FUNCTION:

% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a
maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active R You are driving on a motorway or a main road similar to a motorway.
Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled R The travel speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 180 km/h.
until the vehicle has been restarted. R A dashed boundary marking separates the adjacent lane.
R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane.
409
F295 0075 02
R The sensors have detected a vehicle with sufficient distance behind your
own vehicle once since the last vehicle start.
R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system
(/ page 414).
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activa‐
ted on the motorway.
THE SYSTEM IS NOT AVAILABLE AND MUST BE REACTIVATED:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were

already activated before the vehicle entered the motorway.
Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance
R The system briefly no longer recognises the road being travelled on as a
motorway or a main road similar to a motorway, e.g. at a motorway junc‐ 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated
tion.
2 Red arrow: lane change cancelled
If Active Lane Change Assist is available, the notification ± appears with
As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road again, you can
green arrows on the driver display. If the system has been activated but is not
reactivate it using the buttons J, ® or ¯.
currently available, the notification ± appears with grey arrows on the
Depending on the respective country, Active Lane Change Assist activates driver display.
again automatically. The Indicating briefly starts lane change message is then
If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane, and a lane change is
shown on the driver display.
permitted, the lane change is initiated as soon as the driver activates the turn
signal indicator. The lane change is indicated to the driver by a green flashing
arrow next to the steering wheel symbol ± . In the Assistance menu, a green
arrow 1 indicating the respective adjacent lane appears on the driver dis‐
play. The message Lane change to the left, for example, also appears.
ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST CAN BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING

SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R The environmental conditions change (e.g. obstacle detected).

R The driver takes his hands off the steering wheel.
R The driver steers too hard or in the opposite direction.
410
F295 0075 02
R The driver switches on the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist are deactiva‐ & WARNING
ted. Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
R The lane change cannot be executed by the vehicle as planned.
If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached,
there is no guarantee that the system will remain active.
A CANCELLATION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST IS DISPLAYED AS
FOLLOWS: Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque.
R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the
R A corresponding message appears on the driver display. steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or
brake if necessary.
R In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds.
AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE

& WARNING The automatic lane change is a sub-function of Active Lane Change Assist. It
Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane can assist the driver in deciding when a lane change is appropriate, as well as
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is its subsequent execution.
free.
& WARNING
The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not
Risk of accident due to erroneously triggered lane change
free.
The system cannot always clearly recognise all situations in which a
# Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighbouring lane is lane change makes sense.
free and there is no danger to other road users.
The system can initiate a lane change even though the traffic situation
# Monitor the lane change. is not suitable or the neighbouring lane is not available, not usable or
occupied.
# Always monitor the traffic situation.
# If necessary, cancel the lane change: Hold the steering wheel

or countersteer slightly and return the vehicle to its own lane.
411
F295 0075 02
You can cancel a lane change initiated by the system at any time by holding R A lane change is necessary in order that the route entered in the naviga‐
the steering wheel or countersteering slightly and returning the vehicle to its tion system, or the road currently being navigated can be followed. The
lane. lane change can already take place before the prompt to do so appears
in the navigation system.
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR AN AUTOMATIC
R The system detects that the lane being travelled in is about to end.
LANE CHANGE:
R The conditions for activating Active Lane Change Assist are fulfilled. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR, ACTIVE LANE CHANGE
R Automatic lane change is switched on in the multimedia system ASSIST DOES NOT PERFORM AN AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE:
(/ page 414).
R If the vehicle is already in a lane which should be used to follow the
R Your hands are on the steering wheel.
route entered in the navigation system.
R You are driving on a motorway, or a main road similar to a motorway, in a
R The system detects that the adjacent lane is about to end.
country for which this function is approved.
R If the driver has cancelled an automatic lane change, no lane change will
R The road currently being travelled allows lane changes. There are no tight
be initiated in this direction for a certain period of time. The automatic
bends, forexample.
lane change is then temporarily switched to passive mode for this direc‐
R The maximum permissible speed for the current section being travelled tion.
is limited to approximately 140 km/h.
R If the driver has initiated a lane change in a given direction or has
R The travel speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 140 km/h. changed lanes themselves, no lane change is initiated in the opposite
direction for a certain period of time. The automatic lane change is then
temporarily switched to passive mode for this direction.
% If you are not in a country for which this function is approved,
the menu item for automatic lane change is not available in the
The same cancellation conditions apply to the automatic lane change as for
multimedia system.
the lane change initiated by the driver with Active Lane Change Assist.
ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST CAN INITIATE AN AUTOMATIC LANE IN ADDITION, THE AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE CAN BE CANCELLED
CHANGE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE: UNDER THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES IN PARTICULAR:
R The set desired speed for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be R During the lane change, the system detects a construction site separated
reached due to a slower vehicle in front. by traffic cones, in its own or in the adjacent lane.
R There is little traffic, and the set desired speed for Active Distance Assist R The system recognises that the reason for a lane change no longer exists.
DISTRONIC can also be achieved in a slower lane. R The driver removes their hands from the steering wheel during the lane
change.
412
F295 0075 02
NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY R The system does not recognise a suitable road, e.g. in narrow bends or
If the automatic lane change is available, in place of the notification ±, the shortly after a slip road.
notification A appears in green. R The vehicle is within a construction site.
If the automatic lane change is available, however, not all conditions for acti‐
vation of the function are currently fulfilled, the A‑ symbols are shown in grey. AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE MAY BE INOPERATIVE OR IMPAIRED IN THE
Depending on the respective country, only an A can be shown in grey. The FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR, AND MAY LEAD TO LANE
automatic lane change is then temporarily switched to passive mode for this CHANGES BEING INITIATED ERRONEOUSLY:
direction. This will be implemented, forexample, if the driver has cancelled an
R The vehicle is before or within a construction site and/or the system has
automatic lane change or has initiated a lane change themselves.
detected a construction site separated by traffic cones.
If the system deems a lane change appropriate and has to adjust the travel R The vehicle is within a section with temporary lane closures or lane
speed accordingly, the green A flashes on the side to which a lane change is to openings.
take place. R The system can no longer detect the lane marking correctly.
When the automatic lane change is initiated, the driver display shows a vehicle R It is raining heavily.
with an arrow pointing to the adjacent lane in which the lane change is to take R Another vehicle changes to the same lane simultaneously, e.g. incoming
place, and a warning tone sounds. In addition, the reason for a lane change, traffic from slip roads.
for example an overtaking manoeuvre, can be shown.
If the automatic lane change is cancelled, A the A on the side to which a

% Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a
lane change was to take place is shown in red on the display. Under certain
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been deliv‐
circumstances, warning messages can also be displayed and an additional
ered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable during this teach-
warning tone sounded.
in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active Steer‐
SYSTEM LIMITS ing Assist symbol Ø.
For Active Lane Change Assist, the system limits of Active Steering Assist
(/ page 405) apply. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
IN ADDITION, THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE
R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty (/ page 378).

R The exterior lighting indicates a defect.
413
F295 0075 02
SETTING ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds
Multimedia system: and the L distance warning lamp lights up.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
# Select Active Lane Change Assist.
# Select between the On or Off setting options.
The setting option Also automatically can likewise be activated or deactivated.
% If the Active Steering Assist was switched off, then the Active
Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance
Lane Change Assist cannot be operated.
1 Distance insufficient
2 Red radar waves
Active Brake Assist In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance to the vehicle in front 1 is
displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST
highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves
ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: 2 appear in front of your vehicle.
R Distance warning function
R Collision warning % Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an addi‐
R Autonomous braking function tional haptic warning is given in the form of slight, repeated ten‐
sioning of the driver's seat belt.
R Situation-based brake force boosting
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Active Steering Assist:
Evasive Steering Assist
% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: If Warning assistance is
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist switched on, the warning by Active Brake Assist is reinforced by
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: intersection start-off func‐ the ambient lighting (/ page 280).
tion
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehi‐ cal situations.
cles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.
414
F295 0075 02
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autono‐
mous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone and distance warning & WARNING
lamp L are simultaneous with the braking action. Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of
Active Brake Assist
If you apply the brakes yourself in a critical situation or apply the brakes dur‐ Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex
ing autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The traffic situations.
brake pressure increases up to maximum emergency braking if necessary.
IN SUCH CASES, ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MIGHT:
R Give a warning or brake without reason

R Not give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintain‐
ing a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and
for braking in good time.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occur‐
red, pop-up 1 appears in the driver display and then automatically disap‐ # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
pears after a short time. on Active Brake Assist alone.
If the autonomous braking function or the situation-based braking assistance # Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection by PRE-
SAFE® may also be initiated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. owing
to activation of another driving system, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê appears in the driver display.
If the system is unavailable owing to soiled or damaged sensors or a fault, or if

the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist Ó warning lamp
appears on the driver display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:
415
F295 0075 02
DISTANCE WARNING FUNCTION R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary

From approximately 30 km/h, you are warned by the distance warning function pedestrians and cyclists.
if the safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead is insufficient at the cur‐
rent speed for several seconds. In this case, the distance warning lamp L in AUTONOMOUS BRAKING FUNCTION
the driver display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in front continues to From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function can
decrease at higher speeds, the distance warning lamp L begins to flash. intervene in the following situations:
COLLISION WARNING VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

The collision warning function can assist you in the following situations from R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
approximately 7 km/h with an intermittent warning tone and the distance cles ahead.
warning lamp L .
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐
cles.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐ R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
cles ahead. pedestrians and cyclists.
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles, pedestrians walking along the road and moving cyclists ahead.
VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
pedestrians and cyclists. R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary cles ahead.
pedestrians and cyclists. R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐ R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
cles ahead. cyclists ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. pedestrians and cyclists.
vehicles. SITUATION-BASED BRAKE FORCE BOOSTING
From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, situation-related brake force boosting
can intervene in the following situations:
cyclists ahead.
416
F295 0075 02
VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MAY CANCEL THE BRAKE APPLICATION WHEN
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
cles ahead. R You steer to avoid an obstacle.
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving R There is no longer a risk of collision.
cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐ R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.
cles.
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing REACTION TO ONCOMING ROAD USERS (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING
pedestrians and cyclists. ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CAN ALSO REACT TO DETECTED ONCOMING ROAD
pedestrians and cyclists. USERS:
R Reaction up to a speed of approximately 100 km/h

VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: R Warning of oncoming road users through warning tone and distance
warning lamp L
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
cles ahead. R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an
accident
R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. INTERSECTION START-OFF FUNCTION (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)
vehicles.
cyclists ahead.
pedestrians and cyclists.
CANCELLING A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST

YOU CAN CANCEL A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST AT
ANY TIME BY: If a risk of collision with crossing traffic is detected when moving off or at
walking pace, three red arrows consecutively light up in the driver display in
R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. the direction of the crossing road user, together with the distance warning
R Releasing the brake pedal. lamp L. If the situation is particularly critical, the arrows begin to flash. A
warning tone will also sound. If you do not react to the warning, acceleration
417
F295 0075 02
can be restricted or autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST HAS THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:
The autonomous braking can also prevent you from moving off and keep the
vehicle stationary. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles.
also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the distance warning R Help through additional steering assistance if it detects an evasive
lamp L and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking action. manoeuvre.
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during an evasive manoeu‐
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occur‐ vre.
red, a pop-up appears in the driver display and automatically disappears after
a short time.
R Assistance in taking evasive action, and straightening of the vehicle.
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of
If Active Brake Assist is set to Late the purely visual warning stage and restric‐ approximately 110 km/h.
tion of acceleration are deactivated. If the situation is particularly critical,
there can still be a visual warning, a warning tone and initiation of autonomous
The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be cancelled at any time
braking.
by counter steering.
EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST
SYSTEM LIMITS
Full system performance is not yet available for a short time after switching on
& WARNING the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the Æ
Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist warning Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown in the driver dis‐
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex play. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes
traffic situations clearly. before full system performance is available.
Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION, PARTICULARLY
not sufficient to avoid a collision. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely R in snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly vary‐
on Evasive Steering Assist alone. ing light conditions.
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. (/ page 378)
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
R if the sensors are impaired owing to interference from other radar sour‐
# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. ces, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
R if a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and dis‐
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to
played.
the path of your vehicle.
418
F295 0075 02
R in complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly

identified. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the ê symbol appears in
the status bar of the driver display and when the vehicle is next
R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detec‐
started the system is activated again.
tion range.
R If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other
objects.
% The setting after starting the vehicle depends on the country.
R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished
from the background.
R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. owing to special SETTING WARNING TIMING
clothing or other objects. # Select Z alongside Active Brake Assist.
R if the driver's seat belt is not fastened. # Select Early, Medium or Late.
R on bends with a tight radius.
SETTING ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST % If the ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of fatigue or a
microsleep, depending on the country, the system can issue a
Requirements:
warning earlier than set. Further information about ATTENTION
R The vehicle is switched on. ASSIST (/ page 392).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance Speed Limit Assist
# Activate or deactivate the function. FUNCTION OF SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist % The Speed Limit Assist uses Open Street Map data provided
activated. under the Open Database Licence (ODbL) terms. For more infor‐
mation, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
Switching off Active Brake Assist also switches off the distance warning func‐
tion, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Active Eva‐ Speed Limit Assist records speed restrictions with a multifunction camera and
sive Steering Assist (with Driving Assistance Package - country-dependent). shows them in the driver display.
419
F295 0075 02
Optionally, maximum permissible speeds can also be shown in the head-up On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear
display. road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination
(depending on the country).
The camera also detects further speed restrictions indicated by an additional
sign (e.g. in wet conditions). No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the multi‐
media system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for the
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual.
OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION
R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐
tions
% Observe also the notes on trailer operation (/ page 474).
R observe actual traffic signs
R observe applicable traffic rules and regulations
If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows the
query concerning the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed
(/ page 480). Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
The driver must manually adjust the maximum permissible speed in the small
or large trailer category. WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED
The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO speed. Depending on the country, you can set how much the maximum per‐
ACCOUNT, E.G. ON: missible speed may be exceeded on the multimedia system before a warning
is issued. You can select in the settings whether the warning should be issued
R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is optically, with the traffic sign flashing in the driver display, or as a combination
approved of optic and acoustic warning. Selection of the type of warning is confirmed
R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle via an indication in the driver display, depending on the respective country of
R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence use.
R type and condition of the road used
R the weather conditions
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination

can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the jour‐
ney (depending on the equipment).
420
F295 0075 02
% Traffic signs that affect the maximum permissible speed, e.g.

indicating the beginning or end of motorways, can also be detec‐
ted.
The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultane‐
ously. The system always prioritises displaying speed restrictions. The head-up
(Example) display shows only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If two
speed signs are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed limits
1 Optical warning only are detected, the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always trans‐
2 WARNING off mitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
acceptance and is shown on the head-up display.
% The type, duration and activation threshold of the speed limit Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the activa‐ for a short time.
tion threshold upon which the warning is issued, are subject to
legislation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is If the Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible
delivered. speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears in the driver
display:
DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
This display is shown permanently in the vehicle when travelling in countries

which do not support Speed Limit Assist. Speed Limit Assist is not available in
all countries.
If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault

or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears in the
driver display. Depending on the country, the Speed Limit Assist warning lamp
(Example) ê also lights up in the driver display.
1 Permissible speed
% Please also note the information on the display messages
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
(/ page 856).
3 Additional sign with restriction
421
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS SETTING SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING Multimedia system:
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING
variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. % The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on
R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction the respective country).
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, # Switch off Speed limit warning .
obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insuffi‐ Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains
ciently illuminated or askew. deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the
R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or driver's door is opened (depending on the respective equipment).
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency.
R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs % The acoustic speed limit warning can also be switched off and on
at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads,
via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the
and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights.
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of
R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard. the central display or via a voice control command (availability of
R If the signage, road markings, or road guidance is country-specific and these functions is country-dependent).
deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after
road works.
CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
R After sharp turns and tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the camera's # Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.
field of vision.
R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them. SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
SPEED ON OR OFF
R If transport devices are used that are attached to the trailer coupling,
e.g. bicycle racks, the system may react to restrictions for trailers.
% The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory.
The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each

change of the displayed speed on the driver display.
422
F295 0075 02
# Activate or deactivate the function. Traffic Sign Assist detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and
compares them with the information from the digital road map of the naviga‐
tion system. It supports you by showing detected speed restrictions and over‐
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐
taking bans on the driver display.
try.
Maximum permissible speeds can also be shown on the head-up display.
SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD
The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible
This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.
speed.
# Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.
In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can
Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation. warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are
about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally.
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE DETECTED
SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated
SPEED: by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions).
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs on the driver display. Actual
traffic signs and speed restrictions have priority over traffic signs and speed
R Cruise control
restrictions shown on the driver display.
R Variable limiter
% Additional information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 399). NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION
% Observe also the notes on trailer operation (/ page 474).
Traffic Sign Assist

If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows the
FUNCTION OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST query about the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed
(/ page 480).
The driver must manually adapt the maximum permissible speed in the small
or large trailer category.
423
F295 0075 02
IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
ACCOUNT, E.G. ON:
R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is

approved
R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle
R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence
R type and condition of the road used
R the weather conditions (Example)
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination 1 Permissible speed
can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the jour‐ 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
ney (depending on the respective equipment). 3 Additional sign with restriction
On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultane‐
road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination ously. The system always prioritises displaying speed restrictions. The head-up
(depending on the respective country of use). display shows only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If two
speed signs are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed limits
No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the multi‐ are detected, the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always trans‐
media system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for the mitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual. acceptance and is shown on the head-up display.
OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
for a short time.
R select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐
tions
R observe actual traffic signs
R observe applicable traffic rules and regulations
Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed
424
F295 0075 02
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT AND DISPLAY THE FOLLOWING TRAF‐ Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the system can also display
FIC SIGNS 1: speed restrictions ahead on the driver display and head-up display. The driver
display can also show the distance to an upcoming lower limit speed. Informa‐
R speed restrictions tion from the digital road map of the navigation system is used for this pur‐
R end of the speed restriction pose. The Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visualisation of the
R overtaking restrictions speed restrictions ahead.
R play streets If the Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible
R depending on the country: signs showing the start or end of motorways speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears in the driver
and dual carriageways display:
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL SIGNS

3 AND EVALUATE RELEVANCE OF THE RESTRICTIONS AS REQUIRED Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. This display is shown perma‐
USING AUXILIARY VEHICLE SENSORS: nently in the vehicle when travelling in countries which do not support Traffic
Sign Assist.
R in wet conditions
R slippery road surfaces If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault
R in fog or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears in the
R temporary restrictions driver display. The Traffic Sign Assist ê warning lamp also lights up in the
driver display in certain countries.
R exits
R restrictions for car/trailer combinations
% Please also note the information on the display messages from
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 856).
Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map on the navigation
system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motor‐
way exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display on WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED
the driver display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
detected. speed. Depending on the country, you can set how much the maximum per‐
missible speed may be exceeded on the multimedia system before a warning
is issued. You can switch off the warning, or select in the settings whether the
% Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system to warning should be issued optically, with the traffic sign flashing in the driver
ensure optimum functioning of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 39). display, or as a combination of visual and audible warning. Selection of the
425
F295 0075 02
type of warning is confirmed via a notification in the driver display, depending system detects more than one stop sign, or if a stop sign is confirmed using
on the respective country of use. the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs
are detected.
Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive through a red light uninten‐
tionally.
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED:
R Several traffic lights have been detected.

(Example)
R All traffic lights detected are red.
1 Visual warning only R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger
2 WARNING off side beside the vehicle's lane.
R The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red,
yellow, and green.
% The type, duration and deployment stages of the speed limit
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the deploy‐
ment stages upon which the warning is issued, are subject to leg‐ % Where available, you can turn the warnings on and off in the Traf‐
islation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is fic Sign Assist menu under Further warnings(/ page 427).
delivered.
SYSTEM LIMITS
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST (COUNTRY-SPECIFIC) THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
wrong way down a section of road, forexample, on motorway slip roads or
one-way streets. R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly
variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, pro‐
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections
vided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic
Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction
Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintention‐
ally. For this to be possible, the sign must be unambiguous, forexample, if the
426
F295 0075 02
R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, # Switch off Speed limit warning .
obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insuffi‐ Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains
ciently illuminated or askew. deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off.
R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency.
% The acoustic speed limit warning can also be switched off and on
R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the
incomplete or out of date. steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of
R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs the central display or via a voice control command (availability of
at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads, these functions is country-dependent).
and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights.
R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard. CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
R If the signage, road markings, or road guidance is country-specific and # Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.
deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after
road works. SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD
This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.
R After sharp turns and tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the camera's
field of vision. # Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.
R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them.
R If you use transport equipment secured to the vehicle with a trailer cou‐ % Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legisla‐
pling, suchas a bicycle rack, restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations tion.
may be considered valid if applicable.
SETTING TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
Multimedia system: SPEED ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING % The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory.
% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on

the respective country). The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each
change of the displayed speed in the driver display.
427
F295 0075 02
If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐ light view is shown on the central display.
try.
When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC # Activate D or deactivate E Traffic light view.
SIGN ASSIST
USING OTHER AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
# Activate or deactivate Further warnings.
# Select Z.
The available functions are switched on or off.
SET THE TYPE OF WARNING FOR OTHER FUNCTIONS # Select On request or Automatic.
# Select Visual or Visual & audible. If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap
here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is
shown after confirmation of the message.
Traffic light view When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed
when the traffic light view is available.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW
The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by
displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is dis‐
played when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
out when the vehicle drives off. FUNCTION OF BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST
WITH EXIT WARNING
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the
Requirements: area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.
R The Traffic light view option is switched on. The system can detect vehicles travelling from speeds of approximately
R A traffic light view is available. 12 km/h and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range.
STATUS DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER DISPLAY

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic light view
¸ Grey: the system is activated but inoperative.
¸ Green: the system is activated and operational.

% This function is not available in all countries.
428
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking
you at a greatly different speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

Display in the driver display in the menuAssistance # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐
tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
1 Warning lamp in the exterior mirror
2 Red radar waves
If a vehicle is detected from approximately 12 km/h and immediately moves
& WARNING
into the monitoring range, the warning lamp in the relevant exterior mirror
Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
lights up in red. Assistance In the menu, the lamp in the exterior mirror 1 also
lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO THE FOLLOWING:
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you activate the direction R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot
indicators in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once area
and the warning lamp flashes red in the corresponding exterior mirror. Red R if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then
radar waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic. overtake
If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the exterior mirror flashes Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such sit‐
for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you uations.
overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐
tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
% Vehicles with active ambient lighting : If Warning assistance is
switched on, the warning is reinforced by the ambient lighting
(/ page 280). EXIT WARNING
The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a stationary
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ vehicle about approaching vehicles.
429
F295 0075 02
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle
& WARNING occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving
Risk of accident despite exit warning the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or
SYSTEM LIMITS
road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed.
BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST MAY BE LIMITED
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR:
# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when R if there is soiling on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. R in poor visibility, e.g. owing to fog, heavy rain or snow
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorcycles
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
in the corresponding exterior mirror. R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane
If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warn‐
ing tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar
warning lamps in the corresponding exterior mirror flash red. continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to
the side for other traffic or obstacles.
% Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: the Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, e. g. trucks,
Warning assistance of the ambient lighting can be activated and for a prolonged time.
deactivated (/ page 280).
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when
reverse gear is engaged.
% The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational if transport
and may vary according to the setting. equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the
electrical connection has been correctly established.
The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot
ADDITIONALLY, THE EXIT WARNING MAY BE LIMITED IN THE FOLLOW‐
Assist is active.
ING SITUATIONS:
After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a
R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking
few minutes. If a door is opened when the vehicle is switched off, the exit
spaces
warning is active again for a few minutes. When the exterior mirror warning
lamp flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available. R when people approach the vehicle
430
F295 0075 02
R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

& WARNING
BRAKE APPLICATION FUNCTION IN ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST DOES NOT REACT IN THE FOLLOWING
% The brake application function is only available for vehicles with SITUATIONS:
Driving Assistance Package.
R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed.
R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitored
range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Course-correcting Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such sit‐
brake application helps in this case to avoid collossion with another vehicle. uations.
The course-correcting brake application is available to you from a speed of # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐
approx. 30 km/h - 60 km/h (depending on the country) up to a speed of tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
approx. 200 km/h.
& WARNING
Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.
# Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active

Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting
brake application. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes
in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display 1 indi‐
# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. cating the danger of a side collision appears on the driver display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This
brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction or accelerate.
SYSTEM LIMITS
Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not
recognise the dangers (/ page 428).
431
F295 0075 02
EITHER A COURSE-CORRECTING BRAKE APPLICATION APPROPRIATE TO Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h
THE DRIVING SITUATION, OR NONE AT ALL, MAY OCCUR IN THE FOLLOW‐ and 200 km/h.
ING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
THE SYSTEM CAN INTERVENE IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of
your vehicle. R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
R An approaching vehicle leaves too little lateral distance between you. R You touch this lane marking with one of your front wheels.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate significantly. If you activate the turn signal indicators, there is no steering intervention on
that side.
R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated. There is no steering intervention if you leave your lane without activating the
R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. turn signal indicators, but there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle in
your own lane.
R Transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
trailer coupling and the electrical connection has been correctly estab‐ Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: If the sys‐
lished. tem detects an obstacle, e.g. another vehicle, in the adjacent lane, there is
steering intervention despite the turn signal indicators.
SWITCHING BLIND SPOT ASSIST OR ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST ON OR
OFF DEPENDING ON THE COUNTRY, ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST CAN
Multimedia system: ALREADY REACT IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS FROM A SPEED OF
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance APPROXIMATELY 45 KM/H:
# Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist.
R If your own vehicle is overtaken by another road user and a risk of colli‐
sion is detected, there is course-correcting steering intervention.
Active Lane Keeping Assist R If a recognised lane marking is crossed, a warning is given by tangible
feedback from the steering wheel.
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle using the
multifunction camera (/ page 378).
It can protect you against unintentionally departing your lane. The system can
guide you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention,
and warn you with tangible steering wheel feedback.
432
F295 0075 02
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES THE WARNING 1 APPEARS ON THE DRIVER Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: If both lane mark‐
DISPLAY AND A WARNING TONE SOUNDS: ings are shown in red on the status display at the same time, Active
Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 408).
R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts more than
approximately ten seconds.
R There are two or more steering interventions by the systems within
approximately three minutes, without steering action by the driver.
You can set the sensitivity of the system in the Active Lane Keeping Assist set‐
tings in order to determine the level of assistance. You can also determine
whether the system is to react to broken lane markings, or only to continuous
lane markings (/ page 434). Visual on the driver display in the Assistance menu
If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of drowsiness or microsleep, the If one of your front wheels moves onto a detected lane marking, this is high‐
most sensitive setting is automatically selected (/ page 391). lighted in red in the Assistance menu on the driver display.
STATUS DISPLAYS OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched off. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: If Warning assistance is
switched on, the warning by Active Lane Keeping Assist is rein‐
If ESP® is switched off or a tyre pressure loss warning is indicated, forced by the ambient lighting (/ page 280).
Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically switched off.
ï Yellow: There is a malfunction. Also note any display messages. SYSTEM LIMITS
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE MAY BE NO COURSE-CORRECT‐
ð Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on but not ready.
ING STEERING INTERVENTION, BUT A WARNING MAY BE GIVEN IN THE
ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on and ready. If the STEERING WHEEL DEPENDING ON THE SITUATION:
system is only ready on one side, only the lane marking on that side
R if you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
is shown in green.
R if a driving safety system is intervening, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist
ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane R if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or
by a course-correcting steering intervention. If a tangible warning is high rates of acceleration.
also given in the steering wheel, the status display flashes. The lane
R if transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
marking of the affected side is shown in red.
433
F295 0075 02

SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: % Setting after vehicle start is country-dependent.
R in poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient road illumination, highly varia‐

SETTING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
ble shadows, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray
Multimedia system:
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
R if the bumper is soiled in the area of the radar sensors, or if these are SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
damaged or obscured # Select Z.
R if there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are pres‐ # Select Early, Med. or Late.
ent for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R if the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. The last setting selected will be applied the next time the vehicle is started.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings
can therefore not be detected. % The standard setting of this function is country-dependent.
R if the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one
another or merge.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ASSISTANCE WHEN LANE MARKINGS ARE
R if the lanes are very narrow and winding. INTERRUPTED
# Select Advanced support.
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 378). The last setting selected will be applied the next time the vehicle is started.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

% The standard setting of this function is country-dependent.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
% This function must be activated for vehicles without Driving
# Activate or deactivate the function. Assistance Package for Emergency Stop Assist to be available in
full measure.
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 408).
the vehicle quick-access y.
434
F295 0075 02
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function R Raised vehicle level selectable via the multimedia system for increased
ground clearance
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the sus‐ R Comfortable suspension tuning in driving modes A and ;
pension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. R Firmer, sporty suspension tuning in driving mode C
THE DAMPING IS SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH WHEEL AND IS AFFECTED R From a speed of 120 km/h the vehicle is lowered to save energy
BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS: When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is returned to normal
level.
R the road surface conditions
R the vehicle load
% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment
R the drive program selected such as a trailer or a bicycle rack is attached to the trailer cou‐
R the driving style pling and the electrical connection has been correctly estab‐
lished, the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed
The drive program can be adjusted using DYNAMIC SELECT. or the driving mode selected.
SETTING THE VEHICLE LEVEL

AIRMATIC
FUNCTION OF AIRMATIC & WARNING
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high
driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible Driving characteristics may be impaired.
suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When
driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.
and reduce energy consumption. You also have the option of manually adjust‐ # Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and
ing the vehicle level.
the road surface conditions.
AIRMATIC INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS:
R Air suspension with automatic all-round level control

R ADS PLUS (adaptive damping system with constant adjustment of damp‐
ing characteristics)
R Speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle level
435
F295 0075 02
Requirements
& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering R The vehicle has been started.
When lowering the vehicle, persons may become trapped if body parts R The vehicle is not moving faster than 40 km/h.
are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. R With contacted trailer socket (trailer/rear bicycle rack): the vehicle is not
moving faster than 30 km/h.
# Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immedi‐
ate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß 5y
& WARNING RAISING THE VEHICLE

Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering # Select t.
Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or The indicator lamp lights up constantly.
leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the The vehicle is raised to high level +1.
set level shortly afterwards.
Your selection is saved. The set high level +1 remains stored even after the
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody vehicle has been switched off.
could thus become trapped.
THE VEHICLE IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.
R When driving faster than 50 km/h.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the
R With contacted trailer socket (trailer/rear bicycle rack): the vehicle is
vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
GPS-BASED RAISING
If the function is activated, when raising the vehicle level it is possible to store
* NOTE
the vehicle position.
Damage due to vehicle lowering
Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered. # Confirm the prompt.
The position of the vehicle is stored. If the previously stored position is
# Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs under‐
reached again, in the Zero Layer a question appears, asking whether the
neath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehi‐
vehicle level should be raised again.
cle is being lowered.
436
F295 0075 02
THE DAMPING IS SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH WHEEL AND IS AFFECTED

% Settings for GPS-based raising (/ page 437). BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R The drive program selected

% Function of the Zero Layer (/ page 526). R Driving style, e.g. sporty
R Road condition, e.g. bumps
LOWERING THE VEHICLE R The individual selection of SPORT, SPORT + or COMFORT
# Select t.
Indicator lamp goes out. AMG RIDE CONTROL + INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS AND
FUNCTIONS:
The vehicle is set to the normal level.
R Air suspension with variable spring rate and automatic level control
% Used the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce energy consumption
not permitted in trailer operation on public roads. R Increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the
multimedia system
SETTING GPS-BASED RAISING OF THE VEHICLE LEVEL R Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 GPS-based raising SUSPENSION SETTING AND VEHICLE LEVEL PER DRIVE PROGRAM
DRIVE PROGRAMS O AND A:
# Select Positions saved on request, Always save positions or Delete all saved
positions. R The suspension setting is comfortable.
R The vehicle is set to the normal level.
AMG RIDE CONTROL + R The vehicle is lowered while you are driving in the following cases:
- You are driving faster than 120 km/h for at least 20 seconds.
FUNCTION OF AMG RIDE CONTROL + - When driving faster than 160 km/h.
AMG RIDE CONTROL + is an air suspension system with variable damping for
R The vehicle is raised to the normal level again in the following cases:
improved driving characteristics. The all-round level control system ensures
the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a - You are driving slower than 100 km/h for at least one minute.
laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to - You are driving slower than 80 km/h.
improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. You also have the
option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.
437
F295 0075 02
DRIVE PROGRAMS C AND B:
R The suspension setting is firm (C).

R The suspension setting is even firmer (B).
R The vehicle is set to the low level.
R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher
speeds.
# Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays
the ä symbol.
When the vehicle is started again, the COMFORT setting is activated automati‐
cally.
SELECTING THE SUSPENSION SETTING % If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
played can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 329).
% You can also adjust the suspension setting via the multimedia
system (/ page 335).
# Press the corresponding button 2.
YOU CAN SELECT FROM THREE DIFFERENT SUSPENSION SETTINGS: The selected suspension setting is shown on the driver display as a mes‐
sage.
R COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this sus‐ THE Ä SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED MODE:
pension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style.
R SPORT lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a firmer sus‐ R ä (blue): COMFORT
pension setting. Select this suspension setting when employing a sporty R ä (yellow): SPORT
driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. R ä (red): SPORT +
R SPORT + lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a very firm
suspension setting.
438
F295 0075 02
SETTING THE VEHICLE LEVEL

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering
& WARNING
Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL+ or level control system: when
you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.
The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody
# Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and could thus become trapped.
the road surface conditions.
The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.
# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the

WARNING vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
&
Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, persons may become trapped if body parts Multimedia system:
are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. 4© 5ß 5y
# Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immedi‐ RAISING THE VEHICLE
ate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle. REQUIREMENTS FOR RAISING THE VEHICLE:

R The vehicle is not moving faster than 40 km/h.
R If trailer socket is connected (trailer/rear bicycle rack): the vehicle is not
# Select t.
The indicator lamp lights up continuously.
The vehicle is set to high level +1.
Your selection is saved. The selected high level +1 remains active after the
vehicle is switched off.
439
F295 0075 02
THE VEHICLE IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

RACE START
INFORMATION ON RACE START
R If trailer socket is connected (trailer/rear bicycle rack): the vehicle is
% RACE START is available only for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
SETTING GPS-BASED RAISING OF THE VEHICLE
If the function is activated it is possible to save the vehicle position when rais‐
RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a
ing the vehicle level.
suitably high-grip road surface is required, and the tyres and vehicle must also
# Confirm the prompt. be in good condition.
The position of the vehicle is saved. When the previously saved position
is reached again, the zero-layer shows a query whether the vehicle level % RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE
should be raised again. START may be activated and used only on dedicated race cir‐
cuits, not on public roads.
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 383).
% Settings for GPS-based raising (/ page 437)
% Function of the zero-layer (/ page 526) & WARNING

Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is
LOWERING THE VEHICLE
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
# Select t.
The indicator lamp disappears. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐
ity of your vehicle.
The vehicle returns to normal level.
% Use normal level when towing a trailer. High-level driving is not RACE START WITH BOOST FUNCTION
permitted in trailer operation on public roads. The boost function for RACE START is available only for vehicles with the
AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package (/ page 380).
If the activation conditions are fulfilled, the additional engine output will be
enabled automatically during RACE START. In this case, vehicle acceleration
from a standstill will be even more dynamic.
440
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING RACE START # Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.

In vehicles with active ambient lighting, a special animation of the ambi‐
& WARNING ent light will play.
Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning The drive noise will become louder and the vehicle will vibrate. The seat
If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP®
mode selected, there is belts on the driver's and front passenger seats will be pre-tensioned.
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐ % If the activation conditions are not fulfilled, RACE START cannot
ity of your vehicle. be used. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual mes‐
sage will appear on the driver display.
Requirements:
R The vehicle is switched on and at normal operating temperature. The

temperature indicators on the driver display are white instead of blue.
R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.
R The driver's door is closed.
R All vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened properly and are
seated correctly.
R The front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1 RACE START display area activated
R The vehicle is on level ground. 2 Boost function display area available
R The vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) and the
parking brake is released. % What is shown in display area 1 will vary according to the menu
R The transmission is in position h. selected for the driver display.
R One of the C or B drive programs is selected (/ page 332).
# Display areas 1 will flash red on the driver's display and the RACE
START Release brake to start message will appear.
% RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE RACE START with boost function: if RACE START with boost function is
START may be activated and used only on dedicated race cir‐ activated, the race start messages will be supplemented with the Boost
cuits, not on public roads. active note. In addition, lower centre display range 2 will flash red
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 383). (vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package).
441
F295 0075 02
% If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START
will be cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear
on the driver display.
# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START
active message will appear on the driver display.
RACE START will be deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator

pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions is no longer ful‐
filled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear on the driver display. Menu Camera views (top view)
1 Menu Parking Assistance

% After being used several times in short succession, RACE START
2 Path indicating the route the wheels will take at the current steering angle
will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
Reversing camera 5 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m
from the rear area
FUNCTION OF THE REVERSING CAMERA
The reversing camera serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐ 6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐ 7 Trailer view (depending on the respective vehicle equipment)
vring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no persons, animals 8 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 452)
or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking. 9 Switching between wide-angle view and reversing camera with top view
% The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as it % When Active Parking Assist is active, the paths 2 are displayed
would appear in the inside mirror. in green (/ page 453).
VEHICLES WITH PARKING PACKAGE

The following camera perspectives are available on the central display:
442
F295 0075 02
C Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of
the trailer hitch
D Ball head of the trailer hitch
SYSTEM LIMITS
If the system is not ready for operation, the message System inoperative
appears on the driver display and/or on the central display.
If a camera perspective is selected and the central display is temporarily black

or does not show a camera image, the camera system is also faulty or is not
ready for operation.
Wide-angle view (example)

& WARNING
6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449) Risk of accident due to functional limitations of the reversing cam‐
8 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 452) era
A Switching between standard view and wide-angle view Functional limitations of the reversing camera could lead to a risk of
collision with persons or objects.
# Do not use the reversing camera if its functions are limited.
# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in

the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
THE REVERSING CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTI‐

ALLY FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.

R The boot lid is open.
Trailer view (example) R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or
spray.
6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)
R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if a light is shining into the
B Yellow guide line, locating aid
camera.
443
F295 0075 02
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on R Front camera
cleaning the reversing camera (/ page 720). R Two outside mirror cameras
R The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the
camera, its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist work‐
The cameras serve solely as aids and may show a distorted view of obstacles,
shop.
show them incorrectly or even omit them altogether. They are not a substitute
for you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no per‐
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle sons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and
rack). parking.
The following camera perspectives are available on the central display:

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or
by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particu‐
lar attention must be afforded in this case.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is

considerably restricted due to pixel errors.
Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 378).
360° Camera Overview of Camera views menu (example)
FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA

The 360° camera is a system comprising four cameras which cover the imme‐ 1 Menu Parking Assistance
diate vehicle surroundings. The cameras support you, for example, when park‐ 2 Top view with image from the front camera
ing or when exits are difficult to see. 3 3D view right-hand side of the vehicle
4 Switching between standard view and wide-angle view
THE 360° CAMERA INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING CAMERAS AND EVALU‐
5 Switching between reversing camera and trailer view (depending on the
ATES THEIR IMAGES:
respective vehicle equipment)
R Reversing camera 6 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 452)
444
F295 0075 02
7 3D auto view
8 3D view left-hand side of the vehicle
% The warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is shown in

all views (/ page 449).
Top view with image from front camera or reversing camera (example)
% Availability of the 3, 8 3D view and 7 3D auto view functions
is dependent upon the respective vehicle equipment. 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)
2 Path indicating the current steering angle
& WARNING
Risk of accidents due to objects not being displayed or being dis‐
played as heavily distorted
Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be
heavily distorted or not displayed at all.
Function of the guide lines (example)

# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the
manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m
from the rear area
2 Path indicating the route the wheels will take at the current steering angle
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
% When Active Parking Assist is active, paths and guide lines are
displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 453). 3D view left/right-hand side of the vehicle (example)
1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)

2 Switching between 3D view and 2D view
445
F295 0075 02
In the 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to
the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the transmission position,
the view is automatically adapted.
% Display of the area beneath the vehicle may deviate from the
actual circumstances.
Wide-angle view (example)
% The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a conventional

1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)
mirror image in the 3D views.
2 Switching between standard view and wide-angle view
If you select the trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the fol‐
lowing display appears:
3D auto view (example)
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 449)

Trailer view (example)
2 Guide lines
In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard view, facing 1 Switching between standard view and trailer view
forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when 2 Yellow guide line, locating aid
approaching obstacles. 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of
If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to a 3D view with free rotation.
the trailer hitch
You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.
% In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the
trailer hitch.
446
F295 0075 02
When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the THE 360° CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTIALLY FUNC‐
trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. TION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.

R The doors are open.
R An outside mirror is not completely extended.
R The boot lid is open.
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or
spray.
Side view of outside mirror camera in the trailer view (example) R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if a light is shining into the
camera.
1 Switch to the side view of the outside mirror cameras R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Refer to the notes on
SYSTEM LIMITS cleaning the 360° camera (/ page 720).
If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are
appears on the driver display and/or on the central display. damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their set‐
ting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If a camera perspective is selected and the central display is temporarily black
or does not show a camera image, the camera system is also faulty or is not
ready for operation. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the
vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide
lines and in the display of generated images.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to functional limitations of the 360° camera The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle
If the function of the 360° camera is restricted, there is a risk of colli‐
rack).
sion with persons or objects.
# Do not use the 360° camera in case of functional limitations. % Contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt direct sunlight
or other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particu‐
# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in
lar attention must be afforded in this case.
the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
447
F295 0075 02
MANAGING 360° CAMERA WITH GPS-ACTIVATION POSITIONS

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is Multimedia system:
considerably restricted due to pixel errors.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
RENAMING AN ACTIVATION POSITION

Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 378).
CALLING UP THE 360° CAMERA VIEWS USING THE BUTTON % You can determine activation positions in the Camera views menu
(/ page 444).
# Select u for the desired activation position.
# Select Edit.
# Enter a name and confirm.

The activation position is stored under the new name.
DELETING AN ACTIVATION POSITION
# Select u for the desired activation position.
# Select Delete entry.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be
# Confirm the prompt.
located in a different position on the centre console.
The activation position is deleted.
# Press button 1. OPENING THE CAMERA COVER

Multimedia system:
# Select the Camera views menu. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
# Select Open camera cover.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 444).
SELECTING A VIEW FOR THE 360° CAMERA (REVERSE GEAR)
# Engage reverse gear.
% The camera cover closes automatically after some time, or after
the vehicle is switched on or off.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 444).
448
F295 0075 02
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC DISPLAYS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY
FUNCTION OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which
monitors the area surrounding your vehicle . The distance between your vehi‐
cle and a detected obstacle is displayed visually and acoustically.
The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side.
These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper
while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and Example: vehicles with 360° camera
there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued.
Passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multi‐
In order that front or rear obstacles to the side can be displayed, the vehicle
must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle
has travelled a distance of one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be
shown.
Example: vehicles with reversing camera
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for

you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe 1 Ready for display at the front and rear
manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that 2 Ready for display all around
there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while 3 Ready for display all around and obstacles detected
manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective
areas 1 to 3 of the display are shown in blue.
THE COLOUR OF THE DISPLAY CHANGES DEPENDING ON THE DISTANCE

TO THE DETECTED OBSTACLE:
R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)

R Yellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
R Orange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
449
F295 0075 02
R Red: < 0.4 m
Vehicles with 360° camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending
on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.
An intermittent warning tone also sounds depending on the distance to the

obstacle detected. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia
system. In the Warn early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 1 m.
In the standard setting, from a shorter distance of 0.4 m.
Example: vehicles with reversing camera
IF YOU ARE NOT IN THE CAMERA & PARKING MENU AND AN OBSTACLE IN
THE VEHICLE'S PATH IS DETECTED, A POP-UP WINDOW 1 APPEARS ON
THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IF THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET:
R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than

12 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than
18 km/h.
Example: vehicles with 360° camera
Head-up display (example)
450
F295 0075 02
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance R Objects placed next to the vehicle
of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m at the sides 3 can also be dis‐
played on the head-up display.
OBSTACLES ON THE SIDES ARE NOT SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
VEHICLES WITH ACTIVE AMBIENT LIGHTING AND PARKING PACKAGE TIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
WITH REMOTE PARKING FUNCTIONS
R You park the vehicle and switch it off.
When Warning assistance is activated, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display
is also accompanied by ambient lighting. If an obstacle is detected, the ambi‐
R You open the doors.
ent lighting lights up in the same colour as the central display.
After the vehicle is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past
The active ambient lighting which accompanies the Parking Assist them before a new warning can be issued.
PARKTRONIC display is only intended to accentuate the display on the central
display, and not to replace it. OBSERVE ALSO THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
More information on ambient lighting: (/ page 280) R Reversing camera (/ page 442)
R 360° camera (/ page 444)
% The ambient lighting does not respond in the vicinity of the
driver display or behind the rear doors. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; otherwise the sys‐
tem cannot function properly (/ page 378).
% Depending on the selected setting, other functions may super‐ Vehicles with trailer hitch: If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is
sede the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly estab‐
In this case, the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist lished, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone.
PARKTRONIC do not occur.
PROBLEMS WITH PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three
SYSTEM LIMITS seconds and then goes out, and the é symbol appears on the driver dis‐
PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC DOES NOT NECESSARILY TAKE INTO play, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start
ACCOUNT THE FOLLOWING OBSTACLES: the vehicle again and check whether Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works in a
different location.
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or IF A WARNING TONE ALSO SOUNDS, THE CAUSES MAY BE AS FOLLOWS:
loading ramps of lorries
R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors (/ page 720).
R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side
451
F295 0075 02
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunc‐ Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in
tion: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified spe‐ the quick-access menu.
cialist workshop.
SETTING THE WARNING TONES OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking 5 PARKTRONIC
* NOTE
SETTING WARNING TONES
Vehicle damage when parking or manoeuvring due to nearby
objects
# Select Set warning tones.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects in the close- # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.
up range.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING AUDIO FADEOUT
# When parking or manoeuvring, pay particular attention to # Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fade for warnings.
objects that are under or above the sensors, e.g. flower pots The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced when a
or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects may otherwise be warning tone sounds in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
damaged.
or
Requirements # Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fadeout in trans.
position R.
R The camera menu is open.
The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced when
R Or: the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up window is displayed.
reverse gear is engaged.
SETTING WARNING TIMING
# Tap = on the central display.
# Select Time of warning.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator # Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.
lamp does not light up or the symbol é is displayed, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is not active. # Activate or deactivate Side warning.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the

vehicle is started.
452
F295 0075 02
Active Parking Assist The parking space is freely selectable. The parking direction (forwards or
reversing) can also be freely selected, depending on the orientation of the
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST parking space.
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses
If Active Parking Assist is available, the notification Ç appears on the driver
ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera or 360° camera. When
display. When the system detects parking spaces, the notification È
you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automati‐
cally measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. appears. The arrows show the side of the roadway on which free parking
spaces are located. These are then shown on the central display.
Active Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐ When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated
vring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no per‐ based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The parking and unparking pro‐
sons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path. cedures are assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.
Active Parking Assist offers the following functions: To start the parking procedure, press the button c (/ page 454) or go to
the navigation view (e.g. when near the destination) and select Active Parking
VEHICLES WITH REVERSING CAMERA Assist (/ page 527).
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST WILL BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
R Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway TIONS:
R You press the button c again.

The parking space is freely selectable. The parking procedure is executed with R You begin steering.
the vehicle reversing.
R You select the park position j.
VEHICLES WITH 360° CAMERA R You engage the electric parking brake.
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway

R ESP® intervenes.
R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway (either forwards
R You open the driver's door.
or reversing as desired) SYSTEM LIMITS
R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such from mark‐ If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.
ings (forexample at the roadside)
R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist OBSERVE ALSO THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
R Reversing camera (/ page 442)
453
F295 0075 02
R 360° camera (/ page 444) DO NOT USE ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS,
FOR EXAMPLE:
Objects above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. pro‐ R In extreme weather conditions, suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
truding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or parking space bounda‐ R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
ries are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also not
subsequently taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore prematurely guide R When snow chains are fitted.
you into the parking space or brake too late. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
R Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
Certain environmental conditions, suchas snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a
parking space being mismeasured. Parking spaces that are partially occupied R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or may be measured incor‐ R On steep downhill gradients of more than approximately 15 %.
rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level road surfaces with adequate R If the vehicle level has been offset, e.g. mounting the kerb on one side
grip. (vehicles with level control).
PARKING WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist & WARNING
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, tion range of Active Parking Assist
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
There is a danger of collision! R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. There is a danger of collision!
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking
spaces in which parking is not permitted or on unsuitable surfaces.
454
F295 0075 02
Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central display.
At speeds greater than approximately 16 km/h, the camera perspective on the

right-hand side of the screen switches off.
% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button 1 may also

be located in a different position on the centre console.
# Press the button 1. Parking Assist menu (example)
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the indicated vehicle path 4 into the cur‐
rently selected parking space 5 also appears.
# If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
# If necessary, select another parking space.
# Vehicles with 360° camera: to change the parking direction, tap the
selected parking space again.
# To start the parking procedure: press the button 1 again.
or
Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen)
# Depress the brake pedal and select Start parking procedure 6 (depend‐
# Select the menu Parking Assistance 2. ing on the respective vehicle equipment).
455
F295 0075 02
# Take your hands off the steering wheel.

The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The duration of the parking procedure is indicated by a progress bar.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking proce‐
dure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in
accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indi‐
cator accordingly.
Immediate parking via the Camera views menu
& WARNING # Select the Camera views menu.

Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐
ing out of a parking space
# When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position k, and the
symbol 7 appears in the camera image: press the button 1 again.
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space.
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
% The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in
# Pay attention to objects and other road users. immediate parking.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking pro‐

cedure with Active Parking Assist.
Following completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist fin-
ished message appears.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When necessitated by legal

requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position
during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission
position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.
456
F295 0075 02
EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
& WARNING
tion range of Active Parking Assist

There is a danger of collision!

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button 1 may also be
located in a different position on the centre console.
Requirements: # Press button 1.

R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera.
R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.
Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen)
# Select the menu Parking Assistance 2.
457
F295 0075 02
# If necessary, change the direction of exit 3. trol of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your‐
self again.
# To initiate the unparking procedure: press the button 1 again.
If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will
or brake the vehicle to a standstill.
# Depress the brake pedal and select Start unparking procedure 4 PAUSING ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
(depending on the respective vehicle equipment).
# If necessary, change the transmission position. Observe any messages & WARNING
displayed on the driver display and central display. Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
The vehicle moves out of the parking space. tion range of Active Parking Assist
The duration of the unparking procedure is indicated by a progress bar. IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when the unparking pro‐
cedure is initiated, and automatically switched off again when it is completed. R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
& WARNING # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐
ing out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can You can interrupt the parking or unparking procedure of Active Parking Assist
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. by performing one of the following actions, forexample:
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.
# Depress the brake pedal.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Open the front passenger door, a rear door or the boot.

# Apply the electric parking brake or activate the HOLD function.
cedure with Active Parking Assist. # To resume the parking or unparking procedure: gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Active
Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take con‐
458
F295 0075 02
% If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Remote Parking Assist
Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal gently to
FUNCTION OF REMOTE PARKING ASSIST
start the parking or unparking procedure.
% Remote Parking Assist is an additional function of Active Parking

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking
Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using
procedure. Ensure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the
Remote Parking Assist on public roads.
manoeuvring range. Observe also the system limits of Active Parking Assist.
If you are required to steer the wheels in the direction of the
AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST kerb, you must not use Remote Parking Assist.
Please note that you can only use Remote Parking Assist if you
have a valid driving licence and are in a fit state to drive.
& WARNING
tion range of Active Parking Assist Remote Parking Assist parks or releases your vehicle while you are outside
your vehicle. You can control the manoeuvring and parking process on your
mobile phone.
With Remote Parking Assist, you can perform all the parking and unparking
operations of Active Parking Assist. In addition, you can position the vehicle
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. directly in front of a garage or driveway and then park or unpark it with Remote
There is a danger of collision! Parking Assist.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Remote Parking Assist takes over starting, braking and steering. While Remote
Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked.
Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to
Persons or objects detected in the vehicle's path may trigger a sudden braking
the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains
action, which will in turn halt the parking or unparking procedure. The vehicle
with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure
will then remain at a standstill. The parking or unparking procedure is resumed
that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Also pay
if you depress the accelerator pedal.
attention to other vehicles.
Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or
unparking procedure. Ensure once again that no persons, animals or objects
are in the vehicle's path. Observe also the system limits of Active Parking
Assist.
459
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS OPERATING REMOTE PARKING ASSIST

IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS A MALFUNCTION OR SYSTEM LIMIT DURING Requirements
THE MANOEUVRING OR PARKING PROCESS, THE PROCESS IS ABORTED:
FOR THE REMOTE PARKING ASSIST FUNCTION, YOU WILL REQUIRE:
R The vehicle is brought to a standstill.
R The transmission position j is selected, and the electric parking brake R a user account with Mercedes me
is applied automatically. R the current Remote Parking Assist app for your vehicle model
R The vehicle is switched off. R a mobile phone
R The vehicle is still locked.
% A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://

A corresponding message is displayed on the mobile phone if the parking
process is cancelled.
Depending on the situation, you can take control of the procedure, manoeuvre THE FOLLOWING OPERATING SYSTEMS ARE SUPPORTED:
the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take control of the vehi‐
cle. R Android™
R Apple® iOS
The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 453).
Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to

a parking space being mismeasured or to connection problems with the & WARNING
mobile phone. Only use Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist
During parking, your distance from the vehicle should not exceed approx.
3.0 m At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corre‐ IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
sponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. When you approach THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
the vehicle again, you can continue the process. R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
460
F295 0075 02
Objects located above the detection range of Active Parking Assist will not be # Authorise the mobile phone using the Remote Parking Assist app in the
detected when the parking space is measured. They are therefore not taken vehicle (/ page 463).
into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. protruding loads,
SELECTING THE PARKING MANOEUVRE IN ADVANCE WHILE INSIDE THE
overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. In some circumstances, Active Parking
VEHICLE
Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.
# Stop the vehicle and select transmission position j.
& WARNING
Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings
If you manoeuvre, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using
Remote Parking Assist, observe the following:
# Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle
and the vehicle's surroundings.
# Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path

of your vehicle.
# Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle

and that neither you nor other road users could be endan‐
gered.
# Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify be located in a different position on the centre console.
possible dangers.
# If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. # Press button1.
No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking
procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the
parking procedure. Always ensure that vehicle access is guaranteed for other
road users.
# Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service, e.g. via the Mercedes me
homepage.
461
F295 0075 02
STARTING THE PARKING PROCEDURE WHILE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

# Unlock the vehicle.
CARRYING OUT A PARKING PROCEDURE WITH REMOTE PARKING ASSIST
% Keep the vehicle key with you during the parking procedure. You
can cancel the parking procedure and bring the vehicle to a
standstill by pressing a button on the key.
% Following completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is

# Select Parking Assistance 2 menu. locked.
# For further information on Remote Parking Assist: select 3.

If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is
# If necessary, select another parking space 4 or select 5 to drive ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited period of time.
straight ahead into a garage, forexample. # Start the Remote Parking Assist app on the mobile phone and connect to
# If necessary, change parking direction 6. the vehicle.
# Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking Assist app.
% Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist

(/ page 454) and continue with the Remote Parking Assist from % The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when start‐
any vehicle position. To do this, stop the parking process and ing the parking procedure, and switched off again upon comple‐
engage transmission position j. tion.
# Switch off and exit the vehicle taking the key with you.
STARTING THE PARKING PROCEDURE WITHOUT SELECTING IN ADVANCE
% If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is
interrupted while a parking manoeuvre is being performed, the
# Stop the vehicle and engage transmission position j.
manoeuvre can be continued if the connection is re-established
# Switch off and exit the vehicle taking the key with you. within a short period of time.
462
F295 0075 02
AUTHORISING/DEAUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE FOR REMOTE PARK‐

& WARNING ING ASSIST
Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐ Multimedia system:
ing out of a parking space 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out 5 Remote Parking Assist
and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.
AUTHORISING A NEW MOBILE PHONE
This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. To be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorise your
mobile phone. You can authorise up to ten mobile phones.
# Pay attention to objects and other road users.
# Select Remote Parking Assist.
cedure with Remote Parking Assist. # In the opened window, select Authorise a new device.
Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect.
# Following completion of the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle # Start the Remote Parking Assist app and then start the authorisation
doors, windows and the boot are closed. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ process.
ing away.
A connection prompt is displayed.
CANCELLING THE PARKING PROCEDURE
You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time
# Scan the QR code on the central display.
and bring the vehicle to a standstill. The mobile phone is authorised.
# Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist app. DEAUTHORISING MOBILE PHONES
# Select Remote Parking Assist.
or
# In the opened window, select the device to be deauthorised.
# Press a button on the vehicle key.
# To deauthorise a mobile phone: Select a mobile phone and confirm
or with Yes.
The mobile phone is deleted from the device list.
# Pull a door handle.
# To deauthorise all mobile phones: Select Deauthorise all devices and
confirm with Yes.
All mobile phones are deleted from the device list.
463
F295 0075 02
Manoeuvring assistant play, the symbol appears together with the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC pop-up.
FUNCTION OF DRIVE AWAY ASSIST
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If Drive Away Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you having
the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring,
briefly restricted to approximately 2 km/h. parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no persons,
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.
A RISK OF COLLISION MAY ARISE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR
EXAMPLE:
& WARNING
R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals.
Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive
R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. Away Assist
R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force. Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic sit‐
uations.
DRIVE AWAY ASSIST IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS: # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
R If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed on Drive Away Assist alone.
to k or h. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the
R If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 1.0 m since coming to a traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive
standstill. action.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
SYSTEM LIMITS
The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assis- The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 453).
tance menu (/ page 467).
On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is limited.
If a critical situation is detected, the É symbol appears in red in the selec‐
ted view in the Camera & parking menu. If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is attached to the trailer hitch,
and the electrical connection is correctly established, Drive Away Assist is not
available when reversing.
% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the É symbol appears in
grey. If the Camera & parking menu is not open in the central dis‐
464
F295 0075 02
FUNCTION OF CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC AHEAD

The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when exiting a park‐
ing space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to R If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically
the vehicle. when crossing traffic is detected.
R A warning appears if Active Parking Assist is not active, but the Camera
THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CON‐ & parking menu is open.
DITIONS:
R If the Camera & parking menu is not open, the system cannot react to
R Warning for crossing traffic behind: The vehicle is driving in reverse at a crossing traffic.
speed slower than approx. 10 km/h.
R Warning for crossing traffic ahead: The vehicle is driving forwards at a The cross traffic warning serves solely as an aid, and is not a substitute for you
speed slower than approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is shown on paying attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring,
the central display (/ page 448). parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no persons,
animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.
The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be deactivated or activated in the
Manoeuvring assistance menu. & WARNING
Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the
Depending on the country, the Warning for crossing traffic behind can also be cross traffic warning
deactivated or activated (/ page 467).
The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traf‐
If a critical situation is detected, the symbol L appears in red in the selec‐ fic situations.
ted view in the Camera & parking menu. # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC BEHIND on the cross traffic warning alone.
R The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detec‐

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the
ted. traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive
action.
R If the Camera & parking menu is not opened and a critical situation is
detected, a warning appears on the central display together with the
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up.
465
F295 0075 02
SYSTEM LIMITS When close-range braking is triggered, the symbol º appears in red in the
selected view in the Camera & parking menu.
% If the cross traffic warning is not available, the L symbol
appears in grey. % If close-range braking is not available, the symbol º appears
in grey.
The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 453).
Close-range braking serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
not possible. vring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no per‐
sons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS NOT
AVAILABLE:
& WARNING
R on uphill gradients
Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring
R Warning for crossing traffic behind: if a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicy‐ brake function
cle rack is attached to the trailer hitch, and the electrical connection is
The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people.
correctly established.
Other obstacles are not detected by the function.
FUNCTION OF CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING
In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.
Close-range braking can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle
is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. on the manoeuvring brake function alone.
CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING CAN INTERVENE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDI‐ # Be ready to brake.
TIONS:
R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h. SYSTEM LIMITS

R The camera image is shown on the central display (/ page 448). OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453)

Depending on the respective country, close-range braking can be deactivated
or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 467). R 360° camera (/ page 444)
466
F295 0075 02
THE CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE FOL‐ Within a radius of approx. 150 m, only one parking or unparking procedure can
LOWING SITUATIONS: be recorded.
R on uphill gradients Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e.g.
R if transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the in public parking spaces, is not permitted.
Memory Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE MANOEUVRING ASSISTANT having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
Multimedia system: manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.
SYSTEM LIMITS
% This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 101). Observe the system limits of Active Parking Assist (/ page 453).
& WARNING
% The Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistant function is not Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
available in all countries. tion range of Memory Parking Assist
# Select Manoeuvring assistance. THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
# Activate or deactivate the desired manoeuvring assistant. R Memory Parking Assist may steer too early.
Memory Parking Assist This result in a collision.
FUNCTION OF MEMORY PARKING ASSIST # In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist.
Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking
space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 500 m
(100 m per parking or unparking procedure). Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist
may not be detected during the parking procedure.
During parking or unparking, the system can travel a previously stored dis‐
tance of up to approximately 100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for Drawbars of parked trailers that protrude into the parking space, for example,
example, from the driveway entrance into the garage. may not be detected.
467
F295 0075 02
DO NOT USE MEMORY PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS,

FOR EXAMPLE: % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button 1 may also
R In extreme weather conditions, suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. # Press the button 1.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.
R When snow chains are fitted.
RECORDING A PARKING PROCEDURE USING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements:
R There are no public roads included within the travel route, e.g. entirely
within your own property.
R The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself,
suchas fences, walls or trees. A certain distance must therefore be driven
after starting the vehicle. If insufficient reference points are detected in
the surrounding area, no new route can be recorded. # Select the menu Memory Parking Assist 2.
R Sufficient distance is maintained between the vehicle and surrounding
objects as the parking procedure is being recorded. # Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the assis‐
ted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance.
# To start recording: tap 3.
% If not all conditions for a recording are met, the symbol 3 is

greyed out.
# To start the recording, press the button 1.
468
F295 0075 02
# Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed a speed of # Press the button 1.
8 km/h. The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.
# To stop recording: stop the vehicle and tap 3 again.
The recording is stored.
It is also possible to record the unparking procedure using the same method
with Memory Parking Assist. Refer to the information on the central display.
% In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename
stored parking procedures.
PARKING WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements: # Select the Memory Parking Assist 2 menu.
R A parking procedure has been recorded. # Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored park‐
ing procedure.
# To start the parking procedure: press 6.
# Select the stored parking procedure from the list.
# Follow the instructions on the central display.

The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You

are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accord‐
ance with the traffic conditions.

# Following completion of the parking procedure, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
469
F295 0075 02
EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements:
R The unparking procedure was recorded together with the corresponding

parking procedure and stored separately, without switching off the vehi‐
cle in between.
R The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist.
Alternatively, manually position the vehicle at the starting point of the
recorded unparking procedure.
# Select the menu Memory Parking Assist 2.

STARTING THE UNPARKING PROCEDURE
# Press 6.
# Confirm the saved unparking procedure.

The vehicle drives the recorded route.
% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You

are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accord‐
ance with the traffic conditions.
# Take control of the vehicle after the unparking procedure has been com‐
# Press the button 1.
pleted.
The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.
470
F295 0075 02
SETTING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Multimedia system:
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking FUNCTION OF TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST
5 Memory Parking Assist
RENAMING A RECORDING & WARNING

Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers
# Select Memory Parking Assist.
Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer
# Select ´ next to the desired recording. Manoeuvring Assist.
# Enter a name and confirm with OK. Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction
and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.
DELETING A RECORDING
# Select Memory Parking Assist. # Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed
drawbars and axles.
# Select E next to the desired recording.
The selected recording will be deleted.
DELETING ALL RECORDINGS * NOTE
# Select Memory Parking Assist. Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations
The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to
# Select Delete all tracks.
overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.
% Alternatively, you can delete all data in Memory Parking Assist by

# Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations
resetting the multimedia system (/ page 564). while manoeuvring.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. The
reversing camera monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and the
trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits
your speed.
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you
having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that
471
F295 0075 02
there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while
manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
You can enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system,
or use a straightening or 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening
manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and
straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction.
Observe the notes regarding trailer operation (/ page 474).
SYSTEM LIMITS
OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 453) % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button 1 may also
R 360° camera (/ page 444) be located in a different position on the centre console.
# Engage reverse gear k.
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING # Press the button 1.
SITUATIONS:
The camera image is shown on the central display.
R The uphill gradient is greater than approximately 15 %.
# Take your hands off the steering wheel.
USING TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST
Requirements:
R The vehicle has been started and is stationary.

R A trailer is selected in the Vehicle menu (/ page 480).
R A trailer has been detected.
R The uphill gradient is less than approximately 15 %.
R The boot lid is closed.
R The electric parking brake is not applied.
% This image is shown as an example and is without trailer.
R The driver's seat belt is fastened.
472
F295 0075 02
You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist menu. the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer
The manoeuvres available depend on the trailer's current articulation angle the trailer, the greater the maximum articulation angle (max.
and length. approximately 60°).
# To adjust the articulation angle: select 4. To change the articulation

angle, swipe to the left or right on the central display in the entire area % Be aware of all surroundings and always remain ready to brake.
of the camera image.
or
# To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select 2.

The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direc‐
tion of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short
countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversing,
which then guides it back to the desired line. This allows the vehicle to
align with the trailer, while at the same time maintaining the trailer's
direction.
or
# To activate the 90° manoeuvre:

R Align the vehicle in the same direction (line) as the trailer.
R Select 3 (left or right).
The system calculates the articulation angle so that a trailer can be man‐
oeuvred into a driveway at the most acute angle possible when it is per‐
pendicular to its own vehicle. After the manoeuvre, the vehicle is aligned
again in the trailer's direction.
# Accelerate and brake as required.
% The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the

trailer. The system calculates this by driving the vehicle forwards,
including cornering. Before the trailer length has been calculated,
473
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Trailer hitch
Trailer hitch
Notes on trailer operation & WARNING

Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving
* NOTE If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may
The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐ start to swerve.
tion of trailer hitches
This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The
The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
car/trailer combination may even overturn.
able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited. # Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/
trailer combination by increasing your speed.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of
trailer hitches. # Reduce the speed and do not countersteer.
# Brake if necessary.
Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your

vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for
trailer operation.
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE TONGUE WEIGHT:
R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible
tongue weight
R use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight
474
F295 0075 02
DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING VALUES:

Folding the ball neck out and in
R permissible trailer load
R permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle & WARNING
R gross vehicle weight rating of the towing vehicle Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
R permissible gross mass of the trailer If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
R maximum permissible speed of the trailer # Always engage the ball neck as described.
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY:
R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maxi‐ & WARNING
mum load Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
R the lighting of the connected trailer is operational The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
been properly engaged.
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination may not There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating
permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed # Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. structed.
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: If the socket of the trailer hitch is occupied (e.g. by # Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.
a trailer or rear bicycle rack), the vehicle will be set to the normal level at
speeds greater than 30 km/h, regardless of the drive program.
* NOTE
% When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function (/ page 471). # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
hitch, retract the ball neck.
475
F295 0075 02
# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
hitch itself may be damaged in the process. Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
# Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fix‐
ture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is per‐
mitted.
# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the

information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing
eye."
FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check
lock message will appear on the driver display.
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
# Keep the swivel range clear.
476
F295 0075 02
FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY:
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 928)

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle level may be changed uninten‐
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. tionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncouple the trailer dur‐
ing this time, you may become trapped. In addition, other people could
The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the
Indicator lamp 1 will flash. tyres or underneath the vehicle.
Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling:
# Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.
# Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate

DYNAMIC SELECT.
# Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.
THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:
# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.
behind the bumper. R Vehicles with AIRMATIC: ensure that the vehicle is at the normal level
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will (/ page 435).
disappear.
477
F295 0075 02
Use normal level when towing a trailer. High-level driving is not permit‐ R AIRMATIC
ted in trailer operation on public roads.
COUPLING UP A TRAILER
TRAILERS WITH A 7-PIN PLUG CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE VEHICLE
WITH THE FOLLOWING ADAPTERS: NOTE
*
Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge
R adapter plug
R adapter cable Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can
damage the starter battery.
THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF # Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET: battery.
R the trailer is connected correctly

R the trailer lighting system is in working order
A CORRECTLY CONNECTED TRAILER INFLUENCES, AMONG OTHER
THINGS, THE FUNCTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up
to the vehicle.
R ESP® trailer stabilisation
R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
R Active Lane Keeping Assist
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Active Parking Assist
R Blind Spot Assist
R Active Blind Spot Assist
R Drive Away Assist # Open the socket cap.
R Cross traffic warning
# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on the socket.
R Close-range braking
R Reversing camera # Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as it will go.
R 360° camera
478
F295 0075 02
# Let the cap engage.

* NOTE
# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake
adapter cable).
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun
# Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during brake.
cornering. # Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.
IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES, A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE
DRIVER'S DISPLAY EVEN IF THE TRAILER HAS BEEN CONNECTED COR‐
RECTLY:
& WARNING
R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system. Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum cur‐ Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle may lower when you disconnect
rent (50 mA). the trailer cable.
This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are
% Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.
up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the # Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immedi‐
ignition lock.
ate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the
trailer cable.
UNCOUPLING A TRAILER

& WARNING
Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a # Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your
# Uncouple the trailer.
hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Place the cover on the ball head.
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.
% Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch
the vehicle on and then off again.
479
F295 0075 02
Selecting a trailer type

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Trailer type
CONFIGURING SETTINGS FOR A TRAILER

The settings on this menu will improve the energy forecast at the start of the
trip. As a result, charging stations will be selected more accurately, for exam‐
ple, and charging time will be optimised.
# Select the desired trailer type.
# Select the maximum permissible speed for the selected trailer.
# To save changes: select Confirm.
% When contact with the trailer socket is established (trailer/rear

bicycle rack), a menu will automatically appear on the display.
R Bicycle rack
R Small trailer
R Large trailer
480
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Bicycle rack function
Bicycle rack function
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of accident due to improper handling of the bicycle rack Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or
THE BICYCLE RACK MAY DETACH FROM THE VEHICLE IN THE FOL‐ improperly used bicycle rack.
LOWING CASES: # Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly
as described below.
R If the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
R If the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
R If the bicycle rack is attached to the ball neck below the ball head.
* NOTE
FOR YOUR SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF OTHER ROAD USERS, Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING: # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
R Always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. hitch, retract the ball neck.
R Always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐
cle.
R Use the bicycle rack only for transporting bicycles.
* NOTE
R Always secure the bicycle rack properly by attaching it to the ball The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐
head and, if possible, also to the guide pins of the ball neck. tion of trailer hitches
R When transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks with The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
additional support on the guide pins of the ball neck. able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
R Use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. lighting system is prohibited.
R Always observe the operating instructions of the bicycle rack.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of
trailer hitches.
481
F295 0075 02
NOTES ON LOADING
The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head,
the greater the load on the trailer hitch.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible

R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible
across the vehicle's longitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g.

Trailer hitch with additional guide pin baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the
bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of grav‐
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be ity of the bicycle rack.
transported.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check
THE FOLLOWING BICYCLE RACK DESIGNS ARE POSSIBLE: them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.
R When mounted by being attached to ball head 1, the maximum load Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view
capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles. may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the
R When mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin 2, the maximum load trailer hitch will increase.
capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles.
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack
and the bicycle rack load.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle
(/ page 320).
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear Load distribution on the bicycle rack
axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
the tyre pressure table (/ page 756). 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.
482
F295 0075 02
Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:
LOADING THE BICYCLE RACK

Attaching without additional guide pins (max. 3 bicycles)
Total weight of bicycle rack Up to 75 kg

and load
Max. distance 1 420 mm
Attaching with additional guide pins (max. 4 bicycles)
Total weight of bicycle rack Up to 100 kg

and load
When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg,
always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide
pins.
483
F295 0075 02
Driving and parking Vehicle towing instructions
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat
towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems
may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow
bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing
vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
R Permitted towing methods (/ page 737)

R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
(/ page 65)
Back to Contents484
F295 0075 02
Driver's display
Driver's display
Overview of status indicators on the driver

Notes on the driver display 486 505
display
Overview of status indicators on the driver

Notes on the range 487 507
display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Driver display malfunction 488
Operating the driver display 489
Driver display menus 491
Head-up display 501
Function of the power availability display 504
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Notes on the driver display
Notes on the driver display
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver display malfunctions R Various menus, such as Assistance and Navigation
if the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, you will R Status displays for the driving systems
not receive information about such issues as other function restrictions, R Display messages
speed, current drive range and the status of the electric parking brake.
This will impair operating safety. Some menu content and settings can be changed (/ page 492).
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic

conditions and switch it off. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Have the vehicle transported rather than towed.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immedi‐
ately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
THE DRIVER DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING BASIC INFORMATION:
R Speed and power meter level

R Range according to average consumption, personal driving style or high-
consumption driving style
R State of charge of the high-voltage battery
R Indicator and warning lamps
486
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Notes on the range
Notes on the range
THE RANGE IN GENERAL RANGE WITH HIGH CONSUMPTION
R All ranges shown are assumptions based on various calculation bases. R The minimum range shows the range when consumption is high, e.g. as a
The actual range achieved may differ from the range displayed. result of a sporty driving style or having the air conditioning system
R Outside temperatures, climate control settings, vehicle interior tempera‐ turned on.
tures, road conditions, driving style etc. directly influence the achievable R This range is determined based on past and current consumption figures.
range.
R Pay attention to the charging prompts at all times. ELECTRIC ENERGY CONSUMPTION
R The From start and From reset consumption figures take into account all
RANGE ACCORDING TO PERSONAL DRIVING STYLE
active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's opera‐
R Your previous personal consumption will be taken into account when the tional readiness õ.
range is being calculated.
R While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional
information about the route ahead can be included in the range calcula‐ % If the range maximisation function is switched on, the range on
tion. the speedometer may increase depending on the potential range
(/ page 327).
RANGE WITH LOW CONSUMPTION
R The maximum range shows the potential range when consumption is low,
e.g. as a result of economical driving or having the air conditioning sys‐
tem turned off.
487
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Driver display malfunction
Driver display malfunction
What to do in the event of a driver display malfunction

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver display malfunctions If the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, stop the vehi‐
cle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch it off. The
if the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, you will
following procedure is recommended in this eventuality:
not receive information about such issues as other function restrictions,
speed, current drive range and the status of the electric parking brake. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
This will impair operating safety. # While the vehicle is stationary, continue to hold the brake pedal down.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic # Press the j button on the DIRECT SELECT lever.
conditions and switch it off. Do not continue driving.
# Apply the parking brake.
# Slowly release the brake pedal and make sure that the vehicle is secured
# Have the vehicle transported rather than towed. against rolling away.
# Press and hold the start/stop button (/ page 367) once for roughly
Identifying a driver display malfunction three seconds to switch off the drive system.
A DRIVER DISPLAY MALFUNCTION CAN BE IDENTIFIED BY CHARACTERIS‐ # Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
TICS SUCH AS THE FOLLOWING:
# Have the vehicle transported rather than towed.
R When the vehicle is switched on, the driver display continues to show
nothing but a black screen.
R The driver display restarts.
% In addition, note the additional information about switching off
the vehicle (/ page 367)and the notes on transporting the vehi‐
R The content freezes.
cle (/ page 740).
R The display stops showing data such as speed. Various indicator and
warning lamps are also displayed.
488
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Operating the driver display
Operating the driver display
SCROLLING ON THE MENU BAR

& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐

mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying

attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary.
1 Back button
2 Main menu button
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv‐ 3 Touch Control
ing when operating the driver display.
489
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Operating the driver display
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
1 Back button
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control
The controls on the left of the steering wheel manage the content of the driver
display. Swipe with your finger on Touch Control 3 to navigate vertically or
horizontally through the content. Press the Touch Control to confirm your
selection.
% To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the

tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of
the Touch Control on the central display (/ page 533).
# Briefly press main menu button 2.
# Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3.
490
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Driver display menus
Driver display menus
Notes on menus on the driver display R Service

R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE
& WARNING
equipment On some of these menus, you can choose from a range of information for the
centre display content.
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. the menu-specific display content.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
mits.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driv‐
ing when operating the driver display.
THE FOLLOWING MENUS CAN BE CALLED UP VIA THE MENU BAR ON THE
DRIVER DISPLAY:
R Understated
R Sport
R Classic
R Navigation
R Assistance
491
F295 0075 02
Calling up and operating menus on the driver # Press main menu button 2 on the steering wheel.
The menu bar will be shown in the lower area of the driver display.
display
CALLING UP A MENU ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Swipe to the left or right on Touch Control 3 and select a menu (e.g.
the Classic menu) on the menu bar.

CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU
# To call up: press Touch Control 3.
# To exit: press back button 1.

BROWSING THROUGH DISPLAY CONTENT OR LISTS
1 Back button
# Swipe vertically or horizontally on Touch Control 3.
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control
492
F295 0075 02
% On some menus, an index character will be displayed at the right Calling up the Classic or Understated menu
edge of the centre display content to indicate how the informa‐
Driver display:
tion has been sorted.
4 Classic
PRESETTING DISPLAYS INFORMATION FOR SELECTING THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT

You can preset individually configured information of a menu and thus deter‐ The Classic menu shows the driver display separated into speedometer and
mine the standard display. power availability display. The area in between can be filled with various types
of information.
# Press Touch Control 3 until the bar is completely filled.
Answer the Set direct entry? query as follows.
# Swipe to the left on Touch Control 3 and select Yes.
# To call up presettings: press back button 1 on the upper level of a

menu.
1 Speedometer
2 Recommended maximum speed when range monitoring and route guid‐
% Pressing back button 1 on the standard display will open the ance are active
previous menu. 3 Digital speedometer
4 Display area for output
RESETTING VALUES 5 Display area for recuperated power (recuperation)
# To call up the Options submenu: press Touch Control 3. 6 Outside temperature
7 Centre display content (example: trip computer)
# Select Yes .
8 Time
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3. 9 State of charge indicator
A Range according to personal driving style (/ page 487)
B Range when consumption is low (/ page 487)
493
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION CAN BE SHOWN IN THE CENTRE DIS‐ R Display 5 will change when intelligent recuperation is activated
PLAY CONTENT 7: (/ page 324).
R Trip and total distance CHANGING THE RADIO STATION OR TRACK ON THE STATION OR TRACK
R Distance From start and From reset LIST
You can change radio stations or tracks on the station or track list in the centre
R ECO display
display content with audio information.
R Range trend display
R Current consumption THE FOLLOWING WILL BE ADJUSTED IN THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:
R ATTENTION ASSIST R Configuring the radio station and track lists.
R Audio R Switching between tracks
R Navigation (with changing navigation instructions) R Setting the frequency band
THE FOLLOWING VALUES WILL BE DISPLAYED FOR TRIP COMPUTER 7:
R Distance covered in electric mode

R Electric energy consumption
R Driving time
R Average speed
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch Control and select the dis‐ 1 Track list in the centre display content (example)
play content. # To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the Touch
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE CLASSIC MENU: Control and select a radio station or track on the station or track list 1.
R Recommended maximum speed 2 ensures that the destination is
reached with active route guidance. The state of charge that is desired % The radio station or track displayed when the vehicle is restarted
and entered will be taken into account. If it becomes necessary to limit depends on the user profile used for the previous trip.
the vehicle's speed to reach the destination safely with the specified
state of charge, the recommended maximum speed will be displayed on
the speedometer. A message will also appear on the driver display.
Please note that despite recommended maximum speed 2, the maxi‐
mum permissible speed must not be exceeded.
494
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUB‐

MENU, FOR EXAMPLE:
Calling up the Service menu
Driver display:
R Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map set‐
tings 4 Service
R Resetting the trip odometer The current status of the vehicle is shown on the Service menu.
R Resetting the trip computer From start # To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
R Resetting the trip computer From reset THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT IS AVAILABLE ON THE SERVICE
R Resetting the ECO display values MENU (EQUIPMENT-DEPENDENT):
CHANGING COLOUR SETTINGS ON THE UNDERSTATED MENU R Information about how many messages are in the message memory
# Call up the Understated menu via the driver display menu bar. R Tyre pressure:
- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
# To call up the colour list: press the Touch Control.
tem (/ page 757)
# To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left- - Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 757)
hand Touch Control and select the colour setting. R ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date (/ page 705)
# Press the Touch Control to confirm. R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: temperature display (high-voltage battery,
front and rear high-voltage motors)
# To exit the colour list: press the back button G.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:

% Depending on the equipment, the selected colour adjustment
will be adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multime‐ R Tyre pressure (/ page 757)
dia system. When you select the Understated menu on the driver R Message memory (/ page 856)
display, the content in the MBUX multimedia system will also be
reduced.
Calling up the Assistance menu
Driver display:
4 Assistance
The Assistance menu displays various driver assistance systems and naviga‐
tion instructions.
495
F295 0075 02
# To call up the display: select Assistance on the driver display. THE CONTENT ON THE ASSISTANT DISPLAY WILL ADAPT TO THE FOLLOW‐
ING SITUATIONS:
# Press the Touch Control.
R Number of lanes detected
R Change of direction, e.g. lane change
R Current road conditions
R Road users detected
% The assistant display will not display other detected obstacles

with the exception of road users.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indicator on the assistant display (exam‐
ple)
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE DRIVING SIT‐ THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:
UATION: R Starting route guidance
R The navigation instructions in the left-hand display section R With active route guidance: end route guidance
R The traffic light view in the right-hand display section R Call up previous destinations and favourites
R The display of the driver assistance systems R Start new route guidance to a recent destination
R The level of detail on the assistant display R Start new route guidance to a favourite
THE FOLLOWING STATUS DISPLAYS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE ASSISTANT Calling up the Supersport menu
DISPLAY:
Requirements:
R Y Green: pedestrian detection active
R Y Grey: pedestrian detection enabled R For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.
R ¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is ena‐
bled and ready for operation Driver display:
R ¸ Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is ena‐ 4 Supersport
bled but not ready for operation # To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
496
F295 0075 02
# To select: Swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch Control and select

the display content. % The AMG-specific content for temperature, engine data and set-
up depends on the vehicle equipment. You can configure the set-
up display content either using the buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 335).
DEPENDING ON THE SELECTED CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT 2, THE FOL‐

LOWING WILL BE DISPLAYED IN THE OUTER AREA OF THE MENU:
1 Display area for output R Power display as a percentage

2 Centre display content (example: power display) R Current engine output and current torque
3 Display area for recuperated power (recuperation)
Calling up the Track Pace menu

% The displays for output 1 and recuperated power 3 are given
either as percentages or as absolute values. Requirements:
R For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.

CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT 2 OF THE SUPERSPORT MENU SHOWS THE
FOLLOWING CONTENT:
Driver display:
R Power display (electric drive support) 4 TRACK PACE
R Temperature display (high-voltage battery and front and rear high-volt‐ The Track Pace function is intended only for closed race tracks. Do not use this
age motors) function on public roads, and adapt your driving style to your personal capa‐
R Set-up (drive, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension and sound) bilities and the ambient conditions.
R G-force THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THE TRACK PACE
R Trip and total distance MENU:
R Distance From start and From reset
R G-meter
R Current consumption
R Race track selected
R Audio
R Braking and acceleration procedure
R Navigation
497
F295 0075 02
R Gear currently selected While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter will show the forces that are exer‐
ted on the vehicle occupants both laterally and in the direction of travel. The
maximum values will appear in red in the coordinate system.
Calling up the Sport menu

Driver display:
4 Sport
The Sport menu shows information about electric mode.
Indicators on the Track Pace menu (example)
1 G-meter # To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
2 Centre display content (example: electric drive support display)
3 Telemetry display (example: selected race track)
# To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
THE DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE TRACK PACE MENU WILL ADAPT TO THE
SELECTED SETTINGS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:
R Gear display
R Electric drive support display 1 Maximum available output
R Recuperated power display 2 Current output
R G-meter 3 Recuperative braking
R Braking points 4 G-force display
R Acceleration 5 Selected recuperation level
R Quarter-miles 6 Range trend display
R Race track selected on the central display 7 State of charge of the high-voltage battery
R Current race The range indicator on the driver display will vary depending on the menu
R Record route selected.
498
F295 0075 02
3 Traffic incident indicator

4 Currently selected route
5 Indicator showing vehicle's current position
6 Change-of-direction symbol
7 Recommended lane (white)
8 Lane not recommended (grey)
9 Current lane
Display content for range
1 Range when consumption is high (/ page 487)
2 Range according to personal driving style (/ page 487) % The level of detail in the navigation instructions in the left-hand
3 Range when consumption is low (/ page 487) display section may vary.
# To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe upwards or downwards

Calling up the Navigation menu on the Touch Control.
Driver display:
4 Navigation % If you do not operate anything in Autozoom, the system will reset
the scale of the map view already selected after a short time.
The Navigation menu shows the relevant map with navigation instructions. You can set the map scale permanently in the MBUX multimedia
# To call up the menu: press the Touch Control.
CHANGING THE SCALE OF THE SELECTED MAP VIEW
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:
R With active route guidance: end route guidance

R Select route guidance
R Map settings
% If the current route guidance is ended on the Navigation menu of

1 Distance to the change of direction the driver display, it will also be ended in the MBUX multimedia
system.
2 Road to which the change of direction leads
499
F295 0075 02
On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the Destinations and
Map settings categories.
YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE DESTINATIONS CATE‐

GORY:
R Call up previous destinations and favourites

R Start new route guidance to a favourite
% The two options Work and Home will be displayed in Favourites

even if no address is stored.
YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE MAP SETTINGS CATE‐
GORY:
R Activate auto zoom

R Set the map view, satellite view and route overview.
THE FOLLOWING MAP VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE NAVIGATION MENU:
R Entire route
R 2D direction of travel
R 2D north-up
R 3D map
% There is an additional navigation view on the front passenger dis‐

play. The front passenger can thus assist the driver with route
guidance (/ page 602).
500
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Head-up display
Head-up display
Function of the head-up display HEAD-UP DISPLAY CONTENT WITH NAVIGATION (9X3°)
The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision,
for example.
YOU CAN USE THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY MENU BAR TO SELECT DIFFERENT
CONTEXTS, E.G.:
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport

R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE 1 Navigation instructions
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Race 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
R Minimal 3 Status of Active Steering Assist
R Sport 4 Current speed
R Standard 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control)
R Settings 6 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)
R Head-up display on/off When you receive a call, the 6 Call waiting message will appear on the
head-up display and the driver display.
501
F295 0075 02
HEAD-UP DISPLAY ON THE SUPERSPORT MENU (AMG VEHICLES)

Operating the head-up display
SELECTING DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY VIA THE MENU
BAR OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Press the main menu button ò.
# To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the
Touch Control.
1 Output obtained as a percentage

2 Recuperation setting
3 Current speed, set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control), detec‐
ted traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)
When you receive a call, the 6 Call waiting message will appear on the
head-up display and the driver display.
SWITCHING BETWEEN DISPLAY CONTENT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY
SYSTEM LIMITS
# Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control.
VISIBILITY IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IN PARTIC‐
ULAR: A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up
display.
R Seat position
# To confirm: press the a button.
R Image position setting
R Light conditions SWITCHING BACK TO THE DRIVER DISPLAY
R Wet road surfaces # Press the G or ò button.
R Objects on the display cover SETTING THE POSITION AND BRIGHTNESS
R Polarisation in sunglasses # Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control and select Settings on the
menu bar of the head-up display.
# Press the Touch Control.

The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graph‐
ics on the head-up display as well as on the driver display.
502
F295 0075 02
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch Con‐

trol.
Setting the head-up display in the multimedia
system
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the Touch Con‐
trol. Multimedia system:
The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved auto‐ 4© 5ß 5y
matically.
SWITCHING THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY ON/OFF
# Press the G or a button to exit the settings. # Select Head-up display.
The head-up display is activated or deactivated.
Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver display:
4©
SWITCHING ON
# Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
# Press Touch Control a.

SWITCHING OFF
# Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
# Swipe on the Touch Control and select Head-up display.
# Press Touch Control a.
503
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Function of the power availability display
Function of the power availability display
When maximum recuperated power 3 is reached, the additional desired

deceleration will be set via the brake control system. Also brake with the
service brake if necessary.
1 Current output
2 Available operating energy output
3 Recuperated energy (recuperation)
4 Recuperation level set
The maximum operating energy output is available in normal operating mode.
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE OPERATING ENERGY OUTPUT AVAILABLE

MAY DEVIATE FROM THE MAXIMUM VALUE:
R When the outside temperatures are very high or low

R In the event of very high output requests over an extended period of
time
R When the high-voltage battery's state of charge is very low
R When the drive system is malfunctioning
The values displayed serve only as guidance. The operating energy output
value displayed may deviate from the actual value.
504
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display
Overview of status indicators on the driver display
The status indicators for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in h Cruise control (/ page 393)
display sections 1 to 4.
È Limiter (/ page 393)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396)
Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 396)
æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 419)
Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 419)
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 405)
± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 409)
% The number, position and presentation of the status indicators ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432)
on the driver display depend on which systems are activated or
deactivated. Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (/ page 431)
° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 327)

Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only) (/ page 273)
ë HOLD function (/ page 387)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 454)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 276)
È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 454)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 277)
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 452)
ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
505
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display
¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 405)
Ò Slippery road surface warning
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 419)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 423)
Important information from other driving systems may briefly appear in front
of the displayed traffic signs.
506
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)
The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems in Mercedes- h Cruise control (/ page 393)
AMG vehicles can be found in display sections 1 to 5.
È Limiter (/ page 393)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396)
Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 396)
æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 419)
Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 419)
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 405)
± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 409)
% The number, position and presentation of the status indicators ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 432)
on the driver display depend on which systems are activated or
deactivated. Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (/ page 431)
ë HOLD function (/ page 387)

Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only) (/ page 273)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 276)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 454)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 277)
È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 454)
ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 452)
¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 405)
507
F295 0075 02
Driver's display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Ò Slippery road surface warning
ä AMG RIDE CONTROL + (/ page 437)
N AMG Active Sound (/ page 328)
g AMG DYNAMICS (/ page 332)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 419)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 423)
Back to Contents508
F295 0075 02

Notes on operating safety 510
Operation 511
Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively 514
Essential voice commands 516
F295 0075 02
MBUX Voice Assistant Notes on operating safety
Notes on operating safety
FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS

WHEN OPERATING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND ESPE‐
CIALLY YOUR VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM:
R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can
change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be
delayed.
R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before start‐
ing the journey.
% The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Man‐
ual.
The answers from the voice control system do not provide the
complete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual.
The voice control system also does not give detailed warning or
damage information. Therefore read the Owner's Manual so that
you are fully informed about the functions and the safe operation
of the vehicle.
510
F295 0075 02
MBUX Voice Assistant Operation
Operation
Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant For the dialogue with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete senten‐
ces of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it
outside?
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the
MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or INTERRUPTING THE DIALOGUE
Telephone. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational about half a minute after # During the dialogue say Pause.
switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the The dialogue is interrupted.
special equipment).
# Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.
Conducting a dialogue CORRECTING AN ENTRY

# During the dialogue say Correction.
Requirements:
or
R Voice activation is activated in the multimedia system (/ page 512).
# Interrupt the system's voice output.
R For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activa‐
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 512). CHANGING DIALOGUE LEVEL
# During the dialogue, say Back.
STARTING A DIALOGUE The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step.
# Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX Voice Assistant.
# During the dialogue, say From the beginning again.
or The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps to the highest dialogue level.
NAVIGATING IN THE SELECTION LIST
# Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.
A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be
started.
511
F295 0075 02
# Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with acti‐
details shown. vation of online voice control (/ page 512).
# Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

CALLING UP HELP Information on the language setting
# For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say Hey Mercedes, You can change the language of the MBUX Voice Assistant via the system lan‐
what can you do? . guage settings (/ page 559). If the set system language is not supported by
the MBUX Voice Assistant, English will be selected.
# Current application: say Help.
You will receive suggestions and information about operation of MBUX
Voice Assistant for the current application. Setting functions of MBUX Voice Assistant
# Specific function: call up the voice command for the required function, using the multimedia system
for example with Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio.
Multimedia system:
# Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the Owner's Manual. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Voice assistant
The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available on the central
SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION OF MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT ON OR OFF
display when the vehicle is stationary.
# Select Hey Mercedes.
When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can acti‐
Overview of the operable functions of the vate the dialogue.
MBUX Voice Assistant SWITCHING DIRECT COMMANDS ON OR OFF
# Select Z.
YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT: # Activate or deactivate the function.
R Telephone If the function is active, some commands can be used without Hey
Mercedes, for example Next track.
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION FOR INDIVIDUAL SEATS ON OR OFF
R Radio and media # Select Z.
R Vehicle functions # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.
R Online functions
512
F295 0075 02
SWITCHING VOICE INTERRUPTION ON OR OFF

# Select Further settings.
# Select Voice barge-in.

If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice out‐
put of the system.
SWITCHING PROACTIVITY ON OR OFF
# Select Further settings.
# Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your
phone.
When the function is active, the voice assistant proactively provides
information in specific situations.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ONLINE VOICE CONTROL
% Online voice control is activated at the factory.
# Select Online recognition.

If the function is activated and a Mercedes me user account is linked to
the vehicle, additional results are available through the provision of
external information, e.g. information on POIs. By clicking the symbol in
the wave, more information about the online voice control can be dis‐
played.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING CONTACTS FOR ONLINE USE
# Select Contact upload for online recognition.
When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and
accurately using voice input.
513
F295 0075 02
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
Notes on optimum use of the MBUX Voice Information on the MBUX online voice assis‐
Assistant tant
R The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational half a minute after switching on The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external informa‐
the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equip‐ tion makes additional results available.
ment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command
was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control
(/ page 512).
R When a dialogue is ended, the MBUX Voice Assistant continues to be
active for as long as the wave is displayed in the multimedia system. You You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a
can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes. user account you must create one and connect it with your vehicle
R Using the direct command Change language to English, the system lan‐ (/ page 657).
guage can be changed to English without Hey Mercedes. Direct com‐
mands must be activated for this. Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are
shown and can be activated (/ page 657).
R If a user profile has been stored and is active, the MBUX Voice Assistant
can make suggestions based on the habits of the user. If the voice com‐ By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave, further information on the
mands are not clear, the system selects an action. The action can be cor‐ online status is displayed.
rected with a new voice command.
Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile, to activate the profile. The WHEN ONLINE VOICE CONTROL IS ACTIVE, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE
user's voice must first be taught in by the system and assigned to a pro‐ AVAILABLE SUCH AS:
file.
R Weather
Further information on user profiles (/ page 537).
R General knowledge
R With the MBUX Voice Assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejec‐
R Public holidays and school holidays
ted without the keyword Hey Mercedes.
R Smarthome
R Messages
R Time, date and time zones
514
F295 0075 02
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively
R Pocket and currency calculator

R Football results and fixture lists
R Share prices
R Calendar
R ChitChat
R Horoscope
R Geo Quiz
% The availability of these functions is country and equipment-

dependent.
% Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC

BY-SA 3.0 licence.
515
F295 0075 02
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands
Essential voice commands
Notes on voice commands R Set Covent Garden as intermediate destination.

R Cancel the route guidance.
It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function. R Show my last destination.
The MBUX Voice Assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial
R I want to buy juice.
speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these
examples are only available to a limited extent. R Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London.
EXAMPLES OF VOICE COMMANDS:

Examples of telephone voice commands
R Navigation (/ page 516)
R Telephone (/ page 516) You can operate phones connected with the MBUX multimedia system using
the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the
R Radio and TV (/ page 517) possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you
R Media player (/ page 517) say Help for phone.
R Messages (/ page 517)
R Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
R Vehicle functions (/ page 517)
R Dial 0711 17 0.
R Online functions (/ page 518)
R Call my father.
R Accept call
Examples of navigation voice commands R Reject call
R Search for the contact Peter Miller.
You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The
R Switch to address book
following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation com‐
mands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation. R Show me the incoming calls.
R Switch phone
R Drive me home.
R Where is the nearest service station?
R Is there a service area along the route?
516
F295 0075 02
Examples of radio and TV voice commands Examples of message voice commands

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate the radio and TV using Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX Voice Assis‐
the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the tant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message
possible radio or TV voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for
if you say Help for radio or Help for TV. messaging.
R Play the radio station Heart FM. R Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place?
R Next station. R Show me my new e-mails.
R Previous station. R Write an e-mail to Jane Doe.
R Show me the list of radio stations R Read me my new text messages.
R Save the station R Show all new text messages.
R What am I listening to? R Write an e-mail to John Doe in English
Examples of media voice commands Examples of vehicle voice commands

You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle functions using the MBUX voice
Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle
media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help voice commands.
for media or Help for player.
R Play Michael Jackson. % If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out
automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken
R Play "Yellow Submarine' by the Beatles.
or for the function which is closest to that seat.
R Next track.
R Previous track.
R Switch the seat heating to level 2.
R Play similar track.
R My feet are cold.
R Repeat this track.
R Start the Refresh programme.
R Switch on random playback.
R Switch the relaxation function on.
R Mute the music.
R I would like to set the ambient light to blue
R Switch to USB.
R Switch on the reading lamp.
517
F295 0075 02
R Open all the windows.

Examples of online functions
R Tell me my next service appointment
R How warm is it outside? Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional func‐
tions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses
R Show me the charging options
external information and can, as a result, answer general knowledge questions
R Select the Home charging programme. and make calculations, for example.
R Set the charging limit to 80%.
R To what percentage will the battery be charged? R Is the sun shining in Manchester?
R Set my weekend departure time for 10 a.m.. R Is it raining at my destination?
R With how many kilowatts will the battery be charged? R What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze?
R How much longer do I have to charge? R What's the time in Sydney now?
R In which country do you pay with dollars?
R How many Swiss franks make 25 euros?
INFORMATION ABOUT THE VEHICLE CAN ALSO BE REQUESTED:
R How long now until the holidays?
R Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment R What day is it tomorrow?
- Hey Mercedes, which relaxation programmes do you have? R What is 20 % of 29?
- Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist? R What does my horoscope say?
- Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle? R What is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group shares?
R Information about functioning of the systems and components installed R Let's play Geo Quiz.
in the vehicle
R I'm bored.
- Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
R Who is the current prime minister?
- Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
R What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London?
- Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?
R Who painted the picture "The Scream"?
R Information about operating the systems and components installed in
R What's the status in the Premier League?
the vehicle
R Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am.
- Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone?
R What's my next task?
- Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main beam headlamps?
R Tell me a joke.
- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionisation function?
R How many languages do you speak?
R What is your favourite animal?
518
F295 0075 02
R Are there any updates? R Navigate home

R Is the light still on in the kitchen? R Repeat driving instruction
R Switch off all the devices in my house. R Cancelling route guidance
R Please set the temperature in the living room to 24 degrees. R Change language to English
Direct command examples

With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying
the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the function must
be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 512).
R Next TV channel
R Previous TV channel
R Next radio station
R Previous radio station
R Next station
R Previous station
R Next track
R Previous track
R Start dashcam recording
R Stop dashcam recording
R Show the map
R 3D map
R 2D map
R Align map to north
R Align map in direction of travel
R Show all routes
R Show traffic
R Navigate to work
Back to Contents519
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system
MBUX multimedia system

Overview and operation 521 Navigation and traffic 579
Driver camera 553 Telephone 628
System settings 555 Online and Internet functions 666
AMG TRACK PACE 565 Media 676
Drive system settings 571 Radio 686
Emotion Tour 572 TV 691
Fit & Healthy 574 Sound 699
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation
Overview and operation
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system * NOTE

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the cen‐
tral display/front passenger display
The surface of the display is very dark.
& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface may heat up
equipment considerably.
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic # If the display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. cool down before touching it for a longer period of time.

mits.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. Example: Vehicles with central display
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.
• Operating Touch Control (/ page 532)
2 Central display with touch functionality
• Overview of the Zero Layer (/ page 527)
• Calling up and operating the Zero Layer (/ page 529)
521
F295 0075 02
• Home screen overview (/ page 531)

% To connect the passenger's mobile phone to the MBUX multime‐
• Operating the touchscreen (/ page 533)
dia system, a QR code is shown in front passenger display 3. If
3 Switch panel with: possible, the QR code should be scanned with the mobile phone
ú Fingerprint sensor when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. after entering the vehicle.
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central
display off
a Switches sound on or off % Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice dialogue.
ø Adjusts the volume Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey
Mercedes" (/ page 511). You can start a voice navigation, for
example, with the input of a 3 word address from what3words.
Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you.
In the zero layer, entertainment sources as well as telephone, active applica‐

tions and suggestions are directly available to you. You can conveniently call
up and add your favourites using the ß button on the steering wheel.
Example: Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select func‐
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system tions more quickly.
• Operating Touch Control (/ page 532) If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, phone numbers
2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver dialled during operation, active massage programmes or vehicle functions are
• Overview of the Zero Layer (/ page 527) suggested to you. Suggestions are displayed on the zero layer based on con‐
• Calling up and operating the Zero Layer (/ page 529) text and your user behaviour. The configuration of the suggestions is comple‐
• Home screen overview (/ page 531) ted in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from various
vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and
• Operating the touchscreen (/ page 533)
services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to
3 Front passenger display with touch functionality identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN.
4 Switch panel with:
ú Fingerprint sensor The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available
software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off
actions. The call is made via the Control Center.
a Switches sound on or off
522
F295 0075 02
With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. R The driver camera detects the driver's head and line of sight.
in the navigation, and on the Internet.
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION It displays content from the MBUX multimedia system independently of the
This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. central display. Depending on the application, operation is independent of the
More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a driver. Depending on the market, extended content, e.g. playback of media
qualified specialist workshop. content, is also available while driving.
FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPER‐ For the playback of certain content on the front passenger display, e.g. moving
SCREEN) images, the pairing of Bluetooth® headphones is necessary.
If the driver keeps their eyes on the front passenger display for too long, con‐
& WARNING tent, e.g. moving images, will be hidden. An intelligent, camera-based blocking
Risk of accident and injury due to distraction when the driver is concept is used for this purpose.
looking at the front passenger display
If you look at the front passenger display while driving, you may be dis‐ % WHEN THE VEHICLE IS PARKED, THE FRONT PASSENGER CAN
tracted from the traffic. This could also cause you to lose control of the
USE THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY UNDER THE FOLLOW‐
vehicle. The front passenger display is intended exclusively for the front
ING CONDITIONS:
passenger.
R The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat.
# Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view.
R There is interaction with the MBUX multimedia system.
# Avoid looking at the front passenger display while driving.
If the driver has left the vehicle briefly, e.g. to go shopping, the
The front passenger display is an additional touchscreen specifically for the front passenger display can also be operated.
front passenger.
REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPLAYING CONTENT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER % If no front passenger is present, a digital decorative image can be
DISPLAY WHILE DRIVING: shown on the front passenger display (/ page 555).
R The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat.

R The driver camera is switched on (/ page 554).
In the status line of the central display is shown as a è white symbol.
523
F295 0075 02
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING
equipment
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic Vehicles with central display
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.
mits. • Operates Touch Control (/ page 532)
2 Central display with touch functionality
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying • Overview of the zero layer (/ page 527)
• Calls up and operates the zero layer (/ page 529)
• Operates the touchscreen (/ page 533)
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐ 3 Switch panel with:
rently driving when operating the multimedia system.
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central
* NOTE display off
Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the cen‐
a Switches sound on or off
tral display/front passenger display
The surface of the display is very dark.
If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface may heat up

considerably.
# If the display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to

cool down before touching it for a longer period of time.
524
F295 0075 02
Mercedes" (/ page 511). You can start a voice navigation, for

example, with the input of a three-word address from
what3words.
Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you.
These can be called up via the home screen.
Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen In the zero layer, entertainment sources as well as telephone, active applica‐
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system tions and suggestions are directly available to you. You can conveniently call
up your favourites using the ß button on the steering wheel. Quick-access
• Operates Touch Control (/ page 532)
in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more
2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver quickly.
• Overview of the zero layer (/ page 527)
• Calls up and operates the zero layer (/ page 529) If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, phone numbers
dialled during operation, active massage programmes or vehicle functions are
suggested to you, for example. Suggestions are displayed on the zero layer
• Operates the touchscreen (/ page 533)
based on context and your user behaviour. The configuration of the sugges‐
3 Front passenger display with touch functionality tions is completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile
4 Switch panel with: from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some
ú Fingerprint sensor functions and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric pro‐
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central cedures to identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me
and front passenger displays on or off PIN.
a Switches sound on or off The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available
ø Adjusts the volume software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various
actions. The call is made via the Control Centre.
% Various MBUX multimedia system apps offer the option of linking With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g.
via QR code. Scan this QR code with your mobile phone before in the navigation, and on the internet.
starting the journey.
% Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice dialogue.

Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey
525
F295 0075 02
FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPER‐ If the driver keeps their eyes on the front passenger display for too long, con‐
SCREEN) tent, e.g. moving images, will be hidden. An intelligent, camera-based blocking
concept is used for this purpose.
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to distraction when the driver is % WHEN THE VEHICLE IS PARKED, THE FRONT PASSENGER CAN
looking at the front passenger display USE THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY UNDER THE FOLLOW‐
If you look at the front passenger display while driving, you may be dis‐ ING CONDITIONS:
tracted from the traffic. This could also cause you to lose control of the
vehicle. The front passenger display is intended exclusively for the front
R The front passenger is sitting on the front passenger seat.
passenger. R There is interaction with the MBUX multimedia system.
# Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view.

If the driver has left the vehicle briefly, e.g. to go shopping, the
# Avoid looking at the front passenger display while driving. front passenger display can also be operated.
The front passenger display is an additional touchscreen specifically for the % If no front passenger is present, a digital decorative image can be
front passenger. shown on the front passenger display (/ page 555).
REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPLAYING CONTENT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER
DISPLAY WHILE DRIVING: ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION
This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft.
R The front passenger is sitting on the front passenger seat. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a
R The driver camera is switched on (/ page 554). qualified specialist workshop.
In the status line of the central display is shown as a è white symbol.
R The driver camera detects the driver's head and line of sight.
Zero layer
It displays content from the MBUX multimedia system independently of the FUNCTION OF THE ZERO LAYER
central display. Depending on the application, operation is independent of the The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia
driver. Depending on the market, extended content, e.g. playback of media system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use.
content, is also available while driving. When you select © on the central display, the digital map with the applica‐
tions appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a
526
F295 0075 02
classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You The applications are first displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you
can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu. can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view).
The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again. A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions
are available.
THE ZERO LAYER PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING MODULES AND APPLICA‐
TIONS: The learning function can be switched on and off for the options
(/ page 560).
R EQ module and navigation module
The EQ module is always shown on the digital map. In the expanded OVERVIEW OF THE ZERO LAYER
view, charging settings and navigation functions are offered. DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS (EXAMPLE)
R Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone
When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are
always displayed.
A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for
the phone to be displayed.
R Active applications
The lower display area shows an active massage programme, for exam‐
ple.
1 EQ module (reduced view)
R Suggestions 2 Enters a destination (/ page 40)
Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context 3 Searches for a charging station
and your user behaviour. Here are a few examples:
4 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
- Latest calls
5 Calls up user profile settings
- Active massage programs 6 Content sharing menu (/ page 545)
- Vehicle functions 7 Status line
- Online voice applications 8 Suggestions
R Online voice applications Requirement: suggestions are activated (/ page 560).
In the lower display area, context-dependent services that can be execu‐ 9 Active application, e.g. massage programme
ted via voice are available for direct access. A ©
Press briefly: displays all applications and the global search (/ page 529)
Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu (/ page 531)
527
F295 0075 02
B Entertainment sources (media, radio) and telephone EXAMPLES:

Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multi‐
R Answer a call and call a missed call
media system.
The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phone currently connected
The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-specific applications. to the MBUX multimedia system.
THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS ARE DISPLAYED IN THE R Display contacts and call list as well as call a contact
LOWER DISPLAY AREA: R Use voice functions
R Suggest contacts
R Suggestions 8
The contacts are suggested for the mobile phone connected to the
R Active applications 9 MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for a mobile phone
R Entertainment sources and telephone B that is linked to another user profile.
R Online voice applications R Write messages to contacts (suggestion)
R Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion)
The lower display area can be hidden and shown (/ page 529).
INFORMATION ABOUT ACTIVE APPLICATIONS
INFORMATION ABOUT ENTERTAINMENT SOURCES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expan‐
ded view) (/ page 529). R Operating a massage programme
R Operating Active Park Assist
EXAMPLES: R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme
R Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station R Raising or lowering the vehicle level
R Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list SUGGESTIONS FOR COMFORT AND VEHICLE FUNCTIONS AS WELL AS
R Select a media source NAVIGATION
The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system. Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the
suggestions.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE TELEPHONE
To use the functions, your mobile phone must be connected with the MBUX R Operating a massage programme
multimedia system. For example, the multimedia system suggests a programme at a certain
time.
Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & messages option is activated in the
R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme
suggestions.
R Opening the tailgate
528
F295 0075 02
Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with boot lid convenience closing. OPERATING APPLICATIONS IN THE REDUCED VIEW (EXAMPLES)
R Opening and closing the comfort doors # Media: to play the previous or next track, tap û or ü.
Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with comfort doors.
# To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact.
R Setting the vehicle level
After the connection has been established, the call functions are availa‐
R Making heating settings ble.
R Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favourites
# To end a call: tap on the contact again.
SUGGESTIONS FOR ONLINE VOICE APPLICATIONS

# To reply to a message: tap on a message and dictate the message via
Requirement: the Online voice services option is activated in the suggestions. the MBUX Voice Assistant.
# To start a massage programme: tap on the application and start the

The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on
massage programme.
your previous voice inputs.
# To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one
EXAMPLES:
of the previous destinations.
R What will the weather be like tomorrow?
# To select a destination from the favourites: tap on the application and
R Play the messages. select the destination.
R Start geoquiz.
HIDING AND SHOWING THE DISPLAY AREA WITH APPLICATIONS
R Open the garage door.
# To hide: pull the applications down.
CALLING UP AND OPERATING THE ZERO LAYER # To show: pull the bar above © upwards.
CALLING UP THE ZERO LAYER or

When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the
digital map. Navigation is active. # Select ©.
# From another application: press the © button on the right side of or
the steering wheel.
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
or
# Tap on ©.
529
F295 0075 02
EQ MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW) Switches range maximisation on or off (/ page 328).

R Consumption
The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.
R Symbol Z
Makes settings for View, Messages & tones and Route.
# To close the menu: select G.

NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW)
1 Sets the charging program (/ page 364)

2 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
3 Maximum state of charge (depending on the setting)
4 Sets the next charging break (to use a less expensive tariff)
5 Sets the departure time
6 Opens the socket flap
7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging
# Tap on the EQ module (/ page 527). Example: navigation module with active route guidance
1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station
The charging settings are displayed.
2 Charging stop shows the charging time recommended by the Navigation
ADDITIONAL EQ AND NAVIGATION FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN
THE LOWER MENU BAR:
R Symbol ª 3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time
Enters a destination (/ page 40) 4 Searches for an additional charging station
R Route # Tap on the EQ module (/ page 527).
The route shows charging stops and the destination.
# Select Route in the lower menu bar.
R Range
530
F295 0075 02
OPERATING A MENU IN THE LOWER DISPLAY AREA (EXAMPLE: ACTIVE # To hide applications: briefly press © again.
MASSAGE PROGRAMME)
SWITCHING BETWEEN THE ZERO LAYER AND HOME SCREEN WITH CLAS‐
SIC MENU
# Press and hold on ©.
The home screen with classic menu is shown.
# To return to the zero layer: press and hold on ©.
1 Selects a relaxation programme

Home screen overview
2 Starts/stops a massage programme for the driver
3 Starts/stops a massage programme for the front passenger
4 Sets the massage intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat
# Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is displayed.
# To close the menu: select G.

1 Displays in the status line
OPENING AND CLOSING THE CONTEXT MENU FOR A SUGGESTION
2 Calls up user profile settings and switches user
# Press and hold on a suggestion.
3 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
The context menu opens and shows the No longer suggest option, for 4 Calls up favourites
example.
5 Displays in the status line
# To close: swipe downwards. 6 Shows additional applications
REMOVING A SUGGESTION FROM THE DISPLAY AREA 7 Calls up applications
# Swipe the suggestion upwards. 8 Quick-access to application
9 Global menu
SHOWING ALL APPLICATIONS
G Calls up previous menu
# Briefly press ©.
© Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer
Available applications are displayed. The global search is available.
û Previous track or previous radio station
ü Next track or next radio station
531
F295 0075 02
% During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global Touch Control
menu 9.
OPERATING TOUCH CONTROL (MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)
Alternatively, to switch between the home screen and the zero layer, press and
hold the © button on the right-hand side of the steering wheel.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE CALLED UP IN THE CONTROL CENTRE:
R Notifications Centre
R Content sharing menu
R Favourites
R Vehicle quick-access
1 © Shows zero layer/home screen
2 Touch Control
=9Ì: Swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate)
a Press (confirm)
3 G Returns to the previous display
4 6 Makes or accepts a call
5 ~ Rejects or ends a call
6 To increase volume: swipe upwards
To reduce volume: swipe down
8 To switch off the sound: press
7 ß Calls up favourites
8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
532
F295 0075 02
% To operate Touch Control 2 in the most effective way, use the Touchscreen
tip of your thumb if possible.
OPERATING THE TOUCHSCREEN
TAPPING
You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of
# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example:
# To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
# To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press
on Touch Control 2. # To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
# To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2. # To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. SINGLE-FINGER SWIPE
SETTING THE SENSITIVITY FOR TOUCH CONTROL

# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
Multimedia system: # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
5 Touch Control sensitivity # To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one
finger on the touchscreen.
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
TWO-FINGER SWIPE
SETTING ACOUSTIC OPERATIONAL FEEDBACK FOR ALL CONTROL ELE‐
MENTS
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
Multimedia system: # To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fin‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements gers together or apart.
5 Acoustic feedback
# To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.
The function is supported by the selection in a list.
THREE-FINGER SWIPE
# Set Off, Unleaded or Loud. # To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an applica‐
If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when selecting tion.
control elements or when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end
TOUCHING, HOLDING AND MOVING
of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.
# To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any
direction.
533
F295 0075 02
# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move your fin‐
ger to the left or right.
Overview of the fingerprint sensor
TOUCHING AND HOLDING
# To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold
until a message is shown.
# To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen

and hold until the Options menu appears.
SETTING HAPTIC OPERATION FOR THE TOUCHSCREEN
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
5 Touch & feel disp.
# Set Off, Unleaded or High. Equipment with central display
If the function is switched off, all you need to do is tap the display to
make an entry.
If the function is switched on, the entry is made by pressing the display.
The system supports you with discreet tactile aids and pressure resis‐
tances.
% You can use this function for the central display and the front
passenger display.
Equipment with MBUX Hyperscreen
Fingerprint sensor 1 allows you to conveniently access protected MBUX mul‐

timedia system functions and services. Compared to protection provided by
the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-digit number is not required to acti‐
vate services and functions with personal content.
The fingerprint sensor must be set up before use (/ page 537).
534
F295 0075 02
If equipped with a front passenger display, one fingerprint can be scanned in

for the driver's seat and one for the front passenger seat. These fingerprints
User
are then assigned to the respective seat. They can be used for authentication NOTES ON USER PROFILES
or to activate your own user profile on the assigned display.
& WARNING
% The fingerprint sensor stores only a data model and no image of Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
the fingerprint. The data model is only processed in the vehicle after calling up a driver profile
and is not transmitted from the vehicle. Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to
the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
pants could be injured in the process.
# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being

adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body
parts are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the

adjustment process by:
# a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat

adjustment switch in the driver's door.
The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the
driver's profile.
535
F295 0075 02
OVERVIEW OF USER PROFILES

% The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated
REQUIREMENTS FOR USE from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels
R You have a Mercedes me user account. cannot be turned off.
R You have a Mercedes me PIN.
R You have agreed to the terms of use.
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. % WHEN A USER PROFILE IS ACTIVATED, THE FOLLOWING PER‐
SONALISED COMFORT SYSTEMS, FOR EXAMPLE, CAN BE
ADJUSTED OR THEIR SETTINGS LOADED:
% If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile R Seat
has been selected, the data described in the following section
will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard set‐
R Ambient light
tings can be changed by all vehicle users. R Outside mirrors
R Roller blinds
User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a R Air conditioning settings
person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other
users. If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat
position will not be adjusted.
You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or
using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me
PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT
me Portal. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT YOU CAN, AS A USER, SAVE
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:
% If the user profile is downloaded while travelling, user profiles
R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings
are not set up using the set-up assistant.
R Climate control
R Ambient light
User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by dif‐
ferent levels of security (/ page 537). R Radio (including station list)
R Suggestions and favourites
To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the
vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are used. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
536
F295 0075 02
ADDING A USER SELECTING USER OPTIONS

Multimedia system:
Requirements:
4 © 5 f 5 Settings
R The vehicle is stationary.
PROTECTING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS
If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user pro‐
Multimedia system: file. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biomet‐
4 © 5 f 5 Select user ric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be
taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available
# Select f Add user.
sensors into account.
A QR code is loaded.
THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS ARE PRO‐
# Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code TECTED, FOR EXAMPLE:
scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed
on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile R User selection and user profile settings
device. R Biometric sensors
# Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App. The teaching-in of biometric sensors
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This For teaching in and editing biometric recognition see the following sec‐
automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. tion.
You will be informed when your user profile is available. R Suggestions
When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically The data and determination of the most probable navigation destina‐
after user selection. tions, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages.
R ENERGIZING COACH
% When the user has been added, they can be selected The recorded health data and its evaluation.
(/ page 539). R In-Car Office
The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails.
R Parking service
The payment transactions.
R Mercedes me Store
The purchase of services.
R System activations of paid vehicle functions
537
F295 0075 02
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES YOU WILL BE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICA‐

TION OR RE-AUTHENTICATION USING A SENSOR OR THE MERCEDES ME % Please note that authentication is necessary for several functions
PIN: such as In-Car Office and cannot therefore be completely
switched off.
R When selecting a protected user profile
R When calling up a function requiring special protection SETTING UP AND EDITING BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION
R If biometric sensors provide insufficient or contradictory information The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recogni‐
R If the multimedia system no longer trusts a sensor tion has been set up, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authenti‐
cation on the multimedia system.
R If the seat belt buckle and the door are opened at the same seat and a
function requiring special protection is called up # Select Protect content.
R When the vehicle is locked from outside
# Select Facial recognition, Fingerprint recognition or Voice recognition.
% Facial recognition for re-authentication in the driver's seat is only % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.
possible once the door has been closed or the seat belt buckle
has been fastened.
SETTING UP FACIAL RECOGNITION
# Follow the system's instructions.
# Select Protect content.
Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display or central display
# Switch Access protection on or off. shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock
your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.
% When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be SETTING UP FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION
viewed from any seat and changes can be made. # Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under
the touchscreen (/ page 534).
The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a mes‐
% Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific sage appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and
basis. protected applications with your fingerprint.
538
F295 0075 02
SETTING UP VOICE RECOGNITION vehicle. In the vehicle itself, you can select other sample images
# Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the voice instead of the photo.
assistant's instructions.
If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the cen‐ DELETING A USER PROFILE
tral display. You can unlock your user profile. # Select Profile.
# Select Remove.
% Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.
# Select Remove user profile.
DELETING BIOMETRIC DATA
# Tap on E , for example, behind Fingerprint recognition. % Your Mercedes me user account and your personal data will
remain within the Mercedes me ecosystem.
# Select Yes.
CALLING UP THE SET-UP ASSISTANT
RESETTING THE USER PROFILE TO FACTORY SETTINGS
# Select Profile. # Select Profile.
# Select Set-up assistant. # Select Reset.
# Follow the directions from the set-up assistant. # Select Yes.
CHANGING A USER NAME OR PROFILE PHOTO
# Select Profile. % This resets the contents of the user profile to factory settings,
but not the vehicle.
# Select Change user name.
or You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
# Select Profile picture. SELECTING A USER

# Enter the user name or select a user image. Multimedia system:
4© 5f
# Select Finished.
% When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the
% You can store your photo in the Mercedes me user account using
steering wheel can be set.
the app or in the portal. The photo will then be shown in the
539
F295 0075 02
YOU CAN CANCEL THE SETTING PROCESS WITH THE FOL‐ # Select Synchronise now.
LOWING ACTIONS: After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised
with the Mercedes me user accounts.
R Press Tap here to cancel. message on the central display.
R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.
% Not all user profile functions are available during synchroniza‐
tion.
# Select Select user.
# Select a user.
% IF THE PERSONALISATION SERVICE IN THE VEHICLE IS
# When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a DEACTIVATED, ONLY THE FOLLOWING USER PROFILE MAS‐
taught-in biometric characteristic. TER DATA IS SYNCHRONISED:
The user profile is loaded and activated.
R Profile name
R Profile image
% If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings
R Mercedes me PIN
for the user profile are loaded.
SYNCHRONISING USER PROFILES

Favourites
Requirements
OVERVIEW OF FAVOURITES
R You have a Mercedes me user account. Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favour‐
R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. ites are available in total.
You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from
Multimedia system: an application.
4 © 5 f 5 Settings 5 Synchronisation
# Synchronise automatically . % You can add and edit navigation favourites within the application.
When the vehicle is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle is
automatically synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. This
synchronization is done for all user profiles and is not profile-specific.
or
540
F295 0075 02
CALLING UP FAVOURITES # Select Save as favourite.

Multimedia system: The contact is added as a favourite.
4© 5ß
RENAMING FAVOURITES
# Alternatively, in the home screen pull down bar 3 in the centre of the Multimedia system:
status line (/ page 531). 4© 5ß
# Select ß in the Control Center. # Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
ADDING FAVOURITES # Select Rename.

Multimedia system:
4© 5ß
# Enter the name.
SELECTING FAVOURITES FROM CATEGORIES # Save the names.

# Select r. MOVING FAVOURITES
Multimedia system:
# Select W Create new favourite.
4© 5ß
# Select the category. # Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
# Select a favourite. # Select Move.
The favourite is stored at the next available position.
# Move the favourite to the new position.
# All positions in the favourites are taken: confirm the message shown.
# Tap on ø.
A list shows all the favourites.
DELETING FAVOURITES
# Select a favourite to be overwritten. Multimedia system:
ADDING A FAVOURITE FROM AN APPLICATION 4© 5ß
You can, for example, save a contact (example), or add an ENERGIZING COM‐ # Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.
FORT programme.
# Select Delete.
# To save a contact as a global favourite: select a contact (/ page 636).
# Select Yes.
# Press on a telephone number until a menu is shown.
541
F295 0075 02
RESETTING FAVOURITES Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no
# In the menu, select Reset all favourites. action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre.
# Select Yes. The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are
at the top.
Notifications Centre
OVERVIEW OF THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE
THE FOLLOWING COMMUNICATIONS ARE COLLECTED IN THE NOTIFICA‐
TIONS CENTRE:
R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from the multi‐

media system.
R Communications which are received through the use of services.
THE FOLLOWING NOTIFICATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE FOR YOU:

Example of a message
R Navigable destinations and routes 1 Calls up the Notifications Centre
R Messages (text messages) 2 Symbol for a pinned notification
R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-Car Office 3 Time message received
This function is not available in all countries. 4 Calls up the settings
R System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to 5 Deletes notifications
start the update. 6 Display for available actions
R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be sub‐ 7 Description of the notification and the issuing service
scribed to or emergency reports (e.g. tornado) 8 Symbol for notifications
9 Date of the received notifications
The Notifications Centre is in the Control Centre. Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are availa‐
ble.
Depending on the style set, newly received notifications are shown using a
coloured dot.
542
F295 0075 02
EXAMPLES OF ACTIONS INCLUDE: CLOSING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE

# Select G.
R Reading aloud
R Placing a call SELECTING ACTIONS FOR A NOTIFICATION
R Replying THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R Calling up a web page R Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown.
R Navigation R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.
Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, # Up to two actions available: select the action.
it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the
notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. # More than two actions available: select q.
You can pin a notification so that this is not deleted automatically after a cer‐ # Select the action.
tain time. The notification is then denoted by symbol 2. The notification is still available.
CALLING UP NOTIFICATIONS # Close the actions with r.

OPENING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE EDITING NOTIFICATIONS
# In the zero layer pull down bar 4 in the centre of the status line # Call up the Notifications Centre (/ page 543).
(/ page 527).
CONFIGURING SETTINGS
or # Select Z Settings .
# In the home screen pull down bar 3 in the centre of the status line # Select the service.
(/ page 531).
# Switch the options on or off.
The Control Centre opens.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE
# Select 3 in the Control Center.
SERVICE:
SELECTING A NOTIFICATION
R Allow notifications
# If several messages are available swipe up or down.
R Display in notification centre
# Select an action. R Show notifications
R Switching Acoustic signals on or off
543
F295 0075 02
R External access THE GLOBAL SEARCH PROVIDES SEARCH RESULTS FOR THE FOLLOWING
The option allows an external service access to specific data, e.g. CATEGORIES:
the current vehicle position. The detailed, approved information is
R Navigation
shown with Õ.
R Entertainment
R Phone, In-Car Office
If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with
In-Car Office is not available in all countries.
the exception of External access.
R Digital Owner's Manual
PINNING A NOTIFICATION
R Internet
# Drag a notification to the right on the touchscreen.
A pin appears.
The global search enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attrac‐
# Tap on the pin. tions in the navigation category, for example.
The notification is marked with a pin.
The global search makes it possible to enter a three-word address
DELETING NOTIFICATIONS (/ page 584).
# Drag a notification to the left on the touchscreen.
If the search field is empty, you will first see smart suggestions in the Sugges-
or tions category.
# Select E. The prerequisite for this is that the smart suggestions are activated in the user
# Select Yes. options (/ page 537).
All messages are deleted.
As soon as a letter is entered, you will be shown the best hits in the All cate‐
gory. You will find further search results in the individual categories. Next to
Global search the category is the number of results.
After selecting a category you can select the search results within the cate‐
GLOBAL SEARCH OVERVIEW
gory. When you select a search result, a detailed view is opened depending on
You can call up the global search on the home screen. You can input charac‐
the category.
ters using the keyboard or the handwriting recognition. Alternatively, the MBUX
voice assistant allows voice input.
544
F295 0075 02
USING THE GLOBAL SEARCH source, for example. Status symbols on the displays inform you about the cur‐
Multimedia system: rent settings, for example "Headphones connected".
4 © 5 ª Search
Content is shared in the menu itself or directly from an application.
In the Suggestions category up to six smart suggestions are displayed, even if
no search entry has been entered yet. Active content is shared on a display and played back on the receiving display.
# Enter the search term into the search field. Inactive content can be searched for in an application and then shared from
As soon as a character is entered the All category is marked. Up to ten there.
search results per category are displayed there.
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT CAN BE SHARED, FOR EXAMPLE:
In the other categories suitable search results for the entered search
item are displayed. R Radio stations
R Media
R Browser
% Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input using R ENERGIZING COMFORT programme
p or you switch to the handwriting recognition v
(/ page 550). OPENING THE CONTENT SHARING MENU IN THE CONTROL CENTRE
# To end the search: select a.
# To show search results for a category: select a category.
# To accept the search result: select the search result.

An action starts, e.g. a radio station is set or a detailed view is displayed,
e.g. for a contact.
Content sharing menu

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENT SHARING MENU Example: content sharing menu
You can find the Share content menu in the Control Center. It shows the availa‐
1 Calls up a menu
ble displays in the vehicle and their playback status. Content currently on a
2 Central display with active content (cover display)
display can be shared with other displays; playback of an entertainment
3 Front passenger display
545
F295 0075 02
4 Displays animation for content sharing # In the menu drag and drop a display to another display.
5 Status information, e.g. Ä Bluetooth® headphones connected to the The content of one display is placed on another display or retrieved from
front passenger display on the right another display.
# Call up the Control Center in the zero layer (/ page 527). or
or # Select Share with everyone.

The content of one display is shared with all displays in the vehicle.
# Call up the Control Center on the home screen (/ page 531).
The Control Centre opens. or
# Select 1.
5 SHOWS THE FOLLOWING STATUS INFORMATION: # Share content directly from an application using Share; share a radio sta‐
tion in the vehicle, for example.
R Audio playback, for example via Ä Bluetooth® headphones or the CONTROLLING ENTERTAINMENT SOURCES WITH MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT
Ã vehicle loudspeakers # Activate the voice assistant with "Hey Mercedes".
R Playback status, for example pause or mute function active
# Say a voice command, for example "Play Rihanna on front passenger
seat".
DEPENDING ON THE STATUS OF THE DISPLAY, THE FOLLOWING INFOR‐
MATION IS SHOWN ON 2 AND 3: CONTROLLING MEDIA PLAYBACK IN THE CONTROL CENTRE
R The cover
R The active É privacy mode
R Display off
R System off
SHARING MBUX DISPLAY CONTENT

In the Share content menu, you can share content currently being played back
on one display with other displays. Example: control menu
1 Cover (if available)
You can also share content from an application in the vehicle, e.g. in a menu or
2 Track and other information
in a search.
3 Controls playback of the entertainment source
Previous track/scene, play/pause or sound on/off, next track/scene
546
F295 0075 02
4 On the central display: switches the MBUX multimedia system or the dis‐ SWITCHING THE SOUND FOR THE HEADPHONES ON AND OFF
play off # To switch off: press and hold ..
On the front passenger display: switches the display off The current audio source is muted.
5 Switches the É privacy mode on or off at the seat
6 Selects the current audio source at the seat for playback on the vehicle
# To switch on: press and hold . once again.
speakers
The available options are seat-specific. On the front passenger display the Switching the sound for the MBUX multimedia
sound for the connected headphones can also be switched on or off and the
volume can be set. system on or off
% The options in 3 are available depending on the application.
% In the active É privacy mode, the display content being

played back is hidden from the other seats. The display content
can be shared but not retrieved.
On the steering wheel
# Call up the Control Center on the home screen (/ page 531).
The Control Centre opens.
# Briefly press on a display.

The control menu for media playback is called up.
# Change the settings.

SETTING THE VOLUME FOR HEADPHONES
# Select ..
# Slide the volume button up or down.
On the central display control panel
547
F295 0075 02
Setting the volume of the MBUX multimedia

system
SETTING WITH THE BUTTON
On the control panel when equipped with MBUX Hyperscreen

# To switch off: press button 1. On the steering wheel
The current audio source is muted.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the central display.
If you are listening to a radio station, for example, and switch off the sound
then all media sources will be muted.
Traffic and navigation announcements can still be heard in this case. The
MBUX voice assistant and telephony are also not affected.
SWITCHING ON
# Press button 1 again.
or
On the central display control panel
# Set the volume. # Press ± or q 1.
or or
# The media source changes. # Swipe across button 1.
The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set.
548
F295 0075 02
or
# Press and hold © on the touchscreen.

The home screen appears.
# Select Settings.
# Select System.
# Select Audio.
# Select a volume setting.
On the control panel when equipped with MBUX Hyperscreen

# Press ± or q 1. % The volume can be set for all groups except the entertainment
volume.
The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set.
THE VOLUME IS ADJUSTED FOR THE FOLLOWING GROUPS:
# Set the volume.
R Entertainment THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE ASSISTANCE
R Ringtone MENU:
R Calls, for example phone calls
R Switching the navigation announcements on or off during a phone call.
R Voice output, for example MBUX voice assistant
R Reducing the entertainment volume while a navigation announcement is
R Navigation announcements being issued.
% If you set the volume of the voice output to "0", for example, a Entering characters
minimum volume is automatically set when the MBUX voice
assistant is next called up. The entertainment volume is automat‐ USING THE CHARACTER INPUT FUNCTION
ically adjusted after the multimedia system is restarted. Requirements:
R For the handwriting recognition read-aloud function: the MBUX multi‐

SETTING IN THE MENU
media system is equipped with the MBUX voice assistant.
# Press and hold the © button on the right of the steering wheel.
R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.
549
F295 0075 02
R The handwriting recognition read-aloud function is activated.
Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on the touchscreen. Character

input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.
# When the keypad is shown, enter the characters by swiping and pressing
on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen.
or
# If handwriting recognition has been selected, write the characters on the

touchscreen.
Examples for character input include the global search, entering a navigation Example: character input with the keypad
destination or the renaming of a favourite, for example. 1 Input line with current entry
2 Search result
THE TOUCHSCREEN SUPPORTS CHARACTER INPUT WITH THE FOLLOW‐ 3 Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double
ING FUNCTIONS: arrow
R Handwriting recognition offers character suggestions. 4 Deletes an entry
R If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then 5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
the entered characters are read aloud. 6 Deletes the last character entered
7 Hides the keypad
ENTERING CHARACTERS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN
8 Switches to handwriting recognition
Requirements 9 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 511)
A Sets the written language
R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud func‐
tion of the handwriting recognition is switched on (/ page 551). B Switches to digits and special characters
R An online connection is required for some functions. C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
# Example: call up the navigation and enter a destination address
(/ page 40).
# Briefly press on a character.

The character is entered in input line 1.
550
F295 0075 02
# Resume character input. 7 Accepts an entry

8 Writing area
% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input.
language set and the character level.
# When the keyboard is displayed, select v.
ENTERING ALTERNATIVE CHARACTERS # Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The letters can
# Press and hold on a character. be written next to each other or above each other.
# Select the character. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2.
ENDING CHARACTER INPUT # Select one of the suggestions.

# Hide keypad 7.
# If available, display additional suggestions with q or r.
# To end character entry: press briefly on G.

SETTING THE KEYBOARD AND HANDWRITING RECOGNITION FOR CHAR‐
ACTER ENTRY
Requirements:
R For the read-aloud function: the function is available for the selected
system language.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Keyboards and handwriting
Example: entering characters with handwriting recognition
1 Input line SETTING THE KEYBOARD LANGUAGE
2 Shows suggestions during input # Select Keyboard languages.
3 Deletes an entry # Select one or more keyboard languages.
4 Last character entered
SETTING THE WRITING SPEED
Pressing and holding deletes the entry
# Select Handwriting recognition.
5 Switches to input using the keyboard
6 Enters a space # Select an option, e.g. Medium.
551
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION

# Activate D Read out.

The letter that your write on the touchscreen is read aloud.
ACTIVATING HANDWRITING RECOGNITION ON THE KEYBOARD
# Activate D Handwriting recognition.

You can write characters directly on the keyboard.
DELETING THE USER DICTIONARY
The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during
character input. You can reset the user dictionary.
# Select Reset my dictionary.
# Select Yes.
552
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Driver camera
Driver camera
Overview of the driver camera The current status of the è driver camera is shown in the sta‐
tus line of the central display.
& WARNING
Risk of injury from infrared radiation from the camera % The driver camera records image data for applications such as
This product uses an infrared lighting system of risk group 0 (RG0). If ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example.
the housing is opened or damaged, infrared radiation may damage your The driver camera converts the image data directly into meta
retina. data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only pro‐
cessed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.
# Do not open the housing.
# Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a The driver camera must be set up for facial recognition before use
qualified specialist workshop. (/ page 537).
SYSTEM LIMITS
This device is a product of risk group 0 (RG0) according to IEC 62471: 2006 THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐
(First Edition) & DIN EN 62471: 2008. ING SITUATIONS:
The driver camera is located in the driver display.
R The driver camera is covered or dirty, misted up or scratched.
THE DRIVER CAMERA DETECTS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS: R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered.
R Head position R The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.
R Viewing direction DISPLAY MESSAGES
R Eyelid closure characteristics IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS DISPLAY MESSAGES MAY BE SHOWN:
R Driver's face
R If the driver camera is not functioning.
The driver camera is malfunctioning.
% The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehi‐
cle is opened with the key. The Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual message appears.
553
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Driver camera
R If the driver camera cannot capture the position of your head due to the WHEN THE DRIVER CAMERA IS SWITCHED OFF OR THE THE CAMERA'S
position of the steering wheel or seat. VIEW OF THE DRIVER IS CURRENTLY IMPEDED AFFECTED FUNCTIONS: SEE OWN-
The Change steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the ER'S MANUAL MESSAGE APPEARS, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE NOT
upper edge of the screen message appears. AVAILABLE OR LIMITED:
R If the view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted. R The microsleep and distraction detection function of ATTENTION ASSIST
The The camera's view of the driver is currently impeded Affected functions: (/ page 391)
see Owner's Manual message appears. R The facial recognition
The message can appear, for example, in the following cases: This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of
- The camera's view is obstructed, e.g. due to a scarf or hat being the user profile and protected applications (/ page 537).
worn.
- The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.
- If hair partially obstructs the eyes, e.g. as with a long fringe.
- In the event of strong direct sunlight. The driver camera cannot
detect the driver's eyes if the light-dark contrast is too strong.
- When one or both hands are on top of the steering wheel (twelve
o'clock position).
NOTES ON CARE
For the display, please comply with the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 722).
Switching the driver camera on or off

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent assistants
The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is switched
on.
# Select On or Off.
554
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system System settings
System settings
Display % Using the Mercedes me App you can select a personal image for
the front passenger display.
CONFIGURING DISPLAY SETTINGS
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
% If no user is logged in on the front passenger display and the
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS front passenger display is switched on, the decorative image or
# Select Display brightness. the personal image is visible.
# Vehicles with a driver display and central display: adjust the display
brightness of the driver display or central display.
Time and date
# Vehicles with the MBUX Hyperscreen: adjust the display brightness of
the driver display, central display or the front passenger display. SETTING THE TIME ZONE
Multimedia system:
SETTING THE DECORATIVE IMAGE FOR THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date
(VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)
# Select Time zone.
% The function is country-dependent. The list of countries is displayed.
# Select Passenger screen decorative image.

% If there are several time zones available in a country, these will
be shown after the country is selected.
A selection of decorative images is displayed.
# Select the desired decorative image. # Select a country and, if required, a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed after Time zone.
% The number of available decorative images is variable.
or
555
F295 0075 02
# Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list.
% On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings
The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.
are determined automatically based on the vehicle location and
cannot be set manually.
% The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with sat‐
ellite reception.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
# Select Adjust time.
SETTING THE TIME AND DATE FORMAT
Multimedia system: # Set a value.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date 5 Set format # Press OK to confirm.
# Select a time and date format.
SETTING THE TIME AND DATE MANUALLY % The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception.
Requirements:
R The vehicle does not have satellite reception.

Vehicle position
Multimedia system: SWITCHING TRANSMISSION OF THE VEHICLE POSITION ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date Requirements:
SETTING THE TIME
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me ID.
# Select Set time.
R At least one digital Mercedes-Benz service is activated for the vehicle,
# Set a time. which customers and/or third parties can use to display the vehicle posi‐
tion via the respective user accesses.
# Press OK to confirm.
SETTING THE DATE With this setting, you decide whether the vehicle position will be transmitted
# Select Set date. in order to show it to users who have access to the digital Mercedes-Benz
services for this vehicle.
# Select a date.
# Press OK to confirm. % The function is country-dependent. For more information, con‐

sult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
556
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: - Contacts (/ page 635)

4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection - Call lists (/ page 638)
# Activate or deactivate the Transmit veh. position function. - Text messages (/ page 638)
R Internet connection (/ page 666)
% Alternatively, you can also switch the function on or off in the
status line via Ô.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG)
Inc.
Setting permissions % Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all coun‐
tries.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 Permissions
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BLUETOOTH®
In the Permissions menu, you can set access authorisations for various data
Multimedia system:
points (such as microphone, camera) used in an application. You can change
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
permissions that have already been granted here. You can set permissions
either for individual data points or for certain applications or websites. # Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.
# Select Requests or Apps/websites.
# Make the required settings for the permissions.

Wi-Fi
WI-FI CONNECTION OVERVIEW
You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network
Bluetooth® devices.
INFORMATION ABOUT BLUETOOTH®

Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up % The availability of the function is dependent on the country.
to approximately 10 m.
GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:
YOU CAN USE BLUETOOTH® TO CONNECT YOUR MOBILE PHONE TO THE
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AND USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAM‐ R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot (/ page 558)
PLE:
R Hands-free system with access to the following options:
557
F295 0075 02
The vehicle's multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile to be connected. The type of connection must be selected on the multi‐
communication devices, such as smartphones or tablet PCs, for example. media system and on the device to be connected.
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)

(/ page 668) % The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering
device is used for the data connection.
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
Data volume for the vehicle: depending on the vehicle equip‐
vehicle's multimedia system.
ment, you can obtain an Entertainment Package via the Mercedes
SWITCHING WI-FI ON OR OFF me Store. In order to use the data package included, you must
Multimedia system: conclude your own contract with a mobile phone network pro‐
vider via the Mercedes me App. This can be terminated at any
time and incurs no costs. Without this contract it is not possible
# Select Wi-Fi. to use the services included in the previously acquired Entertain‐
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. ment Package. The availability of this option is dependent on the
country.
When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded,
external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices. you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone
network provider for a fee. The availability of this option is
When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connec‐
dependent on the country.
tion.
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐ % Some functions may first need to be activated on the device
try. being connected. More detailed information can be found in the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AS A WI-FI HOTSPOT
Requirements:
% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not avail‐
R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of con‐ able in all countries.
nection described.
The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The
function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device
558
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system:
% When a new security key is generated, all existing WLAN connec‐
tions are then disconnected. If the WLAN connections are re-
# Select MBUX hotspot. established, the new security key must be entered.
# Select one of the following connection options.
CONNECTING USING A QR CODE
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being System language
connected.
NOTES ON THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE
Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner This function allows you to determine the language for the menus and naviga‐
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions). tion announcements. The selected language affects the characters available
for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a
# Scan the QR code shown. language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.
The WLAN connection is established.
SETTING THE LANGUAGE
CONNECTING USING A SECURITY KEY Multimedia system:
# Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is dis‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language
played with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
SETTING THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE
# Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the A list of the available system languages is shown.
device to be connected.
# Select a language.
# Confirm the entry. The system language is switched to the selected language.
GENERATING A NEW SECURITY KEY
# Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu. Setting the distance unit
# Confirm the prompt with Yes. Multimedia system:
A new security key is generated. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
559
F295 0075 02
# Select a unit for the distance.

Configuring suggestions
# Activate Additional speedometer for an additional display in the driver
Multimedia system:
display.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
# Select Z.
Activating/deactivating system PIN protection
# Switch the options on or off individually.
Multimedia system: If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, per‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 PIN protection sonalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to
you. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone num‐
SETTING THE SYSTEM PIN
bers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.
# Select Set PIN.
Navigation
# Enter a four-digit system PIN. When Allow destination suggestions is switched on, the vehicle makes
suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations.
# Enter the four-digit system PIN again.
If Commuter route is switched on, the navigation automatically detects
If both system PINs match, then the system PIN protection is active. that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
CHANGING THE SYSTEM PIN Calls & messages
# Select Change settings. Suggestions are offered for numbers dialled and messages sent.
Comfort
# Enter the current system PIN.
The vehicle makes suggestions based on the use of your comfort func‐
# Select Change PIN. tions, e.g. which massage programme should be started at what time.
Entertainment
# Set a new system PIN.
Suggestions are offered for the currently played media source. Sugges‐
ACTIVATING SYSTEM PIN PROTECTION FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES tions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify, TuneIn Radio
# Select Protect software updates. and streaming services, and for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood.
Vehicle
The suggestions for vehicle functions such as Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC and the vehicle level settings are displayed on the zero
layer.
560
F295 0075 02
The zero layer is your own personalised user interface with the digital The navigation maps are also updated via updates from external storage media
map in the foreground and the applications that you use the most. You (e.g. USB flash drive).
can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic
menu. Install available software updates regularly. Otherwise the security of your
MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components cannot be
Online voice services
ensured.
The suggestions are made available online based on your voice input
and are offered on the zero layer.
% Software updates can be protected with a system PIN. Further
information about the system PIN (/ page 560).
% The suggestions offered depend on the equipment.
Further information about software updates can be found at https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com.
Deleting collected suggestions
CARRYING OUT SOFTWARE UPDATES
Multimedia system:
Requirements
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
# Select Î. FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE AND WI-
FI:
# Select Yes.
R Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account (/ page 657).
The suggestions are reset.
R Software updates without Mercedes me user account: The Allow soft-
ware updates option is activated in the Software update menu.
Software update R For software updates via the communication module: an Internet con‐
nection exists via the communication module (/ page 667).
INFORMATION ON SOFTWARE UPDATES
R For software updates via Wi-Fi: a connection to an external Wi-Fi hot‐
Software updates keep your vehicle and the related systems up-to-date and
spot exists (/ page 668).
prevent security flaws.
Software updates are available online for vehicle components such as control
units, convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance sys‐ % Depending on the software update, this is started via the z
tems, suspension and drive systems as well as for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ communication module, ö Wi-Fi or an 4 external storage
tem. Software updates are available via the communication module or a Wi-Fi medium.
connection to an external hotspot.
561
F295 0075 02
# Select an update from the list of available updates.

% Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi
hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP. # Start the update.
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.
STARTING A SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA WI-FI
% If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the
Some software updates require an additional connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot.
connection is successfully established the browser will open in
The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software
order to start the update. To start the download follow the
update is started.
instructions in the browser.
# Select an update from the list of available updates.
Multimedia system: # Start the update.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Software update 5 Z
# Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot.
STARTING A MAP UPDATE FROM AN EXTERNAL STORAGE MEDIUM
The update is downloaded and installed automatically.
# Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface.
A message about an available map update appears on the central dis‐ For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installa‐
play. tion step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the vehi‐
cle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display
# Select the message. to complete the installation.
# Select Start. There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is
The map update is started. safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is
locked.
STARTING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE
If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are INSTALLING SOFTWARE UPDATES
downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As
keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws. soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears in the
central display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system.
# Select Automatic online update.
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically. Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be
completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the
vehicle switched off. If this is necessary, a message appears on the central dis‐
If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates
play after the vehicle is switched off.
once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.
562
F295 0075 02
# Follow the instructions on the central display. If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown
above appears every time the vehicle is started.
For some software updates, you can set a time for installation. The installation FAILURE OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
is carried out automatically at the scheduled time. You do not need to be in If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise limi‐
the vehicle during installation. Note that the planned installation is cancelled tations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for
as soon as the vehicle door is opened. example. This may impair the operating safety of the vehicle. Park the vehicle
safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.
If an installation is available where you can set the time, a message appears
(/ page 885)
on the central display after the vehicle is switched off.
Further information about software updates can be found at https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed.
FAILURE OF THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:
Make sure that no persons or animals are in the path of your vehicle. Events
If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown con‐
stored in the vehicle's control units can be overwritten.
tinuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist
AVAILABILITY OF THE DRIVER AND CENTRAL DISPLAY PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and
During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehi‐ consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.
cle, driver display and central display. You may receive the following display
FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY FAILURE (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX
messages when an installation is running:
HYPERSCREEN):
If the front passenger display has failed or a display message appears perma‐
nently, functions and systems are no longer available via the front passenger
display. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
% The display message does not appear every time a software

update is installed.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system
automatically attempts to restore the previous version.
563
F295 0075 02
Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐ # Select Reset.

A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.
tion)
# Select Yes.
WARNING The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia
&
Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions system is restarted after the system reset.
While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the revers‐
ing camera, are not available. % Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driv‐
ing systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to
# Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is station‐ carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or
ary. transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.
Requirements:

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset
WHEN RESETTING THE SYSTEM, PERSONAL DATA AND SETTINGS ARE
DELETED, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Connected devices
R Individual user profiles
R Biometric data
% Data used and saved by the driving and driving safety systems as
well as activated functions in the multimedia system are deleted.
564
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE
AMG TRACK PACE
Function of AMG TRACK PACE # At the desired starting point, select Ì Start recording.
The track recording starts at this point.

During track recording, sectors can be set to subdivide the track.
With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be ana‐ # Select ö Set sector.
lysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hocken‐
heimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for # To finish track recording, select É Stop recording or cross the starting
every track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to ach‐ line again.
ieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking pro‐
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
cedures can be measured and stored.
# Select the weather.
Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public traf‐
fic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environ‐
mental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your
vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application. % The temperature is determined automatically.
Enter a name.
Setting Track Race
#
# Press a to confirm.
Multimedia system:
The track is saved under the name you entered.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Track Race
SEARCHING BY TRACK NAME
RECORDING A NEW TRACK # Select ª Search .
# Select Ü New track .
# Enter the desired track name.
Tracks with the searched name are displayed.
565
F295 0075 02
MEASURING THE TIME ON THE SAVED TRACK R Lap overview

# ß Select All tracks.
# Select ï Start timing .
# Select the desired track.
# Select à.
# Select u.
# Drag the desired display from the grid to the left or right edge of the
# If you are already at the starting line, select Start timing.
central display.
or The displays are shown during Track Race.
# Select Navigate to to be navigated to the starting line. Selecting ¨ on the active display deactivates it.
Timekeeping begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
DISPLAYING THE ANALYSIS
# ß Select All tracks.
% Selecting ¨ enables you to switch to the AR view of the track.
An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
Selecting ò also allows you to switch to the telemetrics dis‐
play. # Select a track.
# Select a session.
# To end the timekeeping, select ð End timekeeping.
THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:
# Confirm the prompt with OK.
R lap and sector times
# Select the weather. R average and maximum permissible speed
R driver
# Select Yes to save the times recorded for this track.
R Vehicle
FADE IN DISPLAYS DURING TRACK RACE
R Date
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS CAN BE SUPERIMPOSED:
R Weather
R Tyre temperature
# Select Add recording to use another session for comparison.
R Miniature map # Select % in order to return to the overview.
R Sector overview
R G-force display
# Select Diagram.
566
F295 0075 02
# Set the desired parameters. EXPORTING TRACKS (USB)

The analysis is displayed. # Select ß Tracks .
An overview of all saved tracks appears.
# Select options u of the desired track.
# Select Export track to….

The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected
to the vehicle.
EDITING TRACKS AND RECORDINGS
# Select ß Tracks .
1 Lap overview
2 Parameter overview # Select options u of the desired track.
3 Editing parameters # Select Rename or Delete.
4 Deleting parameters
5 Adding a new parameter or
# Select a track.
% THE FOLLOWING VALUES CAN BE SET FOR PARAMETERS,
FOR EXAMPLE: # Highlight the desired recording.
R Speed # Select u options.

R longitudinal/lateral acceleration
# Select Exporting to… or Delete.
R Steering angle
R Engine speed
R engine oil/tyre temperature
Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise driving characteristics for
any position on the track.
567
F295 0075 02
Setting Drag Race # Start off and begin the measurement.

Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the
Multimedia system: target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Drag Race
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.
MEASURING ACCELERATION
MEASURING BRAKING
# Select Z Drag race options.
# Select Z Drag race options.
# Select Acceleration.
# Select Braking.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been
reached. # Start off and begin the measurement.
# Set a target speed. # Brake to a stop.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking
reached. procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as
soon as 150 km/h has been reached
# Start off and begin the measurement.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. STORING AND CALLING UP MEASURED VALUES
If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure. the measurement should be saved.
QUARTER MILE RACE # Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

# Select Z Drag race options. CALLING UP SAVED MEASUREMENTS
# Select Quarter-mile.
# ± Select History.
# Set a target distance.

# Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
# Select a measurement.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been
reached. The desired measurement is displayed in detail.
or
# Delete a measurement.
568
F295 0075 02
Calling up the telemetry display Multimedia system:

4 TRACK PACE 5 Z
Multimedia system:
CONNECTING A MOBILE DEVICE VIA THE TRACK PACE APP
4 TRACK PACE 5 Telemetry The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise
The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a them with stored tracks.
diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display.
# Select TRACK PACE App.
FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select Authorise new device.
R Engine speed
# Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
R Wheel angle
R speed # Select Continue and confirm the authorisation prompt.
R Steering angle A four-digit code is shown on the central display.
# Enter the code on the smartphone.

# Set the desired parameters.
The device is authorised.
# Set the time. DE-AUTHORISING THE MOBILE DEVICE
The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the selected time. # Select TRACK PACE App.
# Select a device.
Configuring AMG TRACK PACE
Requirements: The device is de-authorised.
To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app: SETTING THE TRACK PACE READOUT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY AND
DRIVER DISPLAY
R the TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile device. # Select IC and HUD contents.
R The mobile device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi
(/ page 558). # Activate or deactivate the desired contents.
The content on the head-up display and driver display is adjusted.
569
F295 0075 02
SETTING THE DASH CAM

% Further information on the display of the head-up display If the vehicle is equipped with a dash cam, it can be used in AMG TRACK
(/ page 501). PACE.
# Select Dashcam.
% Further information on the driver display (/ page 486). # Select Track Race or Drag Race and switch on Activate recording.
SETTING ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK

# You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under
Video overlay contents.
# Select Acoustic feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
# Select a setting.
SHOW STATISTICS
# Select TRACK PACE statistics.
Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.
THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:
R Driving time
R distance driven
R tracks recorded
R track races recorded
R laps recorded
R drag races recorded
R maximum speed
ACTIVATING THE AMBIENT LIGHT
If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on
delta time.
# Select Ambient light.
570
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Drive system settings
Drive system settings
Overview of the energy flow display in the Calling up the energy flow display
multimedia system Multimedia system:
The active components of the drive system are highlighted on the energy flow 4 © 5 Info
display. The energy flow between the individual components is shown in col‐ # Select Energy flow.
our. The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.
THE COMPONENTS DISPLAYED ARE:
R State of charge of the high-voltage battery

R Electric motors (drive system)
R Energy flow
R High-voltage battery
THE ENERGY FLOW IS SHOWN IN DIFFERENT COLOURS DEPENDING ON

THE OPERATING STATUS:
R White: strong acceleration (boost effect)

R Copper: driving at constant speed or with moderate acceleration
R Blue: recuperation (charging the high-voltage battery) or overrun mode
571
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Emotion Tour
Emotion Tour
Overview of Emotion Tour in the MBUX multi‐ Operating Emotion Tour Routes in the MBUX
media system multimedia system
In the Emotion Tour menu, routes can be recorded and reviewed, as well as Multimedia system:
saved for later reuse or sharing with other users. The function allows you to 4 © 5 Emotion Tour 5 My routes
navigate along an emotional route on public roads and record it. These routes
can be driven again and the journey recorded again in the process. In addition CREATING YOUR OWN ROUTE
to vehicle data, a video can also be recorded if the appropriate vehicle equip‐ # Select q.
ment is available. The self-recorded routes from Emotion Tour can be shared to The recording is started and the Active recording tab is displayed while
make them available to other users. driving. In addition, the EMOTION TOUR widget is displayed in the naviga‐
tion.
ROUTES
In the Routes tab you can record and drive along your own routes, as well as # When the route is completed, select É.
call up downloaded routes.
# Enter a route name.
EXPLORE
The Explore tab is used to download nearby routes from the community, as # Confirm with Save tour.
well as to calculate routes or explore the surroundings and have destinations The route is saved.
suggested to you.
CALLING UP DOWNLOADED ROUTES
# Select a route from My routes.
% Further information on using the Routes and Explore tabs
(/ page 572). # Select Let's go to start recording and navigation.
A new recording for the selected route is started.
572
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Emotion Tour
# Select the category shown.

% If the vehicle is too far from the start point of the route, it can
A route is displayed that can then be saved. Alternatively, it can be
either navigate to the start or to the next possible logical way‐
deleted using Back.
point of the route. Further information on navigation:
(/ page 579). DISCOVER THE SURROUNDINGS
# Select the second tile from the carousel.
DELETING ROUTES # Select the category shown.
# Select a route in the carousel and keep it pressed. A route is displayed that can then be saved. Alternatively, it can be
# Select Delete route. deleted using Back.
The route is deleted.
Operating Emotion Tour Explore in the MBUX

multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Emotion Tour 5 Explore
CALLING UP AND DOWNLOADING ROUTES

# Select a route from the carousel.
Select Save in EMOTION TOUR. The tour will be downloaded and saved in
My routes.
# Select Let's go to start recording and navigation.

A new recording for the selected route is started.
CALCULATING TOUR
# Select the first tile from the carousel.
# Enter the Start point and Destination.
# Select Next.
573
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy
Fit & Healthy
Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics In addition to the seat backrest and seat cushion, the lumbar support can be
activated for the function.
Requirements: # Activate or deactivate Including lumbar.
% These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a
memory function. ENERGIZING COMFORT
OVERVIEW OF ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMMES
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
% Note that the available programmes and the associated functions
# Select Seat kinetics. depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equip‐
ment, fewer functions may be available.
ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat posi‐
tion during a journey. This involves repeatedly stressing and relieving the mus‐
cles and joints by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest. PROGRAMME OVERVIEW
STARTING SEAT KINETICS R Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The
# Select ; for the desired seat. seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and
the programme is completed with appropriate sound. In addition, the
The programme will run for the set duration.
vibration massage in the cushions can loosen the muscles.
CONFIGURING SEAT KINETICS R Warmth: Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. Seat
# Select Z for the desired seat. and steering wheel heating provide soothing warmth. The programme is
completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours.
# Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or Seat surface.
R Vitality: Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driv‐
# Select the desired duration for the selected seat. ing situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is car‐
ried out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising massage.
Vehicles with multicontour seats:
574
F295 0075 02
R Joy: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as desired area of the body you can receive targeted tips for the comfort
mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage pro‐ level of this area.
gramme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours.
R Well-being: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. This is achieved Most programmes that have been started for one seat can also be transferred
through a relaxing massage programme, friendly light and calming sound. simultaneously to another seat.
R Forest Glade: Can have a calming and soothing effect on the vehicle
occupants thanks to the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is suppor‐ STARTING THE ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMME
ted by a suitable animation, colours and sound.
R Sounds of the Sea: Can contribute to calming the vehicle occupants. & WARNING
The acoustics of wave sounds and seagulls in combination with other Increased risk of accidents when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT
vehicle functions create a relaxing seashore atmosphere. programmes Tips and Training
R Summer Rain: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. The relaxing effect The Tips and Training ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes can distract
of a rain shower can be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle you when driving.
functions inside the vehicle.
# Only carry out exercises if the traffic situation permits.
R Power Nap: The programme consists of three phases.
- Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music is played and the air is # When listening to the tips, make sure you are aware of the
purified by ionisation. traffic around you at all times.
- Sleeping phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted
as much as possible.
- Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is played and the air is
purified by ionisation. Additionally, functions such as seat ventila‐
tion and a massage programme are activated.
R Training: Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling
asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The
exercises are demonstrated in short videos.
The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio
content is conceived so that it can also be played back when you are
driving. Animations are only shown when the vehicle is stationary. Always
observe the traffic conditions if you are training when driving.
R Tips: The system gives auditory tips for possible exercises or measures
for improving the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By selecting the
575
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system:
& WARNING 4 © 5 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT
Risk of entrapment when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro‐
gramme Power Nap STARTING AND STOPPING A PROGRAMME
With the Power Nap ENERGIZING COMFORT programme the following
# Select a programme.
systems are moved automatically if required: # Select ; for the desired seat.
R Seats # Select É to stop the programme.
R Side windows
R Sliding sunroof
% If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no lon‐
R Roller sunblinds ger met, a corresponding message appears. The active pro‐
gramme is cancelled.
This can cause you or another vehicle occupant to be trapped.
CONFIGURING A PROGRAMME
# Make sure that there is sufficient space behind the front seats.
# Make sure that no body parts are in the areas of movement.
# Select Settings.
Requirements: # Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.

SETTING THE DURATION
FOR THE START OF POWER NAP: # Select Settings.
R Only the power supply is on. # Select the desired duration.

R The doors are closed. STARTING A POWER NAP
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. # Select Power Nap.
R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of
the auxiliary climate control.
# Select ; for the desired seat.
576
F295 0075 02
WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STATIONARY, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS ARE CAR‐

RIED OUT WHEN POWER NAP IS STARTED:
ENERGIZING COACH
FUNCTION OF THE ENERGIZING COACH
R The roller sunblinds are extended.
REQUIREMENTS:
R The doors are locked.
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. R The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes me portal
R The seats are moved into the fully reclined position. or the Mercedes me App.
R The parking brake is applied. R The Mercedes me ENERGIZING app is installed on the mobile phone to
use the service.
# Select É to stop the programme.
With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation.
Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start of an
% The programme is available for the rear seats while the vehicle is appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.
in motion. The above-mentioned functions may only have limited
availability. THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMMES COULD BE SUGGESTED:
R Vitality
STARTING THE TRAINING PROGRAMME
As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long
# Select Training. journey times, for example
# Select Ì a programme. Information on the vitality program see (/ page 574).
R Joy
# Select É to stop the training programme.
As a balancing programme in demanding driving situations
Information on the Joy programme see (/ page 574).
% The animations demonstrating the exercises are faded out when
R Refresh
the vehicle is in motion and you only hear the instructions.
As a refreshing programme when temperatures rise
Information on the Refresh programme; see (/ page 574).
STARTING TIPS
R Warmth
# Select Tips.
As a warming programme when temperatures drop
# Select Ì an area of the body. Information on the Warmth programme; see (/ page 574).
# Select É to stop playback of the tip.
577
F295 0075 02
By connecting a Garmin fitness tracker, for example the Garmin vívoactive® 3, R You are logged in with your Mercedes me profile both in the vehicle and
additional information can be entered into the evaluation for the recommenda‐ in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
tion of an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional information
includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress
Multimedia system:
level is based primarily on the pulse rate.
4 © 5 Apps 5 ENERGIZING COACH
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INTEGRATION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION # Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last
VIA A GARMIN FITNESS TRACKER: 30 minutes driving time are shown.
R Your fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account. A corresponding fault message is shown if there is no mobile phone con‐
nected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an extended period.
R Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account.
% Only pulse values in the range of 30 ‑ 140 (possibly 150) bpm are
If you wear your Garmin fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included
shown on the central display. The pulse values have no medical
in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH.
validity but are only informative in nature and are therefore also
REQUIREMENT FOR THE INTEGRATION OF THE SLEEP DATA: not required to be accurate.
R The Garmin fitness tracker is synchronised with the Garmin account

before the beginning of the journey.
% If ATTENTION ASSIST determines an excessive lack of attention,

ENERGIZING COACH makes no further suggestions. Further infor‐
mation about ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 392).
CALLING UP THE ENERGIZING COACH DISPLAY

Requirements:
R The fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.

R Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account
in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 630).
578
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic
Navigation and traffic
Switching navigation on Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route
(/ page 597)
Multimedia system: Route guidance not active:
4© EQ module is shown in the reduced view
# Alternatively, press the © button on the steering wheel on the right Tapping opens the EQ module in the expanded view with the charging
(/ page 532). functions (/ page 529)
2 Enters a destination
The Zero Layer with the digital map is displayed.
3 Calls up the Control Centre in the status line
4 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
Navigation overview 5 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and
suggestions
DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
6 Searches for POIs, e.g. charging stations w and parking facilities j, as
well as sets map orientation Ä and map type
7 Navigation window shows the next manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the
route monitor (zoomed in view)
Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming
driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, charging stops, destina‐
tion, traffic delays, 3D images at motorway exits, online content
. Switches off navigation announcements
1 Navigation module (reduced view) or EQ module (reduced view) Ì Switches on navigation announcements
Route guidance active: THE FOLLOWING MAP ORIENTATIONS 6 ARE AVAILABLE:
Reduced view of the navigation module shows information relevant to the
route, e.g. the next charging stop, the destination and a traffic delay R 2D and to the north
£ Ends the current route guidance R 2D and in the direction of travel
R 3D and in the direction of travel
579
F295 0075 02
R Map with complete route

Destination entry
NOTES ON DESTINATION ENTRY
% If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of
travel and 2D north orientation. WARNING
&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
THE FOLLOWING MAP TYPES 6 ARE AVAILABLE: equipment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
R Daytime display when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
R Night-time display could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
R Satellite map
mits.
% If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report. attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ENTERING A POI OR ADDRESS

Requirements:
Observe the notes on destination entry (/ page 580).
R For the online search:

- There is an Internet connection.
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have
accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
580
F295 0075 02
- The service is available and has been activated. A Sets the written language
B Switches to digits and special characters
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
% If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
the data of the digital map.
# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ª Where to?
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.
THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:
R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
R Contact name
Example: entering a POI or address
R Geo-coordinates (/ page 584)
1 Input line with current entry
R Three-word addresses from what3words (/ page 584)
2 Search result
Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search .
3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with dou‐
ble arrow
4 Deletes an entry # Hide the keyboard with a.
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
6 Deletes the last character entered
The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
7 Hides the keypad
information and a corresponding map section.
8 Switches to handwriting recognition (/ page 550)
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
9 Starts the MBUX voice assistant (/ page 511)
581
F295 0075 02
SELECTING A DESTINATION SUGGESTION

% You can save a destination as a favourite (/ page 607).
Requirements
R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 560). SELECTING A POI
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show Requirements:
destination suggestions.
R For the use of personal POIs:
Multimedia system: - A USB device is connected with the multimedia system .
4 © 5 ª Where to? - Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been
saved in the PersonalPOI folder on the USB device.
# Select Suggestions.
or Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ª Where to?
# Select a destination suggestion directly on the Zero Layer (/ page 526).
# Select POIs.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
# Select one of the displayed quick-access categories, e.g. j .
% If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is available via Ä. # Select the POI.
The menu offers settings for the suggestions and memory func‐
tions. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
or
% Managing destination suggestions (/ page 608). # Select All categories or Personal POIs (see requirements).
# Select the category.

SELECTING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS
Multimedia system: # Select the POI.
4 © 5 ª Where to? The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
# Select Previous destinations.
# Select the destination.

The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
582
F295 0075 02
SETTING A SEARCH FILTER AFTER SELECTING A POI CATEGORY # Use G to change back.
THE PRESET SEARCH POSITION DEPENDS ON THE STATUS OF THE ROUTE The new categories are shown after the destination entry is called up the
GUIDANCE: next time.
R If route guidance is not active, In the vicinity is searched.

% If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category
R If route guidance is active, Along the route is searched.
to be replaced.
# When the search results are displayed, select Filter.

CHANGING THE ORDER OF QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity. # In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.
# If a route with intermediate destinations already exists and Near destina- # Tap on the arrows next to the selected category.
tion has been selected in the search filters, the destination is selected The arrows for the other categories are greyed out.
for the search.
# Drag the category up or down.
or
# Select ø.
# Select the desired travelling time to the point of interest. DELETING QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# Select Search results. # In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.
CONFIGURING CATEGORIES FOR QUICK ACCESS
# Select ß for the chosen category.
THE CATEGORIES ARE DISPLAYED:
R As symbols after calling up the destination entry via ª

# Select Delete.
R As a list after calling up All categories # Select ø.

CHANGING CATEGORIES FOR PERSONAL POIS
# In the POI menu, select All categories. # Select Personal POIs.
# Select f or ß for a category. # Press on a category as long as is necessary until a menu appears.
Tapping on f adds the category.
# Select Change name and enter a name.
Tapping on ß removes the category.
# Select Change icon and select a symbol.
583
F295 0075 02
# Select Delete and confirm the prompt with Yes. ENTERING THE DESTINATION AS A THREE-WORD ADDRESS
SELECTING A CONTACT FOR DESTINATION ENTRY Requirements
Requirements R An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the cen‐
tral display with the Q symbol.
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 630).
R The online search is active.
R The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded .
R The contact has a navigable address.
Multimedia system:
R The address data can be located on the digital map.
4 © 5 ª Where to?
Multimedia system:
# Enter the destination as a three-word address from what3words. The
entry can be made with spaces between the words instead of dots.
4 © 5 ª Where to?
The search results are displayed.
# Enter a contact in the entry line.
# Select the address.
Alternatively, after calling up the destination entry, you can enter the
THE BRANDENBURG GATE HAS THIS LANGUAGE DEPENDENT THREE-
name of a contact in the search field.
WORD ADDRESS:
ENTERING GEO-COORDINATES
Multimedia system: R German: tapfer.gebäude.verliehen
4 © 5 ª Where to? R English: that.lands.winning
# Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and longitude. R French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant
EXAMPLES OF INPUT FORMATS:

% Searching for a destination using three-word addresses is not
R 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and seconds) possible in all countries and in all languages.
R 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
ALTERNATIVELY, USE THE FOLLOWING ENTRY OPTIONS:
# Confirm the entry.
R Entry in the global search (/ page 545)
R Voice navigation (/ page 511)
584
F295 0075 02
Example: during a telephone call you are given a 3-word address. After # Press and hold on the map.
activating the MBUX voice assistant, say one of the following two voice Available destinations are displayed.
commands:
- Navigate to tapfer gebäude verliehen or
- Navigate to tapfer Punkt gebäude Punkt verliehen # Briefly press on a POI symbol.
The POI is selected. If there are several POIs at this map position, a list
appears.
# Select the destination in the Selected objects list.
SELECTING A DESTINATION FROM FAVOURITES
Requirements:
R Destinations are saved as favourites.

Three-word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system
for multilingual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite
metres. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do (/ page 607).
not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example.
Multimedia system:
% Three-word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice 4 © 5 ª Where to?
for most routine applications. # Select Favourites.
YOU CAN CONVERT ADDRESSES TO THREE-WORD
ADDRESSES AND BACK AGAIN: # Select a favourite.
R At the website https://what3words.com
R In the what3words apps ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE ALREADY SET
# Select Home or Work.
SELECTING A DESTINATION ON THE MAP
Multimedia system:
4©
# If necessary, move the map (/ page 615).
585
F295 0075 02
ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE NOT YET SET Multimedia system:
# Select Home or Work. 4 © 5 ª Where to?
The prompt No "Home" address available. Set address now? appears, for The vehicle can receive destinations from services or apps. You will be
example. informed when a destination is received.
# Select Yes. # Select Received destinations.
# Search for or select the address. # Select a destination.

# Select Save.
DELETING FAVOURITES
% You can save a received destination in the favourites
# Select Ä for a favourite. (/ page 607).
# Select Delete.
or DELETING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS

# Delete a destination with E.
# Select Delete all.
or
When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for # Select Delete all.
example.
SELECTING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS Route
Requirements:
CALCULATING A ROUTE WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE
R There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.
Requirements:
R A destination has been sent to the vehicle.
R Destinations have been shared from another seat in the vehicle. R The destination has been entered.
R The destination address is shown.
R For Navigation with Electric Intelligence:
- You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is
connected with the account.
586
F295 0075 02
- The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and # Select one of the options.
activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of % When the Schedule charging stops route option is switched off, a
charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for opti‐ route without charging stations is calculated.
mal function.
- The Schedule charging stops route option is switched on
(/ page 589). % If the destination is located in a multi-storey car park, for exam‐
ple, and corresponding data is available, the parking levels are
displayed.
SAVING A DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE

# Select ß Favourite.
# Select an option.
CALLING UP THE ROUTE OVERVIEW
% When Schedule charging stops is switched off, this option is avail‐

able instead of the favourites function.
Example: detailed display
1 Saves destination as a favourite (Schedule charging stops is switched on) # Select Routes.
Calls up alternative routes (Schedule charging stops is switched off)
# Select an alternative route.
2 Calculates the route and starts route guidance
3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
4 Destination information, online content (e.g. pictures, opening hours),
# Select ¥ Let's go!.
three-word address from what3words CALLING UP THE DETAILED DISPLAY WITH DESTINATION ADDRESS
The route with Electric Intelligence is automatically and intelligently calculated # Pull the bar above the ¥ Let's go! symbol upwards.
to the destination. This is updated during route guidance. The route with Elec‐ Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content,
tric Intelligence contains the required charging stops as intermediate destina‐ for example ratings, prices and weather information, is shown.
tions. The charging stations are determined taking account of the driving dis‐
If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed.
tance and the estimated charging times.
587
F295 0075 02
# To share a destination: select Ç Share.

% IF YOU CALL UP THE MENU DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE,
This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.
MORE OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
# To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select
R To change the order of destinations, select Move
Browser.
(/ page 598).
# To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call. R To delete the destination, select Delete (/ page 598).
SEARCHING FOR POIS IN THE VICINITY OF THE DESTINATION SHOWN R To end route guidance, select Cancel route guidance.
# Select In the vicinity.
OVERVIEW: NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE
# Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal If the Schedule charging stops route option is enabled, the optimal route based
POI (/ page 582).
on time is calculated with the required charging stops. The charging stops are
ADDING AN INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION TO THE EXISTING ROUTE OR determined taking into account the route and charging times and are set as
STARTING A NEW ROUTE GUIDANCE intermediate destinations for route guidance.
# Select ¦ Add.
Navigation with Electric Intelligence constantly checks a large number of influ‐
The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destina‐ encing variables, e.g. specifications for the climate control in the vehicle inte‐
tion. Route guidance begins. rior or changes in the weather. For each section of the route, the current
# There are already four intermediate destinations: confirm the prompt energy requirement is calculated from the high-voltage battery. The multime‐
with Yes and select an intermediate destinations in the route overview dia system determines the ideal charging stations along the route based on
availability and charging power.
(/ page 597), that should be overwritten with the new intermediate
destination. For each charging stop, the required amount of energy and the expected
charging time is calculated and displayed. If the driver wishes, they will be
or
informed by a notification on their mobile phone when the required state of
charge is reached. The high-voltage battery continues to charge until the proc‐
# Select Í Replace.
ess is interrupted by the driver.
The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guid‐
ance begins.
% Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery
(/ page 342).
You can influence the route calculated by the Navigation with Electric Intelli‐
gence.
588
F295 0075 02
The options "Ignore charging station" and "Add charging station" are available SWITCHING ON THE ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE ROUTE OPTION
for this purpose (/ page 597). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route
% NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE ATTEMPTS TO # Switch on the Schedule charging stops route option.
SHORTEN THE TOTAL TRAVEL TIME, IF NECESSARY, BY If the route has been calculated and the state of charge of the high-volt‐
USING THE FOLLOWING CHARGING STRATEGIES: age battery is not sufficient to reach the destination, charging stations
are set automatically as intermediate destinations.
R Charge twice briefly with high charging power instead of
charging once for a long time with low charging power
R Charge once briefly with low charging power to reach a % This function is not available in all countries.
charging station with higher charging power
SELECTING SETTINGS FOR CHARGING STATIONS ON THE ROUTE
NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE USES THE FOLLOWING Requirements:
DATA:
R The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activa‐
R Online Route ted in the Mercedes me Portal.
Route calculation establishes an Online Route. The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging
The Online Route is continuously updated during the journey, e.g. if traf‐ stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for optimal function.
fic information is available.
R Specific vehicle information Multimedia system:
The current state of charge of the high-voltage battery and electrical 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route
consumption are taken into account, for example.
SETTING THE STATE OF CHARGE OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY WHEN
R Charging stations
THE CHARGING STATION AND DESTINATION ARE REACHED
These are made available as intermediate destinations in the Online # Select Charge level at destination or Charge level at charging stations.
Route.
# Move the control knob to the left or right and set the preferred state of
charge in percent (%).
To reach a charging station, the system uses the battery capacity, e.g. up to
10 % residual energy content (state of charge) or even less. The Min. message
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: appears on the central display. You can increase this state of charge for the
589
F295 0075 02
arrival at the charging station and destination, e.g. to 25 % at the charging sta‐ # Activate All.
tion and 50 % at the destination. All charging stations known to the navigation system are taken into
account when calculating routes with Electric Intelligence, regardless of
% IN THE EVENT OF INCREASED ENERGY CONSUMPTION the type of payment.
WHILE DRIVING, E.G. WITH HEADWIND, THE FOLLOWING It may be necessary to register with the provider.
OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE SYSTEM:
R The charging station is safely reached even at states of % If route guidance is active, the high-voltage battery is tempered
charge of less than 10 %. before a charging stop depending on the state of charge and the
battery temperature.
R Navigation with Electric Intelligence selects a closer charg‐
ing station for the route.
SWITCHING THE RANGE MONITOR ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
% If a charging facility is available at the destination, the state of 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route
charge can be lowered below 10 %. The Min. message appears The activated range monitoring assists with messages on the driver and cen‐
on the central display. Make sure that the range monitor is tral display to ensure safe arrival at the destination.
switched on.
# Activate or deactivate Range monitoring.
To reach the destination with the state of charge set by the driver, the
% When planning a route, you can enter another destination or the range is permanently monitored when the option is switched on.
return journey. The Navigation with Electric Intelligence then
takes into account the required state of charge at the destina‐
% If necessary, the range monitor in the speedometer shows a rec‐
tion. This ensures that an optimal charging station or the new
ommended maximum speed and informs you in the driver dis‐
destination is reached safely on the onward journey.
play, e.g. with the message Avoid additional charging stop: drive
less than 100 km/h .
SELECTING A PROVIDER FOR CHARGING STATIONS Tips for saving energy are then also shown on the central display
# Activate or deactivate Mercedes me Charge. while driving.
If the option is activated, only charging stations payable with Mercedes
me Charge are taken into account when selecting the charging station.
or
590
F295 0075 02
# Select All categories r.

% THE RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM SPEED IS ACCOUNTED FOR
BY THE FOLLOWING DRIVING SYSTEMS: # Switch on the Charging stations category.
YOU CAN RECOGNISE CHARGING STATIONS IN THE VICINITY OF THE
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 399)
CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION ON THE MAP BY THE FOLLOWING SYM‐
R Cruise control (/ page 394) BOLS:
R Online charging stations

% This function is not available in all countries. The charging power and availability are shown in the symbol for the
charging station using arrows and a status indicator.
SHOWING CHARGING STATIONS ON THE MAP R On-board charging stations
The charging stations are shown on the map with white symbols without
Requirements:
detailed information.
R For the display of online charging stations:
% The display of the online charging stations is not available in all
- You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is
countries.
connected with the account.
- The "Display of charging stations" service is available and activated
in the Mercedes me Portal. PAYING FOR CHARGING ON A ROUTE WITH MERCEDES ME CHARGE
Requirements:
Multimedia system:
R The Mercedes me Charge service is available and subscribed to in the
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 View Mercedes me Portal.
# Select Schedule charging stops. R The "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" services
DISPLAYING ON-BOARD CHARGING STATIONS are activated.
On-board charging stations are included in the map data of the MBUX multi‐ R To select the charging station using Navigation with Electric Intelli‐
media system navigation. The data on these charging stations is not updated gence: the "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is activated and
regularly. In contrast, online charging stations are transmitted to the vehicle the Schedule charging stops option is switched on in the multimedia sys‐
via an Internet connection and displayed on the map. tem.
R For authentication at the charging station: after activation in the
# Select POI symbols r.
Mercedes me Portal, you have concluded a charging contract with your
payment details with the respective contractual partners.
591
F295 0075 02
R For authentication using the app: the Mercedes me App is installed on This charging function is not available in all countries.
the external device, e.g. tablet or smartphone.
R For charging stations without the ability to be unlocked using the app, # To select a charging station: tap on a symbol on the map for a charging
you have purchased an RFID card for the contractual partner. station or on a group of symbols for several charging stations.
or
# Select a charging station as a POI and accept it in the list (/ page 582).
Multimedia system: or
4©
# When route guidance is active with Navigation with Electric Intelligence,
select a charging stop 1 in the route overview (/ page 597).
% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: # Select Details.
R Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery When arriving at a charging station, the corresponding screen is auto‐
(/ page 342). matically displayed if necessary.
R Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE CHARGING STA‐
charging station (/ page 347) and (/ page 348).
TION (IF AVAILABLE):
R Before selection of a charging station: the data for the
charging stations is based on the online content available R Name of the charging station operator
from the respective third-party provider. R Address of the charging station
R Observe the local information and conditions. R Plug with availability and information about charging power
R Opening times
R Name of the charging station
% With the Plug-and-Charge charging function of Mercedes me
R Travel time and distance of the charging station from the vehicle
Charge, you can charge the vehicle at public Plug-and-Charge-
enabled charging stations. The charging process starts immedi‐ R Authentication method
ately when the charging cable is plugged into the charging sta‐ R Contact information of the charging station operator
tion. No further authentication is required. Communication R General costs and charging costs
between the vehicle and the charging station takes place directly
R Estimated charging costs and your available energy volumes, if available
via the charging cable.
R Display of available reviews and the ability to review with up to five stars
592
F295 0075 02
R Availability prognosis # Display the details using the widget (programme symbol).
R Information on green charging # Select Start charging process.
Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certificates of origin to ensure that
The charging process starts. In addition, the payment agreement saved
an equivalent amount of electricity from renewable sources is fed into
with the third-party provider is authorised.
the grid for charging processes carried out via Mercedes me Charge.
# If required, enter the PIN for personalisation.
# Calculate the route (/ page 586).
# Confirm the action.
% If the function is available, the start/stop of the charging process # If required, select the connector ID from the list shown.
can be selected. The selected charge port is unlocked.
# Start the charging process.

AUTHENTICATION AT THE CHARGING STATION (START/STOP)
The start of the charging process is shown.
% During authentication, the contract data is checked at the charg‐

# Select the Stop charging process display button in the app.
ing station. If the check is successful, the charging process is The charging process is ended.
authorised. Payment is made automatically via the payment Payment is processed automatically.
method specified in the contract.
IF DATA FOR THIRD-PARTY PROVIDERS IS AVAILABLE, YOU WILL
Depending on the charging station operator, authentication is
RECEIVE THIS INFORMATION:
first carried out at the charging station. The charging cable of the
charging station is then unlocked. Alternatively, first plug the R Overview of the charging process
charging cable connector into the vehicle socket and then carry R Estimated cost
out authentication at the charging station.
% There may be differences between the costs listed and the costs
% For some charging stations, unlocking the charging station via billed.
the app is not available. In this case use your RFID card to acti‐
vate the charging process (if available). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
OVERVIEW OF THE RANGE ON MAP SERVICE

# In the app or on the MBUX multimedia system, select a charging station If there are only a few fast-charging stations or charging stations available
in the map menu. within the vehicle's electric range, the service warns you with a notification.
593
F295 0075 02
The notification recommends charging stations made available to the service

by charging station providers/operators. % If the route type Online routes is switched on, you will not receive
any notifications.
THE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
R The chargeable "Range on Map" service is available and activated in the OVERVIEW OF CHARGING NEAR DESTINATION
Mercedes me Portal. THE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
R The route type Online routes is switched off (/ page 595).
R The destination has been entered.
R The destination address is shown.
THERE ARE THREE NOTIFICATION TYPES: R For Navigation with Electric Intelligence:
R Comfort warning - Mercedes me connect is available.
There are no longer enough fast charging stations nearby. - You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is
R Warning when electric range falls below 50 km connected with the account.
As soon as the vehicle falls below the electric range of 50 km, the next - The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and
charging stations in the vicinity are suggested. activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
R Critical warning The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of
charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for opti‐
There are less than five charging stations including fast charging stations
mal function.
nearby.
The function suggests the best possible charging stop near the destination
% If you do not want to receive notifications, deactivate the Allow from which you can reach the destination on foot.
notifications option for the "Range on Map" service
THE DIGITAL MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, FOR EXAM‐
(/ page 543). PLE:
R The route to the destination

In addition, the electric range can be displayed on the map (/ page 620).
R The route to the charging stop
R The pedestrian route from the charging stop to the destination and the
% If the electric range of the vehicle is less than 6 km, there is no
walking time in minutes
display on the map. If there are not enough charging stations
available within this range, you will receive a notification.
594
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED, FOR EXAMPLE: R After asking

A prompt appears when a new route is detected with a shorter journey
R Select the charging station as the destination and calculate the route.
time based on traffic reports. You can continue to use the current route
R Move the map and reset the map to the current vehicle position. or use the dynamic route instead (/ page 595).
R Change the map scale. R Off
R Select additional map symbols, e.g. for displaying traffic information or No traffic reports are taken into account for the route.
hazard warnings from Car-2-X.
CALCULATING ALTERNATIVE ROUTES
SELECTING A ROUTE TYPE
Multimedia system: Requirements:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route R The Schedule charging stops option is switched off (/ page 589).
USING ONLINE ROUTES
The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Multimedia system:
If available, you can select online routes. 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 View
# Activate Overview of route after start.
% Online routes are not available in all countries and for all vehi‐ Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
cles.
% When Schedule charging stops is switched on, the route is calcu‐
# To use online routes: switch on the option. lated with Electric Intelligence.
TAKING TRAFFIC INFORMATION FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT
# Select Dynamic route guidance r. ACCEPTING A DETOUR RECOMMENDATION AFTER A PROMPT
Requirements:
# Select one of the options.
EXPLANATION OF THE OPTIONS: R After asking is switched on (/ page 595) in the Dynamic route guidance
menu.
R Automatic
R Route guidance is active.
Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account
R There are traffic reports for the current route.
(/ page 608).
Live Traffic Information and FM home screen are not available in all
countries. If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new
routes will be shown.
595
F295 0075 02
If another application is active, a notification is hidden. # Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing.
Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment.
# Confirm the notification.
Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding
# To accept the new route: select Accept. with the payment type selected.
# To maintain the current route: select Keep to current route. AVOIDING OR USING ROADS REQUIRING A SPECIAL TOLL STICKER
A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.
SELECTING ROUTE OPTIONS
Multimedia system: # Select Avoid vignette roads r.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid options # Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE SECTIONS, E.G. MOTORWAYS OR FERRIES or

# Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
# Switch individual countries on or off in the list.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consider‐
toll sticker in the selected countries.
ation, for example.
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the
selected country which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).
% The selected route options cannot always be taken into account.
Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though
the Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears % These route options are not available in every country.
and you will hear a corresponding message.
AVOIDING AREAS
AVOIDING OR USING TOLL ROADS # Select Avoid areas r (/ page 616).
The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll).
SELECTING NOTIFICATIONS FOR THE ROUTE
# Select Toll roads r. Requirements:
# Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
R For an audible indication when approaching a personal POI: the USB
If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads.
device contains personal POIs.
If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account.
R The USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
or R The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated.
596
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: DISPLAYING A ROUTE OVERVIEW WITH CHARGING STATION

4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Messages & tones Requirements:
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF R A destination is entered.
# Activate Reduced messages.
If a driving instruction is available for a simple change in direction, you
Multimedia system:
hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The number of
4 © 5 EQ 5 Route
driving instructions along the route is minimised.
# Activate Detailed messages.

If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situa‐
tion, you hear supplementary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and
continue to follow the major road". Additional driving instructions are
issued for the route, for example on turning major roads.
# Activate Announce street names.
The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced.
% This option is not available in all countries and languages.
SWITCHING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF 1 Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station
# Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warnings. 2 Charging stop shows the charging time recommended by the navigation
If available, traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic
jams that pose a risk.
3 Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time
AUDIBLE INDICATION WHEN APPROACHING A PERSONAL POI
4 Searches for an additional charging station
# Select Personal POIs.
When route guidance is active, the charging stops, entered intermediate desti‐
# Activate a category. nations the destination are shown.
When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible
DEPENDING ON THE ROUTE, TRAFFIC SITUATION AND AVAILABLE DATA,
indication will be issued.
FURTHER INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED:
R Name, destination address
597
F295 0075 02
R Symbols for intermediate destination and destination # Select 4.

R Phone number (if available)
# If necessary, filter the display of the charging stations according to the
R Web address (if available) charging power.
R Traffic information
# Select a charging station.
You can influence the route calculated by the navigation with Electric Intelli‐
gence using options 1 and 4. % You can also search for a charging station using the w symbol
on the digital map or next to ª Where to?(/ page 579).
# Select one of the options.
IGNORING A CHARGING STATION PLANNING ROUTES
If you do not want to drive to the selected charging station, it can be removed
for the current route guidance. The navigation with Electric Intelligence tries to Requirements:
plan the best possible alternative charging station for the route. R A destination is entered.
# Select 1.
The expected charging output, the dynamic charge level display as well Multimedia system:
as the current state of charge and the predicted charging target are dis‐ 4 © 5 EQ 5 ª
played, for example. # Enter the intermediate destination (/ page 40).
# Select Ignore. After entering the destination and new calculation of the route, the route
overview is shown again. The route contains a new intermediate destina‐
# Select Ignore during this journey. tion.
The charging station is removed from the route.
% If there are already four intermediate destinations, delete an
% After selecting Details, the detailed information about the charg‐ intermediate destination (/ page 598).
ing station is displayed.
EDITING A ROUTE WITH INTERMEDIATE DESTINATIONS
ADDING A CHARGING STATION Requirements:
If you want to drive to a charging station on the route earlier than planned, for
example, you can search for an additional charging station. If the charging sta‐ R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been
tion is suitable for the route, it will be accepted by the navigation with Electric entered.
Intelligence.
598
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: Destination at the end of the list

4 © 5 EQ 5 Route 2 Current vehicle position
CHANGING THE ORDER OF THE DESTINATIONS The route sections are displayed in the navigation window. The route list is
# In the route overview, press and hold on a destination. updated during the journey.
# Move the destination with = or Ì.

% Motorway information shows the available service facilities. After
# Tap on ø. selecting symbols, e.g. for car parks, service areas or motorway
exits, the POI is adopted as an intermediate destination or desti‐
The editing mode is ended.
nation.
DELETING A DESTINATION
# In the route overview, press and hold on a destination. # Swipe up or down.
# Tap on E. # Select a route section.
The editing mode is ended. The map section is displayed.
DISPLAYING THE ROUTE LIST
# To return to vehicle position: select Current position.
Multimedia system:
4© SELECTING AN ALTERNATIVE ROUTE
# Tap on the navigation window 7 (/ page 579). Requirements:
R A route has already been created.

R The Overview of route after start option is switched on (/ page 595).
R The Schedule charging stops option is switched off (/ page 589).
% When Schedule charging stops is switched on, the route is calcu‐

lated with Electric Intelligence. Alternative routes are then not
available.
Example: route list
1 Route sections with turning arrow, distance to change of direction, road
number, road name
Current driving manoeuvre at the top of the list
599
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: ACTIVATING A COMMUTER ROUTE

4 © 5 EQ 5 Route 5 Other routes Requirements
The original route and alternative routes with indication of the travel time dif‐
ference are displayed on the map. An alternative route can also be a faster
R You have created a profile (/ page 537).
route, but one that is significantly longer. R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 560).
R The Commuter route option is switched on .
THE FOLLOWING ROUTE INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED:
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
R Driving time destination suggestions.
R Time of arrival R Routes have been learned for these destination suggestions.
R Distance to the destination R Route guidance is active.
R Avoid options based on the set route options
R Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route
% This commuter route is not available in all countries.
# When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in
the navigation window by swiping to the right or left. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route
CHANGING ROUTE TYPE
# Select Filter.
# Activate Commuter route.
The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a
# Switching the route type on or off. commuter route.
AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE OPTIONS For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also repor‐
# Select Filter. ted when driving without active route guidance.
# To select commuter route: select Start.
# Switch the route options on or off (/ page 596). Route guidance begins without spoken driving instructions.
# Confirm the settings with Finished.
# To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start. % A commuter route is suggested even with delays on the route.
# To select an alternative route on the map: touch any point on the

# To delete a commuter route: select ¨.
alternative route.
The alternative route is highlighted.
600
F295 0075 02
ADJUSTING THE ROUTE ON THE MAP DRIVING SITUATION

The following notification is shown on the central display ATTENTION ASSIST
Requirements:
Tap here to search for rest areas..
R A route has already been created.
# Confirm the notification.
The service station search starts. The available service stations along the
You can change the course of the original route on the map. A new intermedi‐ route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.
ate destination is set in the process.
# Select a service station.
% If the maximum number of intermediate destinations is reached, # Calculate the route with the service station as an ¦ intermediate des‐
the function is not supported. Press the OK button to confirm the
tination or as a ¥ destination (/ page 586).
message.
# If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the
# Press and hold lightly on the route. prompt.
A symbol appears. The route can be changed. The selected service station is entered in the route overview at position
1. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
# Drag and hold the route with your finger to a desired map position.
STARTING AND EDITING A STORED ROUTE
The new route is displayed. The route is recalculated.
Requirements:
When the route is calculated, the journey time and distance are com‐
pared with the original route. R A USB device with stored routes is connected with the multimedia sys‐
When the finger is pulled away from the display, the intermediate desti‐ tem (/ page 679).
nation is shown on the map. R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange data
format (.gpx).
# Accept the route with Confirm or reject it with Cancel and return to the
original route.
Multimedia system:
STARTING THE AUTOMATIC SERVICE STATION SEARCH
4 © 5 ª Where to?
Requirements
# Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is
R ATTENTION ASSIST is activated (/ page 392). displayed.
R You are driving on a motorway. # Select Stored routes.
R There are service stations along the route section ahead.
601
F295 0075 02
STARTING A SAVED ROUTE # Select End recording.

# Select a route.
# Select Start: route guidance at start or Start: current location. Route guidance
Route guidance begins.
NOTES ON ROUTE GUIDANCE
RENAMING A ROUTE
# Press on a route until a menu is shown. WARNING
&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
# Select Rename.
equipment while the vehicle is in motion
# Enter the name. If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
# Select OK. could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
RECORDING AND STORING A ROUTE # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
Requirements: mits.
R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 679). # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ª Where to?
# Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
displayed. rently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic
# Select Stored routes. rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving
instructions. Driving instructions are, for example navigation announcements,
STARTING RECORDING
changes in direction and lane recommendations.
# Select Start recording.
A white rectangle is displayed. Changes in direction and lane recommendations are shown in the navigation
window.
The route is stored on the USB device.
STOPPING RECORDING
# Press the white rectangle.
602
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS AND FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN CHANGING DIRECTION OVERVIEW
THE NAVIGATION WINDOW, FOR EXAMPLE: CHANGES OF DIRECTION ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
R Route list R Detailed image of the junction
R Destination information The display appears when you drive into a junction.
R Traffic information, e.g. length of traffic jam, delay R 3D image
R Motorway facilities The display appears when driving on junction-free, multi-lane roads, for
R Car park search example at motorway exits and motorway interchanges.
R Emergency corridors
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated
route, a new route is calculated automatically.
If, for example, the route is diverted or the direction of a one-way road has
been reversed, driving instructions may deviate from the actual traffic situa‐
tion.
Alternatives may be offered during route guidance, e.g. before passing a

motorway exit road. The additional driving time for the journey along the
motorway exit is shown.
Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direc‐
For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations tion
during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic conditions.
1 Name of the street to turn into
The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of road‐ 2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
works or incomplete digital map data. 3 Current distance to the change of direction
NOTES ON SATELLITE RECEPTION

The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things
on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satellite recep‐
tion can be impaired, malfunction or even not be possible, e.g. in tunnels or in
multi-storey car parks.
603
F295 0075 02
When the Auto zoom map orientation is switched off (/ page 619), a
detailed representation of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming
change in direction appears in the navigation window.
R Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the imminent change of direction, e.g.
by announcing "Now turn right".
Example of 3D image: when the distance to manoeuvre point 1 is
shown with 0 m and the symbol for current vehicle position 4 has
reached manoeuvre point 1 the change in direction is carried out.
Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction

% Changes in direction are also displayed on the driver display and
1 Manoeuvre point
head-up display.
2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map)
Larger map scales show change of direction points instead of change of
LANE RECOMMENDATIONS OVERVIEW
direction arrows.
3 Current distance to the change of direction
4 Current vehicle position
THERE ARE THREE PHASES WHEN CHANGING DIRECTION:
R Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia
system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation
announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".
The navigation window shows: the direction information or the name of
the road which is to be turned into as well as the distance to the change
of direction.
R Announcement phase Example: lane recommendations
The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, 1 Lane not recommended (grey arrow)
e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 m". 2 Possible lane (white arrow)
3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue background)
604
F295 0075 02
This display appears for multi-lane roads. # If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the
list.
If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane recommendations are dis‐
The destination address and the map position are shown.
played in the navigation window. # Calculate the route (/ page 586).
EXPLANATION OF THE DISPLAYED LANES:
or
R Recommended lane
# Search for a POI in the vicinity.
In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direc‐
tion and the one after that. or
R Possible lane
In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direc‐ # Use other functions, e.g. store the destination address of the service
tion. facility.
R Non-recommended lane DESTINATION REACHED
In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction Once the destination is reached, you will see the Í chequered flag. Route
without changing lane. guidance will now be complete. The navigation menu is shown.
When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the inter‐
During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also mediate destination flag with the number of your Î intermediate destina‐
shown. tion. Route guidance is continued.
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF

% Lane recommendations are also displayed on the driver's display
and head-up display. SWITCHING OFF
# Press the Ì button on the right of the steering wheel or on the MBUX
multimedia system during a navigation announcement (/ page 547).
USING MOTORWAY INFORMATION
When driving on the motorway, upcoming motorway facilities and available The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message
service facilities are shown in the route list. These include car parks, service appears.
stations or motorway exits with service POIs, for example.
or
The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehi‐
cle position.
# In the navigation window, select . for an upcoming driving manoeu‐
vre.
# Select an entry. The symbol changes to Ì.
605
F295 0075 02
SWITCHING ON ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS

# Press the Ì button again on the right of the steering wheel or on the Multimedia system:
MBUX multimedia system. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
5 Navigation & traffic announcements
or
# Select Driving recommendation vol..
# In the navigation window, select Ì for an upcoming driving manoeu‐
# Set the volume.
vre.
The current navigation announcement is played. # To leave the menu: select G.
The symbol changes to .. ROUTE GUIDANCE IS ACTIVE
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF DURING A # Set the volume during a navigation announcement on the steering wheel
PHONE CALL or under the touchscreen (/ page 548).
# When the zero layer is shown, press the © button on the right side on
SWITCHING AUDIO FADEOUT ON OR OFF DURING NAVIGATION
the steering wheel (/ page 532).
ANNOUNCEMENTS
or
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
or
# Select © on the zero layer.
The applications are displayed. # Tap © on the central display.
# Select Settings. # Select Settings.
# Select System. # Select System.
# Select Audio. # Select Audio.
# Select Navigation & traffic announcements. # Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
# Activate or deactivate Driving recommendations during call. # Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout during navigation announcements.
# To leave the menu: select G. # To leave the menu: select G.
606
F295 0075 02
REPEATING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS

Destination
Requirements
SAVING THE CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION
R A route has already been created. Multimedia system:
R Route guidance is active. 4©
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.
Multimedia system:
# Select Store position.
4©
# In the navigation window, select . for an upcoming driving manoeu‐ # To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
vre.
# To save as "Home" address: select Home .
# Select Ì.
# To save as "Work" address: select Work .
The current navigation announcement is repeated.
MANAGING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS
CANCELLING ROUTE GUIDANCE
Multimedia system:
Requirements 4 © 5 ª Where to?
R A route has already been created. # Select Previous destinations.
R Route guidance is active. SAVING THE LAST DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE
# Select Ä for the last destination.
# Select £ in the navigation module (/ page 579). A menu appears.
OVERVIEW OF OFF-ROAD STATUS DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE # To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on
the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multime‐ # To save as "Home" address: select Home .
dia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position
on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Road not mapped will be shown. # To save as "Work" address: select Work .
Route guidance may be restricted. DELETING A PREVIOUS DESTINATION
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route # Select Ä for the last destination.
guidance continues as normal. # Select Delete.
or
607
F295 0075 02
# Select Delete all.

Route guidance with current traffic reports
TRAFFIC INFORMATION OVERVIEW
When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for Current traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscrip‐
example. tion service.
EDITING DESTINATION SUGGESTIONS
If the subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC is available in selected
Requirements: countries.
R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 560).

% Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries.
R For the display of destination suggestions: the multimedia system has
gathered sufficient data.
The service must be registered in the Mercedes me user account
(/ page 609). This secures the free-of-charge period of three years.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ª Where to? The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short,
# Press and hold on a destination suggestion. regular intervals.
A menu appears. Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG.
The data is immediately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and for‐
# To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do not suggest now or No
warded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to
longer suggest.
the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for
# To save a destination suggestion: select Save as favourite, Home or the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports.
Work.
% There may be differences between the traffic reports received
% Delete a destination suggestion from the favourites and the actual road and traffic conditions.
(/ page 585).
IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO TRANSMIT THE VEHICLE POSITION, YOU HAVE
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me user account.

R You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
608
F295 0075 02
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

% Further hazard warnings are received using the Car-to-X service
(/ page 612).
% Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
SHOWING INFORMATION FROM THE SERVICE PROVIDER FOR LIVE TRAF‐
FIC INFORMATION
EXTENDING A LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION SUBSCRIPTION
Requirements:
Requirements:
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me 5 My services
# Call up the Mercedes me website.
# Select Live Traffic.
# Call up the Mercedes me user account.
When the subscription for Live Traffic Information has expired then in selected
countries FM RDS-TMC is available. # Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the linked vehicle.
REGISTERING LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION # Select Live Traffic Information.

Requirements: # Select the renewal period.
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. # Add the product to the shopping basket.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.
# Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. A Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension
valid email address is required for this. period. Activation begins on the date of extension.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP
# Register the vehicle using the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Requirements:
# Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account.
R Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are switched on (/ page 611).
A code is sent to the multimedia system.
# Enter the code into the multimedia system.
609
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: SHOWING TRAFFIC INCIDENTS ON THE ROUTE

4© Requirements:
# If necessary, move the map (/ page 615).
R The Traffic incidents display is switched on (/ page 611).
THE MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC INFORMATION DEPENDING
ON THE ACTIVATED SETTINGS:
Multimedia system:
R Traffic incidents 4 © 5 EQ 5 Route
These are roadworks, road blocks and warning messages, for example.
If there are traffic incidents on the route, these are shown on the map and in
When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be the route overview.
shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey.
R Warning messages
% With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can inform yourself about
Warning messages are shown as the d symbol. traffic incidents on your route. Ask, for example How is the traffic
Traffic safety information can be shown, e.g. if there are people on the on my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A voice output is
carriageway. issued.
If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for example the end of a traffic
jam in a dangerous position, the Ë symbol is shown on the map. If
Announce traffic warnings is switched on and a message has been issued,
an additional announcement is made.
R Traffic flow information:
- Traffic jam (red line)
- Slow-moving traffic (orange line)
- Heavy traffic (yellow line)
- Free-flowing traffic (green line)
R Display for traffic delays on the current route
The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.
Example: traffic incidents on the route
1 Delay
610
F295 0075 02
2 Colour display of traffic flow information, delay and length, road name or CALLING UP DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE MAP
road number # Tap on traffic flow information on the map, e.g. a red line for a traffic jam
3 Switches traffic information display on or off section.
The detail information is displayed.
% DURING ACTIVE ROUTE GUIDANCE, THE TOTAL DELAY ON # If several lines are shown on top of the other, then select an item of traf‐
THE ROUTE IS DISPLAYED:
fic flow information from the list.
R in the navigation system in the navigation window SHOWING TRAFFIC INCIDENTS ON THE MAP
R in other applications in the status line at the top # Tap on a traffic incident symbol.
A traffic incident symbol is, for example Ò for roadworks.
# Several traffic incidents are in the immediate vicinity: tap on the top
In the map several traffic incidents may be shown on top of each
traffic incident symbol and select from the list of traffic incidents.
other. The traffic incident symbol shows a plus sign.
If available, the street number can be replaced by a street name SWITCHING THE TRAFFIC INFORMATION DISPLAY ON
or both the name and number. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
# Select View.
% If a message about forming an emergency corridor has been
issued, Emergency corridor is shown in the navigation window. # Traffic .
# Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic.

# To see all of the traffic incidents on the route, swipe to the right or left.
Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and
The route section is highlighted on the map. warning messages, are shown on the route.
# To switch traffic information in the quick-access on or off: tap on
# To show detailed information in the route overview: tap on a display
º in the route overview (/ page 597).
in the route overview.
The detailed information is shown, for example the road section and the The indicator lamp lights up or is off.
direction.
611
F295 0075 02
Car-to-X-Communication by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount
of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently.
CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY FOR THE CAR-TO-X-COMMUNI‐ % Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseu‐
CATION SERVICE: donymisation process. In this way, your identity is protected
against access by unauthorised third parties.
R The vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multimedia system with naviga‐
tion function.
DISPLAYING HAZARD WARNINGS
R There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service.
Multimedia system:
R The Car-to-X-Communication service is activated in your Mercedes me
4©
user account.
If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map.
The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.
% Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. # Select EQ.
The communication module automatically establishes an Internet connection

# Select Z.
once the vehicle is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be # Activate or deactivate Traffic incidents.
provided shortly thereafter. Depending on the mobile phone connection, pro‐
vision takes place from within a second up to about a minute. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown.
If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a
BENEFITS OF CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION: hazard warning.
R Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by THE FOLLOWING HAZARDS MAY BE SHOWN ON THE MAP:
the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Communication
R Accidents and breakdowns
in the immediate vicinity.
R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
R If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's
current position are received. R Hazards reported manually
This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic R Vehicle with active hazard warning light
conditions. R Roadworks
R Additional hazards (if available)
The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehi‐
cle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised
612
F295 0075 02
During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real
% If Announce traffic warnings is switched off (/ page 596), voice traffic scene is shown on the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The
output can indicate a danger area. camera image includes additional information, for example arrows indicating a
change of direction.
SENDING HAZARD WARNINGS
If the options are switched on and this additional information is available, road
REPORTING HAZARDS MANUALLY names and house numbers are displayed (/ page 614).
% Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle.
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.

The Position menu is shown.
# Select Report traffic incident.

The Thank you for supporting accident prevention! message appears. 1 House number
2 Street name
Route guidance with augmented reality 3 Change of direction arrow

Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations,
OVERVIEW OF ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digi‐
tised.
& WARNING
Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries.
Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect
depiction or wrong interpretation of the display You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a
guide for driving.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
# Avoid extended observation of the camera image.
613
F295 0075 02
ACTIVATING ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY # Select Augmented reality video.
# Activate Street names and House numbers.

& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional
tional information information in the camera image.
The additional information from the augmented reality display may be
inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the
actual driving situation.
Map and compass
SETTING THE MAP SCALE
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carry‐
Multimedia system:
ing out all driving manoeuvres.
4©
ZOOMING IN
Multimedia system: # When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z display.
# Select View.
or
# Select Augmented reality video.
# Move two fingers apart on the central display.
# Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video.
ZOOMING OUT
The camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turn‐ # Tap with two fingers on the central display.
ing manoeuvre. The video image includes additional information.
or
SHOWING PROPERTY INFORMATION FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUG‐
MENTED REALITY # Move two fingers together on the central display.
Requirements:
R Augmented reality is activated (/ page 614). % You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale
(/ page 559).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
# Select View.
614
F295 0075 02
MOVING THE MAP # Activate Hide all points of interest.

Multimedia system: When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are
4© shown on the map according to the settings in the POI categories.
# When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the
central display. % If the conditions are fulfilled, the POI symbols are shown with
current online information (/ page 620).
# To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Centre .
SWITCHING THE ROUTE OVERVIEW AFTER START ON OR OFF
SWITCHING DISPLAY OF CATEGORIES FOR QUICK-ACCESS ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
# Switch a category on or off in the menu.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
# Select View. SELECTING CATEGORIES
# In the menu, select Other categories r.
# Activate D or deactivate E Overview of route after start. # Activate or deactivate Show all.
If the option is enabled, the map shows the full route after route guid‐ When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are
ance is started and, if available, all alternative routes. shown on the map.
SELECTING POI SYMBOLS FOR THE MAP DISPLAY
or
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z # Select r the categories.
POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example. These are displayed as sym‐
# Activate or deactivate the categories.
bols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries.
The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map.
Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for
SELECTING PERSONAL POI CATEGORIES
example.
# In the menu, select Personal POIs r.
% The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deac‐ # Select r a category.
tivated as a favourite.
# Activate or deactivate Display on the map.
# Select View. # To issue a signal when approaching: activate Visual warning and Acous-
tic notification.
# Select POI symbols on map r.
615
F295 0075 02
RESETTING THE POI SYMBOL DISPLAY DISPLAYING THE MAP VERSION

# In the menu, select Reset POIs. Multimedia system:
The settings are reset to the standard settings. 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
SELECTING THE DISPLAY OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE MAP

# Select View.
Multimedia system: # Select Map data version.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
# Select View.
# Select Show additional information. % The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can
be used to update the map data (/ page 39).
# Switch the options on or off. A message is shown on the central display when a new map ver‐
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: sion is available.
R Current street
If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in the navigation window. % Information about new versions of the digital map can be
R Scale obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
If the option is switched off, the map scale is only displayed on the map
when zooming. OVERVIEW OF AREA AVOIDANCE ON THE ROUTE
If the option is enabled, the map scale is permanently displayed on the You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid.
map.
Motorways or multi-lane expressways that pass through an area to be avoided
The option also influences the display on the driver display.
may be included in the route despite being blocked.
R Altitude
R Next junction AVOIDING A NEW AREA FOR THE ROUTE
Multimedia system:
If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route
guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed in 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
the navigation window. # Select Avoid new area.
616
F295 0075 02
STARTING USING THE MAP TAKING THE AREA FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT
# Select Using map. # Select the area in the list.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoi‐ # Activate Avoid area.
ded.
If route guidance is active, a new route is calculated.
# Move the map (/ page 615). If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guid‐
ance.
# Set the map scale (/ page 614).
THE ROUTE CAN INCLUDE AN AREA THAT IS TO BE AVOIDED IN THE
# Select a. FOLLOWING CASES:
The area is entered into the list. R The destination is located in an area that is to be avoided.
STARTING USING DESTINATION SEARCH R The route includes motorways or multi-lane expressways which
# Select Via address entry. pass through an area to be avoided.
R There is no practical alternative route.
# Enter the address (/ page 40).
DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
# Select the destination in the list. Multimedia system:
The map appears. The area is saved. 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
CHANGING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
Multimedia system: # Select an area in the list.
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
# Select Delete.
# Select an area in the list.
# Select Edit.
DELETING ALL AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
# To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the central dis‐ # If at least two areas to be avoided are set, select Delete all.
play.
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE AREA # Confirm the prompt with Yes.
# Move two fingers apart or together on the central display. MAP DATA UPDATE OVERVIEW
As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a
# Select a. negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
The area is entered into the list.
617
F295 0075 02
experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes- UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL
Benz. The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP
DATA: Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car
> Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage
R Online map update medium.
R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
Additional costs can be incurred in this process.
map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has
ONLINE MAP UPDATE been restarted, the updated map data is used.
REQUIREMENTS: OVERVIEW OF MAP DATA
If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activation code needs to be entered.
R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have a Mercedes me user account. For map data purchased as data media, the enclosed activation code must be
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region. entered after starting the installation.
R The service has been activated. Activation codes are only ever valid for one vehicle.
IN THE EVENT OF THE FOLLOWING PROBLEMS, PLEASE CONTACT A

% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐ MERCEDES-BENZ SERVICE CENTRE:
tries.
R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code.
R You have lost the activation code.
Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update.
DISPLAYING THE COMPASS
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the Multimedia system:
European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved.
4©
The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle # When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until
is switched on. the Position menu is shown.
618
F295 0075 02
# Select Compass. Multimedia system:

THE COMPASS DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: 4 © 5 EQ 5 Route
The current vehicle position can be shared with a contact.
R The current direction of travel with bearing (360° format) and com‐
pass direction # In the Route menu, select Share journey.
R Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and sec‐ The display changes to Stop sharing journey.
onds
R Number of satellites from which a signal can be received # Select the contact (/ page 636).
The text message is sent. The display changes back to the digital map. A
The information is not available in every country.
symbol is displayed in the status line. When the message has been sent,
DISPLAYING QIBLA a notification is displayed.
Multimedia system: SETTING THE MAP SCALE AUTOMATICALLY
4© Multimedia system:
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
the Position menu is shown. # Select View.
# Select Alerts. # Activate D Auto zoom.

The arrow on the compass shows the direction to Mecca in relation to When the option is switched on, the map scale is set automatically
the current direction of travel. depending on your driving speed and the type of road.
The number of satellites received is shown.
% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually.
% This function is not available in all countries. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset.
When the option is activated, no detailed display of the junction
or a 3D image is shown in the navigation window during an
SHARING THE VEHICLE POSITION WITH A CONTACT upcoming driving manoeuvre.
Requirements:
R A mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system. DISPLAYING THE SATELLITE MAP
Multimedia system:
R The connected mobile phone supports sending text messages from the
4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
vehicle (/ page 638).
# Select View.
619
F295 0075 02
# Activate or deactivate Satellite map. Multimedia system:

WHEN SATELLITE MAP IS SELECTED, THEY ARE DISPLAYED AT THE 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
FOLLOWING MAP SCALES: # Select View.
R On-board maps # Range .
The satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km. The electric range is shown on the map with a white line around the cur‐
R Online maps rent vehicle position.
The satellite maps are displayed in high-resolution map scales
from 10 m. % The electric range display on the map is not available in all coun‐
tries.
When Satellite map is not selected, no satellite maps are displayed.
DISPLAYING ONLINE MAP CONTENTS
% The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all Requirements:
countries.
R There is an Internet connection.
SHOWING ELECTRIC RANGE ON THE MAP R Mercedes me connect is available.
Requirements:
R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted
R There is an Internet connection. the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
R Mercedes me connect is available. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The service is available and has been activated.
R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted
the Mercedes me connect terms of use. Multimedia system:
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
R The service is available and has been activated. # Select View.
# Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g.
temperature or cloud cover.
620
F295 0075 02
The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym‐ R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
bols.
Multimedia system:
% The display of online map content is not available in all coun‐ 4 © 5 EQ 5 Z
tries.
# Activate Parking.
The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are
shown.
Parking service SELECTING PARKING OPTIONS
NOTES ON THE PARKING SERVICE
* NOTE
NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and
*
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐ parking conditions
ble clearance height The data is based on the information provided by the respective service
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance providers.
Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height. provided in relation to the car park or parking area.
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not # Always observe the local information and conditions.
drive in.
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐ Requirements:
R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
R Parking is activated (/ page 621).
% This service is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
DISPLAYING PARKING OPTIONS ON THE MAP
4©
Requirements
# Tap on j on the map.
621
F295 0075 02
or THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN ALSO BE SELECTED (IF AVAILABLE):
# In the route overview, select j Parking spaces (/ page 597). R Searching for POIs in the vicinity.
# Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and R Saving the destination.
Multi-storey car parks. R Placing a call at the destination.
The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings. R Sharing the destination via QR code.
R Calling up the web address.
# Select a parking option.
R Showing the destination on the map.
The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE): PRIOR BOOKING OF A PARKING SPACE
R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and Requirements:

arrival time
R Information on the car park, e.g.
- Opening times
R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
- Parking charges ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
- Current occupancy contract partner.
- Maximum parking time R Parking is activated (/ page 621).
- Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service
does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐ % This option is not available in all countries.
cumstances.
R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, Multimedia system:
cards) 4©
R Details on parking tariffs # Select a parking option on the map.
R Number of available parking spaces
R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters) # If a parking space available to book has been selected, select Book park-
ing space.
R Services/facilities at the parking option
R Telephone number
# Calculate the route (/ page 586).
622
F295 0075 02
# Select the desired booking period. Take note of the cancellation condi‐ PAYING PARKING CHARGES
tions.
Requirements:
If the parking space is available for the selected period, the price will be
shown. R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
# In the booking overview, confirm with Book. ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
contract partner.
# If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. R Parking is activated (/ page 621).
The parking space will be booked in the background.
A booking confirmation including a car park ticket will be sent to your
registered e-mail address. % This option is not available in all countries.
MAKING USE OF OR CANCELLING THE BOOKING
# Start the Mercedes me app on your smartphone. Multimedia system:
4©
# Open Menu.
# Select a parking option on the map.
# Select My transactions.
# If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the
# Select Parking transactions. parking details.
# Select the desired booking. # Select Payment.

# To make use of the booking: select Show car park ticket. Once the vehicle has reached a parking position with payment function
and the vehicle is switched off, a message appears. Using this message
or
you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.
# To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking. STARTING A PAYMENT PROCEDURE
# Acknowledge the message.
% If possible, a parking space booking can be cancelled up to the # Please note the maximum parking period displayed and any existing
stated time. If a booking cannot be cancelled, this will already be additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about the
shown to you during the booking procedure. necessity of displaying a receipt confirming the online payment for the
parking space.
623
F295 0075 02
% You will receive the receipt as a printout from the parking Dashcam
machine after successfully completing the payment process.
NOTES ON THE DASHCAM
# Select Start the payment process. NOTE

*
Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations
# If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
and data protection provisions
# Press a to confirm. You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam func‐
The successful start of your parking transaction is shown. tions.
# Complete the booking with OK. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam
can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.
# To cancel a parking transaction: after receiving the confirmation
request, select Cancel. This function is not permitted in all countries.
Minimum charges may be incurred. # Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal
ENDING A PARKING TRANSACTION regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in
# Stop the active transaction using the Mercedes me app. the respective country of use.
You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs. # Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection
If an uncompleted parking transaction is detected for your vehicle as requirements.
you continue your journey, a message will appear asking whether you
would like to end it.
# Acknowledge the message. % OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERA‐
TION:
When the parking transaction is stopped successfully, another message
appears with the details about your completed parking. R Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.
R Use USB-IF certified USB storage devices.
USB-IF is a non-profit corporation and stands for USB
Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, USB-
IF certifies, for example, USB versions, corresponding
cables and plugs as well as energy supply processes via
the USB interface.
624
F295 0075 02
R USB storage devices may be damaged if often or perma‐ Multimedia system:

nently overwritten at high speed. Mercedes-Benz recom‐ 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
mends a high-quality external SSD drive.
# Select the USB symbol.
The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid State Drive.
# Select the USB device.
% The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limi‐ % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video
ted by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 files are not always displayed in the recording list.
formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one
example. partition.
When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you
receive a notification.
STARTING OR STOPPING A LOOP RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements:
% THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE GAL‐
LERY APP: R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the
multimedia system (/ page 679).
R Switching write protection on or off R The vehicle is switched on.
R Deleting video files
Multimedia system:
Additional information about the Gallery app (/ page 658). 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
SELECTING A USB DEVICE FOR A VIDEO RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM a USB device (/ page 625).
Requirements: If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.
R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system
(/ page 679). # To select recording mode: select Loop recording.
Loop recording continuously records short video files. When the memory
is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, the oldest video
file is written over.
625
F295 0075 02
# To start: select Start recording. Multimedia system:

The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. a USB device (/ page 625).
# To end: select End recording. If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are # To select recording mode: select Individual recording.
shown in the video image. Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.
inaccuracies.
# To start: select Start recording.
A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# To end: select End recording.
R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 627).
R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
shown in the video image.
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater
played.
inaccuracies.
STARTING OR STOPPING INDIVIDUAL RECORDINGS WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements: A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the R Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes
multimedia system (/ page 679). recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped
R The vehicle is switched on. imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video file.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
626
F295 0075 02
R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 627).

R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐
played.
CONFIGURING DASHCAM SETTINGS

Requirements:
R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 679).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# Select Z.
RECEIVING NOTIFICATIONS AFTER PASSING A BORDER CROSSING
# Activate National border alert .
A message is shown if video is being recorded and the vehicle passes a
border.
STARTING AUTOMATIC VIDEO RECORDING

# Select Automatic loop recording.
# Activate Automatic loop recording.

When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically.
627
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Telephone
Telephone
Telephony & WARNING

NOTES ON TELEPHONY Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment while the vehicle is in motion # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle the vehicle is stationary.
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ rently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communica‐
ment with the vehicle stationary. tion equipment in the vehicle.
628
F295 0075 02
TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

& WARNING
open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects within.

# Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in

such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. mobile phone
mobile phone (two phone mode)
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. 4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5 Options
6 Messages
OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON STOWING MOBILE COM‐
MUNICATIONS DEVICES CORRECTLY: 7 Calls up devices
8 Numerical pad
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 241) 9 Starts contact search
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or
at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ BLUETOOTH® PROFILE OVERVIEW
Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are automatically displayed in the
multimedia system
MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used
629
F295 0075 02
Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the sec‐
ond SIM card at the same time
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Wireless telephony is available
SAP (SIM Access Profile) The car telephone has access to the SIM card The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech qual‐
data and dials into the mobile phone network ity. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone net‐
via the exterior aerial
work provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® .
TELEPHONY OPERATING MODES OVERVIEW
Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.
DEPENDING ON YOUR EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING TELEPHONY OPER‐
ATING MODES ARE AVAILABLE: CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE
Requirements:
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®
(/ page 630). R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Blue‐ operating instructions).
tooth® (two phone mode) (/ page 631). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 557).
- You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with both
mobile phones.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
% Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can by used SEARCHING FOR A MOBILE PHONE
with any mobile phone (/ page 679). # Select Connect new device.
AUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE
INFORMATION ON TELEPHONY # Select a mobile phone.
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO THE CALL BEING DISCON‐
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
NECTED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION:
# If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.
R There is insufficient network coverage in the area
R You move from one transmission/reception station to another and no
communication channels are free % For older mobile phone models, enter a 1 to 16-digit number
code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
authorisation.
630
F295 0075 02
# Select the tab with the desired mobile phone.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia
Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated
system.
telephone contents.
Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically.
Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone.
The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages)
% The connected mobile phone can also be used as Bluetooth® relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the
audio equipment (/ page 679). telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for
both mobile phones.
CHANGING THE FUNCTION OF A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
CONNECTING A SECOND MOBILE PHONE (TWO PHONE MODE) 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
Requirements ACTIVATING A FUNCTION
# Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone.
R At least one mobile phone is already connected to the multimedia sys‐
tem via Bluetooth®. The corresponding function is activated.
DEACTIVATING A FUNCTION
Multimedia system: # One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices mobile phone.
The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system.
# Select Connect new device.
# Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of
# Select the mobile phone.
one of the mobile phones.
# In some cases, if the query appears, confirm the selection of the mobile The corresponding function is deactivated.
phone pair with the Device name 1 + Device name 2 option.
REPLACING MOBILE PHONES
The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. Multimedia system:
INTERCHANGING MOBILE PHONES (TWO PHONE MODE) 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
Multimedia system:
NO AUTHORISED MOBILE PHONE AVAILABLE:
4 © 5 Phone # Select Connect new device.
Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.
# Select a mobile phone.
631
F295 0075 02
# Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm the numerical code on the DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A MOBILE PHONE
mobile phone. Multimedia system:
USING IN SINGLE TELEPHONE MODE 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
# Select Device name. DISCONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE
A newly authorised mobile phone is connected in single telephone # Select Disconnect.
mode. If applicable, the mobile phone will be automatically reconnected when
If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single the vehicle is next started.
telephone mode, it is connected again in single telephone mode.
DELETING A MOBILE PHONE
If a mobile phone is already authorised and has been connected in two # Select Devices.
phone mode with another mobile phone, a query may come, whether the
mobile phone should in future be operated in single telephone mode or # Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
connected with another mobile phone in two phone mode.
# Select Delete device.
# If required, confirm the query about operating mode (single telephone or
The mobile phone is deleted from the system.
two phone mode) by confirming the Device name option.
SETTING THE RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION VOLUME
USING IN TWO PHONE MODE
# Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. Requirements:
A newly authorised mobile phone is connected with the selected mobile R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 630).
phone in two phone mode.
If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single
Multimedia system:
telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile
phone in two phone mode. 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
If the mobile phone was previously connected with another mobile This function ensures optimal language quality.
phone, this connection is cancelled.
% Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected
for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume.
# Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
# Select Volume.
632
F295 0075 02
# Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception volume and
Transmission volume. % If a mobile phone is connected via Smartphone Integration, the
voice recognition of this mobile phone is always started or stop‐
Further information on the recommended reception and transmission volume: ped.
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
SETTING THE RINGTONE NOTE ABOUT CONTACT SUGGESTIONS

Multimedia system: The multimedia system can show contact suggestions based on frequently
used contacts, outgoing calls and text messages. For this, the Allow contact
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Ringtones
suggestions option must be switched on (/ page 560).
# Set the ringtone.
When you open the call list or the message menu, contacts which you can call
or write to will be suggested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the Sugges-
% If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you
tionstab.
will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the
vehicle audio system.
% The multimedia system does not use the content of messages for
suggestions.
STARTING OR STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
Requirements
SELECTING OPTIONS FOR CONTACT SUGGESTIONS
R At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system Requirements
(/ page 630).
R The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be R The Allow contact suggestions option is switched on (/ page 560).
started is selected (/ page 631). R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
contact suggestions.
STARTING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
# Press and hold the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel for Multimedia system:
more than one second. 4 © 5 Phone
Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone. # Select Call list or Contacts.
STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION # Select Suggestions.
# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
633
F295 0075 02
# Select Ä in the line of the suggested contact. ACTIVATING FUNCTIONS DURING A CALL
THE FOLLOWING OPTION IS AVAILABLE FOR SELECTION: THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DURING A CALL:
R k End call
R Do not suggest now
R m Micro. off
R _ Keypad (show to send DTMF tones)
Calls R Á Add call
TELEPHONE OPERATION R Hands-free
Multimedia system: Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All seats.
4 © 5 Phone R Private mode
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING NUMBERS Transfer the call to the telephone or headphones, for example.
# Select _.
# Select a function.
# Enter a number.
# Select R. % Observe that the functions and symbols can vary depending on
The call is made. the vehicle equipment.
ACCEPTING A CALL
CONDUCTING CALLS WITH SEVERAL PARTICIPANTS
# Select R Accept .
Requirements
REJECTING A CALL
# Select k Reject . R There is an active call (/ page 634).
ANSWERING A CALL WITH A MESSAGE R Another call is being made.
# Select s Answer w SMS.
ENDING A CALL SWITCHING BETWEEN CALLS
# Select k.
# Select the contact.
The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.
PUTTING A CALL ON IN-CAR OFFICE'S TO-DO LIST
ACTIVATING A CALL ON HOLD
# Select À Put call on In-Car Office's to-do list.
# Select the contact of the call on hold.
634
F295 0075 02
CONDUCTING A CONFERENCE CALL # Select Answer w SMS.

# Select Â Conference. The incoming call is not accepted.
The new participant is included in the conference call. You answer with a message.
ENDING AN ACTIVE CALL or
# Select k End call.
# Select k Reject.
% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as
the active call is ended. % The function and the behaviour depend on your mobile phone
network provider as well as on the mobile phone (see the manu‐
facturer's operating instructions).
ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A WAITING CALL
Requirements
USING THE INTERNATIONAL DIALLING CODE
R There is an active call (/ page 634). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 _
If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. # Press and "0" until a "+" appears in the selection field.
Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will # Enter the numbers of the country code, regional code and the telephone
hear a call waiting signal. number.
Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call # Select R.
goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone. The call is made.
# Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active. Contacts
If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the
previous call will be put on hold. INFORMATION ABOUT THE CONTACTS MENU
The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g.
If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in
mobile phone or data storage medium.
two phone mode then the existing call is ended.
or
635
F295 0075 02
DEPENDING ON THE DATA SOURCE, IT IS POSSIBLE TO SAVE/LOAD THE # Select the contact.
FOLLOWING NUMBER OF CONTACTS: A CONTACT CAN CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING DETAILS:
R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Phone numbers
R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone R Navigation addresses
R Internet address
FROM THE CONTACTS MENU, YOU CAN PERFORM THE FOLLOWING R Email addresses
ACTIONS: R Relationship (if set)
R Make a call, for example call a contact (/ page 637)
MANAGING THE FORMAT OF A CONTACT'S NAME
R Navigation (/ page 584) Multimedia system:
R Compose messages (/ page 639) 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z
R Additional options (/ page 637) # Select Name format.
# Select an option.
Mobile phone contacts are automatically displayed when a mobile phone is OVERVIEW OF IMPORTING CONTACTS
connected to the multimedia system (/ page 630).
IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU
DOWNLOADING MOBILE PHONE FAVOURITE CONTACTS Source Requirements
If the mobile phone supports the function, the favourites of the mobile phone
are automatically loaded and appear in the overview of the phone menu. ° USB device The USB device is connected with the USB
port.
CALLING UP CONTACTS Mobile phone A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐

Multimedia system: dia system via Bluetooth®.
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts Contacts are available.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS CAN BE USED TO SEARCH FOR CONTACTS:
R Searching by initials % Note that the imported contacts remain in the vehicle and can be
accessed at any time regardless of the connected mobile
R Searching by name
phones.
R Searching by phone number
# Enter characters into the search field.
636
F295 0075 02
IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU SELECTING FURTHER OPTIONS IN THE CONTACTS MENU
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Contacts 5 Import contacts 4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
# Select a mobile phone <device name>, from which the contacts should be # Select r in the line of the contact.
imported.
# Select Ä.
# Select an option.
# Select an option.
SAVING A MOBILE PHONE CONTACT
Multimedia system: DELETING CONTACTS
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts Requirements
# Select r in the line of the mobile phone contact. R The contacts are saved in the vehicle.
# Select Ä. R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the
vehicle.
# Select Save.
# Select Yes. Multimedia system:

The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX 4 © 5 Phone
symbol. DELETING ALL CONTACTS
CALLING A CONTACT # Select Z.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
# Select Contacts.
# Select ª Search contacts. # Select Delete all MBUX contacts.
# Enter characters into the search field. # Select an option.
# Select the contact. DELETING A CONTACT
# Select Contacts.
# Select the telephone number.
The number is dialled. # Select r in the line of the contact.
# Select Ä.
637
F295 0075 02
# Select Delete contact. # Select an entry.

The call is made.
# Select Yes.
SELECTING ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE CALL LIST
Multimedia system:
Call list 4 © 5 Phone
OVERVIEW OF THE CALL LIST

# Select ª Call list.
Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® pro‐ # For contacts that are in the address book: select options.
file or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of
The contact details are called up.
the call list.
# For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book):
IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS ARE AS
select ç.
FOLLOWS:
DELETING THE CALL LIST
R The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia sys‐ Multimedia system:
tem.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices
R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the con‐
# Select Delete call list.
nection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
# Select Yes.
IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS NOT SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS
ARE AS FOLLOWS: % This function is only available if your mobile does not support
the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as
calls are made in the vehicle.
R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone.
Text messages
MAKING A CALL FROM THE CALL LIST
Multimedia system: OVERVIEW OF MESSAGE FUNCTIONS
4 © 5 Phone In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send
them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant.
# Select ª Call list.
If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile, the mes‐
sage functions can be used on the multimedia system.
638
F295 0075 02
You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of Multimedia system:
Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ # Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the voice command Send a mes-
Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the sage to, and name the desired contact (/ page 511).
multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's DICTATING TEXT
operating instructions). # Say the message.
SETTING MESSAGE DISPLAYS You are guided by the voice dialogue.
Multimedia system: REPLYING TO A MESSAGE IN THE MESSAGING HISTORY
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices Multimedia system:
# Select Message display. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
A message list is shown.
# Select On or Off.
READING MESSAGES # Select r next to a contact.
Multimedia system: The messaging history with this contact is shown. You will be guided
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç through the steps with the help of a voice dialogue.
USING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION # Say the message.

FORWARDING MESSAGES
# To read aloud, select the ¬ symbol at a conversation. Multimedia system:
The message is read aloud. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
CREATING AND SENDING A NEW MESSAGE A message list is shown.
Requirements # Speak the voice command Forward message.

You are guided by the voice dialogue.
R There is an Internet connection.
R At least one mobile phone with reception is connected. CALLING A MESSAGE SENDER
Multimedia system:
R If applicable, the message function must be activated on the mobile
phone. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
639
F295 0075 02
# Select r next to a contact.

% The availability of In-Car Office is country-dependent.
The messaging history with this contact is shown.
# Select Ä. # Select an option.

# Select Call. DELETING A MESSAGE
Multimedia system:
USING TELEPHONE NUMBERS, URLS OR EMAIL ADDRESSES FROM A TEXT
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
MESSAGE
Requirements
# Select a contact.
R An Internet connection is available to call up a URL.
# Press and hold on a message.
Multimedia system: # To delete the message: select Delete.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
In-Car Office
# Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is shown. IN-CAR OFFICE FUNCTIONS
Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services to the multimedia
# Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. system.
If a URL is selected the web browser opens.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
IF A TELEPHONE NUMBER IS SELECTED THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS
ARE AVAILABLE: R Calendar
Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing
R Call
a call, navigating
R New message
R E-mail
or Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering and forwarding e-mails
R Tasks and calls
# If In-Car Office and the email function are available: select an email
Managing tasks and pre-booked calls
address.
R Voice input
In-Car Office opens.
640
F295 0075 02
Creating appointments/reminders and tasks LINKING A USER ACCOUNT

# Select the desired online service.
% Alternatively, you can record text contents via the MBUX Voice
# Scan the QR code.
Assistant or via the dictation function. # Follow the instructions on the device.
Further information on the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 512).
SELECTING CALENDAR FUNCTIONS IN IN-CAR OFFICE
Multimedia system:
% The zero layer displays notifications or reminders from In-Car 4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Calendar
Office, such as birthdays or calls due (/ page 526). # Select an appointment.

% Please note that certain functions are only available when the
R . Read aloud
R R Call
CALLING UP IN-CAR OFFICE

R Z Navigate
R E Delete
Requirements:
R You have a Mercedes me user account. # Select a function.

R The In-Car Office service is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365. % Functions are available if corresponding appointment informa‐
In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks can be synchronised and tion is saved.
facilitated. EXAMPLES OF THIS ARE:
R If a telephone number has been saved for the appoint‐

Multimedia system:
ment, Call is available.
4 © 5 Apps
R If a navigable address has been saved in the Online
# Select In-Car Office. Account for the appointment, Navigate is available.
Individual functions from In-Car Office can be called up.
641
F295 0075 02
SELECTING FUNCTIONS OF TASKS & CALLS IN "IN-CAR OFFICE" R e Answering e-mails (/ page 643)
Multimedia system: R ¥ Forwarding e-mails to (/ page 643)
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls R E Deleting e-mails
# Select a function for an entry.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: CREATING NEW E-MAILS
Multimedia system:
R Reading aloud . 4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail
R Placing a call R # Select W Create e-mail .
This task function requires a telephone number.
# Select f.
R Marking as completed O
In the current edit, an entry that has been marked as completed can be # Enter an e-mail address directly via the keyboard.
marked as open again by removing the tick.
or
R Deleting E
R Displaying details r # Select an e-mail address from the contacts.
MARKING AN ENTRY AS COMPLETED IN TASKS & CALLS

Multimedia system: % Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information
about the contacts menu (/ page 635).
# Select Tasks & calls.
An overview appears.
% Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is
# Select O.
stationary.
READING AND MANAGING E-MAILS
Multimedia system:
# Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the corresponding fields with
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail
the keypad.
# Select an e-mail.
# Select Send.
The e-mail is opened.
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R . Reading e-mails
642
F295 0075 02
ANSWERING E-MAILS # To forward without attachment: select Forward without attachment.

Multimedia system:
# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad.
# Select an e-mail. # Select Send.
# Select Reply. OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT AND
DICTATION FUNCTION
# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad. Multimedia system:
# Select Send.
OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE DICTATION FUNCTION
The dictation function allows you to dictate text content, such as the subject
% Please note that e-mails can only be written when the vehicle is
or text of an e-mail, instead of typing the content using the keyboard.
stationary.
% The dictation function is not available everywhere with the full

FORWARDING E-MAILS
range of functions. For the first-time activation of the function it
Multimedia system:
may be necessary to accept the Mercedes me connect terms of
4 © 5 Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail use in your Mercedes me user account.
# Select an e-mail.
The following is an example of how you can dictate the subject and text of an
# Select Forward.
e-mail.
# To forward with attachment: select Forward with attachment.
# Select W Create e-mail .
# Add recipients using f.

% Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked
online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information # Select p.
about the contacts menu (/ page 635). The dictation function is started.
# Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail.

% Forwarding with an attachment is only possible if an attachment After the voice input has been processed, it is shown as text.
is available.
# Select Send.
643
F295 0075 02
OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT

With the voice control of the MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate various
Apple CarPlay®
functions of In-Car Office and speak in text contents.
OVERVIEW OF APPLE CARPLAY®
% Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant WARNING

&
(/ page 511). Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment
The following are examples of some voice commands that you can use to If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
operate In-Car Office. ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
# To write new e-mail: say the voice command I want to send an e-mail to
John Doe. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
You are guided by the dialogue. mits.
# To reply to an e-mail: say the voice command Reply to e-mail.

You are guided by the dialogue.
# To forward an e-mail: say the voice command Forward e-mail.
Dictate the text of the e-mail. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
# To show tasks: say the voice command Show my tasks.
iPhone® functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple Car‐
The tasks are shown. Play®. They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri® voice
control. You can activate voice control by pressing and holding the £ but‐
# To create a calendar entry: say the voice command Create a calendar
ton on the multifunction steering wheel.
entry tomorrow at 9 a.m..
You are guided by the dialogue.
% By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering
wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 511).
Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay® with the mul‐
timedia system.
644
F295 0075 02
Also for use of Apple CarPlay® with two phone mode, only one additional
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
As access to the iPhone® is restricted by MBUX when an Apple CarPlay® ses‐ tionary and the parking brake applied.
sion is active, not all MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address book) can
be fully provided for the connected device. In this case use Apple CarPlay®. # Connect the iPhone® to a USB port on the multimedia system using a
suitable cable (/ page 679).
The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is only available with an Internet
connection. When the application is connected for the first time, a message about
data protection regulations appears.
The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country.
# Select Accept & start if the application should be started.
The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and
content connected to it. or
Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. # Open the device manager (/ page 631).
# Start Apple CarPlay® using the relevant symbol next to the device name.
INFORMATION ON APPLE CARPLAY®

The Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line switches within Apple CarPlay® to % If applicable, a message about data protection regulations
the last active display. appears.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route # If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.
guidance is started on the mobile phone.
EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®
CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRED) # Select ©.
Requirements:
or
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Press the © button on the multifunction steering wheel (MBUX multi‐
media system).
645
F295 0075 02
% If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ % It is possible at any time to switch between a connection via
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐ Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) in the device list.
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple CarPlay®
symbol in the status line.
% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®,
CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRELESS) you can connect another iPhone® via Bluetooth® to use Apple
CarPlay® via the device manager.
Requirements:
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®
the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select ©.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions). or
R The device is "visible" for other devices. # Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐ connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐
tionary and the parking brake applied. nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple CarPlay®
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices CALLING UP APPLE CARPLAY® SOUND SETTINGS
Multimedia system:
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 630).
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
When the application is connected for the first time, a message about
# Select the sound settings.
ENDING APPLE CARPLAY®
# Select OK, start Apple CarPlay if the application should be started. # Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager (telephone,
media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone®.
# If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.
646
F295 0075 02
Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android
% Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager in the operating system on the multimedia system. They are operated using the
telephone or media applications if Apple CarPlay® should be touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You can activate the voice control
restarted. system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
% If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ % By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering
connecting, the application starts in the background the next
wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
time it is started automatically. You can call up Apple CarPlay® the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 511).
using the relevant symbol in the status line.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto with the
multimedia system.
Android Auto
Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile
ANDROID AUTO OVERVIEW phone can be connected using Bluetooth® with the multimedia system.
WARNING The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet
&
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications connection.
equipment
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ the country.
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and
content connected to it.
mits. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying INFORMATION ON ANDROID AUTO
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ The Android Auto symbol in the status line switches within Android Auto to the
ment with the vehicle stationary. last active display.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐ guidance is started on the mobile phone.
647
F295 0075 02
CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRED) # Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).
Requirements:
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
R The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0. connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐
R The current version of the Android Auto app is installed on the mobile nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto
phone. symbol in the status line.
R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be con‐
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 630). CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRELESS)
If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use
Requirements:
of the mobile phone with Android Auto.
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the R The device supports the Android Auto function (wireless).
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating
tionary with the parking brake.
instructions).
R The device is "visible" for other devices.
# Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 557)
a suitable cable (/ page 679).
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the
# Select Accept & start if the application should be started. multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the parking brake applied.
or
# Open the device manager (/ page 631). % The Android Auto function (wireless) is not available in all coun‐
# Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol next to the device name. tries.
EXITING ANDROID AUTO
# Select ©.
or
648
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 630). nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto
% Depending on the device configuration, the query whether CALLING UP THE ANDROID AUTO SOUND SETTINGS
Android Auto should be started may appear after connecting the Multimedia system:
mobile phone via Bluetooth®. In this case, the query must be
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
answered with Yes.
# Select the sound settings.
# Select Start Android Auto. ENDING ANDROID AUTO

# Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone,
media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone.
# Select Accept & start. % Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android
Auto should be restarted.
% It is possible at any time to switch between a connection via
Bluetooth® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list.
connecting, the application starts in the background the next
% time it is started automatically. You can call up Android Auto
If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®,
using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.
you can connect another mobile phone via Bluetooth® to use
Android Auto via the device manager.
EXITING ANDROID AUTO Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto

# Select ©. and Apple CarPlay®
or OVERVIEW OF TRANSFERRED VEHICLE DATA
When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the
# Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone
services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.
649
F295 0075 02
THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM INFORMATION IS TRANSMITTED: This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the naviga‐
tion (e.g. for continuity in a tunnel).
R Software release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymised)
Mercedes me calls
The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehi‐ MAKING A CALL VIA THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL
cle and the mobile phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identi‐ % Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at
fier is randomly generated. a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available
in your country.
This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is
deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 564).
THE FOLLOWING DRIVING STATUS DATA IS TRANSMITTED:
R Transmission position engaged

R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
R Day/night mode of the driver display
R Drive type
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to corre‐
spond to the driving situation.
THE FOLLOWING POSITION DATA IS TRANSMITTED: 1 me button for service or information calls
2 SOS button cover
R Coordinates
3 SOS button (emergency call system)
R Speed
Making a Mercedes me call
R Compass direction
R Acceleration direction # Press me button 1.
650
F295 0075 02
MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE USING THE MULTIME‐
# To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it briefly. DIA SYSTEM
Requirements
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second.
R Access to a GSM network is available.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This
R The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respec‐
has priority over all other active calls.
tive region.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE MERCEDES ME CALL USING THE ME BUTTON R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me automatically.
button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 650).
USING THE VOICE DIALOGUE SYSTEM YOU ACCESS THE DESIRED Multimedia system:
SERVICE: 4 © 5 Phone 5 ©
# Call Mercedes me connect.
R Accident and Breakdown Management
After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehi‐
data. The data transfer is shown in the display.
cle
Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the
YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS: Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
R Activation of Mercedes me connect CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE AFTER AUTOMATIC
ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN DETECTION
R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre Requirements:
R Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation
(/ page 376).
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer R The vehicle is stationary.
Centre (/ page 653). R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
651
F295 0075 02
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circum‐ # Select Call.
stances. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Acci‐
dent and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is
REQUIREMENTS FOR COLLISION DETECTION IN THE CONTEXT OF ACCI‐
transferred automatically (/ page 655).
DENT RECOVERY:
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises
R The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551). the breakdown and accident assistance.
R The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
R The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code You may be charged for these services.
P54).
R The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emer‐
on Mercedes me connect. gency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active
calls (/ page 661).
If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked
vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you
switch the vehicle on. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics"
is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event
The message informs you about the potentially affected area of the vehicle
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-
and the strength of the collision.
Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this
In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide prompt can be ignored or declined.
shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few sec‐
onds.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and
% The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.
appear again later.
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Tele‐
After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a diagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being
prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the declined, this will not be shown again.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
ARRANGING A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA A MERCEDES ME CALL
If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle
data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You
652
F295 0075 02
will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of

your vehicle. % The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia sys‐
tem installed.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management
service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time # Select Yes.
that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment. R The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically (/ page 653).
# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. or

After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes- # Select No and confirm.
Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The infor‐
mation is then sent to your desired service outlet. R Only call control data is transmitted (/ page 653).
More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me
This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary con‐
sult about the details. DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable
% If you select Call later after the service message appears, the targeted advice and an efficient service.
message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR THE TRANS‐
FER OF THE DATA:
GIVING CONSENT TO DATA TRANSFER DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL
Requirements:
R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone
R There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me network provider.
button in the overhead control panel (/ page 650). R The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.
MULTI-STAGE TRANSFER DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all coun‐
tries. R Reason for the initiation of the call
R The available mobile phone transmission technology
If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on R The activated Mercedes me connect services
Mercedes me, the Do you want to transfer your vehicle data and the vehicle's R The service selected in the voice control system
position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre to improve the processing of your
request? message is shown.
653
F295 0075 02
IF A CALL IS MADE AFTER AUTOMATIC ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN

% A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the cor‐ DETECTION USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS
responding Mercedes me connect service is not activated. ALSO TRANSMITTED:
R Current mileage and maintenance data

% The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model R Current vehicle location
and vehicle equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is
available at all times.
IF ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT IS CALLED VIA THE VOICE
CONTROL SYSTEM AND NO SERVICE HAS BEEN ACTIVATED, BUT THE
DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE NOT ACTIVA‐ DATA PROTECTION QUERY HAS BEEN CONFIRMED, THE FOLLOWING
TED DATA CAN ALSO BE CALLED UP FROM THE VEHICLE BY THE MERCEDES-
IF NO MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED AND THE DATA BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE:
PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN CONFIRMED THE FOLLOWING DATA IS
R Current vehicle location
TRANSMITTED:
R Vehicle identification number IF THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN REJECTED, THE FOLLOW‐
R Time of the call ING DATA IS TRANSMITTED TO ENABLE TARGETED ADVICE AND AN EFFI‐
R Reason for the initiation of the call CIENT SERVICE:
R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Vehicle identification number
R Country indicator of the vehicle R Time of the call
R Set language for the multimedia system R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐ R Rejection of the data protection prompt
cle
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system
IF A CALL IS MADE FOR A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA THE SERVICE
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐
REMINDER, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS ALSO TRANSMITTED:
cle
R Current mileage and maintenance data
DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED
Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data
be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.
654
F295 0075 02
An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection infor‐ YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING SERVICES VIA THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
mation for the Mercedes me connect services. You can find these in your AND THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL, FOR EXAMPLE:
Mercedes me user account.
R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-depend‐
DATA PROCESSING ent display in the multimedia system)
The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the process‐ R Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and
ing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for SOS button)
other activated Mercedes me connect services.
The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐ The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the
tomer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.
partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note of the
data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead
www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the control panel (/ page 650).
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia
% The recorded message is not available in every country.
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emer‐
gencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national
emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes me connect Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 70).
INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection
information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me
% Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect serv‐ user account.
ices are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-
INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT ACCIDENT AND BREAK‐
Benz service centre if these functions are available in your coun‐
DOWN MANAGEMENT
try.
% Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.
country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out
whether this function is available in your country.
655
F295 0075 02
THE ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT CAN INCLUDE THE FOL‐ circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the infor‐
LOWING FUNCTIONS: mation to appear in the multimedia system.
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 70)

Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In
If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or
centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Break‐
use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 659).
down Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all
countries. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
DATA TRANSFERRED DURING MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL SERVICES
You may be charged for these services.
THE DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL
R Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown
DEPENDS ON:
detection (/ page 651)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent R The reason for initiation of the call
which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre R The service that is selected in the voice control system
and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
R The activated Mercedes me connect services
R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are
You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the cur‐
recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly inter‐
rently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection infor‐
preted and are available through the monitoring of components that are
mation for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me
subject to diagnostics.
user account.
If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may
be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system Mercedes me Apps
only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
INFORMATION ABOUT MERCEDES ME
With a Mercedes me user account you have access to Mercedes-Benz services
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the and offers.
mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of
Availability is dependent both on the country and equipment.
the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some
You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or in the
Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
656
F295 0075 02
Further information about on-demand features via Mercedes me can be found CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME SERVICES
in the "General notes" section (/ page 101).
Requirements:
% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated.

R The vehicle is connected with the user account.
CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT Multimedia system:

Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me
4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me # Select My services.
VEHICLE IS LINKED TO USER ACCOUNT AND MERCEDES ME IS AVAILABLE The Mercedes me connect services for which you have a valid licence
are displayed in alphabetical order.
# Select Mercedes me ID.
Information about the linked user account appears. ORDERING OR EXTENDING MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES
To order or renew Mercedes me connect services, use the Store.
YOUR VEHICLE IS NOT LINKED TO THE USER ACCOUNT
# Select ©.
% If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user account, you can cre‐ # Select Store.
ate one at: https://www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me
App. A valid email address or phone number is required for this. DELETING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A USER ACCOUNT AND THE VEHICLE
Requirements:
# Select ©. R The user profile of the user account that was first linked to the vehicle is
selected.
# Select Apps.
R The user profile is synchronised (/ page 540).
# Select Mercedes me. R A Mercedes me PIN has been set.
# Follow the instructions on the display to link the user account with the
vehicle. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me
% If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehi‐ # Select Mercedes me ID.
cle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.
# Select Delete vehicle connection.
657
F295 0075 02
R Filter function, for displaying search results at the current vehicle posi‐
% Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the tion or at the destination
vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and
R Display of detailed information
the vehicle.
R Read-aloud function
R Setting functions
SELECTING APPS
Requirements: USING THE GALLERY APP
Multimedia system:
R Depending on the app, the general terms and conditions are confirmed. 4 © 5 Apps
# Select Gallery.
Multimedia system: IMAGES AND VIDEO RECORDINGS ARE DISPLAYED FROM THE FOL‐
4 © 5 Apps LOWING SOURCES, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select an app.
R Dashcam video recordings
THE FOLLOWING APPS ARE AVAILABLE, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Collision detection images
R Weather R Video recordings and images from other available sources
R Browser R Favourites
R Additional apps, which are purchased or installed subsequently
# Select a tab.
% You can also access both of the first two apps via the quick % The Gallery app is also available on the front passenger display.
access at Apps.
FILTERING DISPLAYS
# Select Z.
% The available features are country-dependent.
Licence fees may be applicable. # Select an option.
All files, all images or all video recordings are displayed.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR APPS, FOR EXAMPLE: PLAYING BACK A VIDEO RECORDING
R Search function
# Select 6.
Playback starts.
658
F295 0075 02
# To continue playback in full screen mode: tap on the display. # To delete a single file: tap on a file.
ø will appear.
# To pause playback: select 8.
# To delete all files: tap on /.
# To continue playback from the desired position: move the · posi‐
tion on the timeline by sliding it. # To delete: select E.
# To select the previous or next video recording: swipe to the right or A prompt appears.
left. # Select Yes.
SCROLLING AND ZOOMING IMAGES
# To scroll: swipe on the image in one direction. % A single file can be deleted even after a long press on the file.
# To zoom: tap twice in quick succession on an image.
To select the previous or next image: swipe to the right or left.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
#
ADDING OR REMOVING A FILE FROM THE FAVOURITES

# Press and hold on a file. INFORMATION ON AVAILABLE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
TWO TYPES OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU IN
# Select Add to favourites/Remove from favourites. THE VEHICLE:
A corresponding message appears.
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
SWITCHING WRITE PROTECTION ON OR OFF
R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
% Active write protection is not supported by every app.

The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries.
You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-
# Press and hold on a file. Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
extra/ecall/
# Activate D or deactivate E Write protection.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES FOR BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:
DELETING FILES
# Select ´. R The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both
emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" sec‐
tion (/ page 662).
659
F295 0075 02
R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone
vehicle and are activated at the factory. network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.
R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile
phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AND THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone net‐ R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to
work. the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls
emergency call centre. directly to public coordination centres.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can‐
not be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out
automatically.
carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the
% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets local dealers.
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functional‐
ity of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on cir‐ MERCEDES-BENZ RECOMMENDS THE ACTIVATION OF THE MERCEDES-
cumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:
includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastruc‐
ture of the public reception centres in the respective countries. R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a lan‐
guage you speak.
R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of
% Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes- the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to
to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other man‐ the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emer‐
ufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi‐ gency call and faster transfer of the accident data.
fied according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in
quickly.
There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transfer‐
and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for red to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.
660
F295 0075 02
In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there

is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
public emergency call centre. speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
faulty.
R If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112
emergency call is carried out automatically. YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐
TEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency R A corresponding message appears in the driver display.
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate
an accident site in places that are difficult to access.
TRIGGERING AN AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CALL
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically Requirements:
(/ page 661) or manually (/ page 662).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS BOTH THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AS WELL AS THE
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL) AUTOMATICALLY INITIATE AN
MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS: EMERGENCY CALL:
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt ten‐
system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete sioners after an accident
failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐ R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency
mitted. Stop Assist
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the
availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:
gency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can R A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call
switched on. centre.
R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
661
F295 0075 02
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:
is finished.
R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐ R If the traffic conditions and safety permit, remain in the vehicle until a
ing message appears in the display. voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
# Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is
number on your mobile phone. necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
IF AN EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN INITIATED: R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call
centre.
R If the traffic conditions and safety permit, remain in the vehicle until a
voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is ing message appears in the display.
necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle # Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call
immediately. number on your mobile phone.
EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER
TRIGGERING A MANUAL EMERGENCY CALL
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emer‐
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS
gency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
button at least one second long (/ page 650).
gency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.
or Depending on the emergency call system (/ page 659) activated different
data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
# To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice assis‐
tant (/ page 516).
662
F295 0075 02
TRANSMITTED DATA ACCORDING TO ACTIVATED EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call
R Position data of the vehicle R Position data of the vehicle
R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
R Direction of travel R Direction of travel
R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle identification number
R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)
R Number of people detected in the vehicle R Number of people detected in the vehicle
R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
R Time of the accident R Time of the accident
R Language setting on the multimedia system
R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not

This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre if necessary.
% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information,
the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emer‐
emergency call centre. gency call.
FOR ACCIDENT CLARIFICATION PURPOSES, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION OF THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
CAN BE TAKEN UP TO AN HOUR AFTER THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time
INITIATED: the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red con‐
tinuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be
R The current vehicle position can be determined. informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. READY indicator on the central display or media display.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red
indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF,
this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.
663
F295 0075 02
STARTING/ENDING ERA-GLONASS TEST MODE The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for res‐
cue and recovery in the event of an accident.
Requirements
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the right
R The vehicle is switched on. to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute. gency call system.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐

% THE TEST MODE IS CURRENTLY AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOW‐ gency call system are the local dealers.
ING COUNTRIES, FOR EXAMPLE: PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐
R Russia TEM (EU ECALL)
All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
R Belarus
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the
R Kazakhstan protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data
R Armenia (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital inter‐
R Kyrgyzstan ests of the affected person in accordance with article 6, paragraph1, letter d of
the GDPR.
# To start the test mode: press and hold the ~ button on the multi‐ The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operat‐
function steering wheel for at least five seconds. ing the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test
DATA RECIPIENT
has been performed.
The recipients of data that is processed by the 112 emergency call system (EU
# To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle. eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals. These are configured
by the appropriate authorities of the respective country in which they are loca‐
The test mode is ended.
ted to first accept and subsequently process emergency calls to the standard
INFORMATION ON DATA PROCESSING European emergency call number 112.
PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY
CALL SYSTEM
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the
protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data
(GDPR)".
664
F295 0075 02
ARRANGEMENTS FOR DATA PROCESSING

BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS ARE DESIGNED SO THAT THE FOLLOW‐
ING REQUIREMENTS ARE FULFILLED:
R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the
system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continu‐
ous tracking in normal operation.
R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continu‐
ously deleted.
R The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the sys‐
tem's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current loca‐
tions required for the normal function of the system are available.
R The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only
kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emer‐
gency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours after the
time that an emergency call is initiated.
RIGHTS OF PERSONS AFFECTED BY THE DATA PROCESSING

The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right
to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or
barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does
not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring
carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to
which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infea‐
sible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the
appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their
rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.
Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeauf‐

tragter für den Datenschutz, Mercedes-Benz Group AG, HPC E600, D-70546
Stuttgart, Germany
665
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection & WARNING

INFORMATION ON CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ the vehicle is stationary.
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ rently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
ment with the vehicle stationary. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND AVAILABILITY IN THE
COUNTRY, YOU CAN ESTABLISH AN INTERNET CONNECTION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING WAYS:
rently driving when operating the multimedia system. R Vehicles with a communication module:
- Using the communication module including data roaming
(/ page 667)
- Using Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone
R Vehicles without a communication module:
- Using Bluetooth® with a data-enabled mobile phone
666
F295 0075 02
- Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone the Mercedes me App. This can be terminated at any time and incurs no costs.
Without this contract it is not possible to use the services included in the pre‐
viously acquired Entertainment Package. The availability of this option is
The Internet functions can only be used to a limited degree whilst driving.
dependent on the country.
SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION USING THE COMMUNICATION
If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can pur‐
MODULE
chase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.
Requirements: The availability of this option is dependent on the country.
R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication

module. % Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is
R A Mercedes me user account is available. possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from
a mobile phone network provider.
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.
R The Entertainment Package is active.
R The Comfort Data Volume service is active. % Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering func‐
tion of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use the web
Multimedia system: browser or Wi-Fi hotspot.
5 Manage Internet access
% With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP,
# Select Acquired data package. online software updates cannot be carried out via the external
Wi-Fi hotspot.
For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when pur‐
chasing the services.
DISCONNECTING THE AUTOMATIC INTERNET CONNECTION VIA COMMU‐
Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. web browser or NICATION MODULE
Wi-Fi hotspot.
Requirements:
If the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me connect
services is limited. R Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® tethering are available in the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can obtain an Entertainment Pack‐

age via the Mercedes me Store. In order to use the data package included, you
must conclude your own contract with a mobile phone network provider via
667
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager
# Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
# Select the Ä settings in the line of Acquired data package.
# Select Search for access.
# To disconnect the automatic connection: select the Delete entry
option. # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
It may take a few seconds until the device is found by the Wi-Fi search.
% The communication module is removed from the list of known # Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 558).
hotspots, but can be reconnected manually at any time
(/ page 667). THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI IS RESTRICTED OR DOES NOT
FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
The Delete entry option permits the use of purchased data volume to be limi‐ R The mobile phone is switched off.
ted. The system is prevented from automatically establishing a connection to R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone.
the communication module after this option has been activated. R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multimedia system.
SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WLAN R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the mobile phone.
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone.
Requirements:
R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 558). SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH®
R The Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the mobile phone (see the Requirements:
manufacturer's operating instructions).
R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® profile PAN (Personal Area
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating Network).
instructions).
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth®
(/ page 630).
Multimedia system:
R Internet access via Bluetooth® is activated (see the manufacturer's oper‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth ating instructions).
% This function is country-dependent.
668
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: R Neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simulta‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth neous use of a telephone and an Internet connection.
5 Manage Internet access R The mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Blue‐
tooth®.
% This function is country-dependent. CANCELLING INTERNET ACCESS PERMISSION FOR A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
# Select the mobile phone with the \ Bluetooth® symbol. # Select options Ä next to the name of the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
# Select Delete configuration.
# Select Search for access.
In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia # Select Yes.
system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone applica‐
ESTABLISHING AN INTERNET CONNECTION
tion.
Multimedia system:
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 630). 4 © 5 Apps
# For example, select z Browser.
% If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth®, this is also
used for the telephone application. If you select a function that requires an Internet connection and the system is
currently offline, a menu opens with a selection of possible Internet accesses
as well as all tethering devices that are within range.
THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH® IS RESTRICTED OR DOES
NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Select an Internet access from the list.
R The mobile phone is switched off. The Internet connection is established.
R The mobile phone network coverage is insufficient.
R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone. % The list of possible Internet connections can also be displayed
using the extended status line.
R The Bluetooth® function on the multimedia system is switched off and
the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®.
R The Bluetooth® function is switched off on the mobile phone and the
mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®.
669
F295 0075 02
R When connecting via a Bluetooth® device, the connection status, device

% Depending on the vehicle equipment and country availability, name, and network type are displayed.
you can establish an Internet connection via the communication
R In the case of a connection via the communication module the following
module or connected mobile phones.
status information can be shown:
- Type of network
% The availability of the web browser depends on the country. - Status (online, offline, data volumes available or used, limited
service)
R For vehicles with a communication module, the connection data of non-
user paid services can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.
Connection status
CONNECTION STATUS OVERVIEW
Web browsers
DEPENDING ON THE CONNECTION STATUS, THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS
CAN APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IN THE STATUS LINE: CALLING UP A WEB PAGE
R ö: a Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet access.

& WARNING
R \: a Bluetooth® device is selected as Internet access. Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
R Mobile communications standard (e.g. 4G + double arrow symbol): the equipment
communication module is selected as the hotspot. If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS
Multimedia system:
4© # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
# Briefly press the status line. mits.
The extended status line is displayed. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
# Briefly press the Internet symbol in the symbol overview.
The current connection status is displayed.
NOTES ON DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS
R When connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection status and device name are rently driving when operating the multimedia system.
displayed.
670
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: WEB BROWSER OVERVIEW

4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser
CALLING UP A NEW WEB PAGE

# Select Search.
# Entering a web address.
# Select OK.
% The function is country-dependent.
% No web pages can be displayed on the multimedia system while 1 Previous website
driving. 2 Next website
3 Update
CALLING UP A WEBSITE FROM THE BROWSER HISTORY 4 URL
# To call up the previous page from the history: select q. 5 Adds/removes bookmarks
6 Options
7 Settings
% UNDER Ä YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
R Tabs
R Bookmarks & history
R Reading mode
R Share link
R Share content
R Request mobile website
671
F295 0075 02
CALLING UP WEB BROWSER OPTIONS R Form data

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä 5 Bookmarks & history # Select one of the options shown.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: MANAGING BOOKMARKS
R Bookmarks Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä
R Browsing history
R Entered URLs # Select Bookmarks & history.
# Select Ä after the bookmark.
A menu with options opens.
# Select an option.
# Change the settings. R Delete entry
CALLING UP THE WEB BROWSER SETTINGS R Delete all
Multimedia system: R Edit
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Settings R Share
R Block popups
# Select one of the options shown.
R Enable cookies MANAGING TABS
R Enable Javascript Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä 5 Tabs
# Switch a function on D or off E. OPENING A NEW TAB
DELETING BROWSER DATA

# Select New tab.
Multimedia system: CHANGING TAB
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Browser data # Select the icon for the desired tab.
THE FOLLOWING SPECIFIC BROWSER DATA CAN BE DELETED: CLOSING A TAB
R Cache
# Press and hold the icon of the tab to be closed until a menu appears.
R Cookies # Select Close.
The tab is closed.
672
F295 0075 02
PRIVATE MODE SETTING THE WEB BROWSER IN THE BACKGROUND

# Switch private mode on D or off E. Multimedia system:
If the private mode is switched on, an icon appears in the input line of 4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser
the web browser. # Press ©.
Audio playback continues.
% In private mode, neither the history nor cookies are saved.
Bookmarks can also be created in private mode.
TuneIn Radio
SHARING URLS FROM THE WEB BROWSER CALLING UP TUNEIN RADIO
Requirements: Requirements:
R To share via QR code: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the R There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me.
mobile device. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
R The TuneIn radio service is activated.
Multimedia system: R The data volume is available.
4 © 5 Apps 5 z Browser 5 Ä Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
SHARING URLS VIA QR CODE R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
# Select Share link.
A QR code appears.
% The functions and services are country-dependent. For more
# Scan the displayed QR code with a mobile device. information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
SHARING URLS WITH ANOTHER DISPLAY
# Select Share content. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# In the menu drag and drop a display to another display.
# Select TuneIn Radio.
The displayed web page opens on the other display.
The TuneIn Radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% More information on sharing display content: (/ page 546)
673
F295 0075 02
# Select a category.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone
reception. # Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
OVERVIEW OF TUNEIN RADIO
or
# Select the search field.

# Enter a station name.
% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using

Internet Radio.
SAVING/DELETING A TUNEIN RADIO STATION AS A FAVOURITE

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio
1 Internet Radio provider SAVING FAVOURITES

2 Additional information on the current station # Select a station.
3 Controls playback # Press the symbol next to the station name.
4 Settings
DELETING FAVOURITES
# Select a station.
6 Favourites
7 Station list # Press the symbol next to the station name.
8 Search
SETTING INTERNET RADIO OPTIONS
SELECTING AND CONNECTING TO TUNEIN RADIO STATIONS Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio 5 Z 5 TuneIn
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 TuneIn Radio THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
# Select =.
R Select Stream: select the stream quality
R Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your TuneIn user account
674
F295 0075 02
R Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn user account
# Select an option.
675
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Media
Media
Information about media mode % OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

INFORMATION ABOUT SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000
files.
& WARNING R Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32‑bit
Risk of distraction when handling data storage media address space).
If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is R Due to the large variety of available music and video files
diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose regarding encoders, sampling frequency and data transfer
control of the vehicle. rates, playback cannot be guaranteed.
R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the mar‐
# Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is sta‐
ket, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices.
tionary.
R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported.
R Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back.
% The driver may be distracted from the traffic situation by the
sounds of media playback. Use headphones for media playback R MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
to avoid distracting the driver. R Files with the corresponding format can be played back
from the USB device in Dolby Atmos.
SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA:
INFORMATION ON COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND TRADEMARKS
Permissible file systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you
Permissible data storage USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many coun‐
media devices tries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copy‐
right holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applica‐
Supported audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC
ble copyright regulations and that you comply with these.
Supported video formats MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV
676
F295 0075 02
For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence

from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together
are registered trademarks, and DTS TruVolume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.©.
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 2020-2022 Dolby Laboratories. All
Rights Reserved.
DTS® Connected Radio™

For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS logo are regis‐
tered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other
countries. © 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics licensed and provi‐
ded by Lyric Find™. Content licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID

and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
This product incorporates Spotify software which is subject to 3rd party licen‐
ces found here: https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses
677
F295 0075 02
9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward
A Additional categories
B Playlists and categories
C Media search
D Controls playback
TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European E Timeline
Union and other countries. When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions
are available:
Overview of the media menu R Controlling media playback

R Selecting tracks from the current playlist
R Selecting a playback list
R Media search
R Select a media source
R Creating favourites
R Configuring settings
% Further information on:

R Overview of the zero layer (/ page 527).
R Operating the zero layer (/ page 529).
1 Album cover
2 Active media source
3 Track and artist
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback
list
5 Random playback
6 Repeat
7 Settings
678
F295 0075 02
Connecting the data storage medium to the # Connect the USB device to the USB port.
multimedia system SEARCHING FOR AND AUTHORISING A BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE

Requirements:
CONNECTING USB DEVICES
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio device.
* NOTE R The audio device supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and
Damage caused by high temperatures AVRCP.
High temperatures can damage USB devices. R The audio device is "visible" for other devices.
# Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehi‐
cle. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth
AUTHORISING A NEW BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE

# Select Connect device.
Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.
# Select an audio device.

Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and
on the mobile phone.
# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio device.
# Select No, only music.

The Bluetooth® audio device is connected with the multimedia system.
Example: vehicles with cup holders
CONNECTING A PREVIOUSLY AUTHORISED BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE
The multimedia connection unit is found in the centre console storage com‐
partment and has two type C USB ports 1. Depending on the vehicle equip‐
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list.
ment there are further USB ports in the storage compartment under the arm‐ The connection is being established.
rest and in the fold-open compartment in the rear.
The charging power of the USB ports is at least 5 V (3 A) and, depending on

the vehicle equipment, a maximum of 20 V (5 A).
679
F295 0075 02
Starting media playback # To select the previous track: select û.
# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold û or ü.

Requirements:
# To show the current track list: select 5.
R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
% You can also control media playback on the zero layer using the
control menu displayed (/ page 527).
4 © 5 Media
# Select a media source.
Additional options for setting media playback

Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media
4 © 5 Media
CALLING UP ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
# To pause playback: select 8. # Select Ä.
# To continue playback: select 6. The additional options are shown.
# To repeat a track: select :.

# Select an option.
FOR THE REPEAT FUNCTION THERE ARE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS:
R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. Media search

R Select twice: the current track is repeated. NOTES ABOUT THE SEARCH FUNCTION IN CATEGORIES
R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated. Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several
categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the con‐
# To play back tracks in random order: select 9. nected device and data format.
# To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the desired point on the
timeline. % The categories are available as soon as the entire media content
has been read in and analysed.
# To select the next track: select ü.
680
F295 0075 02
Availability of the media search with Android devices may be

limited.
Media operation on the front passenger dis‐
play (only vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen)
STARTING A SEARCH IN CATEGORIES INFORMATION ON MEDIA MODE ON THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY
Multimedia system: (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)
4 © 5 Media 5 5 You can also use functions of the MBUX multimedia system on the front
# Select a category. passenger display.
USING THE KEYWORD SEARCH YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS:
Multimedia system:
R Information about supported formats and data storage media
4 © 5 Media
(/ page 676)
You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.
R Information on copyright protection and trademarks (/ page 676)
# Select ª. R Overview of the media menu (/ page 678)
A keyboard for character entry appears.
# Enter the term searched for. Bluetooth® headphones can be connected to the MBUX multimedia system on
the front passenger display.
% The search begins with the first character entered. The more & WARNING
characters entered the more concrete the search results become. Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sour‐
# Select the desired entry from the result list. ces are not secured in the vehicle interior, they can be flung around and
hit vehicle occupants.
If a list with several tracks is selected, then this is opened in the search.
To playback all of the tracks in the list, select Ä and then Play now. # Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that
they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle
stowage compartment.
681
F295 0075 02
# To adjust the volume: select ø in the menu line and press ± or q.

& WARNING
Health hazard due to excessive volume on headphones # To set playback via vehicle loudspeakers: press Ã in the menu line.
Excessive volume can damage your hearing. # To connect Bluetooth® headphones to the front passenger display:
# Avoid wearing headphones for long periods of time and at too press Ï in the menu line and select the desired headphones.
high a volume (85 decibels). THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
# Ensure that the volume is set to a comfortable level. R Controlling media playback (/ page 680)
R Options for setting media playback (/ page 680)
R Starting a search in categories (/ page 681)
% The headphones are special equipment for the MBUX multimedia R Using the keyword search (/ page 681)
system.
You can also obtain the headphones from Mercedes-Benz Cus‐
tomer Solutions or in a specialist shop (see the manufacturer's Music online
operating instructions).
REQUIREMENTS
R There is an account for the music streaming service.
% The function of wireless headphones can be impaired by other R A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained.
radio-based electronic devices, such as mobile phones, for R The data volume is available.
example.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
R A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.
STARTING AND OPERATING MEDIA PLAYBACK ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER DISPLAY (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)
Requirements: % The functions and services are country-dependent. For more
information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
# Select a media source.
682
F295 0075 02
Multimedia system: # Select Z.

4 © 5 Media
# Select Music services.
ADDING A STREAMING PROVIDER THE FIRST TIME YOU START THE APPLI‐ The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
CATION
# Select Online music. # Z next to the streaming provider.
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. # Tap on Log out.
# Select a streaming provider. CALLING UP MUSIC ONLINE
A QR code is shown on the display. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
# Scan the QR code with the mobile phone.
# Select Online music.
# Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.
Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media
ADDING MORE STREAMING PROVIDERS application.
SEARCHING FOR MUSIC IN ONLINE MUSIC
The last active streaming provider is active.
Multimedia system:
# Select Z. 4 © 5 Media 5 Online music
# Select Music services. SEARCHING FOR CATEGORIES IN ONLINE MUSIC

The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
category search. The available categories and the symbol for the category
# Select a streaming provider. search depend on the streaming provider.
A QR code is shown on the display. # Start the category search.
# Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. The list of available categories appears.
# Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone. # Select a category.
LOGGING OUT FROM A STREAMING PROVIDER KEYWORD SEARCH IN ONLINE MUSIC

You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.
The last active streaming provider is active.
683
F295 0075 02
# Select ª. INFORMATION ABOUT DOLBY ATMOS®

A keyboard for character entry appears. The MBUX multimedia system enables playback of Dolby Atmos® content via
the Burmester® sound system, thereby providing an even more immersive
# Enter the term searched for. three-dimensional sound experience.
% The function is available with Apple Music® streaming or by using

% The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the
a USB device with the corresponding file formats.
more concrete the search results are.
# Select the desired entry from the result list. % The availability of this function is equipment-dependent.
Depending on the selected hit, playback is started or a lower level in the
search is opened.
SWITCHING DOLBY ATMOS® ON OR OFF
CALLING UP ONLINE MUSIC SETTINGS
Requirements:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Online music R An account for the Apple Music® music streaming service is available.
# Select Z. R A subscription for the Apple Music® music streaming service has been
obtained.
# Select Music services.
R Sufficient data volume is available.
# Select Z next to a streaming provider. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
# Select a setting.
% Information about the linked accounts can be displayed using % The functions and services are country-dependent. For more
the Z gear icon next to the configured streaming provider. The information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
available information depends on what is offered by the provider
of the streaming service.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.
684
F295 0075 02
# Select Apple Music®.
# Select Z.
# Tap E to switch on Dolby Atmos®.
or
# Tap D to switch off Dolby Atmos®.

Tracks which are present or available in Dolby Atmos® will be played
appropriately by the sound system using this format.
685
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Radio
Radio
Switching on the radio 5 Additional options

6 Switches on traffic reports
Multimedia system: With DAB equipment: switches on radio announcements
4 © 5 Þ Radio 7 Station list
# Start the application on the multimedia system home screen. 8 Search
The radio menu appears. You will hear the last station played on the last
frequency band selected. % The availability of the frequency bands is dependent on the
equipment.
Radio overview
When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions
are available:
R Selecting a radio station

R Setting radio stations from the station list
R Storing radio stations
R Frequency band
R Search function
R Creating favourites
R Configuring settings
1 Preview image
2 Active frequency band
% Further information on:
R Overview of the zero layer (/ page 527).
3 Station name or set frequency
R Operating the zero layer (/ page 529).
4 Settings
686
F295 0075 02
Searching for radio stations using station
names or frequency entry
Setting the frequency band
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio
4 © 5 Þ Radio # Select è.
# Select a frequency band or a favourite in the selection above the pre‐
view image. # Enter a station name or frequency.
# Select a station.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system: Selecting a recommended radio station
4 © 5 Þ Radio Requirements:
# Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.
R The Allow music suggestions option is switched on (/ page 537).
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show sta‐
% You can also set the previous/next radio station on the zero layer
tion suggestions.
using the control menu displayed (/ page 527).
Multimedia system:
Calling up the radio station list 4 © 5 Þ Radio

# Select è.
Multimedia system: The recommended stations are shown.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select a suggested station.
# Select 4.
The selected station is played.
The station list appears.
# Swipe the station list up or down.
# Select a station.
687
F295 0075 02
Storing radio stations Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Þ Radio
Multimedia system: # Select Z.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select Internet radio.
# Select a radio station.
# Activate or deactivate the Service Following function.
# Select f.
When the function is on, the station is searched for via Internet Radio.
If you are driving out of the station's coverage area and the station is
Managing favourites available via Internet radio, the Poor reception. Tap here to switch to Inter-
net radio. message appears on the central display.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Favourites
MOVING STATIONS
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
# Press ·. Multimedia system:
The list of favourites appears. 4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Press Ä to the far right of the station name. The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an
image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news
# Select Move. or service information, for example.
# Move the station to the new position.

% The slide show is available for DAB+ channels that broadcast
additional information.
Setting station tracking via Internet radio
# Press the station picture on the central display.
Requirements:
The image is enlarged.
688
F295 0075 02
Switching a slideshow on or off (FM/DAB Activating/deactivating radio announcements

radio mode) Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z # Switch on Radio announcements.
# Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Slideshow on D or off E. The selected radio announcements are played.
When both slideshows are switched on, the contents of both slideshows When Radio announcements are first switched on, Traffic information
alternate. service (TA), Travel and Warning are preset.
or
Activating/deactivating the frequency fix # Switch off Radio announcements.
function No radio announcements are played.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band Selecting radio announcements
# Activate or deactivate Frequency fix.
Multimedia system:
If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the recep‐
tion is poor. 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Radio announcements
# Switch an announcement on or off.
For example, Traffic information service (TA), Travel or Warning can be
Activating/deactivating traffic announce‐ selected.
ments
% The radio announcements are not station-dependent.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
# Select Radio announcements.
The traffic information service is switched on or off.
689
F295 0075 02
Setting the traffic information service volume If no lyrics are available for the song currently playing on the radio,
Show lyrics is greyed out.
increase HIDING LYRICS
Multimedia system:
# Select the cross at the top of the lyrics display.
4 © 5 Z 5 System 5 Audio or
# Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
# Select G.
# Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
The radio menu appears.
Increasing the volume of the traffic information service increases the
volume of traffic announcements.
Displaying radio text

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band
# Activate or deactivate Radio text information.
Showing or hiding lyrics

% The function is equipment-dependent.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Ä
SHOWING LYRICS
# Select Show lyrics.
The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the song currently playing on
the radio are displayed.
Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top section of the lyrics.
690
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system TV
TV
Information on TV mode R Characteristics of the selected TV channel
INFORMATION ON COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND TRADEMARKS TV RECEPTION MAY BE INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
Copyright® 2015 Ubiquitous Corp.
R Electronic devices which are taken into the vehicle may impair TV recep‐
DVB and DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project. tion.
The TV tuner can receive programmes in Dolby Digital Plus. R The conditions for reception may change whilst the vehicle is in motion.
POOR RECEPTION CONDITIONS CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECT:
R The TV tuner switches to an alternative digital channel with better recep‐

tion with the same programme content.
R The TV tuner mutes the sound, freezes the screen or hides it. The t
symbol appears in the display.
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐

try.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
The TV tuner automatically sets the TV standard.
TV RECEPTION IS DEPENDENT ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R Speed
691
F295 0075 02
Switching to TV mode 5 Settings

Multimedia system: 7 Favourites
4 © 5 Media 8 Selects the previous or next TV channel from the channel list
# Select TV. 9 Station list
The TV picture appears. If available, the channel and programme infor‐ A Searches for a TV channel
mation is displayed.
OVERVIEW OF SYMBOLS
If the vehicle is travelling faster than 5 km/h the television picture is hid‐
den from the driver. If available, the channel and programme information
is continuously displayed.
# To show a TV programme on a full screen: tap on the preview picture.
TV mode overview
1 TV standard
2 Channel fix active
3 Audio languages available
4 Subtitles available
5 TV channel is encrypted
Open lock: TV channel can be decrypted with the currently connected CI+
module
Showing or hiding full screen

1 Preview image Multimedia system:
2 Channel name 4 © 5 Media 5 TV
3 Features of the TV channel and the current programme # To show full screen: press the preview picture.
4 Start and finish times of the current programme, graphic showing the # To hide full screen: press G on the central display.
remaining broadcast time The TV menu appears.
692
F295 0075 02
Selecting TV channels Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Media 5 TV
SELECTING TV CHANNELS FROM THE MENU
SELECTING FROM FAVOURITES
Multimedia system:
# In the menu, select · (/ page 692).
4 © 5 Media 5 TV
# Press û or ü on the central display. # Select the TV channel.
The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list. SELECTING TV CHANNELS IN THE BACKGROUND
SELECTING TV CHANNELS FROM THE CHANNEL LIST Requirements:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 TV R Another application is active, e.g. the navigation, in the foreground.
R TV mode is switched on in the background and the sound from the selec‐
# In the menu, select 4 .
ted TV channel can be heard.
# Select a TV channel.
The TV tuner selects the channel from the channel list. # Press û or ü on the central display.
The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list.
# Press the preview picture.
DISPLAYING CURRENT PROGRAMME INFORMATION FOR THE SELECTED
SEARCHES FOR A TV CHANNEL
CHANNEL (EPG)
# Select the search bar next to ª (/ page 692). Multimedia system:
# Enter the first characters. 4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Õ
EPG DISPLAYS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION (IF AVAILABLE):
# Select the TV channel from the channel list.
R Broadcast times
% Further information on the search bar (/ page 694). R Names of the current and upcoming programmes
SELECTING A TV CHANNEL FROM THE FAVOURITES # Select a programme name with r.

The programme information is displayed.
Requirements:
# To scroll: swipe up or down.
R The TV channel is stored.
# To leave the programme information display: select q.
693
F295 0075 02
FUNCTION OF THE CHANNEL FIX SETTING

Channel list overview
CHANNEL FIX IS SWITCHED ON
The channel is not changed. This is useful if, for example, you drive the vehicle The TV tuner shows the current programme on the digital TV channels or radio
through reception regions that overlap. It prevents frequent switching back stations with adequate reception in its own channel list.
and forth between the channels.
The order of the channel lists is alphabetical or country-specific.
The FIX indicator is displayed after the name of the TV channel.
The TV tuner requires a short amount of time to update the information.
CHANNEL FIX IS SWITCHED OFF
THE CHANNEL LISTS SHOW THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
Depending on reception quality, the TV tuner automatically switches to an
alternative channel with the same programme content but better reception. R receivable channel names
Using this function, the best possible television picture can be found, regard‐
R programme title
less of the reception quality.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING CHANNEL FIX THE INFORMATION IS SHOWN UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV R it is broadcast by the digital channel
# Activate or deactivate Station fix. R the reception conditions are adequate
When the option is switched on, the display button is activated.

SWITCHING THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC CHARACTER SET FOR THE TV CHAN‐ Favourites
NEL ON/OFF
Multimedia system: OVERVIEW OF TV PROGRAMMES (FAVOURITES)
You can save up to 100 digital TV channels in favourites.
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV
# Activate or deactivate Country-specific character set. For quick-access you can save TV channels as favourites.
When the option is switched on, a country-specific character set is used STORING TV CHANNELS
for the display. Multimedia system:
When the option is switched off, the character set transmitted by the 4 © 5 Media 5 TV
currently set TV channel is used for the display.
The respective TV channel is responsible for the transmission of the ADDING A TV CHANNEL TO FAVOURITES
channel-dependent character set. # Select a TV channel.
# Select f.
694
F295 0075 02
MOVING A TV CHANNEL WITHIN FAVOURITES SETTING THE TV SUBTITLES

# Press ·. Multimedia system:
The list of favourites appears. 4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV
# Select the available languages r under the Subtitles category.
# Press þ next to the station name.
# Select one of the available options for the selected language.
# Select Move.
The selected language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multimedia sys‐
# Move the station to the new position. tem is switched off.
When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language
REMOVING A TV CHANNEL FROM FAVOURITES
is loaded as the language. If this is not available, the language that
# Select a TV channel. appears at the beginning of the list is loaded.
# Select ß. # To show no subtitles: switch Activate off.
HIDING ENCRYPTED TV CHANNELS
TV programme Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV
SETTING THE TV AUDIO LANGUAGE
# Select Hide encrypted channels.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV When you start the application for the first time or after the system is
reset, all TV channels are displayed.
# Select one of the available audio languages r under the Audio lan-
If Hide encrypted channels is active, all free-to-air TV channels and TV
guage category.
channels decoded by the CI+ module, for example, are displayed.
# Select one of the available options for the selected audio language.
The selected audio language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multime‐
dia system is switched off.
Teletext
When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language TELETEXT OVERVIEW
is loaded as the audio language. If this is not available, the audio lan‐ Teletext pages are located between page 100 and page 899.
guage that appears at the beginning of the list is loaded.
A dynamic teletext page consists of several subpages.
695
F295 0075 02
INFORMATION ON MHEG-5 DIGITAL TELETEXT:

Picture settings
R Digital teletext is only available in some countries, e.g. the UK and New
SELECTING PICTURE SETTINGS FOR THE TV
Zealand
Multimedia system:
R Interactive multimedia applications such as weather forecasts, news
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV 5 Video settings
reports and sport results are available
# To set the picture format: activate one of the Automatic, 4:3, 8:3, 16:9,
R It may take some time before all the pages load
21:9 or Zoom display buttons.
SHOWING TELETEXT
Multimedia system: The brightness is automatically set.
4 © 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 TV 5 Teletext
# To switch to page selection: switch between number entry and selec‐ HD programmes
tion using the arrow button with Í and 123.
RECEIVING ENCRYPTED HD PROGRAMMES
# To call up a side: enter the numbers in quick succession.
or * NOTE
Damage to the CI+ capable CA module (Conditional Access mod‐
# Select the arrow buttons. ule) and the Smart Card due to sustained high heat
# To return to the TV programme: select TV. The CI+ capable CA module is designed for home use. The CI+ capable
CA module can overheat and be damaged at continuously high outside
MHEG-5 DIGITAL TELETEXT
temperatures.
Apart from the functions described above, additional options can be used.
# Make sure that the CI+ enabled CA module is not exposed to
# To call up data content using colours: select a colour.
prolonged high temperatures.
# To move back a level: select a list symbol. If the CI+ capable CA module is damaged, no encrypted chan‐
nels can be received.
A CI+-capable CA module (Common Interface Plus capable CA module), which

is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes
according to the CI+ standard.
696
F295 0075 02
In some countries, an additional Smart Card is required, which is inserted into + card is still in the vehicle. message appears on the central dis‐
the CI+-capable CA module (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). play.
The CI+-capable CA module is connected in the CI+ box in the glove compart‐
ment. CALLING UP THE MENU FOR THE CI+-CAPABLE CA MODULE
Multimedia system:
# To insert or remove the CI+-capable CA module in the CI+ box: to 4 © 5 Media 5 TV
insert or remove the CI+-capable CA module in the CI+ box, press the
catch downwards. SWITCHING THE REMINDER OF A CONNECTED CI+-CAPABLE CA MODULE
ON OR OFF
Make sure that the catch does not exert any lateral pressure on the CI+-capa‐
ble CA module when inserting or removing it. % The CI+-capable CA module is not available in all countries.
# To insert the Smart Card in the CI+-capable CA module: if required # Select Z.

(country-dependent), insert the smart card into the CI+-capable CA
module slot. # Select General settings.
Encrypted HD programmes can be received according to the CI+ stand‐
ard. # Switch the Card status reminder option on or off.
CALLING UP THE MENU FOR THE CI+-CAPABLE CA MODULE
% The CI+ box is not available in all countries. # Select CI+ module.
# Select Open menu.

% The CI+ box is designed for operating temperatures between The subscription number can be shown in the menu, for example. The
0 °C and 65 °C. At operating temperatures that are too high or content of the menu depends on the manufacturer of the CI+-capable
too low a message appears in the multimedia system and the CI CA module.
+-capable CA module is switched off automatically. If the CI+-
capable CA module is switched off, no encrypted channels can
be received. % You need the subscription number to extend the subscription, for
example.
Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating
% If a CI+-capable CA module is connected, Card status reminder is instructions.
switched on (/ page 697) and the vehicle is switched off, the CI
697
F295 0075 02
# To reset the TV tuner: select Reset TV tuner.
If the playback is malfunctioning, you can try to solve the problem by restart‐
ing.
# To restart CI+-capable CA module: select Restart CI+ module.
698
F295 0075 02
MBUX multimedia system Sound
Sound
Sound settings # Switch on one level.
or
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOUND SYSTEM
The sound system has a total output of 125 W and is equipped with seven # Switch off loudness normalisation.
speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
SETTING THE BALANCE AND FADER
Multimedia system:
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the right and
Multimedia system: left speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the right and left-hand speakers.
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. ADJUSTING THE FADER
ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the front and
Multimedia system: rear speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the front and rear speakers.
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION ON OR OFF Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Loudness normalisation INFORMATION ABOUT THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
The Burmester® 3D-surround sound system has a total output of 710 W and is
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between
equipped with 15 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this
media modes.
purpose. The currently set level is displayed.
Loudness normalisation can also be switched off.
699
F295 0075 02
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE AND FADER IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SUR‐

% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace ROUND SOUND SYSTEM
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path. Multimedia system:
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE
SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the
vehicle in the grid shown.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z
The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings.
sides in the vehicle.
ADJUSTING THE TREBLE, MID AND BASS SETTINGS ON THE BURMESTER® ADJUSTING THE FADER
3D-SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
Multimedia system:
in the grid shown.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser
The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. the vehicle.
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SUR‐
ROUND SOUND SYSTEM ON OR OFF % Setting 0 is recommended for high quality music and voice repro‐
Multimedia system: duction.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between SELECTING A SOUND PROFILE IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this SOUND SYSTEM
purpose. The currently set level is displayed. Multimedia system:
Loudness normalisation can also be switched off. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z
SETTING AN EXISTING SOUND PROFILE

# Switch on one level.
# Select a sound profile.
or
SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE
# Switch off loudness normalisation.
# Select Personal sound profile and Z.
# Select Reconfigure.
700
F295 0075 02
# Restart the set-up assistant.

Advanced sound system
SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE FOR THE FIRST TIME:
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
# Select Personal sound profile.
The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225 W and is equipped with
# Open the set-up assistant with Start. eleven speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes.
# Observe the messages on the display and select the preferred settings.
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
The personal sound profile is created with the selected settings and can Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
be selected in the Sound profiles menu.
CHANGING INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS OF THE PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
AT A LATER DATE: Multimedia system:
# Select Personal sound profile and Z. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z
# Adjust the desired settings. ADJUSTING SOUND SETTINGS
# Select one of the functions shown.
% The availability of a Personal sound profile is dependent on the ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS IN THE ADVANCED
equipment. SOUND SYSTEM
The set-up assistant is available when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z
ADJUSTING THE SOUND FOCUS IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND # Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system: SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYS‐
TEM ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound focus
Multimedia system:
# Select a seat or seat row for the sound focus. 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation
The sound focus is activated.
SWITCHING OFF LOUDNESS NORMALISATION
or # Switch on one level.
# Select the seat or seat row again. or
The sound focus is deactivated. # Switch off loudness normalisation.
701
F295 0075 02
SETTING THE BALANCE/FADER IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM IN THE EXTERIOR AREA, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS
Multimedia system: ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS:
R Locking and unlocking your vehicle
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE R Plugging in and unplugging the vehicle plug
# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the The sound when disconnecting the vehicle plug varies with the state of
vehicle in the grid shown. charge of your vehicle.
The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right R Unlocking the vehicle plug
sides in the vehicle.
R Successful initiation of the charging process
ADJUSTING THE FADER R Malfunction when charging
# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
in the grid shown.
In addition, your vehicle welcomes you with an ambient sound outside when
The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
the vehicle.
% The availability of the exterior area sounds is dependent on the

Sound Experience country.
INFORMATION ABOUT SOUND EXPERIENCE

CALLING UP SOUND EXPERIENCE
Your journey will be an acoustic experience. For this purpose, the active Sound
Multimedia system:
Experience accompanies certain situations in the vehicle with selected
sounds. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Sound Experience
SWITCHING SOUND EXPERIENCE ON OR OFF

IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS
ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS: # Switch Sound Experience inside or Sound Experience outside on or off.
R Arrival in the vehicle

% The availability of the Sound Experience outside is country-
R Starting the drive system dependent.
R Vehicle acceleration
R Recovery of energy from the braking procedure SELECTING SOUND EXPERIENCE STYLE
R Exiting the vehicle # Select a style.
702
F295 0075 02
Styles are already available, for example Vivid Flux.

% The intensity and dynamics of the sounds vary with the set drive
You can purchase additional styles through the Mercedes me Portal. programme.
% The availability of styles that can be purchased is country-

dependent. % You can choose between a comfortable (Balanced), a sporty
(Sport) or a very sporty (Powerful) supporting characteristic of
the driving sounds inside the vehicle. Use the steering wheel but‐
tons (/ page 329) or the multimedia system (/ page 335) to
AMG Sound Experience set the supporting sound characteristics.
INFORMATION ABOUT AMG SOUND EXPERIENCE

Your journey will be an acoustic experience. For this purpose, the active Sound CALLING UP AMG SOUND EXPERIENCE
Experience accompanies certain situations in the vehicle with selected Multimedia system:
sounds. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Sound experience
IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS SWITCHING SOUND EXPERIENCE EVENTS INSIDE OR OUTSIDE ON OR OFF
ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS: # Switch Sound Experience Events inside or Sound Experience Events outside
on D or off E.
R Arrival in the vehicle
SELECTING SOUND EXPERIENCE STYLE
R Starting the drive system
# Select a style, e.g. Authentic.
R Vehicle acceleration
R RACE START
% The availability of the style is dependent on the equipment.
IN THE EXTERIOR AREA, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS

ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS:
R Locking and unlocking your vehicle

R Plugging in and unplugging the vehicle plug
R Locking and unlocking the vehicle plug
R Successful start of the charging process
Back to Contents703
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display 705
Maintenance Management 707
Telediagnostics 708
Engine compartment 709
Topping up the windscreen washer system 713
Cleaning and care 714
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval Information on regular maintenance work
display
* NOTE
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display informs you
Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
of the next regular service due date.
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incom‐
Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or pletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
distance until the next service due date will be displayed.
# Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
You can hide this service display using the back button G on the steering
wheel.
# Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a
You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre
(/ page 112).
* NOTE
Irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery due to mainte‐
Displaying the service due date nance work not being carried out
The high-voltage battery is subject to wear. Maintenance work which is
Driver display: not carried out in time can lead to irreparable damage to the high-volt‐
4 Service age battery.
The next service due date is displayed. # Always observe the warning messages about the high-voltage
battery and immediately consult a qualified specialist work‐
# To exit the display: press the back button G on the steering wheel.
shop.
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage

battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
705
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle.
Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operat‐
ing conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. This is
the case for frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfa‐
ces, for example.
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter changed
more frequently. Check the tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated
under increased stress. Further information can be obtained at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility
of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often
than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.
Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date
only when the battery is connected.
# Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before
disconnecting the battery (/ page 705).
706
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care Maintenance Management
Maintenance Management
Notes about Maintenance Management Data transferred when using Maintenance

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automat‐ Management
ically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.
When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will fault rectification.
then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your
Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the
vehicle.
Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Account", "Data Protection & Legal Notice".
% The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the mainte‐
nance request to the service partner is subject to technical limi‐
% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the
tations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be
multimedia system are not available in every country.
perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this
case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment
with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the
multimedia system.
% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the

multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function
is available in your country.
707
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care Telediagnostics
Telediagnostics
Notes about Telediagnostics ommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and
the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working
on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on
% This service is not available in all countries. the country, vehicle model and equipment.
The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunc‐
tions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activa‐ Data transferred when using Telediagnostics
ted, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault
conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to fault rectification.
the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at:
http://www.mercedes.me. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the
Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://
For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may www.mercedes.me under "My Account", "Data Protection & Legal Notice".
appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the cus‐
% The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model
tomer centre for assistance.
and its equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available
at all times.
% The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system
depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and
requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider
has no influence.
% Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. There‐

fore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and rec‐
708
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) & DANGER

OPERATION OF THE ACTIVE BONNET (PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION) Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the the charging process
risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approx‐ During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
imately 80 mm. tem is under high voltage.
After being triggered, the active bonnet remains in the raised position. Limited # Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
visibility due to the raised bonnet cannot be ruled out. process.
After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limi‐
ted.
& WARNING
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored immediately in a Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a qualified spe‐ # Never release the bonnet when driving.
cialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
Notes on the bonnet

Only the specialist personnel of a qualified specialist workshop should open
the bonnet. Access by the customer is not permitted.
To open the bonnet, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
709
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet Risk of injury due to moving parts
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of
movement. Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:
# Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the # Switch off the vehicle.
bonnet's range of movement.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
& WARNING # Remove jewellery and watches.

Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle
# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHI‐
CLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING SIT‐
UATIONS MAY OCCUR:
& WARNING
R You may come into contact with hot gases. Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐ is open
ids. If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you
could be trapped by the wiper linkage.
# In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment,
keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service. # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if
you need to open the bonnet.
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to
open the bonnet.
Notes on the coolant level

Only trained personnel at a qualified specialist workshop should check or add
coolant. Access by the customer is not permitted.
To check or add coolant, use a qualified specialist workshop.
710
F295 0075 02
& DANGER & WARNING

Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during Risk of injury due to moving parts
the charging process Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐ unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
tem is under high voltage.
Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
process.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐

nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
& WARNING
# Remove jewellery and watches.
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHI‐ # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
CLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING SIT‐
UATIONS MAY OCCUR:
R You may come into contact with hot gases. & WARNING
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating flu‐ Risk of scalding from hot coolant
ids. You may scald yourself if you open the cap when the drive system is at
normal operating temperature.
# In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment,
keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service. # Allow the drive system to cool down before opening the cap.
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
open the bonnet. glasses.
# Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
711
F295 0075 02
Keeping the air/water duct free

# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits,
e.g. ice, snow or leaves.
712
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care Topping up the windscreen washer system
Topping up the windscreen washer system

# Top up the washer fluid.
& WARNING
Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate # Close washer fluid filler flap 1.
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
# Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks
when using windscreen washer concentrate.
Requirements
# Press on the rear area of washer fluid filler flap 1.

Washer fluid filler flap 1 will open.
713
F295 0075 02
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care
Cleaning and care
Information on washing the vehicle in a car * NOTE

wash Damage from automatic braking
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing R Active Brake Assist
the vehicle
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
R HOLD function
# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐ R Active Parking Assist
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored. To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash.
* NOTE
Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the

underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular

the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
714
F295 0075 02
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH, WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS ACTIVATED, THE CAR WASH MODE ACTIVE MES‐
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND: SAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY. THE FOLLOWING ADJUST‐
MENTS WILL BE MADE:
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
R The HOLD function is switched off. R The outside mirrors will be folded in.
R The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off. R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically,
the rain sensor will be deactivated.
R The vehicle is locked and the door handles retracted.
R Air-recirculation mode will be activated.
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed.
R The outside mirrors are folded in.
R The convenience door opening is not operational.
R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
R Active Brake Assist will be deactivated, if applicable.
R The key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
wise, the boot lid or a door could open unintentionally. R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be activated after
approximately eight seconds.
R Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated.
R For car washes with conveyor systems:
- Neutral i is engaged.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be indicated by a % after
- The vehicle is locked from the inside.
the respective setting.
Pressing Switch off will cancel car wash mode. Car wash mode will automati‐
% Removing the wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades cally be deactivated above a speed of 20 km/h.
after washing the vehicle will help avoid smearing and reduce
wiper noise. You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 716).
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WILL BE RESET WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS

Car wash mode DEACTIVATED:
In car wash mode, the vehicle is configured in readiness for entering an auto‐ R The outside mirrors will be folded out.
matic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated up to a speed of 20 km/h R The rain sensor will be activated.
(/ page 716).
R Air-recirculation mode will be deactivated.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed.
715
F295 0075 02
R The convenience door opening is operational again. DEACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected set‐ # Select Switch off.
ting. The settings of car wash mode will be reset.
R Active Brake Assist will be activated, if applicable.
R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be deactivated at % Car wash mode will be automatically deactivated as soon as your
speeds above 18 km/h. speed exceeds 20 km/h.
R Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated.
Switching car wash mode on/off Brake service mode

Requirements:
% Brake care mode is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
R The vehicle is switched on. Brake service mode removes visible red rust. It cleans the brake disc while the
vehicle is in motion. Activate brake service mode as soon as the first signs of
red rust are visible.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving Brake service mode is activated via the multimedia system (/ page 717).
ACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE Requirements for activation:
# Select Car wash mode.
R The temperature of the brake disc is not raised as a result of previous
# Select Activate. braking.
R Brake service mode has been run in full fewer than three times in the last
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by a % next to
two weeks.
the respective setting.
If you have not been accelerating or braking, it will be active from a speed of
% For an overview of the settings configured when you activate car
65 km/h.
wash mode (/ page 715).
Brake service mode generates a slight brake pressure, which cleans the brake
disc. This results in a minimal loss of speed. It may take several minutes to
service the brakes. The process will be completed as soon as the necessary
716
F295 0075 02
number of wheel revolutions has been reached. It will be paused if there is an

interruption during brake servicing. Brake service mode will be resumed as
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
soon as the initial situation is restored.
& WARNING
Brake service mode will automatically be deactivated in the following situa‐
Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-
tions:
spray nozzles
R The vehicle is switched off. The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.
R The temperature of the brake discs is raised significantly.
Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.
R The ESP® function is intervening.
# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

% Brake service mode must be restarted after it has automatically
been deactivated.
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN
USING A HIGH-PRESSURE CLEANER:
Switching brake service mode on or off R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
wise, the boot lid or a door could open unintentionally.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative films: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a
If the start requirements for brake service mode are not met, the button will decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the film-
be greyed out. covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner.
Move the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around while cleaning. The
water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
% Further information on brake service mode (/ page 716).
R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manu‐
facturer's operating instructions.
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive
% Brake care mode is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or
louvres.
717
F295 0075 02
Washing the vehicle by hand R Do not attach stickers, foil or similar materials. Only have foil attached to
the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Do not use acid solutions and
hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays). acidic cleaners.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. MATT FINISH

R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
R Do not attach stickers, foils or similar materials. Only have foil attached
# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.
R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preserv‐
% Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 720). ers, e.g.wax.
IN THE EVENT OF PAINTWORK DAMAGE:
Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
care shop.
R Make sure the radar sensors are working (/ page 378).
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance
systems, please observe the following notes:
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
PAINT
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas Observe the "Notes on paintwork / matt finish paintwork care" (/ page 718).
afterwards. They also apply to matt decorative films.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth
soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. CLEANING
R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. R When cleaning with the high-pressure cleaner, maintain a distance of at
R Tar stains: use tar remover. least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle
of the high-pressure cleaner.
R Wax: use silicone remover.
718
F295 0075 02
R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without addi‐ You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manu‐
tives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes- facturer.
Benz).
In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative
R Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to film has been removed.
damage the decorative film irreparably.
R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint
% Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified
cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).
R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas
afterwards.
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorb‐
Information on window films
ent cloth after every car wash.
* NOTE
AVOIDING DAMAGE TO THE DECORATIVE FILM
Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids
R The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by:
When window films have been retrofitted, fluids such as cleaning
- Sunlight
agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle
- Temperature (e.g. hot air blower) interior and cause damage to electronic components.
- Weather conditions
- Stone chippings and dirt
# Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
- Chemical cleaning agents # Immediately absorb any excess fluids.
- Oily products
R Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the film-wrapped surface.
R Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused

by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a
719
F295 0075 02
Notes on car parts cleaning and care WINDOWS
* NOTE
& WARNING Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids
Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while
When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning
the windscreen is being cleaned
agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the interior and cause damage to electronic components.
windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
# Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the drive system
before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. # Immediately absorb any excess fluids.
R Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a
* NOTE cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Damage due to use of acidic cleaning agents R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Otherwise, the surfaces clean the insides of windows.
could be damaged.
% After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax,
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the
clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recom‐
following car parts:
mended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application
instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling
spots.
% Remove external misting or dirt on the windscreen in front of the

multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 378).
WHEELS AND RIMS

R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
720
F295 0075 02
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could CAMERAS
damage wheel bolts and brake components. R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 448).
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lenses.
few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.
will warm up and dry out.
WIPER BLADES
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 32). % Remove external misting or dirt on the windscreen in front of the
multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp
safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 378).
cloth.
TRAILER HITCH
% Note that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's owner's
residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or manual.
clean them too often. R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. with a wire brush).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
shampoo).
R Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic
lenses. % Before using trailers with anti-swerve coupling, note the manu‐
facturer's owner's manual.
VEHICLE SOCKET (HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY)
R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket.
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents, such as soap.
SENSORS
R Clean the sensors in the front and rear part of the vehicle with car sham‐
poo, plenty of water and a soft cloth (/ page 378).
R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of
30 cm.
721
F295 0075 02
Notes on care of the interior * NOTE

Property damage due to disinfectants
& WARNING The interior includes a number of sensitive surfaces such as displays,
Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ plastics and leather.
vent-based care products
Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other substances that penetrate
Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in
and damage surfaces. Technology behind buttons and displays can also
the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic
be damaged.
parts may break away.
# Do not use disinfectant on interior surfaces.
# Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents
to clean the cockpit.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and
care:
& WARNING SEAT BELTS
Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sun‐
light.
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.
DISPLAY
R Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display
care product (TFT-LCD).
R Do not use any other agents.
HEAD-UP DISPLAY
R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.
R Do not use cleaning agents.
PLASTIC TRIM
R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.
722
F295 0075 02
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Clean with a damp cloth and a 1% soap solution and then wipe with a
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. dry cloth.
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
with the plastic trim. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
REAL WOOD AND TRIM ELEMENTS
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Clean with a microfibre cloth.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐
tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth
ROOF LINING
R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
CARPET Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which
R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes- changes the surface characteristics.
Benz.
GENUINE LEATHER SEAT COVERS
IMITATION LEATHER STEERING WHEEL
R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers
R Clean the entire steering wheel with a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap
with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean
solution. Do not spot clean.
the seat covers.
R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-
R Do not use a microfibre cloth. Benz aftercare.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
STEERING WHEEL MADE OF GENUINE LEATHER OR DINAMICA
NOTE R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
*
Damage caused by wrong cleaners R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover
or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes.
Otherwise you may damage the finish.
723
F295 0075 02
% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐

tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth
Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which
changes the surface characteristics.
Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress
on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material.
Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear
marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the
leather.
DINAMICA SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to
clean.
IMITATION LEATHER SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton
cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
clean.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
CLOTH SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre
cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
clean.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
Back to Contents724
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Emergency 726
Flat tyre 728
Battery (vehicle) 734
Tow-starting or towing away 737
Electrical fuses 744
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Emergency
Emergency
Removing the safety vest

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
Safety vests can be stored in the door stowage compartments of all doors. 7 Class 2 safety vest
# To remove: open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest. The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
bag 1. EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# Then place the safety vest bag 1 back into the door stowage compart‐
ment.
R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded.
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
sunlight.
726
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Emergency
DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY: The first-aid bag 1 is located on the right-hand side of the boot in the as-
delivered condition.
Removing the fire extinguisher

Warning triangle
REMOVING THE WARNING TRIANGLE & WARNING
Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.
# Remove the warning triangle 1.
# Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
SETTING UP THE WARNING TRIANGLE
# Fold the side reflectors upwards to form a triangle and attach using the # Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.
upper snap fastener .
# Fold the legs down and out to the side.
First-aid bag
# Pull the tab 1 upwards.
# Fold tab 1 down.
# Remove fire extinguisher 2.
727
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre
Flat tyre
Notes on flat tyres R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for break‐
down assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break‐
down (/ page 650).
& WARNING R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 764).
Risk of accident due to a flat tyre
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering
and braking. % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries
(/ page 771).
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics:
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare TIREFIT kit storage location
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot floor.
cialist workshop.
Run-flat tyres:
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended

tyres (run-flat tyres).
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐

BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT: 1 Tyre inflation compressor
2 Tyre sealant bottle
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places
TIREFIT kit (/ page 729). under the boot floor.
728
F295 0075 02
% YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY & WARNING

(LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE Risk of accident when using tyre sealant
INFLATION COMPRESSOR:
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in
R LK3 – 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg the following cases:
R there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage
AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLA‐ previously mentioned)
TION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE R the wheel rims have been damaged
GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY: R after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
R Emission sound pressure level LPA 84 dB(A) # Do not continue driving.
R Sound power level LWA 92 dB(A)
The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a

malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements
R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation compressor are ready for use
(/ page 65).
R TIREFIT sticker is displayed.
R Gloves are at hand.
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm,
particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside
temperatures down to -20 °C.
729
F295 0075 02
Observe the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation
& WARNING compressor.
Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced at a qualified specialist workshop every
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it
five years.
to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swal‐
low it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from chil‐ # Do not remove any foreign objects which have pierced the tyre.
dren.
Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:
# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immedi‐
ately.
# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using
clean water immediately.
# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the
mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce driver's field of vision.
vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the
# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre defective tyre.
sealant immediately.
# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immedi‐

ately.
* NOTE
Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten
minutes without interruption.
730
F295 0075 02
# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation com‐ # Switch on the vehicle.
pressor housing.
# Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch 3.
# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pres‐
the plug engages. sure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).
# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre
inflation compressor. Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!
# Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for a maximum of ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as
possible. It is preferable to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible
with perchloroethylene.
# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the defective tyre.
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI)
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. HAS NOT BEEN ATTAINED:
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.
# Drive the vehicle forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately

10 m.
# Pump up the tyre again.

After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
# Insert plug 4 into a 12‑V‑socket in your vehicle.
731
F295 0075 02
# Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed

& WARNING with tyre sealant.
Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being
attained
If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, * NOTE
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in Staining from leaking tyre sealant
this instance. After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that con‐
tained the TIREFIT kit.
# Do not continue driving.

Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI)
disposal
HAS BEEN ATTAINED:
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
& WARNING # Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling charac‐ # Pull away immediately.
teristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.
# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. using the tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
# Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has
been repaired using tyre sealant.
732
F295 0075 02
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being # Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor.
attained The filling hose remains on the tyre sealant bottle.
If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly dam‐ # Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre
aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
sealant bottle and filling hose replaced.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with
the telephone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For
values, see the tyre pressure table on the driver's side B‑pillar.
# To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.
# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to

manometer 2.
# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the
valve of the sealed tyre.
733
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12‑V‑battery & WARNING

Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
& WARNING Battery acid is caustic.
Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the
battery. # Do not lean over the battery.
# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, # Do not inhale battery gases.
touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.
# Keep children away from the battery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and # Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of
during starting assistance. clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries
which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
734
F295 0075 02
If you have to disconnect the 12‑V‑battery, contact a qualified specialist work‐

shop.
Notes on the high-voltage battery
Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batter‐
& DANGER
ies.
Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the
Risk of explosion. high-voltage battery
In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.
Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual
odours, smoke or burn marks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at
gloves, apron and face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid a sufficient distance.
splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor. # Call the fire service.
Wear safety goggles.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).
Keep children away.
Risk of explosion.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
If you do not want to use the vehicle for a long period of time, consult a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
735
F295 0075 02
Starting assistance and charging the

12‑V‑battery
# Only have starting assistance provided by a qualified specialist work‐
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# Only have the battery charged at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Replacing the 12‑V‑battery

# Only have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
736
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away
Tow-starting or towing away
Overview of the permitted towing methods * NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
* NOTE # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Damage from automatic braking
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐
VEHICLES WITH REAR WHEEL DRIVE
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:
Permitted towing methods
R Active Brake Assist
Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC forwards with the driver in the cockpit
R HOLD function
Front axle raised No
R Active Parking Assist
Rear axle raised Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash. 4MATIC VEHICLES
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a break‐
Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only
down, rather than towing it away. forwards with the driver in the cockpit
For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not Front axle raised No
use tow bar systems.
Rear axle raised No
If you notice that the vehicle has lost coolant, do not have it towed away. Have
the vehicle transported instead.
737
F295 0075 02
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the * NOTE

ground Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over
long distances
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 737).
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
# Make sure that the 12‑V‑battery is connected and charged speeds or over long distances.
# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE 12‑V‑BATTERY IS DISCON‐
NECTED OR DISCHARGED # A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.
R The drive system cannot be started
R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
R The selector lever cannot be put into position i or j. & WARNING
Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAV‐
TRANSPORT IS ONLY PERMITTED WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE FOLLOW‐
IER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE
ING CONDITIONS OCCUR:
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:
R If the selector lever cannot be put into position i.
R the towing eye may become detached.
R if the 12‑V‑battery is disconnected or discharged.
R the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn.
R If the display in the instrument cluster is not working
R If the á Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is dis‐
# Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be
played tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross
mass.
R If the + Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual message is displayed
R If the d Stop Switch off the vehicle message is displayed
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed, its permissible gross mass must
not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
# In such cases, transport the vehicle (/ page 740).
# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 840).
738
F295 0075 02
TOWING THE VEHICLE

# Fit the towing eye (/ page 743). & WARNING
Risk of accident due to restricted safety-relevant functions during
# Fasten the towing device. towing
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
* NOTE
Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar R The vehicle is switched off.
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. R The start-stop button was pressed after the selector lever was
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 191).
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Do not tow the vehicle in these situations.
# Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 216).
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 419).

# Transport the vehicle (/ page 740).
# Put the selector lever into position i. NOTE

*
Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing
# Release the electric parking brake.
THE VEHICLE MUST NOT BE TOWED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
# Remain in the cockpit during towing and observe the display messages. TIONS:
# Do not switch off the vehicle while it is being towed. Do not operate the R The vehicle is switched off.
start/stop button after moving the selector lever to the i position. R The start-stop button was pressed after the selector lever was
# Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, because other‐
wise the selector lever automatically switches to position j. R The brake system or the power steering is faulty.
739
F295 0075 02
# Switch on the power supply (/ page 314).

* NOTE
Damage due to excessive tractive power # Shift the transmission to position i.
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
vehicles could be damaged. % The transmission may be locked in position j in the event of
damage to the electrics. To shift to i, supply power to the on-
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
board electrical system (/ page 62).
Vehicles with AIRMATIC

Loading the vehicle for transport
Requirements: * NOTE
Possible vehicle damage when loading or unloading
The vehicle must be raised to transport level when loading or unloading.
R The driver display is in the initial state without any opened menus If the transport settings are not shown or the display message Vehicle
(/ page 489). Transport is also possible when a warning message is not ready for loading appears, the vehicle must not be loaded or unloa‐
visible. ded.
R The 12 V battery is charged. # If necessary, raise the vehicle to transport level again.
# Do not use a ramp to load or unload a vehicle that cannot be

# If necessary, set the system language (/ page 559).
raised to transport level. Contact a qualified specialist work‐
# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 65). shop.
# Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load up the
vehicle.
% Vehicles with trailer coupling: You can also attach the towing
device to the trailer coupling.
740
F295 0075 02
# Switch on the vehicle (/ page 316).

& WARNING The transport settings are displayed.
Risk of accident due to activated transport level
If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driving and driving safety sys‐ # Swipe down to select Transport level and press a.
tems have only limited availability and the view from the vehicle is The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rising… Do not drive on ramp mes‐
restricted. sage is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can take up to
60 seconds and can be interrupted with the G button.
Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident!
# Do not switch the vehicle off while it is being raised.
# Do not use transport level in normal road operation.
# Only activate and use transport level to load the vehicle and As the vehicle is being raised you can already manoeuvre at a maximum speed
when not on public roads. of 40 km/h.
# Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area
surrounding the vehicle.
RAISE VEHICLE TO TRANSPORT LEVEL

# Press and hold button G for at least five seconds.

# Before loading the vehicle, wait until the transport level has been
# Press and hold SOS button immediately a for at least one second. reached and the Transport level status is shown.
The For transport level, switch vehicle on message is displayed.
# Select Vehicle transport. % When the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport set‐
tings are also still displayed after a restart. Operation of the
driver display is restricted.
% The noise certification mode is exclusively intended for the tech‐
nical inspection organisation. This restricts the drive output of IF THE VEHICLE IS AT TRANSPORT LEVEL, IT IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE
the vehicle and must not be used in customer operation. FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
741
F295 0075 02
R The 12 V battery is discharged.

* NOTE
Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehi‐
The vehicle is set to the height of the last active level.
cle
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the
# Load the vehicle in the correct position. transport vehicle.
R Ensure that all wheels are on the transport surface.
R Ensure that the vehicle is aligned parallel to the direction of travel. UNLOAD VEHICLE
# Put the selector lever into position j.
# Make sure that the vehicle is raised to transport level before unloading.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
When the vehicle is raised, the status Transport level is shown on the
# Stop the vehicle and switch off the power supply. driver display.
LOWER VEHICLE AFTER UNLOADING
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
# Switch on the power supply.
4MATIC VEHICLES
# In the transportation settings, swipe down to select Standard level and

press a.
The vehicle is set to the height of the last active level and the Lowering
vehicle message is displayed.
# After the vehicle has lowered, press the button G for at least two sec‐
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same trans‐ onds.
port vehicle. The transport settings are closed.
742
F295 0075 02
Towing eye storage location # Press the cover 1 at the top 2 inwards and remove.
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the end stop.
Vehicles with trailer hitch: vehicles with trailer hitch do not feature a bracket
at the back for the towing eye. Affix the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
# After removing the towing eye, reattach the cover 1 in the bumper.
Towing eye 1 is located under the boot floor. * NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or
trailer hitch
Fitting and removing the towing eye When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehi‐
cle may be damaged in the process.
# Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow
start the vehicle.
# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle
during recovery.
Tow-starting the vehicle

# If the drive system does not start, have the vehicle transported to a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
# The drive system is not started by tow-starting the vehicle. Do not make
any attempts to tow-start the vehicle.
743
F295 0075 02
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the rear passenger compart‐
ment (/ page 745).
& WARNING
* NOTE
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to mal‐
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.
function.
This could result in a fire.
# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐ enter the fuse box.
ing the correct amperage.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
positioned correctly on the fuse box.
* NOTE
Damage due to incorrect fuses If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause determined and rectified
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:
# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
tive specified fuse rating. R All electrical consumers are switched off.
Replace blown fuses with equivalent fuses, identifiable by their colour and
label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:
the fuse assignment diagram.
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 745)
744
F295 0075 02
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 745)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 745)
R
passenger footwell
Opening and closing the fuse box in the cock‐ Requirements
pit R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 63).
Requirements
Right-hand drive vehicles: the fuse box is on the left side.
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 63).
The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover.
# To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. # To open the fuse box: remove cover 1.
# To close: reinsert cover 1. # To close the fuse box: reinsert cover 1.
Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre. Opening and closing the fuse box in the rear
Requirements:
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 63).
The fuse box is located in the centre of the vehicle under the seat.
745
F295 0075 02
# To open and close it, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Back to Contents746
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐

748 Emergency spare wheel 771
acteristics
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and

749 Collapsible spare wheel 773
tyres
Notes on snow chains 751
Activating or deactivating snow chain

753
mode
Selecting the tyre type 754
Tyre pressure 755
Wheel change 759
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics
Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics

when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are
damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics.
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
748
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately. On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.
# Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.
R M+S tyres: 4 mm

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT

LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A
749
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

R Check the valve caps.
the entire width.
4 mm.
750
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains Damage to wheel trims through fitted snow chains
If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag If you fit snow chains on aluminium wheels you could damage the
against the vehicle body or chassis components. wheel trims.
# Never fit snow chains to the front wheels. # Remove the wheel trims from the aluminium wheels before fit‐
ting snow chains.
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:
* NOTE R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.
Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fit‐ You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
ted snow chains Centre.
If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains of the same
quality standard.
# Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist
when snow chains are fitted.
R Vehicles with AIRMATIC: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised
vehicle level (/ page 435).
R Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive
with Snow Chain mode active (/ page 753).
751
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains
% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyre
mode (/ page 396).
% You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 385). This allows
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power.
752
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Activating or deactivating snow chain mode
Activating or deactivating snow chain mode
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß 5y
# Activate or deactivate Snow chain mode.
When the function is active, the vehicle adjusts to the fact that snow chains
have been fitted. This among other things means that the maximum steering
angle of the rear wheels is limited and the turning circle is larger.
Moreover, some functions of the driving and driving safety systems are not
available when snow chain mode is active.
753
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Selecting the tyre type
Selecting the tyre type
Requirements:
R The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activa‐

ted in the Mercedes me Portal.
% Further requirements for Navigation with Electric Intelligence

(/ page 586).
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Tyre type
The setting in this menu optimises the energy prognosis of Navigation with
Electric Intelligence at the start of your journey. Charging stations are thus
better selected, for example.
% After a wheel has been changed and you have travelled for sev‐
eral kilometres the menu for selecting the fitted tyre type
appears automatically.
# Select the tyre type, for example Winter tyres.
754
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure HIGH OR LOW TYRE PRESSURE CAN:
R Shorten the service life of the tyres.

& WARNING R Cause increased tyre damage.
Risk of an accident due to tyre pressure that is insufficient or too R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due
high to aquaplaning.
TYRES WITH A PRESSURE THAT IS INSUFFICIENT OR TOO HIGH
POSE THE FOLLOWING DANGERS IN PARTICULAR:
& WARNING
R The tyres can burst. Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may
be greatly impaired. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures and check the tyre # Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
pressure of all tyres including the spare wheel:
# Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
R monthly
# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified
R when the load changes
R before embarking on a longer journey
R when the operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted
R when driving at over 250 km/h
tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side (/ page 756).
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appear‐
ance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.
755
F295 0075 02
ONLY CORRECT TYRE PRESSURES WHEN THE TYRES ARE COLD. CONDI‐ The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres
TIONS FOR COLD TYRES: approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold
tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. load and/or speed of the vehicle.
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at
least three hours. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. following is only valid for those tyre sizes.
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. These tyre
increases, so too does the tyre pressure. pressures may improve your vehicle's ride comfort. Energy consumption may
then increase slightly.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tyre
pressure in the driver display (/ page 757). The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table
for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual num‐
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION ber of seats may differ from this.
Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the
tyre pressure table for increased load. BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED TOPICS:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 755)

Tyre pressure table
The tyre pressure table is on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Tyre pressure monitoring system
FUNCTION OF THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
The system checks the tyre pressure and the temperature of the tyres fitted to
the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature are displayed on the driver display.
In the event of significant pressure loss or excessive temperature of the tyres,

you will be warned by display messages (/ page 924) or the warning light
h on the driver display (/ page 942).
The tyre pressure monitoring system serves solely as an aid. It is the driver's
responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation.
756
F295 0075 02
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update
the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can,
however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure
monitoring system manually (/ page 757).
SYSTEM LIMITS
R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: Current val‐
R Incorrect reference values were taught in. ues are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values
of each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
R Sudden pressure loss caused, e.g. by a foreign object penetrating the
tyre. R Tyre pressure monitor active: The teach-in process of the system is not yet
complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source.
CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE WITH THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR‐ # Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure
ING SYSTEM for the current operating status (/ page 756). Additionally, observe the
Requirements: notes on cold tyres (/ page 755).

% The values displayed on the driver display may deviate from
those of the tyre pressure gauge as they relate to sea level. At
Driver display: high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure
4 © 5 Service gauge are higher than those shown on the driver display.
RESTARTING THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEARS:
Requirements
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel:
R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective oper‐
ating condition on each of the four wheels (/ page 755).
757
F295 0075 02
RESTART THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM IN THE FOLLOWING

SITUATIONS:
R The tyre pressure has changed.

R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.
Driver display:
4 © 5 Service
# Show tyre pressure: press a.
# Show options: press a again.
# Select Tyre pressure and confirm with a.

The driver display shows the message Use current tyre pressures as new
reference values?.
# Select Yes and confirm the restart with a.
The driver display shows the message Tyre pressure monitor restarted.
Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp
goes out.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the
current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre
pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If the tyre pressure values are not within the prescribed range, the mes‐
sage Please correct tyre pressure appears.
758
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Wheel change
Wheel change
Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres & WARNING

Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing
& WARNING capacity or the permissible speed rating
Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre dam‐
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or age and could cause the tyres to explode.
components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your
damaged.
vehicle model.
# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating
specifications of the original part.
required for your vehicle.
FOR WHEELS, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:
R Designation
R Type
FOR TYRES, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:
R Designation
R Manufacturer
R Type
759
F295 0075 02
* NOTE * NOTE
Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres
sizes Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded
been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. tyres.
THESE TYRES ARE SPECIALLY ADAPTED TO THE ACTIVE SAFETY For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.
SYSTEMS, SUCH AS ABS, ESP® AND 4MATIC, AND MARKED AS FOL‐
LOWS:
# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their
previous usage.
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for
certain wheels) NOTE
*
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles
Otherwise, certain properties, such as driving characteristics, vehicle Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decrea‐
noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Fur‐ ses, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over
thermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the obstacles increases.
body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
the tyre or the vehicle.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps,
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and
manhole covers and potholes.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.
760
F295 0075 02
Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or
* NOTE which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.
Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in pot‐
holes BEFORE PURCHASING AND USING NON-APPROVED ACCESSORIES, VISIT
A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP AND ENQUIRE ABOUT:
Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.
R Suitability
# Only park on level surfaces if possible.
R Legal stipulations
# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. R Factory recommendations
* NOTE & WARNING

Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fit‐ Risk of accident with sport tyres
ting tools The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre com‐
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic pound means that the risk of skidding or aquaplaning on wet roads is
component parts in the wheel. increased.
If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature
components could be damaged. and tyre running temperature.
# Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
# Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. # Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 7 °C.
# Only use tyres suitable for the intended use.
* NOTE
Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN SELECTING, FITTING AND REPLACING
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with sum‐ TYRES:
mer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific
# At temperatures below 7 °C use i M+S tyres. tyre type for your vehicle.
R The use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation
can be advisable.
761
F295 0075 02
R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist work‐
MOExtended tyres) and the same make. shop.
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
VEHICLES WITH AMG DYNAMIC PLUS PACKAGE
Only fit a different size of wheel in the event of a flat tyre, to enable you
to drive to a specialist workshop.
& WARNING
R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the
Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types
tyres.
If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalid‐
the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences:
ate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels R The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding
must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure moni‐ driving dynamics.
toring system. R The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the
R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked vehicle.
i M+S for all wheels. R ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
This can jeopardise road safety.
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. # Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be permissible speed set and the vehicle.
indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
R Drive the vehicle with new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
tics: Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.
% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyres
(/ page 396).
762
F295 0075 02
Notes on changing wheels The menu can also be called up by a qualified specialist workshop or by your‐
self.
WARNING
&
Risk of injury through different wheel sizes Notes on wheel-changing when using the
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving service 'Navigation with Electric Intelligence'
characteristics.
After you change a wheel and have driven for a few kilometres, the menu for
The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be dam‐ selection of the installed tyre type automatically appears (/ page 754).
aged.
The menu can also be called up by a qualified specialist workshop or by your‐
# Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and self.
tyres have the same dimensions.
Notes on storing wheels

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different
dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. WHEN STORING WHEELS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/ page 759). R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
THE WEAR PATTERNS ON THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS DIFFER: R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.
R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equip‐
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly
ped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find
reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
out which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and approved for a wheel change
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the on your vehicle.
wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction
YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
of rotation is maintained for the wheels.
WHEEL:
After a wheel-change and a few kilometres of travel, the menu for selection of
R Jack
the fitted tyre model appears automatically (/ page 754).
R Chock
763
F295 0075 02
R Wheel wrench
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
R Centring pin
Requirements:
R The vehicle is not on a slope.

% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
sticker affixed to the jack. R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.
The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of a malfunction,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, con‐
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot. sult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable
tools.
% When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is adequately secured.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
# Shift the transmission to position j.
# Vehicles with AIRMATIC: set the raised vehicle level for greater ground
clearance (/ page 435).

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:
# Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
R Jack
# Place wedges or other suitable items under the front and rear of the
R Gloves wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
# Unload the vehicle.
R Folding chock
R Ratchet wrench for jack
764
F295 0075 02
Fitting/removing the hub cap % Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm

Requirements
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 764).

Removing and fitting wheel trim/hub caps
REMOVING Requirements
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 764).
WHEEL TRIM
On vehicles with aluminium wheels, the wheel trim covers the wheel bolts.
Remove the wheel trim before unscrewing the wheel bolts.
# Remove socket 2 and wheel wrench 3 from the vehicle tool kit.
# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
# Position the wheel wrench 3 on the socket 2.
# Using wheel wrench 3, turn the hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove
# Removal: use both hands to carefully grip the two wheel trim apertures
it.
and pull the trim away.
FITTING # Fitting: position the wheel trim and press it firmly until it engages.
# Before fitting, check hub cap 1 and the wheel area for dirt, and clean if
necessary.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
# Position hub cap 1 and turn until it is in the right position.
Requirements
# Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
# Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2 and tighten hub cap 1. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 764).
765
F295 0075 02
IMPORTANT NOTES ON USING THE JACK: R Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.
R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-

Benz to raise the vehicle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short
time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under
the vehicle.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary,
use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support
point. # Using the wheel spanner, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish
to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.
Position of the jack support points
& WARNING
Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point
of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
RULES OF CONDUCT WHEN THE VEHICLE IS RAISED:
# Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the
R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehicle. vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically
R Do not lie under the vehicle. under the jacking point of the vehicle.
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
766
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to using an unsuitable jack
You can damage the vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage battery
if you use a jack that is not specifically designed for the jack support
points of the vehicle.
# Only use jacks that are specifically designed for the jack sup‐
port points, or use an appropriate adapter.
* NOTE # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1.

Risk of damage to the vehicle due to incorrect positioning of the
jack
# Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack sup‐
port point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
If you do not position the jack at the designated jack support points,
you could damage your vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage bat‐ # Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the
tery. ground.
# Only position the jack at the designated jack support points. # Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 767).
# Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexa‐
gon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Removing a wheel
Requirements
R The vehicle is raised (/ page 765).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this
could impair the level of comfort when braking.
767
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Fitting a new wheel
Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Requirements
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repo‐
sitioning the wheel. R The wheel to be changed is removed and the centering pin is screwed in
(/ page 767).
# Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when remov‐
ing and repositioning.
& WARNING
Risk of accident from losing a wheel
* NOTE Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose,
Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Never oil or grease the threads.
# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified spe‐

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
cialist workshop immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads

replaced.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 759).
# Screw centering pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rota‐
tion when fitting.
# Remove the wheel.
768
F295 0075 02
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indica‐
* NOTE ted until they are finger-tight.
Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repo‐
sitioning the wheel.
# Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when remov‐

ing and repositioning.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centering pin and push it on.
# Unscrew and remove the centering pin.
& WARNING # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
# If the collapsible spare wheel has been fitted, inflate the collapsible
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, emergency spare wheel (/ page 774).
the jack could tip.
# Lower the vehicle and tighten wheel bolts with the prescribed tightening
# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on
torque (/ page 769).
the ground.
# Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
(/ page 759).
Requirements:
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by R The new wheel has been fitted (/ page 768).
Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
# When mounting a collapsible spare wheel, observe the notes on wheel

bolts (/ page 773).
% The collapsible spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
769
F295 0075 02
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the indicated

* NOTE order 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.
Damage to the emergency spare wheel when lowering the vehicle
Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the emergency col‐
lapsible spare wheel can damage its rim. & WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque
# Inflate the emergency collapsible spare wheel using the tyre
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not
inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle.
tightened to the prescribed torque.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
* NOTE
Risk of vehicle jack becoming trapped by the AIRMATIC system # If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a quali‐
If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the fied specialist workshop and have the tightening torque
jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. checked immediately.
# Start the drive system. This adapts the vehicle level.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if neces‐
# Remove the jack from under the vehicle. sary.
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the lettering "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency
spare wheel:
# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pres‐
sure monitoring system (/ page 757).
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indica‐
ted 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
770
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON FITTING AN EMERGENCY SPARE
WHEEL:
R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted

& WARNING
is 80 km/h.
Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
R Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel
or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regard‐
spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteris‐ less of wear.
tics of the vehicle. R Use the included wheel bolts for the emergency spare wheel.
R Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel when fitted. Cor‐
To prevent hazardous situations:
rect the pressure as necessary.
# Drive carefully.
# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare % The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emer‐
wheel that differs in size. gency spare wheel.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
# Do not deactivate ESP®. % Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emer‐
gency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency
size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pres‐
new wheel must have the correct dimensions. sure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED TOPICS:
wheel bag in the boot.
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 755)
771
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 756)

R Notes on fitting tyres (/ page 759)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 764)
772
F295 0075 02
Wheels and tyres Collapsible spare wheel
Collapsible spare wheel
Notes on the collapsible spare wheel & WARNING

Risk of injury‑ or death due to unsecured collapsible spare wheel
% The collapsible spare wheel is only available in AMG vehicles. If the collapsible spare wheel is not secured correctly it may slip, over‐
turn or be thrown.
This can result in the vehicle occupants being seriously injured.

& WARNING
Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions # Always store the collapsible spare wheel in the emergency
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel spare wheel bag.
or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteris‐ # Always ensure that the lashing straps on the emergency spare
tics of the vehicle. wheel bag are securely fastened to the rear tie-down eyelets
on the load compartment floor and firmly tightened.
To prevent hazardous situations:
# Drive carefully.
% The collapsible spare wheel is secured in the collapsible spare
# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel bag in the load compartment.
wheel that differs in size.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.

% The collapsible spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
# Do not deactivate ESP®.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON FITTING AN EMERGENCY SPARE
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different
WHEEL:
size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The
new wheel must have the correct dimensions. R The collapsible spare wheel is an emergency spare wheel that is only
suitable for temporary use under restricted conditions following a flat
tyre, e.g. to the nearest workshop.
773
F295 0075 02
R The tyre sidewalls are folded when uninflated. Before using the collapsi‐
ble spare wheel, inflate it with the compressor supplied.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
R Check the tyre pressure of the installed collapsible spare wheel and
adjust it as necessary. * NOTE
R The maximum permissible speed with a fitted collapsible spare wheel is Damage to the collapsible spare wheel when lowering the vehicle
80 km/h. Lowering the vehicle without previously inflating the collapsible spare
R Do not fit the collapsible spare wheel with snow chains. wheel can damage its rim.
R Replace the collapsible spare wheel after six years at the latest, regard‐ # Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the tyre inflation
less of wear. compressor before lowering the vehicle.
% Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if a collapsi‐

ble spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure monitoring system
* NOTE
cannot function reliably. The system may still display the tyre
Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. Only restart
the system when the collapsible spare wheel has been replaced
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than eight
with a new wheel. minutes without interruption.
BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED TOPICS: Requirements:
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 755) R Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre
R Tyre pressure table (/ page 756) inflation compressor and on the tyre sealant bottle.
R Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (/ page 768).
The collapsible spare wheel must be installed before it is inflated.
R Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the
boot floor (/ page 65).
774
F295 0075 02
# Inflate the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.
% The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the collapsible

spare wheel.
# When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press the on/off
switch 2 on the tyre inflation compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.

# Pull the plug 5 and hose out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
# If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press the pres‐
# Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the collapsible spare wheel. sure release valve button 4 until the correct tyre pressure has been
reached.
# Screw the union nut 1 of the hose onto the valve.
If necessary, first unscrew the connector from the union nut. # Unscrew the union nut 1 of the hose from the valve.
# Make sure the on and off switch 2 of the tyre inflation compressor is
set to 0.
% If necessary, screw the connector back onto the union nut.
# Insert the plug 5 into a socket in your vehicle.
# Screw the valve cap of the collapsible spare wheel onto the valve again.
R 12‑V‑socket (/ page 258)
# Stow the plug 5 and hose in the lower section of the compressor wheel
R Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 258) housing.
# Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.

# Press the on/off switch 2 on the tyre inflation compressor to I. Deflate and store collapsible spare tyre
The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The
Requirements
tyre pressure is shown on the manometer 3.
The collapsible spare wheel is removed.
775
F295 0075 02
DEFLATE COLLAPSIBLE SPARE TYRE STORE COLLAPSIBLE SPARE WHEEL

# Fold tyre and store collapsible spare wheel in the emergency spare
wheel bag.
# With the aid of the valve cap, screw the valve back into the collapsible
spare wheel by rotating it to the right.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
# Close emergency spare wheel bag.

# Remove valve cap 1.
SECURE COLLAPSIBLE SPARE WHEEL BAG
Emergency spare wheel bag with two straps
# Secure emergency spare wheel bag in the load compartment using the
two rear tie-down eyes.
Emergency spare wheel bag with four straps
# Secure emergency spare wheel bag in the load compartment using the
front and two rear tie-down eyes.
# Push valve cap 1 into the valve 2 with the opposite side.
# Remove the valve from the collapsible spare wheel by rotating to the left
and let the air out until the collapsible spare tyre is completely deflated.
% In doing so, observe that the valve does not come out due to the
air pressure of the collapsible spare tyre.
Back to Contents776
F295 0075 02
Technical data
Technical data
Notes on technical data 778
On-board electronics 779
Regulatory radio information 781
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine

840
number overview
Operating fluids 842
Vehicle data 846
Trailer hitch 852
F295 0075 02
Technical data Notes on technical data
Notes on technical data
The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data
stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain fur‐
ther information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the
COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are sup‐
plied when the vehicle is delivered.
778
F295 0075 02
Technical data On-board electronics
On-board electronics
Notes on tampering with the drive system & WARNING

Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
* NOTE If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromag‐
Premature wear due to improper maintenance netic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in
Improper maintenance can cause vehicle parts to wear out more quickly the following situations, in particular:
and can invalidate the vehicle operating permit.
R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
# Only have the drive system and associated parts serviced at a R The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection
qualified specialist workshop. aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
Two-way radios # Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
NOTES ON INSTALLING TWO-WAY RADIOS # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect
them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electro‐
magnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehi‐
cle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic compo‐

nents carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
779
F295 0075 02
Technical data On-board electronics
If your vehicle is equipped with the pre-installation for a two-way radio, use
* NOTE the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation.
Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.
the instructions for installation and use
MOBILE PHONE TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installa‐
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not
tion and use of two-way radios are not observed.
exceed the values in the following table.
# Only use approved frequency bands.
FREQUENCY BAND AND MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
# Observe the maximum permissible output power in these fre‐ Frequency band Maximum transmission output
quency bands.
2‑m‑ frequency band 50 W
# Only use approved aerial positions. 144 - 174 MHz
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 10 W

380 - 460 MHz
Mobile phone 2W
2G
Mobile phone 0.5 W

3G/4G/5G
THE FOLLOWING CAN BE USED IN THE VEHICLE WITHOUT RESTRICTIONS:
R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW

R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 -410 MHz fre‐
quency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
1 Rear roof area
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
Fitting a roof aerial to vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof is not permit‐
ted.
THERE ARE NO RESTRICTIONS WHEN POSITIONING THE AERIAL ON THE
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installa‐ OUTSIDE OF THE VEHICLE FOR THE FOLLOWING FREQUENCY BANDS:
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting
two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
R 2G/3G/4G/5G
780
F295 0075 02
Technical data Regulatory radio information
Regulatory radio information
Specific information on wireless applications

in accordance with 2014/53/EU
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-
Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.
TYPE OF WIRELESS APPLICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field strength level
decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitor‐ 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
ing
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
781
F295 0075 02
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900) < +33 dBm
GSM (E-GSM 1800) < +30 dBm
UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm
LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20) < +23 dBm
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz) < 20 dBm
Services) WLAN (5736-5833 MHz) < 14 dBm
GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +33 dBm (±2 dB)

GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1) < +30 dBm (±2 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2) < +27 dBm (±3 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2) < +26 dBm (± 3 dB/-4 dB)
UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
3)
782
F295 0075 02
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only
Further information and updates are available at the following web address:
https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
OVERVIEW OF MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer Manufacturer information
ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems

GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau,
Regulatory radio identifiers and specific notes Germany
Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229

The tables and sections contain the following regulatory radio information: Leonberg, Germany
R Manufacturer information Continental Antenna Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Römer‐

ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
R Required regulatory radio identifiers, listed by country/region:
- Manufacturer's specifications Continental Automotive Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße
12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany
- Model designations
- Radio equipment approval numbers Continental Automotive Technologies Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH,
VDO-Straße 1, 64832 Babenhausen, Germany
R Specific information on wireless vehicle components
Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial
Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
Harman Becker Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH,
https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en Becker-Goehring-Straße 18, 76307 Karlsbad,
Germany
HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75,

59552 Lippstadt, Germany
783
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Manufacturer information Manufacturer Manufacturer information
Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvägen 22,
Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin‐ 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden
gen, Germany
WITTE-Velbert WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr.
Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewer‐ 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany
bestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany
ALGERIA
HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger
Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
KATHREIN KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römer‐

Id ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11,
44227 Dortmund, Germany
MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604

Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany
Meta System Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimberti 5, 42124

Reggio Emilia, Italy
Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH, Märkische Straße

72, 15806 Zossen, Germany
Panasonic Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH,

Robert-Bosch-Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Ger‐
many
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ire‐ number
land, United Kingdom
Continental Antenna RKE223GNS (locking system) 71/H/ANF/2021
Sennheiser Sennheiser electronic GmbH & Co. KG, Am
Labor 1, 30900 Wedemark, Germany
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 122/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 136/H/ANF/2023
784
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 122/H/ANF/2021 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 56/H/ANF/2021
tem)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 3994/1.69-DA/2098/DT/DG/
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 123/H/ANF/2021 ARPT/17
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 106/H/ANF/2020 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/
sor) ARPT/17
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 107/H/ANF/2020
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 32/H/ANF/2021
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 133/H/ANF/2022 tem)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 198/H/ANF/2021 ARGENTINA

sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 105/H/ANF/2022
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 172/H/ANF/2021

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 188/H/ANF/2021 number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 189/H/ANF/2021 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) C-18005
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 190/H/ANF/2021 ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) C-2377
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 195/H/ANF/2021 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) H-26206
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 193/H/ANF/2021 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) H-24637
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 194/H/ANF/2021 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) H-24376
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 186/H/ANF/2021 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) H-28998
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 3681/1-73.OA 1639/DT/DG/ Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ H-17929
sor) ARPT/15 tem)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 652/1/DT/DG/ARPCE/2020 Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) H-23974
sor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) H-17845
785
F295 0075 02
number number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) H-15694 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-4788
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) H-15695
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-23292
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) H-28310 sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ H-27592 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) H-25586
sor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) H-20495
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) H-28067
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-20959
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) H-15541 sor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) H-11545 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ H-24664
tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) H-16874
AUSTRALIA
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) H-17689
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) H-21034
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) H-21035

Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) H-17598
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) H-17213
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) H-17212
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) H-23166
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor)
786
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit) BAHAMAS

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2014_082
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_167
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_184
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_157
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_195
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2022_077
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2020_068
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2023_028
787
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ URCA_TA/2017_119 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) URCA_TA_2020_141,
tem) URCA_TA_2022_228
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UCRA_TA/2016_009 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_031
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UCRA_TA/2020_032 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_033
fier)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_250
HELLA DM4 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_078
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_TA/2015_009
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_053 sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_052 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_2019_101
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) URCA_TA/2022_043
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2021_001
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) URCA_TA_2022_057
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2020_046
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_2019_247
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087 sor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA/2017_094 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_169
sor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_168
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_081
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2021_027
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) URCA_TA_2017_042
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2015_063
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_128
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ URCA_TA_2020_056
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_129 tem)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_021
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_141
788
F295 0075 02
BELARUS
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
BOTSWANA
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication module)
number
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2018/2026

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2020/5186

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4674

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
789
F295 0075 02
number number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2017/3788 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4758
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2022/7110 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2020/5473
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) BOCRA/TA/2019/4387 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4359
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/5050 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4360
fier)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4687
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5075
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2023/8144
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4980
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/4661
tem) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2021/6191
HELLA DM4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4662 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2020/5342
tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4724
BRAZIL
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4723
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2022/7099
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145 cause interference in properly approved systems.
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4664 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4593
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4389

number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4388
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 02217-14-06068
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4390
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 06783-19-02496
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5135
790
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) 03691-15-05298 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 00053-13-06643
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 07359-21-12817 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 02712-15-03366
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 3691-15-5298 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 01333-17-02930
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 00325-20-02149 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 01395-11-02930
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 01334-23-02149 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 01392-11-02930
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 03189-17-02856 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 00616-17-02930
tem)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 06218-19-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 04336-23-02149
nologies MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 11149-20-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 04338-23-02149 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 03149-19-02930
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 03756-15-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 04337-23-02149
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 03757-15-02930
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 04689-17-05364

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 03034-20-07018
tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 1855-12-5762
Further specific information

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 1787-12-8058
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 08539-19-03616 Rear Seat Entertainment System:
sor)
This system is not protected against harmful interference and must not cause
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145 interference in properly approved systems.
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 03627-15-06643
791
F295 0075 02
This product is approved by ANATEL in accordance with the procedures set

out in Resolution 242/2000 and complies with the relevant technical require‐
ments. Further information can be found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DTA-000794
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DTA-018051
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-011045

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval sor)
number
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DTA-003757
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DTA-004005 monitor control unit)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DTA-004222 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) DTA-017926
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DTA-011039 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DTA-006138
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DTA-006601 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DTA-000615
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DTA-006678 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DTA-007245
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) DTA-018042 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DTA-019403
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DTA-006665 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DTA-000068
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DTA-004998 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DTA-000066
fier)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) LPD-38890
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DTA-005043
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DTA-003525
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DTA-023993
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DTA-005850
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DTA-017264
tem) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DTA-011312
HELLA DM4 (locking system) DTA-020187 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DTA-011313
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DTA-001661 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DTA-003662
792
F295 0075 02
EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION

number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-005291 Manufacturer Model designation

sor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-003581
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DRQ-D-JATI-07-2000-109000

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-025258

sor)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-025258

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-025258

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor DTA-003893
control unit)
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor DRQ-D-
control unit) MAJU-02-2011-111083 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DTA-004000 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DTA-003999 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DTA-010423 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DTA-006216 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DTA-005628 HELLA DM4 (locking system)

tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
793
F295 0075 02
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) GHANA

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
NCA APPROVED
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 7E6-M1-X9B-SRD
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-225
fier)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-277

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
794
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 7M-7E7-X25-DSR MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BR3-1M-GE2-16A MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X09-DSR
nologies Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-142
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X05-DSR Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
nologies
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 7E5-7M-X72-RDR
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 7M-7E7-X03-DSR
nologies unit)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ SRO-1M-7E4-X59
tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE2-157
INDONESIA
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 7E6-M1-X14-SRD number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) EX6-6M-GE2-16C ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 68676/SDPPI/2020
7163
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X49
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X50

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 90362/SDPPI/2023
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X51 7163
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE-129 ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 89748/SDPPI/2023
7163
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZRO-1H-7E3-26E
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) SRO-1M-7E4-11B
795
F295 0075 02
number number
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 74264/SDPPI/2021 Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 86858/SDPPI/2022
7163 84754
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 74267/SDPPI/2021 han spesifikasi yang dapat
7163 menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) 74265/SDPPI/2021

7163
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 76621/SDPPI/2021
7163
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 74266/SDPPI/2021

7163
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 67882/SDPPI/2020
7163
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ 86957/ SDPPI/ 2022

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ fier) 10325
796
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 87836/SDPPI/2023 Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 66678/SDPPI/2020 7163
7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ han spesifikasi yang dapat
han spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik
menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive NTG7 MID 92192/SDPPI/2023 7163

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 88721/SDPPI/2023 (Headunit)
7163 Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH 92190/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 69379/SDPPI/2020 Production: Hungary
tem) Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
7163 han spesifikasi yang dapat
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
797
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM 92188/SDPPI/2023 7163 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 88579/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit) nologies
Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 92195/SDPPI/2023 7163 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 88478/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit) nologies unit)
Production: Hungary
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 88477/SDPPI/2023 7163 Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 64019/SDPPI/2019 7163
nologies (Headunit)
Production: Germany
798
F295 0075 02
number number
Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 64018/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 MID 65544/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)
Production: Germany
Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 63775/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH 70513/SDPPI/2020 7163
Production: Hungary
Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 63774/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM 65543/SDPPI/2020 7163
Production: Hungary
799
F295 0075 02
number number
Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 70512/SDPPI/2020 7163 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 71369 /SDPPI/2020
(Headunit) 7163

han spesifikasi yang dapat Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik han spesifikasi yang dapat
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
Harman Becker NTG7 RSU (control unit) 66387/SDPPI/2020 7163

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 72974 /SDPPI/2021
7163
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya han spesifikasi yang dapat
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 69378/SDPPI/2020
7163
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 82675/SDPPI/2022
7163
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya han spesifikasi yang dapat
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 72438/SDPPI/2021
sor) 7163
800
F295 0075 02
number number
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 78368/SDPPI/2021 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 67373/SDPPI/2020
7163 7163

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 26742/SDPPI/2015 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 80676/SDPPI/2022
3533 7163

HUF HUF13145 (NFC reader) 83988/SDPPI/2022 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 80621/SDPPI/2022
7163

han spesifikasi yang dapat Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik han spesifikasi yang dapat
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 41121/SDPPI/2018

5125
801
F295 0075 02
number number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 67372/SDPPI/2020 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 75282/ SDPPI/ 2021
7163 7163

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 64126/SDPPI/2019 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 75285/ SDPPI/ 2021
7163 7163

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 90695/SDPPI/2023 7163 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 82980/SDPPI/2022
7163 7163

802
F295 0075 02
number number
Molex WCH-302b (control unit) 71668/SDPPI/2020 7163 Panasonic DAIRSE (control unit) 63550/SDPPI/2019

Molex WCH-302d (control unit) 71220/SDPPI/2020 7163 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020
9338
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 75465/SDPPI/2021

han spesifikasi yang dapat sor) 7163
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 72765/SDPP/2021

7163
Molex WCH-302e (control unit) 71669/SDPPI/2020 7163
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 57058/SDPPI/2018

han spesifikasi yang dapat sor) 3612
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 25626/SDPPI/2015
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya monitor control unit) 3612
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 62396/SDPPI/2020

sor) 7163
803
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval ISRAEL

number
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
7163 number
Approval number of the Min‐

istry of Communications:
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) 74749/SDPPI/2021
7163 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 55-09697
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 55-07525
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 66830/SDPPI/2020 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 55-08783
7163
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 55-08334
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 55-08333

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 78366/SDPPI/2021
7163 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 55-08395
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 55-12854
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 66792/SDPPI/2020 Bosch MBCI2LS3PR1 (head unit) 51-91228
7163
Bosch MBCI2LS4PR1 (head unit) 51-91226
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 55-13929

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 67233/SDPPI/2020
tem) 10325 Continental Automotive D-WMI2017B (control unit) 51-75654
Continental Automotive D-WMI2017A (control unit) 51-75367

han spesifikasi yang dapat Continental Automotive D-WMI2016A (control unit) 55-08177
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 55-08179
Continental Automotive RKE213E1 55-13929
(Antennenverstärker)
804
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS 51-70799 Hirschmann 920702A 55-12320

(Antennenverstärker) (Schließsystem)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 51-87871 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 63-63571
(Schließsystem) sor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 51-92059 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure 63-66757
monitor control unit)
(Schließsystem)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 55-14153
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless 55-13749
(Schließsystem) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 51-87872
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 51-90718 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 55-13847
nologies
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 55-12215
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 51-90717
nologies MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 55-12214
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 51-90719 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 51-85192
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 51-86840
Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH-IL 51-89476
(Headunit) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 55-14331
Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS-IL 51-89475 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 51-94449
(Headunit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 51-94450
HELLA DM4 55-14271
(Schließsystem) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-78338
sor)
Hirschmann 920287A 51-62759
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-73152
(Schließsystem) sor)
Hirschmann 920287B 51-49357 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 51-77898

(Schließsystem)
805
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation

number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-64111
sor) Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 55-09441 HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 51-29611 HUF HUF13145 (locking system)

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor 55-06040
control unit)
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor 51-79817

control unit)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 55-08176

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 55-08301

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 55-12216
tem)
JAMAICA MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
806
F295 0075 02
JAPAN Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2R
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2L

number Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IC:2099A-BTT100
Transmitter)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TMWK2211004648KR
Sennheiser M3IETW2 C (Charging Case) CAN ICS-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 003-230113
nologies
KUWAIT
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 003-230112 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
nologies unit)
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) 201-190814 (R) number
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) 201-190815 (L) Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Ref. 6716
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio 020-180077 Sennheiser M3IETW2 (Momentum True Ref. 4870
Transmitter) Wireless 2)
CANADA Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Ref. 4871

Transmitter)
MALAYSIA
number REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IC: 7812D-CMKG2
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QMIDLF2
nologies Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QHIGLF2
nologies ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IC: NTG7QPREF2 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
nologies unit)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) CIDF15000490
807
F295 0075 02
number number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) RAUU/63A/0311/S(11-0432)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) RAUU/22C/0615/S(15-1864)
Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) HIDF15000153
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) RGLN/30A/0522/S(22-2490) Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ HIDF15000153
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) HIDF15000153
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) RFBY/09A/0422/S(22-1843)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ HIDF16000136
fier) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) RAYN/25A/0715/S(15-2385)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HIDF15000153 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) RAAU/16B/1112/S(12-2053)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) HIDF15000153 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ CIDF15000578 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) RDDK/33A/0317/S(17-0669)
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0263)
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0264)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) RGEZ/12A/1019/S(19-4128)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) RDDK/31A/0217/S(17-0405)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) RCCT/92G/0423/S(23-0350)
nologies MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) RDDK/25B/1019/S(19-0943)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) CCT/91G/0323/S(23-1291) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) RGLO/02A/0720/S(20-2580)
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) CIDF19000029
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head RGQB/05A/0323/S(23-1293)
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) CIDF19000029
HELLA DM4 (locking system) CIDF15000578

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) CIDF19000029
808
F295 0075 02
MOROCCO
number Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) RAVG/18Q/0212/S(11-2068)
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) RAVG/17Q/0212/S(11-2067)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RCDD/03A/0615/S(19-2094)
sor) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RBEF/28A/0419/S/(19-1542) ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27
sor)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MR 20575 ANRT 2019-07-29
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/51A/0121/S/(20-5642)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MR 5371 ANRT 2010
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/09A/1017/S(17-3183) 2019-12-05
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RBEF/09A/1017/S(17-3183) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22
sor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
control unit) Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) MR00032137ANRT2022
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16
control unit)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 fier)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MR 36542 ANRT 2023-02-01
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04
tem)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ RDDK/43B/0420/S(20-1749)
tem) HELLA DM4 (locking system) MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16
809
F295 0075 02
number number
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MR 19241 ANRT 2019
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) MR 32214 ANTR 2022-03-08
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) MR00026829ANRT2020
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07
tor control unit) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor MR 10927 ANRT 2015
control unit)
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
monitor control unit) Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor MR 19527 ANRT 2019
control unit)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) MR 32395 ANRT 2022-03-24
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MR 16355 ANRT 2018-04-19
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14 sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05 Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure MR 6706 ANRT 2011-11-17
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MR 10436 ANRT 2015-05-25
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) MR 6698 ANTR 2021-11-04
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MR 20097 ANRT 2019-06-14
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) MR 6699 ANTR 2021-11-04
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) MR 20149 ANRT 2019-06-19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) MR 27966 ANRT 2021-03-29
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ MR 23310 ANRT 2020-03-10
tem)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) MR 23805 ANRT 2020-04-22
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 10216 ANRT 2015

tor control unit)
810
F295 0075 02
MEXICO
number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12204
number nologies unit)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-1191 Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0448
tem)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
HELLA DM4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-0828
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9212-0608
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0922
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9222-2674
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVKARK15-1741
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPHUHU22-2505

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVCORK19-2174
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-1204

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-2315
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-1587

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IFETEL: COCOCM22-31003
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-0891

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1827
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-0348
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) IFETEL: MECOCM22-17609
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12200
nologies MARQUARDT DC12K (interior protection) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 11923 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-0222
nologies
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-0449
811
F295 0075 02
number number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-0957 Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IFETEL: RCPSEBT18-1407
Transmitter)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1042
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RCPWISD20-0943
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1043 tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPMA3319-0530 MONGOLIA
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-0627 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
sor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVSCAG19-0705

sor) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCBG21-0750
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) A19000633
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-0959
control unit) Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) A23000900
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor IFETEL: RLVSCMF19-0777 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ A18000328
control unit) tem)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-1665 HELLA DM4 (locking system) A18000329
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) A22000649
sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) A22000674
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-062
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) A19000400
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435-A1

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) A19000371
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) A19000372
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) A18000289
812
F295 0075 02

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 010/ARCEP/DG/19
number
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 008/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 009/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 014/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) A19000374
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) HOMO-0096/ARCEP/DG/2019
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) A19000374
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 034/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) A19000401
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 035/ARCEP/DG/19
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ A20000067
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 015/ARCEP/DG/19
NIGER MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) HOMO-0095/ARCEP/DG/2019

NIGERIA
number REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 029/ARCEP/DG/19

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 083/ARCEP/DG/19
tem)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 082/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 097/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 098/ARCEP/DG/19
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 053/ARCEP/DG/19
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 037/ARCEP/DG/19
813
F295 0075 02
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor control unit)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) OMAN

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2016/14
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) D080134
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7769/19

D172338
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7983/19
D172338

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1049/09

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1849/14
814
F295 0075 02
number number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/4353/17 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TTRA/TA-R/7506/19
sensor)
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/13339/22
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13465/22
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA/TA-R/2715/15
D090258 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2665/15
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA/TA-R/8337/19 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0920/12
fier) D172338
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/3129/16
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/8642/19

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA/TA-RD/4056/17
D172338
D100428
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/15164/23

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0227/11
D100428
D080353
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/4158/17

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0228/11
tem) D080134
D080353
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4548/17

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4136/17
D080134
D080134
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0210/11

D080353
D172249
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0655/12

D080353
D100428
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13300/22

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2848/15
D172338
D080353
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/4516/17

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2900/15
sor) D100428
D080353
815
F295 0075 02
number number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/7051/19 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7707/19
D172249 D172338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TTRA R/2380/15 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/11335/21
sor) D080134 D172338
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA R/7287/19 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/9150/20
sor) D172338 tem)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/10694/20 PAKISTAN

D172338
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7464/19
control unit) D090258

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7467/19
number
control unit) D090258
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9014/2019
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/4686/17
D080134 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9389/2019
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/5511/18 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.198/2020
sor) D172249
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.243/2023
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) TRA/TA-R/10988/21
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TAC NO: 9.142/2016
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio TRA/TA-R/10976/21
Transmitter) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TAC NO: 9.100169/2019
fier)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2706/15
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TAC NO:9.100175/2019
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7706/19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.153/2023
D172338
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.213/2017

tem)
816
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) TAC NO: 9.9836/2019 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.497/2015
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.409/2017 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO:9.039/2016
sor)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.845/2013
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO:9.9167/2019
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.846/2013 sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TAC NO. 9.412/2022 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.68/2021
HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.620/2017 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.538/2017
sor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.789/2018
HUF Baolong TSSSRG4G6B (tyre pressure TAC NO: 9.9345/2019 sor)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9284/2019
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.598/2015
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.790/2013
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.118/2016
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.477/2021
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.131/2017
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.527/2020
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.829/2013 tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TAC NO: 9.830/2013
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.133/2017
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.100171/2019
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TAC.NO: 9.774/2020
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.486/2015
817
F295 0075 02
PARAGUAY Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
number
2020-02-I-0110
2019-05-I-0271
2023-03-I-0153
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐
2019-11-I-0602 tem)
2017-05-I-0000136 y
2019-11-I-0602
2022-06-I-0388 y 2017-08-
I-0000261
2019-09-I-0508 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06-
I-0059
2017-06-I-0000162
2017-04-I-0000119 y
2012-05-I-0096
2019-05-I-000236

2022-03-I-0149
2022-05-I-0329
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐

sor)
2022-08-I-0528
2021-02-I-00101 y 2016-02-
I-0000038
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐
2022-04-I-0235
fier)
2019-12-I-0656
818
F295 0075 02
number number
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08- 2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07-

I-0000226 I-0000200
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
2017-12-I-0000409 y 2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07-

2012-10-I-0178 I-0000201
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
2015-06-I-0000181 2019-04-I-000216
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐

sor)
2020-12-I-0898 y 2015-06- 2015-04-I-0000150
I-0000181
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) sor)
2019-05-1-000261
2021-05-I-0304; 2016-5-
I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 2021-02-I-0063
2021-05-I-0305; 2016-5- Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068
2020-02-1-0044
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐
2017-04-I-0000101 sor)
2019-11-1-0632
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)
2019-10-I-0581
2020-07-I-0510
2020-08-I-0604
819
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval PHILIPPINES

number
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
2019-07-I-0399
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) number
2019-07-I-0398 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) ESD-1409466C
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ESD-1920226C
2021-04-I-0188
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ESD-1920531C
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) ESD-1408917C
tem)
2020-06-I-0326
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ESD-1716172C
Further specific information Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) ESD-RCE-2229495
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI): Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ESD-1511856C
D-WMI2020A: Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ESD-1921015C

fier)
This vehicle is equipped with the following radio frequency component
approved by CONATEL - Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices, Con‐ Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ESD-2021556C
tinental brand, model D-WMI2020A, manufactured by Continental Automotive Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2332806
GmbH.
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ESD-1714865C
Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-I-0600 tem)
Rear Seat Entertainment System: HELLA DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539C
DAIRSE: Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ESD-1105246C
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ESD-1206044C

Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asun‐
ción, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, [email protected] Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229632
820
F295 0075 02
number number
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-RCE-2124846
sor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-1715977C
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229722
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1817081C
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) ESD-1511236C sor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ESD-1206521C Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) ESD-1510921C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ESD-1510698C WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ ESD-2022599C
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ESD-1714489C
ZAMBIA
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ESD-1105216C
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ESD-1105215C
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ESD-1715652C

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ESD-1919133C number
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) ESD-2022426C Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/11
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ESD-1510644C Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/3
tem)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ESD-1510645C
HELLA DM4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/4
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ESD-1919198C
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/12
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C
sor) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/11
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1919585C HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/18
sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/48
821
F295 0075 02
number number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/16 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) И011 17
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/17 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) И005 17
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/18 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) И005 21
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/30 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ И005 22
fier)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/123
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) И005 20
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/20
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) И005 23
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/21
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ И005 20
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/6 tem)
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/124 Continental Automotive NTG7 MID И005 23
Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH И005 23

SERBIA
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM И005 23
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS И005 23
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) И005 23

nologies
number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) И005 23

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) И011 20
nologies
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) И011 19

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head И005 23
nologies unit)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) И011 19
HELLA DM4 (locking system) И005 20
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) И011 19
822
F295 0075 02
number number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) И005 18 Meta System MUW II (interior protection) И011 19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) И005 18 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 15
sor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) И005 22
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 15
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 20 sor)
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) И005 20
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) И005 22
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) И005 17
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) И005 21
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 18
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) И005 21 sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) И005 18 Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure И011 11
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) И005 20
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) И011 18
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) И005 20
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) И011 19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) И005 20
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) И011 19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) И011 17
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) И038 21
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ И005 20
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) И005 21
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) И005 21
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) И005 22
823
F295 0075 02
SINGAPORE Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) DA105282
number nologies
Complies with IMDA Stand‐ Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head DA105282
ards nologies unit)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) DA103365 Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication DB107091
module)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DA103365
HELLA DM4 (locking system) DA103365
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DA103365 N3308-22
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DA103365
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DA103365
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DA103365 Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DA105282
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) N3827-22 HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DA30668
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DA105282
HUF Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DA28467
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DA107248 sensor)
fier)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DA105282
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DA103365
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DA103365
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DB106440
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DA103365
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DA105282
tem) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA103787
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) DB107091 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DA103365
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) DA103365 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DA103365
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) DA105282 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) DA103787
nologies
824
F295 0075 02
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval SOUTH AFRICA

number
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DA103787
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DB107091

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DA103365 number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DA103365 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA-2014/1637
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DA103787 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA-2019/1595
Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) DA103365 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA-2019/1200
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) DA103365 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TA-2014/212
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA103787 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TA-2017/2013
sor)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TA-2009/464
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA107968
sor) Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TA-2022/0153
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA103365 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2015/1438
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DA105282 Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2020/043
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA105282 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TA-2019/5405
sor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TA-2022/3611_CMKG2
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DA103365
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TA-2016/3500
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DA103365 tem)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DA103365 Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TA-2021/3460
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DA103365 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0091
nologies
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DA107248
tem) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0111
nologies
825
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TA-2023/0090 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TA-2017/312
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TA-2011/370
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TA-2015/1386
tem) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TA-2012/1542
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TA-2017/2518 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TA-2016/3314
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TA-2011/374 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TA-2019/843
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TA-2013/1262 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TA-2020/5765
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TA-2022/0162 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TA-2015/179
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/1393 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TA-2015/180
sor)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TA-2018/3985
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TA-2019/1440
sensor)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2015/072
sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TA-2022/0375
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2019-133
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TA-2015/1077 sor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TA-2012/1543 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2020/7731
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TA-2015/595 Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor TA-2019/273
control unit)
Meta System ITS Master (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1636
tion) Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor TA-2019-273
control unit)
Meta System ITS Sensor (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1227
tion) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2017/3884
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) TA-2019/261
826
F295 0075 02
number number
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/2933 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6 (tyre pressure R-REM-HHFTSSSG4G6
sor) monitor control unit)
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TA-2011/1370 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MSIP-CRM-HHF-HUF-14632
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor MSIP-REM-SRD-MFR
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA-2015/2087 control unit)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA-2019/1380 Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor KCC R-R-SRD-MFR3A
control unit)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA-2019/1382
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure KCC-REM-SRD-MRXMC34MA4
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA-2021/0150 monitor control unit)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TA-2020/055 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG5SP4
tem) sor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ R-C-SRD-AG3PF4

SOUTH KOREA
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-BG3FP4
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MSIP-CRM-SRD-GG4T

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ R-CRM-SRD-DG6W2D4
number
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) R-R-TeH-CMKG2
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q LF2 (head unit) R-R-TeH- NTG7QLF2

nologies
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ R-CRM-HHFTSSRE4A

sor)
827
F295 0075 02
THAILAND Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) No. 021/19
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) No. 022/19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 130111-23-0132
nologies unit) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) No. 016/20
UKRAINE
TOGO
number
number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) No. 024/19
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0004

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ No. 040/19
tem)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UKR.355-123/19
HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. 039/19
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UA.R.TR.052.682-19
fier)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) No. 089/19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) UA1.001.021175-20-TE

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) No. 088/19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) UA.032.CT.0105-23

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) No. 041/19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ RTS.UKR.355-34/18

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) No. 060/19
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) No. 055/19

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052
nologies
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) No. 057/19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) No. 056/19 nologies
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) No. 008/19 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head UA.TR.052
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) No. 101/19
828
F295 0075 02
number number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR.109 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) UA1.001.018888-19-TE
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) UKR.355-7/20 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 032
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) UKR.355-8/20
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA-TR-001
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ UA 1.001.018568-19-TE sor)
sor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-109
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure UA 1.001.019289-19-TE
monitor control unit) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) UA.TR. 028
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 028
sor)
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ UA.R.TR.052.120-20
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) UA1.001.018653-19-TE tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 1O094.006682-19 UZBEKISTAN
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.307-19 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.308-19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.309-19 Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) UA1.001.019129-19-TE Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.528-19 Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 632.16-CET Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) UA1.001.019233-19-TE Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001.019234-19-TE Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
829
F295 0075 02
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA RTTE: Er558296/17,
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA40068/15
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER77062/19,
DA40068/15

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER74533/19,
DA36758/14

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA ER64693/18,
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DA65993/17
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA ER76442/19,
fier) DA65993/17
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA ER77964/20,
DA0018994/09
830
F295 0075 02
number number
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA ER17713/23, Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA ER42011/15,
DA36975/14 DA35219/14
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA ER10723/22,

DA35219/14
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA ER56005/17,
tem) DA44932/15 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER57806/17,
sor) DA36976/14
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TRA ER11321/22,
DA36975/14 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TRA ER7307/19,
monitor control unit) DA0086237/12
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17731/23,
nologies DA76163/18 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22,
DA36976/14
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17730/23,
nologies DA76163/18 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA ER63716/18,
DA36976/14
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA ER55496/17,

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TDRA ER17732/23, DA36976/14
nologies unit) DA76163/18
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22 DA36976/14
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TRA ER41849/15,

tem) DA35176/14
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA ER62622/18,
DA0105247/13
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication TRA ER03601/21,
module) DA0028019/10
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA ER53465/17,
DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA ER0067828/11,

HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA ER56616/17,
DA0018994/09
DA44932/15
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA ER0067829/11,

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA ER52213/17,
DA0018994/09
DA35219/14
831
F295 0075 02
number number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA ER52668/17, Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER96352/21;
DA0018994/09 0020858/10
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA ER71616/19,

DA0018994/09
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72324/19;
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA ER80720/20, 0020858/10
DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA ER64145/18,

DA0018994/09 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72323/19;
0020858/10
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA ER64146/18,
DA0018994/09
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER95775/21;

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA ER69280/19, 0018994/09
0020858/10
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER37156/15,

sor) DA0047074/10
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA ER79695/20,
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER70533/19, tem) DA0018994/09
sor) DA0047074/10
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER96175/21,

UNITED KINGDOM
DA0047074/10
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER57985/17,
DA0047074/10
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER960528/18, Manufacturer Model designation
sor) DA0047074/10
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TRA ER37066/15,
monitor control unit) DA0047074/10 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) ER78231/20 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio ER64728/18 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
Transmitter)
832
F295 0075 02
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) Further specific information

Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B:
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 10 cm
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) transmitter.
D-WMI2020A:
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 0 cm
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device
833
F295 0075 02
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or Rear Seat Entertainment System:
transmitter.
USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada
UNITED STATES licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two con‐
ditions: (1) This device must not cause any harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
number Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) FCC ID: KR5CMKG2
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QMIDLF2
This device must be installed and used at a distance of at least 6 cm from the
nologies body."
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QHIGLF2 Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS stand‐
nologies
ard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head FCC ID: NTG7QPRELF2
must not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
nologies unit) received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2R
This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits established for
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2L
an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio FCC ID: DMOBTT100 with a minimum distance of 5 cm between the radiation source and your
Transmitter) body."
Information on installation clearances Radar sensors:
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI): ARS4-C (ADC), ARS4-B (ADC), ARS4-A (ADC), FR5CPCCF (Bosch), MRR1REAR
(Bosch), MRREVO14F (Bosch), LRR3 (Bosch), 77V12BSM (Veoneer), 77V12CRN
The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) complies with (Veoneer), MMRV1 (Veoneer)
FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environ‐
ment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum dis‐ USA only: Information on exposure to high-frequency radiation:
tance of 0 cm (in contact) between the source of radiation and your body. This
transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits established for an
time as another transmitter or antenna. uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated
834
F295 0075 02
with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your

body.
This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the number
same time as another antenna or transmitter.
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
Canada only: This equipment should be installed and operated with a mini‐ pany Limited
mum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited
BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):
C0274151118AF04A2
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits estab‐
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
lished for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and fier) Company Limited
operated with a minimum distance of 9 cm between the radiation source and B1522011121AF04A3
your body.
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the Company Limited
same time as another antenna or transmitter. C0001070120AF04A2
VIETNAM Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION C0104060423AF04A3
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

tem) pany Limited
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval B0748240419AF04A2
number
HELLA DM4 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ pany Limited
pany Limited CO204030321AF04A3
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐ Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited pany Limited
B0424070422AF04A3
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ C0112200717AF04A2
sor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
835
F295 0075 02
number number
HUF HUF13145 (tyre pressure sen‐ C1071050922AF04A3 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
sor) Company Limited
C0050150121AF04A3
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0313140421AF0403 Company Limited
C0131030221AF04A3
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0208030321AF04A3 sor) Company Limited
C0002050119AF042A
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0120220519AF04A2
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0077210121AF04A3 Company Limited
C0170191017AF04A2
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
C0078070518AF04A2
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
C0913110821AF04A3 pany Limited
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
Company Limited pany Limited
C0141140520AF04A2
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology pany Limited
Company Limited
C0049150121AF04A3
836
F295 0075 02
number
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

tem) pany Limited
A0847130820AF04A3
Information about the specific absorption

rate (SAR)
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE
The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the
Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorp‐
tion rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 compensators < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
837
F295 0075 02
Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS3+ 2,2 W/kg 4 W/kg
Gen20x.i2 LS4+ 2,5 W/kg 4 W/kg
SM-T230NZ tablet PC 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg
Importer information for regulatory radio PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”
components Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2
FOR MOLDOVA ONLY: 01004 Kyiv

Importer
Ukraine
S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2 Importer
FOR TURKEY ONLY: Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited

Importer
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.Ş. Genel Merkez
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1
England
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul
Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans
FOR UKRAINE ONLY:
Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited
Importer
838
F295 0075 02
Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
England
839
F295 0075 02
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE 3 Manufacturing date

4 Vehicle model
5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Permissible gross mass (kg)
5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination (kg) (only for certain coun‐
tries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
1 Vehicle manufacturer 8 Paint code
2 Place of manufacture
840
F295 0075 02
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
ENGINE NUMBER
% The data in the illustration is shown as an example. Further information on engine numbers can be obtained at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
VIN BELOW THE RIGHT FRONT SEAT
1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)

2 Floor covering
VIN AT THE LOWER EDGE OF THE WINDSCREEN
1 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in
some countries.
841
F295 0075 02
Technical data Operating fluids
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids R coolant

R brake fluid
R windscreen washer fluid
& WARNING
R climate control system refrigerant
Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids
Operating fluids can be toxic.
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage to the vehicle caused
# When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the
the imprints on the respective original containers. Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
# Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscriptions on the container:
# Always keep children away from operating fluids.
R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of oper‐ FURTHER INFORMATION ON APPROVED OPERATING FLUIDS IS AVAILA‐
ating fluids BLE AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:
Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids in accordance
the environment.
with the details on the label
# Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible - at https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
manner. R at a qualified specialist workshop
OPERATING FLUIDS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: Notes on brake fluid

R lubricants
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 842).
842
F295 0075 02
& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake Risk of fire‑ and injury from antifreeze
system If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers compartment, it may ignite.
the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour
pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied
# Allow the drive system to cool down before you top up the
hard. antifreeze.
This impairs the braking effect.

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler open‐
ing.
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before
starting the vehicle.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe
or MB-Approval 331.0.
* NOTE
Damage caused by incorrect coolant
Coolant # Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required
antifreeze protection.
NOTES ON COOLANT
INFORMATION ON COOLANT IS AVAILABLE AT THE FOLLOWING
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 842).
LOCATIONS:
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
R At a qualified specialist workshop
843
F295 0075 02
* NOTE * NOTE
Overheating at high outside temperatures Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently washer fluid
protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside tempera‐ Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of
tures. the exterior lighting.
# Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Operating Fluids 320.1.
* NOTE
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
PROPORTION OF ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATE IN THE COOLING SYSTEM:

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.
R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.
Notes on windscreen washer fluid RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 842). R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
& WARNING
Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into tainer.
contact with hot components, it may ignite.
Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
# Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled
near to the filler opening.
844
F295 0075 02
WINDSCREEN WASHER SYSTEM

WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR CAPACITY
Model Filling volume
All models Maximum 3.7 l
845
F295 0075 02
Technical data Vehicle data
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (EQE 350 4MATIC, EQE 500 4MATIC)
EQE 350 4MATIC
THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING EQE 500 4MATIC
FACTORS:
Vehicle length 4946 mm
R Tyres
Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2103 mm
R Load
R Condition of the suspension Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1961 mm
R Optional extras Vehicle height 1512 mm
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (EQE 300, EQE 350+) Wheelbase 3120 mm
EQE 300
EQE 350+
Vehicle length 4946 mm

Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2103 mm
THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING
FACTORS:
Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1961 mm
R Tyres
Vehicle height 1510 mm
R Load
Wheelbase 3120 mm R Condition of the suspension
R Optional extras
846
F295 0075 02
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Weights and loads (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
All models
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE
Vehicle length 4964 mm DATA:
Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2103 mm R Optional extras increase the kerb weight and reduce the payload.
Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1906 mm R You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identifi‐
cation plate (/ page 840).
Vehicle height 1495 mm
ROOF LOAD
Wheelbase 3120 mm
Model Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg

Weights and loads
Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241).
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE
DATA:
R Optional extras increase the kerb weight and reduce the payload.
Maximum design speeds
R Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identifi‐ The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
cation plate (/ page 840). depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of
the tyres.
ROOF LOAD
NOT FOR MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES:
Model Maximum roof load
Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.
All models 100 kg
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED
Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 241). Model
All models
847
F295 0075 02
Maximum design speeds (Mercedes-AMG High-voltage battery

vehicles) NOTES ON THE ENERGY SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT‐
TERY
In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle labels are loca‐
* NOTE
ted on the vehicle in the following places:
Tyres for vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS Package
The specified top speed for vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS Pack‐ R On the inside of the socket flap
age is only designed for a specific type of tyres. R On the charging cable plug
# Only drive the specified maximum speed with summer tyres.
In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy
# Please also observe the notes on the approved tyre types. You supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations where
could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. the charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.
For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the

Vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS Package: Please see the notice in the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 342).
section "Tyres and Wheels" in addition(/ page 759).
The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
depends on the operating conditions, the special equipment and the size of
the tyres.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.

1 Supply type: AC
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED
Standard: EN 62196-2
Model
Design: type 2
Mercedes-AMG EQE 43 4MATIC Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+
2 Supply type: DC
Only with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS Package: Standard: EN 62196-3
Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+ Design: FF
848
F295 0075 02
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 350+)
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V EQE 350+
3 Supply type: DC
Type Lithium-ion
Standard: EN 62196-3
Design: FF Usable energy content 90.56 kWh
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Range
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline. Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 14 h 30 min
with 7 kW charging capacity
ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 300)
Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 14 h 15 min
EQE 300 with 7.4 kW charging capacity, single-phase
Type Lithium-ion Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 9 h 30 min

Usable energy content 89.9 kWh

Range
Charging time – mode 3
Charging time – mode 4 Approx. 32 min
with 7.4 kW charging capacity
with 7.7 kW charging capacity ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 350 4MATIC)
EQE 350 4MATIC
with 11 kW charging capacity Type Lithium-ion
Charging time – mode 3 Usable energy content 89 kWh

Range
with 170 kW charging capacity Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 14 h 30 min
849
F295 0075 02
EQE 350 4MATIC Charging time – mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10 % to 80 % of the usa‐
ble energy content.
with 7.4 kW charging capacity, single-phase The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the
battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The
Charging time – mode 3 Approx. 9 h 15 min charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current and the
with 11 kW charging capacity type of power supply.
The rated voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label
with 22 kW charging capacity on the inside of the socket flap (/ page 342).
High-voltage battery (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐
ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 500 4MATIC) cles)
EQE 500 4MATIC
NOTES ON THE ENERGY SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT‐
Type Lithium-ion TERY
In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle labels are loca‐
ted on the vehicle in the following places:
Range
R On the inside of the socket flap
Charging time – mode 3 R on the charging cable plug
with 7.4 kW charging capacity, single-phase
Charging time – mode 3 In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy
with 11 kW charging capacity supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations where
the charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.
with 22 kW charging capacity For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the
"Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 342).
Charging time – mode 3 applies to AC charging from 0 % to 100 % of the usa‐

ble energy content.
850
F295 0075 02
All models

The charging capacity was not available by the
editorial deadline.

The charging capacity was not available by the
editorial deadline.
1 Supply type: AC
Standard: EN 62196-2 Charging time – mode 3 applies to AC charging from 0 % to 100 % of the usa‐
Design: type 2 ble energy content.
Charging time – mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10 % to 80 % of the usa‐
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
ble energy content.
2 Supply type: DC
Standard: EN 62196-3 The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the
Design: FF battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current and the
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V type of power supply.
3 Supply type: DC The rated voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label
Standard: EN 62196-3 on the inside of the socket flap (/ page 342).
Design: FF
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.
ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES

All models
Type Lithium-ion
Range
851
F295 0075 02
Technical data Trailer hitch
Trailer hitch
General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehi‐
cle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a trailer load
is specified in the vehicle documents.
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch instal‐
led at the factory.
1 Fastening points
2 Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line
OVERHANG DIMENSION, LENGTH
Model 2 Overhang dimension
All models 1033 mm
852
F295 0075 02
Trailer load TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED

Model Trailer load, unbraked
% The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load. All models 750 kg
TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED (AT A MINIMUM START-OFF GRADEABILITY OF

12 %) Maximum tongue weight‑ and load capacity
Model Trailer load, braked
* NOTE
All models 750 kg
Damage caused by the trailer coming loose
TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.
Model Trailer load, unbraked # The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.
All models 750 kg # Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maxi‐
mum permissible tongue weight.
Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

* NOTE
% The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load. Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
The values for the trailer load, braked apply with a minimum
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the
start-off gradeability of 12%.
maximal load capacity should be observed.
TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED

# Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.
Model Trailer load, braked

Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 481) .
All models 750 kg
TONGUE WEIGHT
Model Maximum tongue weight
All models 75 kg
853
F295 0075 02
LOAD CAPACITY TONGUE WEIGHT

All models Maximum load capacity Model Maximum tongue weight
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg All models 75 kg

head
Observe the additional notes on load capacity in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 100 kg
head and additionally to the guide pin
LOAD CAPACITY
Maximum load
Maximum tongue‑ weight and load capacity When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) head
When attaching the bicycle carrier to the ball 100 kg

head and additionally to the guide pins
* NOTE
Damage caused by the trailer coming loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. TRAILER OPERATION AXLE LOAD
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maxi‐ Model Axle load
mum permissible tongue weight.
All models 1700 kg
* NOTE Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-

Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the
AMG vehicles)
maximal load capacity should be observed. AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER
# Do not exceed the permissible load capacity. Model Axle load
All models 1770 kg
Back to Contents854
F295 0075 02
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages 856
Warning and indicator lamps 928
F295 0075 02
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages
Display messages
Introduction High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver display will show
these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message
INFORMATION ABOUT DISPLAY MESSAGES has been rectified.
Display messages appear on the driver display.
CALLING UP SAVED DISPLAY MESSAGES
Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual Driver display:
and may differ from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display 4 Service
shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages will be The Message memory: XXmessage appears on the driver display.
accompanied by a warning tone.
# Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards
Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional on the left-hand Touch Control.
notes in the Owner's Manual.
# To exit the display: press the G back button.
FOR SOME DISPLAY MESSAGES, SYMBOLS WILL ALSO BE SHOWN:
R Õ Further information
R ¨ Hide display message
You can select the respective symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand
Touch Control. Press Õ to display further information on the central display.
Press ¨ to hide the display message.
You can hide display messages to be acknowledged by pressing the back but‐
ton G or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then
be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.
856
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 129).
6
Restraint system malfunction Consult
& DANGER
workshop
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
tem.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.
RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop
857
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
tem.
6
Front right malfunction Consult workshop
858
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
tem.
6
Second row of seats, left Malfunction
Consult workshop
859
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
tem.
6
Second row of seats, centre Malfunction
Consult workshop
860
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
tem.
6
Second row of seats, right Malfunction
Consult workshop
861
F295 0075 02
& DANGER
tem.
6
Left window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
862
F295 0075 02
6
Right window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front passenger airbag disabled See Own- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to
er's Manual the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING
‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 130).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
863
F295 0075 02
Front passenger airbag enabled See Own- * THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WILL BE ENABLED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
er's Manual
TIONS:
R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat
R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
& WARNING
Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 130).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
864
F295 0075 02
Key
®
* The key battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 178).

Change key batteries
®
* The key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

Key not detected (white display mes‐
# Try to start the vehicle.
sage)
# If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 319).
®
* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.
IF THE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:
Key not detected (red display message)
R You can no longer start the vehicle.
R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 319).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
865
F295 0075 02
®
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being taught in Please wait
Place the key in the marked space See * Key detection is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 319).
Searching for key in stowage tray or Digi- * The key has not been detected.
tal Vehicle Key in inductive charging
bracket… See Owner's Manual # Place the key in the marked space (/ page 319).
If the key is still not detected:

* The Digital Vehicle Key has not been detected.
# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 317).
If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected:
õ
* The key or the Digital Vehicle Key is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the key or the Digital Vehicle Key in the vehicle.
Key not detected
# Try to start the vehicle.
# If the key is still not detected, place the key in the marked space (/ page 319).
866
F295 0075 02
# If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected, place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 317).
õ
* The key or the Digital Vehicle Key is no longer detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.
IF THE KEY OR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:
Key not detected Place Digital Vehicle
Key in inductive charging bracket R You will no longer be able to start the vehicle.
R You will not be able to lock the vehicle centrally.
# Ensure that the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle.
If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:
# Place the key in the marked space (/ page 319).
# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 317).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
The state of charge of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low.
# Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device.
Otherwise, it may not be possible to restart the vehicle after it has been switched off.
If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected:
867
F295 0075 02
í
* If the Digital Vehicle Key is not renewed, the vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started.
# The system will automatically renew the Digital Vehicle Key.

Replace key See Owner's Manual When renewal is complete, the message will disappear and the Digital Vehicle Key will be available again.
õ
* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
Do not forget key
í
* The state of charge of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low.
# Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device.
Digital Vehicle Key Charge device
õ
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new Digital Vehicle Key.
# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being taught in Please wait
í
* The vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started.
# Use the Digital Vehicle Key belonging to the vehicle.

Key does not belong to vehicle
®
* Have the key replaced.

Replace key
868
F295 0075 02
Lights
:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See Owner's Manual * Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 63).
:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.

Automatic driving lights inoperative
:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.

Switch on headlamps
:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

Switch off lights
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system.
Check low beam setting (left/right-side * The type of traffic has been selected manually.
traffic)
# Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (/ page 279).
Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) * The automatic headlamp conversion for left-hand/right-hand traffic has malfunctioned.
Manual adjustment only
869
F295 0075 02
# Change the headlamps over manually (/ page 279).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The system limits have been reached (/ page 277).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will
appear.
# Drive on
# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inopera- * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.
tive
# Drive on
or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.
# Drive on
# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
870
F295 0075 02
# Until then, operate the high beam manually.
:
* The front left parking light is malfunctioning.

Front left parking lights
:
* The front right parking light is malfunctioning.

Front right parking lights
:
* The left low beam is malfunctioning.

Left low beam
:
* The right low beam is malfunctioning.

Right low beam
:
* The left cornering light is malfunctioning.

Left cornering light
:
* The right cornering light is malfunctioning.

Right cornering light
871
F295 0075 02
:
* The left tail light is malfunctioning.

Left tail light
:
* The right tail light is malfunctioning.

Right tail light
:
* The left high beam is malfunctioning.

Left main beam
:
* The right high beam is malfunctioning.

Right main beam
:
* The left daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

Left daytime running lights
:
* The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

Right daytime running lights
:
* The front left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front left turn signal
872
F295 0075 02
:
* The rear left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear left turn signal
:
* The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front right turn signal
:
* The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear right turn signal
:
* The turn signal lamp on the left mirror is malfunctioning.

Left mirror turn signal
:
* The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning.

Right mirror turn signal
:
* The left brake light is malfunctioning.

Left brake lamp
:
* The right brake light is malfunctioning.

Right brake lamp
873
F295 0075 02
:
* The third brake light is malfunctioning.

Third brake lamp
:
* The reversing light is malfunctioning.

Reversing light
:
* The rear fog light is malfunctioning.

Rear fog light
:
* The number plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Number plate lamp
:
* The left turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer left turn signal
:
* The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer right turn signal
:
* The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer brake lamp
874
F295 0075 02
:
* A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

Trailer tail light
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver dis- * An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective.
play. Consult workshop
Climate control
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.
Currently unavailable High-voltage bat-
tery charging incomplete.
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).

Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage
battery
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than three times with the vehicle switched off.
& # Start the vehicle for ten seconds.

Pre-entry climate control via key available Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
again after starting vehicle
875
F295 0075 02
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
& # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).

Pre-entry climate control via key currently When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
unavailable. High-voltage battery low
Drive system
ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system.
Cooling system malfunction Stop immedi-
ately Switch off the vehicle
& WARNING
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHICLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPART‐
MENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
R You may come into contact with hot gases.

R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
# In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire
service.
# Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to open the bonnet.
# Wait until the drive system has cooled down.
# Make sure that the air supply to the vehicle radiator is not obstructed.
876
F295 0075 02
# Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
u
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
# Have the vehicle transported using only a transporter or trailer (/ page 737).
Towing not permitted See Owner's Man-
ual
ò
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road
users.
# Drive with particular care.

Acoustic presence indicator inoperative
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/ * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3
times # To switch off the drive system while the vehicle is in motion (/ page 316).
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * It is not possible to start the vehicle.
A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.
# After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.
# If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The coolant level is too low.
+
Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual * NOTE
Damage to the drive system due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Have the cooling system of the drive system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
877
F295 0075 02
ÿ
* The cooling system has detected a component fault.
# Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Socket flap blocked Please open manually * The socket flap is not opening automatically. An obstruction may be hindering the opening process.
# Make sure that no objects are in the opening area.
# Open the socket flap again.
Please close socket flap manually. Anti- * The socket flap is not closing automatically. An obstruction may be hindering the closing process.
entrapment active
# Make sure that no objects are in the closing area.
# Close the socket flap again.
Please close socket flap manually. Auto- * The socket flap is not closing automatically. The motor of the socket flap may be defective.
matic function inoperative
# Close the socket flap manually.
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
è # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected
Not possible to unlock charging cable * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket.
See Owner's Manual
# If the charging cable is under strain, relieve the strain on the charging cable connector by carefully pulling on the charging cable.
# Press the charging interruption button (/ page 355).
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that:
878
F295 0075 02
Vehicle not currently being charged * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
Charging station fault
# Start the charging process at a different charging station.
or
# Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.
Charging fault Please change charging * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
method See Owner's Manual
# Wait until the malfunction has passed.
or
or
AC charging inoperative Consult work- * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
shop
DC charging inoperative Consult work- * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
shop
Login failed Change authentication * Plug-and-Charge is not expected to be available at this charging station.
method or charging station
or
Reduced drive system performance See * The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.
Owner's Manual
Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow _ reduced-power warning lamp is on.
879
F295 0075 02
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal (e.g. after a short trip), the full output will be available again. The display message and the
yellow _ reduced-power warning lamp will go out.
# Drive on carefully.
* The high-voltage battery is not charged sufficiently.
Drive system power output is reduced. The yellow _ reduced-power warning lamp is on.
# Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.

* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
Please charge the high-voltage battery. * Due to a possible drop in temperature of the high-voltage battery, the starting ability or the range may drop significantly until the vehicle is restarted.
Otherwise the vehicle may not start
# Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).
Please wait in READY status Warming bat- * Operational readiness is established õ and the transmission position j is engaged.
tery See Owner's Manual
The high-voltage battery is warmed up to the operating temperature. This process can take a few minutes and may be prolonged if defrosting of the windscreen
¬ is activated.
The heating process ends when transmission position h is engaged. However, when you are driving, the output will be significantly limited until the high-volt‐
age battery has reached its operating temperature.
Preparing drive system… * The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no longer possible to drive the vehicle. The drive system can no longer be restarted.
Û When the drive system is restarted, the message Battery capacity too low Stop Charge immediately will appear again.
Battery capacity too low Stop Charge
immediately
880
F295 0075 02
* The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of fire.
Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out!
# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Outdoors if possible
% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction

Malfunction Visit workshop
* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system.

Have high-voltage system checked See
Owner's Manual
Consult workshop without starting the * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
vehicle again
# Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
881
F295 0075 02
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
Û Output and range will be severely restricted.

Output and range reduced See Owner's
Manual
If the display message appears again:
# Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).
If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * It is not possible to start the vehicle.
A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.
# If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive malfunction Achievable speed limi- * The drive system is malfunctioning.

ted Stop soon
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. The drive system will shut off within a few kilometres.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.
# Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
882
F295 0075 02
Drive malfunction Achievable speed * The drive system is malfunctioning.

severely limited See Owner's Manual
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted.
ô
* The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range.

Reserve level Charge high-voltage battery
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
d # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction
d # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.
Stop Switch off the vehicle
# Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
d # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop
* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
d Output and range will be severely restricted.

Performance severely limited
If the display message appears again:
883
F295 0075 02
# Fully charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 342).
If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.
High-voltage battery malfunction. No * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.

start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop
(yellow display message) It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery malfunction. No * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.

start in approx. XXX km Consult work-
shop(red display message) It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.
# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
High-voltage battery malfunction. Consult * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
workshop without starting the vehicle
again It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched off.
# Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
884
F295 0075 02
Vehicle
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update.
The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.
& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver's display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you may not be aware of any functional limitations to safety-critical sys‐
tems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle.
# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If the driver display fails, you may not recognise e.g. function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display. The operating safety of the
vehicle may be impaired (/ page 563).
# Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
occurs when locked or automatically in a
few minutes # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.
# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the
engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
¥ # Top up the washer fluid (/ page 32).

Top up washer fluid
Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
# Restart the vehicle.
885
F295 0075 02
If the display message still appears:
ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
Trailer coupling Check lock (white dis‐ & WARNING

play message) Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.
# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 48).
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 48).
886
F295 0075 02
# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 48).
# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
Trailer coupling Check lock(red display & WARNING

message) Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.
# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 48).
# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
887
F295 0075 02

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 48).
# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 48).
# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
Head-up display currently unavailable See * THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Owner's Manual
R Malfunctions in the power supply
R Signal interference
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.
# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
Head-up display Brightness currently * THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS REDUCED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
reduced See Owner's Manual
R Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
888
F295 0075 02
R Faulty exterior brightness signals
# Switch on the windscreen wipers.
# Clean the windscreen if necessary.
# Switch the vehicle off and then back on
Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
Steering malfunction Stop immediately & WARNING

See Owner's Manual Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
Steering malfunction Increased physical

effort See Owner's Manual
889
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.
Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit
workshop
Ù
* The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.
Rear axle steering currently malfunction-
ing
If the display message does not disappear:
Ù
* The rear-axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.

Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit work-
The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.
shop
890
F295 0075 02
# Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.
Ù
* The rear-axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.

Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop
The steering wheel may be at a significant angle when you drive in a straight line.
immediately
Depending on the steering wheel's angled position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.
& WARNING
Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# When stopping, bear the greater width of the vehicle in mind.
Snow chain mode Maximum speed excee- * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded.
ded
# Drive more slowly.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Manual
Ambient light warning support inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.
891
F295 0075 02
# Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes.
# If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
* The bonnet is open.
M
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
* At least one door is open.
C # Close all doors.
* The boot lid is open.
N # Close the boot lid.
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
_ # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear left seat backrest not locked
892
F295 0075 02
* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
_ # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear right seat backrest not locked
* The washer fluid filler flap is open.
¥ # Close washer fluid filler flap (/ page 32).

Washer fluid flap open
Transmission
Only select P when vehicle is stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
# Depress the brake pedal to stop.
# Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P position * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position.
of P or N
# Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.
893
F295 0075 02
# Select transmission position h or k.
Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.
# Select transmission position k.
Apply parking brake to park Visit work- * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
shop
# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
open Transmission not in P
The vehicle may roll away.
# Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
brake to park
# Park the vehicle safely.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the drive system or the vehicle switched on.
manually No automatic switch to P
894
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away
When the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deac‐
tivated.
The vehicle may roll away.
# Be ready to brake.
# Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
N automatically activated Please engage * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
transmission position again
% When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically.
# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
N is selected Please select desired trans- * The accelerator pedal was depressed while the vehicle was rolling or moving in neutral i.
mission position
# To accelerate the vehicle, select transmission position h or k.
To shift to N, hold selector lever longer in * Selector lever not held for long enough in position i.
position N
It will be possible to change from park position j to neutral i only if the selector lever is held in i for an extended period of time.
895
F295 0075 02
If the selector lever is not held for long enough, park position j will remain engaged.
# When changing from park position j to neutral i, hold the selector lever in position i for an extended period of time.
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
# Engage park position j.
Consult workshop without changing the * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
transmission position
# If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white dis‐ * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
play message)
# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.
# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
896
F295 0075 02
Brakes
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
! To apply:
Parking brake See Owner's Manual
# Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 375).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 375).
or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 374).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
To apply:
897
F295 0075 02
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 375).
To release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the state of charge is too low:
# Charge the 12 V battery (/ page 62).
To apply:
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
To release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake man‐
ually (/ page 375).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
898
F295 0075 02
* The red ! indicator lamp is flashing.
! THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED WHILE YOU ARE DRIVING:

Release parking brake
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 374).
R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 376).
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
# Release the electric parking brake manually.
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
! You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release
* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
J A horn may also sound at regular intervals.

Brake immediately
You cannot start the vehicle system.
# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You cannot start the vehicle system again.
* The brake force boosting function is impaired.
J The hill start assist may be impaired.

Malfunction See Owner's Manual
899
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be affected.
J
Malfunction Stop vehicle & WARNING
Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J
Check brake fluid level
900
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐
ing.
# Do not top up the brake fluid.
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
ual (ABS and ESP®)
901
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS
and ESP®)
902
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
ual (ESP®)
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.
903
F295 0075 02
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP®)
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
switched off.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
T! Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD,
ABS and ESP®)
904
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.
ë # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 387).
Off
Restricted mode activated Output * Valet Service Mode is activated. Vehicle acceleration is restricted (/ page 389).
reduced
* Beginner Driver Mode is activated. Vehicle acceleration is restricted (/ page 390).
é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 391).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!
P
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 391).
A warning tone also sounds.

ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a
break!
905
F295 0075 02
# Take a break immediately.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
h
* Cruise control cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 394).

- - - km/h
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 393).
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
È
- - - km/h
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (/ page 393).
È
passive
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable * Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
906
F295 0075 02
# Drive on
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative * Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.
or
ä
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
907
F295 0075 02
* NOTE
The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.
ä
* AMG RIDE CONTROL + is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h
AMG Ride Control Function limited See * At least one of the main functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL + is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
* NOTE
The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side
during cornering.
# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
# Avoid sudden steering movements.
908
F295 0075 02
# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.
# Avoid sudden steering movements.
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
É # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

STOP Vehicle level too low The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE
The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 435, 439).

Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
¢
* THE VEHICLE LEVEL WILL LOWER FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:
R You have selected a different drive program.

Lowering
R You have exceeded the speed limit.
R You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
909
F295 0075 02
R Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if an electrical connection has been correctly made, you have exceeded the speed limit.
* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
É
Rising
¢
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent.
The current level is too high. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
Max. speed 20km/h
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 20 km/h.
* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
É # Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.
Reduce speed
You are driving too quickly with a trailer or the trailer hitch socket is being used, e.g. for a rear bicycle rack.
# Observe the notes on trailer operation (/ page 474).
* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level.
É # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
Compressor is cooling When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level.
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
É # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle rising Please wait
RACE START not possible See Owner's * POSSIBLE CAUSES:

Manual
R The activation conditions have not been fulfilled (/ page 441).
910
F295 0075 02
RACE START cancelled * POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R you released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.
R you depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.
# You can try RACE START again at the next start.
Driver assistance systems

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 399).
- - - km/h
ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 396).
suspended
ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically
(/ page 399).
Off
Active Distance Assist currently unavaila- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
ble See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 396).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
911
F295 0075 02
or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
or
Active Distance Assist available again * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
# Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 399).
Active Brake Assist Functions currently * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
limited See Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:
R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
R Evasive Steering Assist
R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
or
912
F295 0075 02
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:
R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function
R Evasive Steering Assist
R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
or
Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
# Drive on
or
913
F295 0075 02
Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 405).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
ble due to multiple emergency stops
# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 405).
# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Beginning emergency stop
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 408).
Active Emergency Stop Assist currently * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
or
* Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Active Emergency Stop Assist will be available once more.
Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.
914
F295 0075 02
# Drive on
or
Active Lane Change Assist currently * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
or
Active Lane Change Assist inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Automatic lane change currently unavaila- * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
ble. See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
915
F295 0075 02
Automatic lane change inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.
unavailable see Owner's Manual
# Drive on
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.

See Owner's Manual
Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.
# Drive on
or
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
916
F295 0075 02
Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when tow- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
ing a trailer See Owner's Manual
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavail- * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
able See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual
917
F295 0075 02
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
# Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
# Drive on
or
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions * Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.
restricted See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
or
Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Lane Keeping Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 432).
# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Beginning emergency stop
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 408).
¸ð
* FRONT AND CORNER RADAR SENSORS (HEREAFTER "SENSORS") ARE MALFUNCTIONING. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R The sensors are dirty
çÓ R
R
Heavy rain or snow
Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty
918
F295 0075 02
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to func‐
tion normally.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear:
# Clean all sensor covers from the outside (/ page 378).
êð
* THE VIEW OF THE MULTIFUNCTION CAMERA IS RESTRICTED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
Ó¬ R
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Mist on the inside or outside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside or outside of the windscreen during cold times
çÔ of year in particular.
Camera view restricted See Owner's Man-

ual % This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to func‐
tion normally.
# To remove mist from the outside, wipe once (/ page 283).
# To remove the mist from the inside, press ¬ (/ page 301).
919
F295 0075 02
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear even after a driving time of about 15 minutes:
# Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 378).
ð¸
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.
# Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.
±
Restricted during trailer operation
The camera's view of the driver is cur- * THE VIEW OF THE DRIVER CAMERA IS REDUCED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
rently impeded Affected functions: see
Owner's Manual Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera’s field of vision.
R
R The driver camera is dirty.
# Keep the driver camera's field of vision free.
# Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display (/ page 722).
Change steering wheel/ seat position * The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.
until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge
of the screen # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible at the top edge of the screen.
The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight after 30 minutes.
The display message will no longer appear if you acknowledge the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the
entire journey.
Driver camera inoperative See Owner's * The driver camera is malfunctioning.

Manual
920
F295 0075 02
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Man- * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
ual
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Owner's Manual
PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner's * The PRE‑SAFE® PLUS system is malfunctioning.
Manual
# Drive on
or
Parking assistance systems

PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant * If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist
unavailable at rear when towing a trailer PARKTRONIC will be not available at the rear when you are reversing. The rear manoeuvring assistant will also be unavailable in this situation.
921
F295 0075 02
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
Limited availability of Active Parking * Active Parking Assist’s manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Assist manoeuvring assistant See Own-
er's Manual # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 720).

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
G # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative
922
F295 0075 02
Battery
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

12 V on-board electrical system Visit
workshop
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual * NOTE
Possible damage to the drive system if you continue driving
* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
# #
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
Drive for 30–60 mins.
Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V bat-
tery
or
# Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 342).
923
F295 0075 02
* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
# # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge
# Leave the vehicle running
the 12 V battery
# If the display message disappears: drive on.
Tyre pressure monitor

Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring
system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
# Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoperative * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
924
F295 0075 02
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
pressure sensors
# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
é
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.
# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheel sensor(s) missing
é
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone also sounds.

Check tyre(s)
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 755) and the tyres.
é
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.
# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 757).
925
F295 0075 02
é
* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
Warning tyre malfunction & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre
R The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Do not drive with a flat tyre.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.
# Observe the notes on flat tyres.
Notes on flat tyres (/ page 64).
# Check the tyres.
é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Tyre(s) overheated & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
926
F295 0075 02
é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
Reduce speed & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.
927
F295 0075 02
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS

OCCUPANT SAFETY
Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some
indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is 6 Restraint system (/ page 930)
non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if
ü Seat belt (/ page 930)
they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.
The indicator and warning lamps are located in the highlighted display sec‐ DRIVE SYSTEM
tions.
_ Reduced power (/ page 931)
DRIVER DISPLAY
Ú System error (/ page 931)
# Electrical fault (/ page 931)
VEHICLE
ï Trailer hitch (/ page 932)
DRIVER DISPLAY WITH DRIVER CAMERA Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 932)
Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 932)
Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow) (/ page 932)
Ù Rear-axle steering (red) (/ page 932)
928
F295 0075 02
BRAKES ä AIRMATIC (/ page 936)
! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 934) ä AMG RIDE CONTROL + (/ page 936)
! Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 934)

MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 934)
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 941)
J Brakes (red) (/ page 934)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
DRIVING AND DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
h Tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 942)
! ABS (/ page 936)
÷ ESP® (/ page 936) EXTERIOR LIGHTING
T Side lights (/ page 268)

å ESP® OFF (/ page 936)
L Low beam (/ page 268)
¤ ESP® OFF (/ page 936)
K High beam (/ page 269)
Æ ESP® SPORT (/ page 936)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 269)
Û ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 936)
R Rear fog light (/ page 268)
ê Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 936)
ê Speed Limit Assist (/ page 936) SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

É Drive Away Assist (/ page 464)
L Distance warning (/ page 936)
L Rear cross traffic warning (/ page 465)
Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 936)
º Close-range braking (/ page 466)
ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 936)
Æ Active Brake Assist (/ page 936)
929
F295 0075 02
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 129).
Restraint system warning lamp

& DANGER
tem.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 128).

Seat belt warning lamp flashes
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
930
F295 0075 02
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
ü In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.

The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 128).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Drive system
_
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.

Reduced-power warning lamp
* The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
Ú There is a malfunction in the drive system.

System error warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
# There is a fault with the electrics.

Electrical fault warning lamp
931
F295 0075 02
Vehicle
ï
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
Trailer hitch warning lamp

& WARNING
Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
Ù
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)
Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
Power steering warning lamp (red)
932
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
Ù
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yel‐
low)
Ù
* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)

& WARNING
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
933
F295 0075 02
Brakes
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.
! The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit up in the event of a malfunction.
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(red)
!
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(yellow)
* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
J WARNING
Brakes warning lamp (yellow) &
Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning.
# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
# If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.
* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
J
Brakes warning lamp (red)
934
F295 0075 02
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv‐
ing.
935
F295 0075 02

ä
* The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL + warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL +.

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
! ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.

ABS warning lamp
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING
There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.
936
F295 0075 02
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
÷ One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 382).
ESP® warning lamp flashes # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights up
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
switched off.
# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
å ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
937
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 382).
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running.
å¤ ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
938
F295 0075 02
& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 383).
* ESP® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running.
åÆ When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
# Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.
# Observe the notes on activating ESP® SPORT(/ page 383).
Û
* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.
ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp
939
F295 0075 02
ê
* The Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp is lit.
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp
ê
* The Speed Limit Assist warning lamp is lit.
Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.

Speed Limit Assist warning lamp
L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance warning
# Be prepared to brake immediately.
# Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 414).
Ó
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.

Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê
The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.
# Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 414).
Æ
After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process.
Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.
# Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 414).
940
F295 0075 02
ä
* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC.

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)
ä
* The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC.
Suspension warning lamp (red)

* NOTE
The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.

H
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

warning lamp
941
F295 0075 02
Tyre pressure monitor

* The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
h The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp flashes & WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
h The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp lights up & WARNING
Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
942
F295 0075 02
# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Back to Contents943
F295 0075 02
Index
Index
Searching for something specific? Click on the relevant initial letter here and look it up.
Incidentally, you can also use your PDF reader's search function at any time.
0-9 945 G 994 N 1015 U 1050
A 946 H 995 O 1017 V 1052
B 955 I 998 P 1019 W 1056
C 959 J 1001 Q 1023 Z 1062
D 970 K 1002 R 1024
E 987 L 1003 S 1031
F 991 M 1007 T 1040
F295 0075 02
Index 0-9
0-9
4MATIC 341
0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F295 0075 02
Index A
A
A/C function Accident Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (operating
297 ERA-GLONASS test mode 664 Activating/deactivating 432
unit)
Switching on/off (MBUX) 298 Accident prevention 464 Brake application 431
ABS 381 Accident, emergency call 70 Exit warning 428
Accelerator pedal 327 Acoustic presence indicator 312 Function 428
Access data Acoustic vehicle alerting system 312 Trailer operation 431
Activating/deactivating the acoustic

Setting (Bluetooth®) 668 176 Active bonnet 709
locking verification signal
F295 0075 02
Index A
Active Brake Assist Calling up a speed 399 Function 409
Function 414 Function 396 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting 419 Increases/decreases the speed 399 Activating/deactivating 434
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Route-based speed adaptation 403 Function 432
Activate/deactivate variable limiter 399 Storing a speed 399 Setting the sensitivity 434
Activating/deactivating 399 Active Emergency Stop Assist 408 Trailer operation 432
Active Emergency Stop Assist 408 Active headlamps 271 Active light function 271
Active Lane Change Assist 409 Active Lane Change Assist Active Parking Assist
Active Speed Limit Assist 403 Activating/deactivating 414 Automatic braking function 459
F295 0075 02
Index A
Cross traffic warning 465 Active Service System PLUS 705 Adaptive cruise control 403
Drive Away Assist 464 Active Speed Limit Assist 403 Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Exiting a parking space 457 Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating 277
Function 453 Activating/deactivating 407 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Manoeuvering brake function 466 Active Emergency Stop Assist 408 Switching on/off 278
Memory Parking Assist 467 Active Lane Change Assist 409 Additional door lock 187
Adjusting bass, mid-range and treble

Parking 454 Function 405
settings
Pausing 458 Active Stop-and-Go Assist 405 Advanced sound system 701
Remote Parking Assist 459 Adaptive brake lights 389
F295 0075 02
Index A
Adjusting mid-range, treble and bass

Adjusting the sound focus Information 701
settings
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐ Switching loudness normalisation

Advanced sound system 701 701 701
tem on/off
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

Adjusting the balance/fader After-sales service 705
settings
Advanced sound system 702 Advanced sound system 701 Air conditioning menu
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐ Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

700 700 Air distribution 300
tem tem
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Advanced sound system Calling up 297
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

700 Adjusting the balance/fader 702 Climate control 298
tem

Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass 701 Fragrance system 302
settings

700 Calling up the sound menu 701 Front air conditioning 297
tem
F295 0075 02
Index A
Ionisation 302 Air suspension 435 Airflow
Rear compartment climate control 300 Air vents Setting 293
Selecting climate modes 299 Setting 309 AIRMATIC
Air distribution Air/water duct 712 GPS-based vehicle level 437
Overview 299 Airbag Setting the vehicle level 435
Setting 293 Inflating 137 Vehicle level 435
Air freshener system 302 Overview 144 Alarm system 214
Air inlet 712 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 130 All-wheel drive 341
Air pressure 755 Warning lamp 129 Alternative route 599
F295 0075 02
Index A
Ambient lighting 280 AMG RIDE CONTROL + AMG TRACK PACE
AMG Active Sound, Vehicle sound Function 437 Configuring 569
Selecting sound characteristic (steer‐

328 Selecting the suspension setting 438 Drag Race 568
ing-wheel button)
AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package, Power

380 Setting the vehicle level 439 Function 565
increase
AMG DYNAMIC SELECT AMG steering wheel buttons Telemetry display 569
Setting drive programs 335 Setting 329 Track Race 565
AMG Performance AMG steering-wheel buttons Android Auto
Information 29 Function 329 Connecting a mobile phone (wired) 648
Connecting a mobile phone (wire‐

648
less)
F295 0075 02
Index A
Ending 649 Anti-theft protection Sound settings 646
Information 647 Additional door lock 187 Transferred vehicle data 649
Sound settings 649 Immobiliser 214 Apps, Mercedes me
Transferred vehicle data 649 Apple CarPlay®, Smartphone Mercedes me calls 651
Android smartphone 647 Connecting an iPhone® (cable) 645 Mercedes me connect 655
Animals 138 Connecting an iPhone® (wireless) 646 Remote Parking Assist 459
Anti-lock braking system 381 Ending 646 Selecting (MBUX multimedia system) 658
Anti-theft alarm system 214 Notes 645 Assembly licence plate, front 105
Overview 644 Assistance system 379
F295 0075 02
Index A
Assistant display Interior protection 216 Augmented reality
Menu (driver display) 495 Interior protection function 216 MBUX route guidance 613
ASSYST PLUS Tow-away protection 216 Authorisations
Battery disconnection periods 706 Tow-away protection function 215 Setting 557
Service interval display 705 ATTENTION ASSIST Authorised workshop 112
Service requirements 705 Function 391 Automatic car wash 35
ATA Setting 392 Automatic car wash mode 716
Deactivating the alarm 215 Attention assistant 391 Automatic climate control 298
Function 214
F295 0075 02
Index A
Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Automatic lane change Axle load
Function 133 Active Lane Change Assist 409 Trailer operation 854
Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG

Automatic distance control 396 Automatic measures after an accident 136 854
vehicles)
Automatic driving lights 268 Automatic mirror folding function 289
Automatic emergency call 661 Automatic seat adjustment 228
Automatic front passenger airbag shut‐

Automatic transmission 331
off
Information (child restraint system

152 Autonomous braking 414
on the front passenger seat)
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 130 AVAS 312
F295 0075 02
Index B
B
Bad weather light 272 High-voltage battery 735 Beginner driver mode
Ball neck Battery (12 V battery) Activating/deactivating 390
Folding out/in 48 Charging 62 Function 390
Trailer coupling 477 Notes 734 Belt
BAS 381 Replacing 736 Adjusting the height 128
Basic information 125 Starting assistance 62 Fastening 128
Battery (high-voltage on-board electri‐

Battery 848 Notes on wearing correctly 127
cal system)
Declaration of conformity 108 Battery (key) 178 Releasing 143
F295 0075 02
Index B
Bicycle rack Information 557 Boot lid
Load capacity 853 Setting up an Internet connection 668 Closing 199
Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

854 Switching on/off 557 HANDS-FREE ACCESS 201
cles)
Trailer operation 481 Bonnet Limiter 203
Blind Spot Assist Active bonnet 709 Opening 198
Activating/deactivating 432 Opening/closing 709 Power closing function 199
Switching the separate locking fea‐

Function 428 Boot floor 203
ture on/off
Bluetooth® Opening 48 Brake Assist
Connecting a mobile phone 16 Active Brake Assist 414
F295 0075 02
Index B
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐

Brake Assist System 381 Brake service mode 387
tion)
Brake Assist System 381 Activating/deactivating 717 Electric parking brake 373
Brake disks 320 Brakes Handbrake 373
Brake fluid 842 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 381 HOLD function 387
Limited braking effect (salt-treated

Brake force distribution 387 Active Brake Assist 414 320
roads)
New/replaced brake pads/brake

Brake lamps Adaptive brake lights 389 320
discs
Adaptive brake lights 389 BAS (Brake Assist System) 381 Parking brake 373
Brake pads 320 Brake service mode 716 Post-collision brake 136
Driving tips 320 Recuperation 324
F295 0075 02
Index B
Running-in notes 320 Transporting the vehicle 740 Selecting the sound profile 700
Braking assistance Wheel change 764
Active Brake Assist 414 Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
Brake Assist System 381 Adjusting the balance/fader 700
Breakdown Adjusting the sound focus 701

Flat tyre 64 700
settings
Overview of aids 90 Automatic loudness normalisation 700
Tow-starting 743 Calling up the sound menu 700
Towing methods 65 Information 699
F295 0075 02
Index C
C
Call list Calling up the sound menu Ending a call 634
Deleting 638 Advanced sound system 701 Incoming call during an existing call 635

Making a call 638 700 Making 634
tem
Overview 638 Calls, Telephone operation Mercedes me 650
Selecting options 638 Accepting 634 Telephone 634
Calling the customer centre for

651 Activating functions during a call 634 Using overhead control panel 650
Mercedes-Benz
Calling up a web page 670 Calls with several participants 634 Using the international dialling code 635
Declining 634
F295 0075 02
Index C
Camera Manage activation points 448 Washing by hand 718
Opening the camera cover (reversing

360° camera 444 448 Car-to-X-Communication
camera)
Activating using GPS (reversing cam‐

448 Reversing camera 442 Display on map 612
era)
Button 448 Select view 448 Overview 612
Care 720 Car key 175 Sending hazard warnings 613
Cleaning 720 Car wash Care
Driver camera 553 Automatic car wash 35 Air/water duct 712
Function 444 Car wash mode 715 Automatic car wash 35
Information 378 High-pressure cleaner 717 Brake service mode 716
F295 0075 02
Index C
Camera 720 Paint 718 Wheels/rims 720
Car parts 720 Plastic trim 722 Care of the plastic trim 722
Car wash mode 715 Roof lining 722 Care of the roof lining 722
Decorative foil 718 Seat belt 722 Care of the steering wheel 722
Display 722 Steering wheel 722 Caring for rims 720
Exterior lighting 720 Trailer hitch 720 Central display
Genuine wood/trim elements 722 Vehicle interior 722 Operating 533
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

Head-up display 722 720 Central locking system
battery
High-pressure cleaner 717 Washing by hand 718 Button 188
F295 0075 02
Index C
Maximum charging current (mains

Key 176 Charge level display 363 349
socket)
Notes on charging the high-voltage

Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest) Charging cable control panel 350 342
battery
Inflating 137 Charging station, mode 3 347 Notes on the high-voltage battery 735
Information 144 Configuring weekly profile 364 Rapid charging station, mode 4 348
Ending the charging process (alter‐

Charge level display 363 355 Recuperation 324
nating current, mode 2/3)
Ending the charging process (direct Starting the charging process (alter‐
Charge level/charge display 363 361 352
current, mode 4) nating current, mode 2/3)
Starting the charging process (direct

Charging Flexible charging system Pro 350 358
current, mode 4)
12 V battery 62 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 351 Stowing the charging cable 345
At time of departure 364 Mains socket, mode 2 346 USB port 51
F295 0075 02
Index C
Wallbox, mode 3 347 Charging process Child safety lock
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone 260 Paying 591 Rear door 169
Charging cable Charging settings 364 Side window (rear) 171
Control panel 350 Charging stations Child seat
Flexible charging system Pro 350 Showing on the map 591 Adjusting the vehicle seat 164
Stowing 345 Charging system 350 Approval categories 155
Charging near destination Checking the coolant level 710 Basic instructions 148
Brief overview of most important

Route 594 Checking tyre 146
points
pressure 757 Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size 165
F295 0075 02
Index C
Securing to the rear seat with the

Front passenger seat 152 168 CI+ capable CA module, HD programmes
seatbelt
Overview of warning stickers 151 Top Tether 167 Calls up a menu 697
Without automatic co-driver airbag

Rearward-facing 155 154 City lighting 272
shutoff
Recommendations for child restraint

156 Children Classic menu display content
systems
Risks/dangers 149 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle 149 Selecting 493
Seats suitable for belt-secured child

161 Basic instructions 148 Clean varnish 718
restraint systems
Seats suitable for i‑Size child

161 Chock 64 Cleaning
restraint systems
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

160 CI Plus capable CA module Air/water duct 712
restraint systems
Securing to the front passenger seat

168 Inserting a Smart Card 696 Automatic car wash 35
with the seat belt
F295 0075 02
Index C
Brake service mode 716 Vehicle interior 722 Air conditioning menu 297
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

Camera 720 720 Air distribution 293
battery
Car parts 720 Washing by hand 718 Air distribution settings 299
Car wash mode 715 Cleaning carpet 722 Air vents (front) 309
Decorative foil 718 Cleaning the seat cover 722 Air vents (rear) 310
Genuine wood/trim elements 722 Climate control, Air conditioning system Airflow 293
High-pressure cleaner 717 Activating/deactivating 296 Automatic control 298
Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ Automatically controlling (rear oper‐

Paint 718 296 298
ing unit) ating unit)
Activating/deactivating the A/C func‐ Closing/opening the windows (air-

Sensors 720 297 68
tion (control panel) recirculation button)
F295 0075 02
Index C
Defrosting the windscreen 297 Operating unit 293 Synchronisation function 301
Pre-entry climate control for depar‐

Demisting the windscreen 293 306 Temperature 293
ture time
Pre-entry climate control when the

Demisting windows 301 304 Ventilation with comfort opening 207
vehicle is unlocked
Fine particle status display 297 Rear operating unit 294 Windscreen heater 304
Fragrance system 302 Rear window heater 293 Climate control settings
Resetting the climate control set‐

Immediate pre-entry climate control 308 69 Resetting 69
tings
Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER

303 Setting 297 133
grance system) AIR BAG OFF
Switching air-recirculation mode

Ionisation 302 301 COC papers, Certificate of conformity 778
on/off
Switching the A/C function on/off

Notes 293 298
(MBUX)
F295 0075 02
Index C
Components subject to radio regula‐

Cockpit Windscreen wipers 283
tions
Overview (central display) 73 Comfort Declaration of conformity 106
Overview (MBUX Hyperscreen) 76 Information 28 Connection status
Collapsible spare wheel Communication module Displaying 670
Disconnecting automatically from

Notes 773 667 Overview 670
the Internet
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Setting up an Internet connection 667 Contacts, Address book, Phone book
Setting 376 Commuter route 600 Calling up 636
Combination switch Compass 618 Deleting 637
Lights 269 Importing 637
F295 0075 02
Index C
Importing (overview) 636 Content sharing menu Convenience feature
Closing/opening the windows (air-

Information 635 Calling up 545 68
recirculation button)
Making a call 637 Controlling media playback 546 Convenience opening 207
Name format 636 Sharing MBUX display content 546 Coolant
Control element (MBUX multimedia sys‐

Note about suggestions 633 Notes 843
tem)
Options 637 Setting acoustic feedback 533 Cooling 293
Selecting options for suggestions 633 Control elements: 100 Copyright 123
Storing 637 Convenience closing 207 Cornering light 271
Correct use 114
F295 0075 02
Index C
Cover 209 Storing a speed 394
Cross traffic (warning) 465 Cup holder
Crosswind Assist 385 Rear 256
Cruise control
activating/deactivating 394
Calling up a speed 394
Function 393
Requirements: 394
Setting a speed 394
F295 0075 02
Index D
D
Starting/stopping individual record‐
Damage 626 Electronic control units 119
ings
Limited protection 138 Starting/stopping loop recording 625 Online services 121
Damping system ADS PLUS Data processing in the vehicle 119 Deactivating the alarm 215
AIRMATIC 435 Data protection Dealership 112
Setting the vehicle level 435 Granting authorisations 557 Declaration of conformity
Dashcam Data protection rights 121 Battery 108
Components subject to radio regula‐

Configuring settings 627 Data storage 106
tions
Selecting a USB device 625 Data protection rights 121 Electromagnetic compatibility 106
F295 0075 02
Index D
Jack 108 Editing intermediate destinations 598 Selecting a received destination 586
TIREFIT kit 109 Editing the previous destinations 607 Selecting from favourites 585
Decorative foil 718 Saving as a favourite 607 Selecting from the map 585
Defrost function 297 Destination entry Selecting previous destinations 582
Deployed components Accepting a destination suggestion 582 Destination entry (multimedia system)
Limited protection 138 Entering a 3 word address 584 Notes 580
Deployment situations 137 Entering an intermediate destination 598 Selecting a POI 582
Destination Entering geo-coordinates 584 Detecting inattentiveness 391
Editing a suggestion 608 Selecting a contact 584 Diagnostics connection 110
F295 0075 02
Index D
DIGITAL LIGHT Dynamic low beam 271 Problem 185
Activating/deactivating 275 Enhanced fog light function 272 remove 183
Active headlamps 271 Motorway mode 272 Setting up 180
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 276 Overview 271 Starting the vehicle 317
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 277 Topographical compensation 273 Unlocking setting 185
Assistance functions 273 Digital Owner's Manual 93 Unlocking/locking the vehicle 184
Bad weather light 272 Digital Vehicle Key Direct commands
Voice commands for MBUX voice

City lighting 272 Function 180 519
assistant
Cornering light 271 managing 182
F295 0075 02
Index D
DIRECT SELECT lever Display Notes 856
Engages neutral 338 Care 722 Display messages
Engaging drive position 340 Display (driver's display) ç - - - km/h 911
Engaging park position automatically 339 Overview of displays 505 È - - - km/h 906
Overview of displays (Mercedes-

Engaging reverse gear 337 507 h - - - km/h 906
AMG vehicles)
# 12 V on-board electrical sys‐

Function 336 Display (MBUX multimedia system) 923
tem Visit workshop
ò Acoustic presence indicator

Selecting park position 339 Settings 503 877
inoperative
Disconnect device (high-voltage on- P ATTENTION ASSIST Micro‐

313 Display message 905
board electrical system) sleep Take a break!
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

Calling up on driver display 856 905
break!
F295 0075 02
Index D
: Automatic driving lights inop‐

869 é Check tyre(s) 925 ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h 907
erative
Û Battery capacity too low Stop 6 Front left malfunction Consult

880 É Compressor is cooling 910 857
Charge immediately workshop
Û Battery overheated Stop, ÿ Cooling system malfunction

881 876 : Front left parking lights 871
everybody out! Outdoors if possible Stop immediately Switch off the
vehicle
Ø Beginning emergency stop 914 & Currently unavailable Charge : Front left turn signal 872
875
high-voltage battery
6 Front right malfunction Con‐

J Brake immediately 899 & Currently unavailable High- 858
875 sult workshop
voltage battery charging incomplete.
ê Camera view restricted See

919 ! currently unavailable See : Front right parking lights 871
Owner's Manual 901
Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP®)
® Change key batteries 865 ÷ currently unavailable See : Front right turn signal 873
903
Owner's Manual (ESP®)
Û Have high-voltage system

è Charger cable connected 878 í Digital Vehicle Key Charge 881
868 checked See Owner's Manual
device
! inoperative See Owner's Man‐

J Check brake fluid level 900 902
õ Do not forget key 868 ual (ABS and ESP®)
F295 0075 02
Index D
T inoperative See Owner's Man‐

904 õ Key not detected 866 ¢ Lowering 909
ual (EBD, ABS and ESP®)
÷ inoperative See Owner's Man‐ : Malfunction See Owner's Man‐

904 : Left brake lamp 873 869
ual (ESP®) ual
J Malfunction See Owner's Man‐

G Inoperative 922 : Left cornering light 871 899
ual
® Key being taught in Please wait 866 : Left daytime running lights 872 J Malfunction Stop vehicle 900
õ Key being taught in Please wait 868 : Left low beam 871 d Malfunction Visit workshop 883
í Key does not belong to vehicle 868 : Left main beam 872 Û Malfunction Visit workshop 881
® Key not detected (red display

865 : Left mirror turn signal 873 d Malfunction 883
message)
® Key not detected (white dis‐

865 : Left tail light 872 Û Malfunction 881
play message)
õ Key not detected Place Digital 6 Left window airbag malfunc‐

867 862 ¢ Max. speed 20km/h 910
Vehicle Key in inductive charging tion Consult workshop
bracket
F295 0075 02
Index D
_ Rear right seat backrest not

ð Maximum speed exceeded 907 d Performance severely limited 883 893
locked
& Pre-entry climate control via

: Number plate lamp 874 key available again after starting 875 : Rear right turn signal 873
vehicle
Ø 914 & Pre-entry climate control via é Rectify tyre pressure 925
key currently unavailable. High-volt‐ 876
age battery low
ç Off 911 é Reduce speed 927
Ù Rear axle steering currently
890
malfunctioning
ë Off 905 É Reduce speed 910

Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction
891
Stop immediately
Û Output and range reduced See
882 ! Release parking brake 899
Owner's Manual Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction
890
Visit workshop
! Parking brake See Owner's í Replace key See Owner's Man‐
897 868
Manual ual
: Rear fog light 874
! Parking brake Switch on vehi‐

899 ® Replace key 868
cle to release _ Rear left seat backrest not
892
locked
ô Reserve level Charge high-
È passive 906 883
voltage battery
: Rear left turn signal 873
F295 0075 02
Index D
6 Restraint system malfunction

857 : Right tail light 872 d Stop Switch off the vehicle 883
Consult workshop
ð Restricted during trailer opera‐ 6 Right window airbag malfunc‐ # Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on
920 863 924
tion tion Consult workshop to charge the 12 V battery
: Reversing light 874 É Rising 910 É STOP Vehicle level too low 909
6 Second row of seats, left Mal‐ # Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐
: Right brake lamp 873 859 923
function Consult workshop ual
6 Second row of seats, right Mal‐

: Right cornering light 871 861 ç suspended 911
function Consult workshop
# Start the vehicle to charge the

: Right daytime running lights 872 923 : Switch off lights 869
12 V battery
Ù Steering malfunction Drive

: Right low beam 871 890 : Switch on headlamps 869
carefully Visit workshop
Ù Steering malfunction ¸ temporarily unavailable Sen‐

: Right main beam 872 889 918
Increased physical effort See Own‐ sors dirty
er's Manual
: Right mirror turn signal 873 Ù Steering malfunction Stop : Third brake lamp 874
889
immediately See Owner's Manual
F295 0075 02
Index D
+ Top up coolant See Owner’s Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐

877 é Tyre(s) overheated 926 891
Manual er's Manual
Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐

¥ Top up washer fluid 885 É Vehicle rising Please wait 910 912
rently limited See Owner's Manual
u Towing not permitted See Active Brake Assist Functions limited

877 é Warning tyre malfunction 926 913
Owner's Manual See Owner's Manual
Active Distance Assist available

: Trailer brake lamp 874 ¥ Washer fluid flap open 893 912
again
ï Trailer coupling Check lock Active Distance Assist currently

886 é Wheel sensor(s) missing 925 911
(white display message) unavailable See Owner's Manual
ï Trailer coupling Check lock AC charging inoperative Consult

887 879 Active Distance Assist inoperative 912
(red display message) workshop
Active Blind Spot Assist currently Active Emergency Stop Assist cur‐
: Trailer left turn signal 874 917 rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ 914
ual
: Trailer right turn signal 874 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative 917 Active Emergency Stop Assist inop‐
914
erative
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable

: Trailer tail light 875 when towing a trailer See Owner's 917 Active Lane Change Assist currently
915
Manual unavailable See Owner's Manual
F295 0075 02
Index D
Active Lane Change Assist inopera‐ Active Stop-and-Go Assist inopera‐

915 916 Apply brake to engage D or R 893
tive tive See Owner's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently

918 870 Apply brake to engage R 894
unavailable See Owner's Manual unavailable See Owner's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera‐ Apply parking brake to park Visit
918 870 894
restricted See Owner's Manual tive workshop
Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ Automatic lane change currently
918 rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ 870 915
tive unavailable. See Owner's Manual
ual
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐ 922 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐ Automatic lane change inoperative 916
870
er's Manual erative
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white

Active Steering Assist currently Ambient light warning support inop‐ 896
891 display message)
unavailable due to multiple emer‐ 914 erative
gency stops
Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐
AMG Ride Control Function limited 916
Active Steering Assist currently 908 ble See Owner's Manual
913 See Owner's Manual
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift Blind Spot Assist inoperative 917
893
Active Steering Assist inoperative 913 out of P or N
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when

917
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently Apply brake to deselect P position 893 towing a trailer See Owner's Manual
916
unavailable see Owner's Manual
F295 0075 02
Index D
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Head-up display Brightness currently

877 Cruise control off 906 888
Manual reduced See Owner's Manual
Change steering wheel/ seat position DC charging inoperative Consult Head-up display currently unavaila‐
until 6 dots are visible on the upper 920 879 888
workshop ble See Owner's Manual
edge of the screen
Charging fault Please change charg‐ DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited 869 Head-up display inoperative 888
879
ing method See Owner's Manual
Drive malfunction Achievable speed High-voltage battery malfunction.

Check brake pads See Owner's Man‐ 882 Consult workshop without starting 884
901 limited Stop soon
ual the vehicle again
Drive malfunction Achievable speed

Check low beam setting (left/right- 883 High-voltage battery malfunction. No
869 severely limited See Owner's Manual
side traffic) start in approx. XXX km Consult 884
workshop (red display message)
Driver camera inoperative See Own‐
Consult workshop without changing 920
896 er's Manual High-voltage battery malfunction. No
the transmission position
start in approx. XXX km Consult 884
workshop (yellow display message)
Front passenger airbag disabled See
Consult workshop without starting 863
881 Owner's Manual
the vehicle again Inoperative indicator lamp in driver
875
display. Consult workshop
Front passenger airbag enabled See
Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐ 864
906 Owner's Manual
tive Limited availability of Active Parking
Assist manoeuvring assistant See 922
Hazard warning lamp system Mal‐ Owner's Manual
875
Cruise control inoperative 906 function
Limiter inoperative 906
F295 0075 02
Index D
Login failed Change authentication Please charge the high-voltage bat‐ RACE START not possible See Own‐
879 tery. Otherwise the vehicle may not 880 910
method or charging station er's Manual
start
Low beam setting (left/right-side Reduced drive system performance

869 Please close socket flap manually. 879
traffic) Manual adjustment only 878 See Owner's Manual
Anti-entrapment active
N automatically activated Please Restricted mode activated Output

895 Please close socket flap manually. 905
engage transmission position again 878 reduced
Automatic function inoperative
N is selected Please select desired Reversing not poss. Consult work‐

895 Please wait in READY status Warm‐ 896
transmission position 880 shop
ing battery See Owner's Manual
Not possible to unlock charging Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply

878 PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative 894
cable See Owner's Manual 921 parking brake to park
See Owner's Manual
Only select P when vehicle is sta‐ Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
893 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's 894
tionary 921 door open Transmission not in P
Manual
PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring Risk of vehicle rolling away N activa‐

assistant unavailable at rear when 921 PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See ted manually No automatic switch to 894
921
towing a trailer Owner's Manual P
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐ Searching for key in stowage tray or

921 Preparing drive system… 880 Digital Vehicle Key in inductive
er's Manual 866
charging bracket… See Owner's Man‐
ual
Place the key in the marked space
866 RACE START cancelled 911
See Owner's Manual
Snow chain mode Maximum speed
891
exceeded
F295 0075 02
Index D
Socket flap blocked Please open

878 Transmission Malfunction Stop 896 Distance warning 414
manually
Tyre press. monitor currently unavail‐

Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h 907 924 DISTRONIC 396
able
Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐

906 Tyre press. monitor inoperative 924 Dolby Atmos®
able See Owner's Manual
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No

Speed Limit Assist inoperative 907 925 Calling up Dolby Atmos® 684
tyre pressure sensors
The camera's view of the driver is Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown

currently impeded Affected func‐ 920 occurs when locked or automatically 885 Information 684
tions: see Owner's Manual in a few minutes
To shift to N, hold selector lever lon‐ Vehicle not currently being charged Door, Convenience doors
895 879
ger in position N Charging station fault
To switch off the vehicle, press the Additional door lock 187
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ 877 Wiper Malfunction 885
onds or 3 times
Child safety lock (rear door) 169
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ Displaying road names/house numbers 614
907
Emergency key 195

Distance control 396
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative 907
F295 0075 02
Index D
Extend/retract door handles 188 Door handles Selecting 333
Opening (from the inside) 187 Extending/retracting 188 Drive system
Opening/closing comfort doors 191 Drag Race, Drag race 568 Manual switch-off 313
Power closing function 195 Drinks holder 253 Starting (emergency operation mode) 319
Setting convenience doors 194 Drive Away Assist 464 Driver camera
Unlocking (inside) 187 Drive position 340 Activating/deactivating 554
Door control panel Drive program display 333 Function 553
Seat operation 87 Drive programs Driver display
AMG DYNAMIC SELECT 335 Identifying malfunctions 488
F295 0075 02
Index D
Track Pace menu 497 Service due date 705 Adjusting electrically 222
Driver's display, Instrument cluster Service menu 495 Easy entry and exit feature 235
Assistant display 495 Sport menu 498 Seat heating 230
Classic menu 493 Status displays 505 Driving abroad
Head-up display 501 Supersport menu 496 Light adjustment low beam 37
Menus 491 Understated menu 493 Driving safety system
Navigation menu 499 Warning/indicator lamps 79 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 381
Notes 486 Driver's seat Active Brake Assist 414
Operating 489 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220 Active Lane Change Assist 409
F295 0075 02
Index D
Active Steering Assist 405 Hill Start Assist 389 Driving system
Adaptive brake lights 389 HOLD function 387 AMG RIDE CONTROL + 437
ATTENTION ASSIST 391 Overview 379 Driving tips
Acoustic presence indicator (sound

BAS (Brake Assist System) 381 Radar and ultrasonic sensors 378 312
generator)
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

428 Speed Limit Assist 419 AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package 380
Assist
Cameras 378 STEER CONTROL 387 Electric mode 312
Cruise control 393 Traffic Sign Assist 423 General driving tips 320
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐ Light adjustment when driving

387 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 471 37
tion) abroad
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 382 Your responsibility 378 Rear axle steering 323
F295 0075 02
Index D
Recuperation 324 DYNAMIC SELECT
Calling up the fuel consumption indi‐

Running-in notes 320 334
cator
Drowsiness detection 391 Configuring drive program I 334
Duplicate key 179 Displaying vehicle data 334
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Drive program display 333
Suspension 435 Drive programs 331
Dynamic handling control system 382 Function 331
Dynamic low beam Selecting the drive program 333
Overview 271
F295 0075 02
Index E
E
E-mails 517 ECO Assist Emergency braking 376
Easy entry feature Function 325 Manually applying/releasing 375
Function 235 ECO display 323 Releasing automatically 374
Setting 236 Electric Intelligence Electrical fuses 63
Easy exit feature Route with charging stations 589 Electromagnetic compatibility
Function 235 Electric mode, Notes 312 Declaration of conformity 106
Setting 236 Electric parking brake Electronic Stability Program 382
EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution 387 Applying automatically 373
F295 0075 02
Index E
Emergency Brake Assist System 381 Emergency key
Emergency guide 71 Carrying out 376 Door 195
Fire extinguisher 61 Electric parking brake/handbrake 373 Inserting/removing 177
First-aid kit (soft sided) 39 Emergency call Emergency operation mode
Overview of aids 90 Automatic 661 Starting the vehicle 319
Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-

Safety vest 38 Manual 662 313
board electrical system)
Warning triangle 727 Emergency call system Emergency start (drive system) 743
Emergency braking Mercedes me connect 70 Emergency stop assistant 408
Active Brake Assist 414
F295 0075 02
Index E
Emotion Tour ENERGIZING COMFORT Engine electronics 779
Explore 573 Overview of programmes 574 Engine number 840
Overview 572 Starting the programme 575 Engine starting
Emotion Tour Routes Energy flow display Start/stop button 316
Operating 572 Function/notes 571 Entering characters
ENERGIZING Coach Engine Function/notes 549
Calling up 578 Engine number 840 Handwriting recognition 551
Function 577 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key) 317 On the touchscreen 550
switching off (start/stop button) 367 Selecting the writing speed 551
F295 0075 02
Index E
Setting the keyboard language 551 Function 382 Exterior lighting
Environmentally friendly driving 96 Trailer stabilisation 385 Care 720
Light adjustment when driving

ERA-GLONASS test mode 664 EU type approval number 840 37
abroad
ESC, Electronic Stability Control 382 Exit warning

ESP® 428
Assist
Activating/deactivating 385 Exiting a parking space
Adjusting (steering-wheel button) 386 Active Parking Assist 453
Crosswind Assist 385 Drive Away Assist 464
ESP® SPORT 383 PARKTRONIC 449
F295 0075 02
Index F
F
Factory settings Deleting 541 Fingerprint sensor
MBUX reset function 564 Home address 585 MBUX multimedia system 534
Fatigue detection 391 Moving 541 Fire extinguisher 61
Fault message Overview 540 First aid
Driver's display 856 Renaming 541 First-aid kit (soft sided) 39
Favourites Work address 585 Fitting
Adding a destination 585 Fine particle status display 297 Snow chains 55
Calling up 541 Tyres/wheels 768
F295 0075 02
Index F
Fitting accessories Wheel change 764 Fragrance system
Limited protection 138 Flexible charging system Pro 350 Activating/deactivating 302
Fitting the licence plate (front) 105 Floor mats 265 Inserting/removing the flacon 303
Flacon 303 Fog light (extended range) 272 Perfume vial 303
Flat towing Foil covering Setting 302
Pulling/towing 484 On camera/sensors 378 Free software 123
Flat tyre Radar and ultrasonic sensors 378 Frequencies
Notes 64 Fragrance 302 Mobile phone 780
TIREFIT kit 729 Two-way radio 780
F295 0075 02
Index F
Front airbag Operating 682 Front passenger footwell 745
Inflating 137 Front passenger seat Fuse assignment diagram 63
Front headlamps 268 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220 Notes 63
Front passenger airbag Adjusting electrically 222 Rear 745
Disabling/enabling 132 Fuel consumption indicator 334
Front passenger airbag shutoff Function in the event of an accident 137
Information (child restraint system

152 Function seat 87
on the front passenger seat)
Front passenger display Fuses
Information 681 Cockpit 745
F295 0075 02
Index G
G
G-meter (driver's display, Sport menu) 498 Garage door openers Glove compartment
Gallery app Programming buttons 369 Opening/closing 52
Operating 658 Synchronising the rolling code 370 GPS-based vehicle level
Garage door opener General driving tips 320 AIRMATIC 437
Clearing the memory 372 Genuine parts 98 Setting 437
Open/close gate 372 Global search Grab handles 219
Problem 371 Function 545 Gross mass 840
Overview 544
F295 0075 02
Index H
H
Handbrake 373 Hazard warnings Function 501
Handling characteristics Car-to-X-Communication 612 Memory function 239
Unusual 748 Head restraint Operating 502
HANDS-FREE ACCESS 201 Adjusting (rear) 226 Switching on/off 503
Hands-free system 628 Adjusting manually (front) 225 Headlamp flashing 269
Handwriting recognition 551 Removing/fitting (rear) 227 Headlamp range control 273
Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point 327 Head-up display Headlamps 268
Hazard warning lights 60 Care 722
F295 0075 02
Index H
Heating Help call Charging station, mode 3 347
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐

Activating/deactivating 296 70 Configuring weekly profile 364
tem
Centre console 294 High beam 269 Connection types 848
Climate control 293 High-pressure cleaner 717 Disconnect device 313
Ending the charging process (alter‐

Rear window 294 High-voltage battery 355
Ending the charging process (direct

Seat 230 Charge level display 363 361
current, mode 4)
Steering wheel 234 Charging at time of departure 364 Energy flow display 571
Windscreen 304 Charging cable control panel 350 Flexible charging system Pro 350
Charging duration 848 General notes on charging 342
F295 0075 02
Index H
Mains socket, mode 2 346 Stowing the charging cable 345 Hill Start Assist 389
Maximum charging current (mains

349 Type 848 HOLD function
socket)
Notes 735 Voltage types 848 Function 387
Range 848 Wallbox, mode 3 347 Switching on/off 388
Range maximisation 327 High-voltage on-board electrical system Home screen
Rapid charging station, mode 4 348 Charging cable control panel 350 Central display 531
Recuperation 324 Disconnect device 313
Starting the charging process (alter‐

352 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 351
Starting the charging process (direct

358 Manual switch-off 313
current, mode 4)
F295 0075 02
Index I
I
i-Size child restraint system Implied warranty 117 Managing e-mails 642
Fitting 165 Importer information Marking a task as completed 642
Suitable seats 161 Regulatory radio information 838 Selecting functions (calendar entry) 641
Identification plate In-Car Office Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls) 642
Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occu‐

Engine 840 Answering e-mail 643
pants
Vehicle 840 Calling up 641 Limited protection 138
Immediate pre-entry climate control 308 Creating an e-mail 642 Increase in traffic information volume
Immobiliser 214 Forwarding e-mail 643 Setting 690
F295 0075 02
Index I
Indicator lamps/warning lamps Interior lighting Internet
Driver's display 928 Ambient lighting 280 Calling up a web page 670
PASSENGER AIR BAG 130 Setting 280 Calling up the web browser settings 672
Individual drive program Switch-off delay time 282 Calling up web browser options 672
Configuring 334 Interior protection 216 Deleting a bookmark 672
Inside rearview mirror 287 Intermediate destination Deleting browser data 672
Intelligent Light System Editing 598 Managing bookmarks 672
Starting the automatic service sta‐

Activating/deactivating 275 601 Mercedes me connect 655
tion search
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot 558
F295 0075 02
Index I
Smartphone integration 29 Overview of connection status 670 ISOFIX child restraint system
Web browser in the background 673 Restrictions 666 Fitting 165
Web browsers 671 Setting access data (Bluetooth®) 668 Suitable seats 160
Internet connection Setting up (communication module) 667
Cancelling permission (mobile

669 Setting up (Wi-Fi) 668
phone)
Disconnecting automatically (com‐

667 Setup (Bluetooth®) 668
munication module)
Displaying the connection status 670 Ionisation 302
Establishing 669 iPhone®
Information 666 Smartphone integration 644
F295 0075 02
Index J
J
Jack
Declaration of conformity 108
Storage location 64
Jump-start connection 62
F295 0075 02
Index K
K
Key Problem 179 Knee airbag 144
acoustic locking verification signal 176 Replacement key 179
Battery 178 Unlocking setting 176
Deactivating a function 70 KEYLESS-GO
Emergency key 177 Deactivating 70
Energy consumption 70 Locking/unlocking the vehicle 189
Function 175 Problem 190
Key ring attachment 177 Unlocking setting 176
F295 0075 02
Index L
L
Lane Change Assist 409 Last destinations Lighting
Lane Keeping Assist 432 Selecting 582 Dynamic low beam 271
Lane recognition Level control Interior lighting 280
Active Lane Change Assist 409 AIRMATIC 435 Lights
Active Lane Keeping Assist 432 AMG RIDE CONTROL + 437 Active headlamps 271
Language Light adjustment Adaptive brake lights 389
Notes 559 Driving abroad 37 Adaptive Highbeam Assist 276
Setting 559 Light switch 268 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 277
F295 0075 02
Index L
Assistance functions 273 Hazard warning lights 60 Setting low beam 279
Automatic driving lights 268 High beam 269 Switch-off delay time 279
Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐

Bad weather light 272 Interior lighting 280 275
tem on/off

City lighting 272 37 Topographical compensation 273
abroad
Combination switch 269 Locator lighting 279 Turn signal light 269
Cornering light 271 Motorway mode 272 Limiter
DIGITAL LIGHT 271 Reading lamp 280 Activating/deactivating 394
Dynamic low beam 271 Rear fog light 269 Buttons 394
Fog light (extended range) 272 Responsibility for lighting systems 267 Calling up a speed 394
F295 0075 02
Index L
Function 393 Displaying traffic incidents 610 Stowage space under the boot floor 48
Passive mode 393 Extending a subscription 609 Tie-down eyes 50
Information from the service pro‐

Permanent setting 396 609 Loading guidelines 241
vider
Requirements: 394 Registering on Mercedes me 609 Loads 241
Selecting 394 Load capacity Locator lighting 279
Setting a speed 394 Bicycle rack 853 Locking/unlocking
Storing a speed 394 Loading Additional door lock 187
Live Traffic Information Notes 241 Automatic locking (MMS) 191
Displaying the traffic map 609 Roof luggage rack 43 Digital Vehicle Key 184
F295 0075 02
Index L

Doors (from the inside) 187 37
abroad
Emergency key 195 Setting 279
KEYLESS-GO 189 lubricants 842
Mercedes me connect 187 Luggage 241
Loud sound Luggage rack 241
PRE-SAFE® Sound 134 Lumbar support 225
Low beam
Activating/deactivating 268
Left-hand/right-hand traffic 279
F295 0075 02
Index M
M
Maintaining safe distance Restraint system 129 Drive Away Assist 464
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 399 Manoeuvering brake function 466 Manoeuvering brake function 466
Maintenance 705 Manoeuvring Map, Traffic map
Maintenance Management Drive Away Assist 464 Avoiding an area 616
Notes 707 Manoeuvering brake function 466 Avoiding an area (overview) 616
Transferred data 707 Manoeuvring assistant Changing an area 617
Malfunction Activating/deactivating 467 Charging stations 591
Driver display 488 Cross traffic warning 465 Deleting an area 617
F295 0075 02
Index M
Displaying online map contents 620 Moving 615 Maximum full-stop braking 381
Maximum permissible gross vehicle

Displaying Qibla 619 Route overview after start 615 840
mass
Displaying the compass 618 Selecting additional information 616 Maximum speeds 847
Displaying the map version 616 Selecting POI symbols 615 MBUX
Displaying the range 620 Setting the map scale 614 Dashcam 624
Displaying the satellite map 619 Setting the map scale automatically 619 MBUX Interior Assistant
Displaying the traffic map 609 Updating 39 Camera & parking 553
Displaying weather information 620 Map functions 614 Driver camera 553
Map data 618 Massage programmes 229
F295 0075 02
Index M
MBUX multimedia system ENERGIZING seat kinetics 574 Overview 524
Adjusting the volume 548 Factory setting 564 Overview (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 521
Air conditioning menu 297 Fingerprint sensor 534 Set collision detection 376
Setting keyboard and handwriting

Authorisations 557 Global search 545 551
recognition
Setting route-based speed adapta‐

Calling up the zero layer 529 Home screen 531 404
tion
Configuring display settings 503 Language settings 511 Snow chain mode 753
Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT

Display settings 555 Memory Park Assist 471 575
programme
Drive programs 334 Mercedes me & Apps 30 Steering wheel heater/seat heating 234
ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes

574 Operating the zero layer 529 Switching the sound on/off 547
(overview)
F295 0075 02
Index M
Touchscreen 533 Operable functions 512 Media mode
Zero layer 526 Operating safety 510 Adding a favourite song 680
Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐

MBUX Voice Assistant Setting 512 679
ment
E-mails 517 Speech quality 514 Connecting USB devices 679
Function 511 Voice commands 516 Controlling media playback 680
Language setting 512 Voice prompting 511 Copyright and trademarks 676
Media voice commands 517 Mecca 619 Information 681
Information about the search func‐

Online voice commands 518 Media 680
tion in categories
Online voice control 514 General information 28 Overview of the media menu 678
F295 0075 02
Index M
Playing back similar music tracks 680 Memory function Recording 468
Removing a favourite song 680 Head-up display 239 Setting 471
Starting a search in categories 681 Outside mirrors 239 Menus (driver display)
Starting and operating playback 682 Seat 239 Track Pace 497
Menus (driver's display), Steering-wheel

Starting media playback 680 Steering wheel 239
buttons
Supported formats and data storage

676 Memory Parking Assist Assistant display 495
media
Surprise mix 680 Exiting a parking space 470 Classic menu 493
Using the keyword search 681 Function 467 Navigation 499
Medical aids 116 Parking 469 Notes 491
F295 0075 02
Index M
Operating 492 Unlinking the user account 657 Transferred data 653
Service 495 Mercedes me Apps 30 Mercedes me Charge, Paying
Sport 498 Mercedes me calls Charging station display 591
Supersport 496 Arranging a service appointment 652 Mercedes me connect
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Understated menu 493 Centre after automatic accident/ 651 Accident/Breakdown Management 655
breakdown detection
Mercedes me App Information 655

Calls via the overhead control panel 650
Activating on-demand features 101 Transferred data 656

Consenting to the transfer of data 653
Calling up services 657 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information 651
Calling up your user account 657 Automatic emergency call 661

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre 651
F295 0075 02
Index M
Data processing 664 Message memory 856 Reading 639
Data transfer 662 Messages, Short messages Replying 639
ERA-GLONASS test mode 664 Calling a message sender 639 Sending 639
Information 659 Deleting 640 Setting the displayed text messages 639
Manual emergency call 662 Dictating 639 Using a phone number or URL 640
Overview 70 Forwarding 639 Mirror heater 304
Self-diagnosis 663 MBUX voice commands 517 Mirrors
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 98 Overview 638 Mirror folding function 289
Mercedes-Benz service centre 112 Read-aloud function 639 Outside mirrors 286
F295 0075 02
Index M
Rear-view mirror 287 Wireless charging (front) 261 Calling up 683
Wireless charging (rear passenger

Mobile phone 263 Calling up the settings 684
compartment)
Authorising, Remote Parking Assist 463 Model type 840 Requirements: 682
Cancelling permission for Internet

669 Modification Search function 683
connection
Frequencies 780 Limited protection 138
Maximum transmission output 780 Motorway mode 272
Notes on wireless charging 260 Multimedia system 524
Smartphone integration 29 Music online
Telephone 29 Adding providers 682
F295 0075 02
Index N
N
Navigation Route with charging stations 589 Near-field communication (NFC)
Starting the vehicle (Digital Vehicle

Activating 579 Updating the map data 39 317
Key)
Unlocking/locking the vehicle (digital

Destination entry 40 Navigation announcements 184
vehicle key)
Electric Intelligence 589 Activating/deactivating 605 Neutral 338
Information 25 Adjusting the volume 606 Nodding off 391
MBUX voice commands 516 Repeating 607 Notifications Centre
Menu (driver display) 499 Switching audio fadeout on/off 606 Calling up a notification 543
Overview 579 Editing a notification 543
F295 0075 02
Index N
Message types 542
Overview 542
Selecting actions 543
F295 0075 02
Index O
O
Objects in the vehicle interior Child seat 148 On-board electronics
Information on the child restraint

Limited protection 138 132 Engine electronics 779
system
Information on the correct seat posi‐

Occupant presence reminder 126 Two-way radios 779
tion
Activating/deactivating 173 Occupant presence reminder 173 On-demand feature 101
Function 173 Pets in the vehicle 138 Online services 121
Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® 134 Open Source Software 123
Airbag 144 On-board diagnostics interface 110 Open/close garage door 372
Basic information 125 Open/close gate 372
F295 0075 02
Index O
Opening the boot lid using your foot Outside mirrors Overhead control panel 85
HANDS-FREE ACCESS 201 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 287
Operating fluids Automatic mirror folding function 289

Brake fluid 842 428
Assist
Coolant 843 Folding in/out 286
Notes 842 Memory function 239
Windscreen washer fluid 56 Parking position 288
Operating safety 102 Setting 286
Warning lamp 428
F295 0075 02
Index P
P
Paint code 840 Memory Parking Assist 467 Parking assistance systems
Park position 339 PARKTRONIC 449 Active Parking Assist 453
Parking Remote Parking Assist 459 Drive Away Assist 464
Active Parking Assist 453 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Manoeuvering brake function 466
PARKTRONIC 449 Activating/deactivating 452 Memory Parking Assist 467
Prior booking 622 Adjusting warning tones 452 PARKTRONIC 449
Parking Assist Function 449 Remote Parking Assist 459
Active Parking Assist 453 Parking brake 373
F295 0075 02
Index P
Parking charges Parking service PASSENGER AIR BAG
Displaying a parking option on the Status display, front passenger air‐

Paying 623 621 130
map bag
Parking lights 268 Paying parking charges 623 Pedestrian protection 709
Parking option Prior booking of a parking space 622 Permissible axle load 840
Displaying on the map 621 Selecting parking options 621 Permitted towing methods
Parking position Parking space Overview 737
Outside mirrors 288 Finding 621 Pets in the vehicle 138
Storing the front-passenger outside

69 PARKTRONIC 449 Photos
mirror using the memory button
Storing the position of the passenger

288 Gallery app 658
outside mirror using reverse gear
F295 0075 02
Index P
PIN protection Power closing function Pre-entry climate control
activating/deactivating for departure

System PIN protection 560 Boot lid 199 307
time
POI Door 195 At departure time 307
Selecting 582 Power display At time of departure 306
POI symbols Function/notes 504 immediate 308
Selecting 615 Power supply When the vehicle is unlocked 305
Post-collision brake 136 Start/stop button 314 When vehicle is unlocked 304
Power (driver's display, Sport menu) 498 Switching on (start/stop button) 314 Pre-heating 304
F295 0075 02
Index P
PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protec‐

Reversing measures 135 Manoeuvering brake function 466
tion
Preventative occupant protection sys‐

Function 134 134 Protection of the environment
tem
PRE-SAFE® Sound 134 Program 331 Driving style 96
Reversing measures 135 Programme information Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 97
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side TV channel 693 Pulling away
Function 135 Protection Drive Away Assist 464
Inflating 137 Limited 138 Hill Start Assist 389
PRE-SAFE® PLUS Protection against collision
Function 135 Drive Away Assist 464
F295 0075 02
Index Q
Q
Qibla 619
QR code rescue card 62
Qualified specialist workshop 112
F295 0075 02
Index R
R
RACE START Radio Entering a frequency directly 42
Activating 441 Activating 686 Frequency fix 689
Activation conditions 441 Activating/deactivating radio text 690 Managing favourites 688
Information 440 Calling up a slide show 688 MBUX voice commands 517
With boost function 440 Calling up the station list 687 Menu 27
Racetrack mode Deleting stations 688 Moving stations 688
AMG steering-wheel buttons 329 Displaying radio text 690 Overview 686
Radar and ultrasonic sensors 378 Editing station presets 688 Searching for a channel 42
F295 0075 02
Index R
Setting a channel 687 Radio (audio system) Wireless applications 781
Switching traffic announcements

Setting station tracking 689 69 Rain closing function
on/off
Setting station tracking (Internet

688 Radio announcements Side windows 206
Radio)
Setting the frequency band 687 Activating or deactivating 689 Sliding sunroof 211
Setting the traffic information

690 Selecting 689 Rain sensor
service volume increase
Showing/hiding lyrics 690 Radio regulations Side windows 206
Station suggestion 687 Importer information 838 Sliding sunroof 211
Storing radio stations 688 Regulatory radio identification 783 Windscreen wipers 283
Switching a slide show off/on 689 Specific absorption rate 837
F295 0075 02
Index R
Range REACH regulation 115 Rear seat belt
Notes 487 Reading lamp Status display 129
Range maximisation, ERM (Extended

Interior lighting 280 Rear window heater 293
Range Mode)
Activating/deactivating 328 Rear axle steering 323 Rear-view mirror
Function 327 Rear compartment climate control 300 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 287
Range monitor Rear door (child safety lock) Rearward-facing child seat
Activating/deactivating 590 Securing 169 Information 155
Range on map Rear fog lamp 269 Recuperation
On map 593 Rear fog light 269 Function 324
F295 0075 02
Index R
Setting 324 Resetting Information on function 137
Recuperative braking (driver's display, Information on the correct seat posi‐

498 MBUX reset function 564 126
Sport menu) tion
Recycling 97 Responsibility Limited protection 138
Registration 113 Driving safety systems 378 Malfunction 129
Remote Parking Assist Restraint system Protection 126
Authorising a mobile phone 463 Basic information 125 Self-test 129
Function 459 Basic instructions for children 148 Warning lamp 129
Operating 460 Deployment situations 137 Reverse gear 337
Replacement key 179 Functionality 129
F295 0075 02
Index R
Reversing camera Roof load 847 Calculating alternative routes 595
360° Camera 442 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 847 Calculating with Electric Intelligence 586
Activate via GPS 448 Roof luggage rack Charging near destination 594
Function 442 Loading 43 Commuter route 600
Manage activation points 448 Securing 43 Displaying destination information 597
Opening the camera cover 448 Route Displaying the route list 599
Roll away protection 387 Accepting a detour recommendation 595 Editing a stored route 601
Roller sunblind Adjusting on the map 601 Electric Intelligence 589
Sliding sunroof 209 Alternative route 599 Electric Intelligence (overview) 588
F295 0075 02
Index R
Navigation 579 Starting a saved route 601 Notes 602
Starting the automatic service sta‐

Planning 598 601 Off-road 607
tion search
Range on Map service 593 Switching the range monitor on/off 590 Route guidance with augmented reality
Recording 602 Route guidance Activating 614
Activating/deactivating the traffic

Saving a recorded route 602 Cancelling 607 428
light view
Displaying road names/house num‐

Selecting a type 595 Changing direction 603 614
bers
Selecting notifications 596 Destination reached 605 Overview 613
Selecting options 596 Lane recommendations 604 Route-based speed adaptation
Selecting settings for charging sta‐

tions (navigation with Electric Intelli‐ 589 Motorway information 605 Function 403
gence)
F295 0075 02
Index R
Setting 404
Running-in notes 320
F295 0075 02
Index S
S
Safety system 379 Automatic adjustment 228 Lumbar support 225
Safety vest 38 Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest) 144 Massage programmes 229
Satellite map 619 Configuring settings 228 Memory function 239
Saving a destination suggestion as a Resetting settings (massage pro‐

608 Correct driver's seat position 218 230
favourite gramme)
Searching for a channel 42 ENERGIZING seat kinetics 574 Settings 87
Seat, Front seat, Through-loading feature Folding back the backrest (rear) 46 Side airbag 144
Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 220 Folding the backrest forwards (rear) 45 Workout programmes 229
Adjusting electrically 222 Locking the backrest (rear) 250
F295 0075 02
Index S
Seat belt Warning lamp 129 Seat kinetics
Activating/deactivating seat belt

136 Seat belt adjustment Setting 574
adjustment
Adjusting the height 128 Activating/deactivating 136 Seat ventilation
Automatic tightening 136 Function 136 Activating/deactivating 231
Care 722 Seat belt tensioners Second telephone
Fastening 128 Inflating 137 Connecting 631
Notes on wearing correctly 127 Seat belt warning 129 Selecting the sound profile

Rear seat belt status display 129 Seat heating 700
tem
Releasing 143 Activating/deactivating 230 Selector lever 336
F295 0075 02
Index S
Self-test Service due date 705 Shortening the braking distance
Automatic front passenger airbag

130 Service interval display 705 Brake Assist System 381
shutoff
Restraint system 129 Service station search Shunting assistant 471
Sensors Starting automatic search 601 Shunting support 465
Cleaning 720 Setting the date format 556 Side airbag 144
Information 378 Setting the distance unit 559 Side window
Service Settings Close with key 207
Menu (driver's display) 495 Information 30 Convenience closing 207
Service centre 112 Convenience opening 207
F295 0075 02
Index S
Opening with the key 207 Sliding roof Smart Card
Window films 719 Close with key 207 Inserting 696
Side windows Opening with the key 207 Smartphone integration
Automatic function 206 Sliding sunroof, Panorama sliding sunroof Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto 29
Child safety lock (rear) 171 Automatic functions 211 Snow chain mode 753
Opening/closing 205 Opening/closing 209 Snow chains 55
Problem 208 Problem 212 Socket
Rain closing function 206 Rain closing function 211 12 V (front passenger footwell) 258
Skid chains 55 Trailer operation 477
F295 0075 02
Index S
Socket flap 342 Sound settings Speed

SOS button 650 699 Limit, Limiter 393
settings
Sound Automatic loudness normalisation 699 Save, cruise control 399
PRE-SAFE® Sound 134 Calling up the sound menu 699 Save, DISTRONIC 399
Wheels/tyres 748 Setting the balance and fader 699 Save, Limiter 399
Sound Experience Spare parts 98 Speed adjustment, route-based 403
Calling up Sound Experience 702 Spare wheel, Emergency spare wheel 771 Speed control
Information 702 Specialist workshop 112 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 396
Sound generator 312 Specific absorption rate (SAR) 837 Cruise control 393
F295 0075 02
Index S
Limiter 393 Hill Start Assist 389 Starting-off aid
Speed limit Start/stop button Drive Away Assist 464
Winter tyres 55 Parking the vehicle 367 Hill Start Assist 389
Speed Limit Assist Starting the vehicle 316 Station
Switching on the power supply /

Setting 422 314 Deleting 688
vehicle
System limits 419 Starting assistance 62 Entering a frequency directly 42
Standing lights 268 Starting the engine Frequency fix 689
Start-off assist Start/stop button 316 Managing favourites 688
Drive Away Assist 464 Moving 688
F295 0075 02
Index S
Setting 687 Station tracking STEER CONTROL 387
Storing 688 Setting 689 Steering
Station list Setting (Internet Radio) 688 Rear axle steering 323
Calling up 687 Status display Steering wheel
Station presets Front passenger airbag 130 Adjusting electrically 233
Editing 688 Rear seat belt 129 Driver's airbag 144
Station suggestion Steer Assist Manually adjusting 232
Radio 687 Active Steering Assist 405 Memory function 239
STEER CONTROL 387 Steering wheel adjustment 233
F295 0075 02
Index S
Steering wheel heater Door 51 Suspension
Decoupling from the seat heating 234 Glove compartment 51 AIRMATIC 435
Stopping Streaming online music 683 AMG RIDE CONTROL + 437
Parking the vehicle 367 Suggestions DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL 435
Stowage areas 51 Configuring 560 Selecting the suspension setting 438
Setting the suspension level (AIR‐

Stowage space under the boot floor 48 Deleting 561 435
MATIC)
Stowage spaces Supersport menu display content Setting the vehicle level 439
Armrest (front) 51 Selecting 496 Suspension level
Centre console (front) 51 Setting 439
F295 0075 02
Index S
SVHC System PIN protection
Substances of very high concern 115 Activating/deactivating 560
Switch-off delay time System settings
Activating/deactivating system PIN

Exterior 279 560
protection
Interior 282 MBUX reset function 564
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 301 Setting the distance unit 559
Switching loudness normalisation on/off Setting the time zone 555
Advanced sound system 701 Setting the time/date format 556

700 Transmission of the vehicle position 556
tem
F295 0075 02
Index T
T
Tabs Information 778 Tongue weight 853
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

managing 672 Maximum speeds 847 854
cles)
Mounting dimensions of a trailer

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 97 852 Towing capacity 853
hitch
Overhang dimension of the trailer

Technical data 852 Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 853
hitch
Axle load (trailer operation) 854 Radio frequencies 780 Vehicle dimensions 846
Axle load (trailer operation),

854 Radio regulations 783 Telediagnosis
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Fastening points of the trailer hitch 852 Roof load 847 Diagnostic data 708
High-voltage battery 848 Specific absorption rate (SAR) 837
F295 0075 02
Index T
Notes on wireless charging (mobile

Telediagnostics Disconnecting a mobile phone 632 260
phone)
Transferred data 708 Emergency call 70 Operating modes 630
Telemetry display 569 Importing contacts 637 Reception and transmission volume 632
Telephone, Smartphone Importing contacts (overview) 636 Secure Simple Pairing 16
Activating functions during a call 634 Incoming call during an existing call 635 Setting the ringtone 633
Authorising a mobile phone Remote

463 Information 24 Smartphone integration 29
Parking Assist
Calls with several participants 634 Interchanging mobile phones 631 Telephone menu overview 629
Changing a function 631 MBUX voice commands 516 Telephone operation 634
Connecting a mobile phone 16 Notes 628 Voice recognition 633
F295 0075 02
Index T
Wireless charging (mobile phone,

263 Television, Digital TV Tie-down eyes 50
rear)
Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone,

261 MBUX voice commands 517 Time
front)
Telephone (audio system) Temperature Manual time setting 556
Replacing a mobile phone 631 Setting 293 Setting the time zone 555
Telephony operating modes Text messages 517 Setting the time/date format 556
Bluetooth® telephony 630 THERMATIC TIREFIT kit, Tyre inflation compressor
Teletext Air conditioning control panel 293 Declaration of conformity 109
Displaying 696 THERMOTRONIC Storage location 65
Overview 695 Air conditioning control panel 294
F295 0075 02
Index T
Toll system Touch Control Tow bar system
Windscreen 290 Driver display 488 Towing away 484
Tone settings Driver's display 489 Tow-away protection 216
Information 699 MBUX 532 Tow-starting 743
Tongue weight 853 Setting the sensitivity 533 Towing
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 854 Touch-sensitive controls 100 Pulling/towing 484
Top Tether 167 Touchscreen Towing methods 737
Topographical compensation, Predictive

273 Entering characters 550 Towing eye
headlamp range control
Switching haptic operation on and

534 Storage location 743
off
F295 0075 02
Index T
Towing methods Traffic information Traffic light view
Both axles on the ground 65 Car-to-X-Communication 612 Activating/deactivating 428
Overview 737 Displaying the traffic map 609 Information 428
Track Pace Displaying traffic incidents 610 Traffic light warning/display 423
Extending a Live Traffic Information

Menu (driver display) 497 609 Traffic Sign Assist
subscription
Information on Live Traffic Informa‐

Track Race 565 609 Function 423
tion
Traffic announcements (audio system) Overview 608 Setting 427
Switching on/off 69 Registering Live Traffic Information 609 Trailer coupling 48
Traffic Jam Assistant 405 Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing 484
F295 0075 02
Index T
Trailer hitch Mounting dimensions 852 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist
Axle load 854 Overhang dimension 852 Function 471
Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeu‐

Axle load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 854 Socket 477
vring assistant
Bicycle rack 481 Tongue weight 853 Operation 472
Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Care 720 854 Trailer operation
cles)
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 477 Towing capacity 853 Active Blind Spot Assist 431
Fastening points 852 Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 853 Active Lane Keeping Assist 432
Folding the ball neck out/in 48 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 471 Axle load 854
General notes 852 Bicycle rack 481
F295 0075 02
Index T
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 477 Transmission Transmission positions 336
Folding the ball neck out/in 48 DIRECT SELECT lever 336 Transmission position display 336
Making settings 480 Drive programs 331 Transporting
Notes 474 DYNAMIC SELECT button 331 Vehicle 740
Socket 477 Engages neutral 338 TuneIn
Trailer stabilisation 385 Engaging drive position 340 Deleting stations 674
Transferred vehicle data Engaging reverse gear 337 Logging out 674
Android Auto 649 Selecting park position 339 Overview 674
Apple CarPlay® 649 Transmission position display 336 Registering 674
F295 0075 02
Index T
Calling up the menu (CI+ capable CA

Saving stations 674 697 Showing/hiding the full screen 692
module)
Selecting and connecting a station 674 Hiding encrypted TV channels 695 Teletext overview 695
Selecting stream 674 Information 691 TV channel
Setting options 674 MBUX voice commands 517 Activating/deactivating channel fix 694
Turn signal indicator 269 Overview 692 Channel fix 694
Turn signal light 269 Picture settings 696 Channel list overview 694
TV Setting subtitles 695 Country-specific character set 694
Activating 692 Setting the audio language 695 EPG (electronic programme guide) 693
Adjusting the brightness 696 Showing teletext 696 Overview of favourites 694
F295 0075 02
Index T
Selecting from the channel list 693 Type approval number EG 840 Tyre sealant 729
Selecting from the control menu 693 Tyre pressure Tyre tread 37
Selecting from the favourites 693 Notes 755 Tyre type
Selecting in the background 693 TIREFIT kit 729 Selecting (MBUX) 754
Storing 694 Tyre pressure table 756 Tyre-change tool 64
Two-way radios Tyre pressure monitoring system Tyre-change tool kit 64
Frequencies 780 Function 756 Tyres
Installation 779 Restarting 757 Breakdown 64
Transmission output 780 Tyre pressure table 756 Checking 37
F295 0075 02
Index T
Checking temperature 757 Replacing 759
Fitting 768 Selection 759
Interchanging 763 Snow chains 55
Noise 748 Storing 763
Notes on fitting 759 TIREFIT kit 729
Notes on using Electric Intelligence 763 Tyre pressure table 756
Removing 767 Unusual handling characteristics 748
Removing/fitting hub cap 765
Removing/fitting wheel trim 765
F295 0075 02
Index U
U
Updating software, System update,
Understated menu display content Stowage compartments (front) 51
Update
Selecting 493 Error message 563 USB port (multimedia system)
Unfastening 143 Information 561 Connecting devices 679
Units of measurement Performing 561 User profiles, Personalisation
Setting 559 URL Adding a user 537
Unlocking setting Sharing 673 Notes 535
Digital Vehicle Key 185 USB port Overview 536
Rear 258 Requirements for use 536
F295 0075 02
Index U
Selecting a user 539
Selecting options 537
Synchronising 540
User-specific content 536
F295 0075 02
Index V
V
Valet service mode Diagnostics connection 110 Lowering 769
Activating/deactivating 389 Emergency key 195 Medical aids 116
Function 389 Implied warranty 117 QR code rescue card 62
Variable limiter 393 Information 29 Raising 765
Vehicle, Starting, Switching on the ignition KEYLESS-GO 189 REACH regulation 115
Additional door lock 187 lock automatically (MMS) 191 Registration 113
Correct use 114 Lock/unlock (emergency key) 195 Set collision detection 376
Data storage 119 Locking/unlocking (from inside) 188 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key) 317
F295 0075 02
Index V
Starting (emergency operation mode) 319 Transporting 740 Roof load 847
unlocking/locking (digital vehicle

Starting (start/stop button) 316 184 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 847
key)
Stopping 367 ventilate / comfort opening 207 Transferring to Android Auto 649
SVHC/substances of very high con‐ Voice commands for MBUX voice

115 517 Transferring to Apple CarPlay® 649
cern assistant
Switching off 367 Vehicle cameras 378 Vehicle height 846
Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

switching off (start/stop button) 367 Vehicle data 846
cles)
Switching on (start/stop button) 314 Display, MBUX 334 Vehicle length 846
Vehicle length (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Towing 484 Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT 334 846
cles)
Towing away 737 Maximum speeds 847 Vehicle width 846
F295 0075 02
Index V
Vehicle width (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

846 Gross mass 840 Vehicle location
cle)
Wheelbase 846 Model type 840 Switching transmission on/off 556
Wheelbase (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 846 Paint code 840 Vehicle position
Vehicle dimensions 846 VIN 840 Sharing with a contact 619
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG

846 Vehicle key 175 Storing 607
vehicles)
Vehicle identification number 840 Vehicle level Vehicle sensors 378
Vehicle identification plate AIRMATIC 435 Vehicle socket
Axle load 840 Setting (AIRMATIC) 435 Care 720
EU type approval number 840 Indicator lamps 351
F295 0075 02
Index V
Vehicle start Video recordings Voice assistant
Start/stop button 316 Gallery app 658 Voice prompting 511
Vehicle tool kit VIN Voice recognition 633
TIREFIT kit 65 Engine compartment 840
Towing eye 743 Identification plate 840
Ventilation 207 Seat 840
Vents Vision
Air vents 309 Demisting windows 301
Windscreen heater 304
F295 0075 02
Index W
W
! Electric parking brake indicator Ù Power steering warning lamp
Warning system 214 934 932
lamp (red) (yellow)
! Electric parking brake indicator Ù Rear axle steering warning

Warning triangle 39 934 933
lamp (yellow) lamp (red)
Ù Rear axle steering warning

Warning/indicator lamp # Electrical fault warning lamp 931 933
lamp (yellow)
! ABS warning lamp 936 å ESP® OFF warning lamp 937 _ Reduced-power warning lamp 931
Ó Active Brake Assist warning

940 ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes 937 6 Restraint system warning lamp 930
lamp
Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning

939 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up 937 ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes 930
lamp
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call ü Seat belt warning lamp lights

J Brakes warning lamp (red) 934 941 931
system warning lamp up
Ù Power steering warning lamp ê Speed Limit Assist warning

J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) 934 932 940
(red) lamp
F295 0075 02
Index W
ä Suspension warning lamp (red) 941 Warning/indicator lamps Wear
ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐

936 Driver's display 928 Limited protection 138
low)
Ú System error warning lamp 931 PASSENGER AIR BAG 130 Weather information 620
ê Traffic Sign Assist warning

940 Washer fluid Web browser
lamp
ï Trailer hitch warning lamp 932 Topping up 32 Calls up options 672

942 Windscreen washer fluid 56 Deleting browser data 672
tem warning lamp flashes

942 Washing by hand 718 Web browsers
tem warning lamp lights up
L Warning lamp for distance

940 Water tank 712 Calling up a web page 670
warning
Calling up the settings 672
F295 0075 02
Index W
Deleting a bookmark 672 Wheel change Wheels
Managing bookmarks 672 Fitting a new wheel 768 Breakdown 64
Setting in the background 673 Lowering the vehicle 769 Care 720
Sharing URLs 673 Preparation 764 Checking 37
Tabs 672 Raising the vehicle 765 Checking tyre temperature 757
Weight information 840 Removing a wheel 767 Fitting 768
What3words Removing/fitting hub caps 765 Interchanging 763
Destination entry with a 3 word

584 Removing/fitting wheel trim 765 Noise 748
address
Wheel rotation 763 Notes on fitting 759
F295 0075 02
Index W
Removing 767 Tyre pressure monitoring system 756 Windows
Removing/fitting hub cap 765 Unusual handling characteristics 748 Care 720
Removing/fitting wheel trim 765 Wi-Fi Convenience opening 207
Replacing 759 Activating/deactivating 558 De-icing 297
Selection 759 Information on connection 557 Opening with the key 207
Snow chains 55 Setting up a hotspot 558 Opening/closing 205
Opening/closing (air recirculation

Storing 763 Setting up an Internet connection 668 68
button)
TIREFIT kit 729 Window airbag 144 Removing mist 301
Tyre pressure 755 Window films 719
F295 0075 02
Index W
Windscreen Windscreen wipers Setting the permanent speed limit 55
De-icing 297 Activating/deactivating 283 Wiper blades
Demisting 293 Replacing the wiper blades 32 Care 720
Replacing the wiper blades (wind‐

Infrared reflective coating 291 32 Replacing (windscreen) 32
screen)
Radio waves 290 Winter operation Wipers 283
Activating/deactivating snow chain

Toll system 290 753 Wireless applications 781
mode
Windscreen heater 304 Snow chains 55 Wireless charging
Windscreen washer fluid 56 Winter tyres Mobile phone (front) 261
Windscreen washer system 32 Limiter 55 Mobile phone (rear) 263
F295 0075 02
Index W
Notes 260
Workout programmes 229
Workshop 112
F295 0075 02
Index Z
Z
Zero layer
Function 526
Overview 527
F295 0075 02
Publication details
WEBSITE
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following
websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://group.mercedes-benz.com
EDITORIAL TEAM
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you
may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical
editorial team at the following address:
Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546

Stuttgart, Germany
© Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or oth‐
erwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written per‐
mission from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
VEHICLE MANUFACTURER
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart, Germany
F295 0075 02

Mercedes Eqe Saloon 2024 March v295 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Eqe Saloon 2024 March v295 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Eqe Saloon 2024 March v295 Mbux Owners Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EQE

Digital – in the vehicle Digital – on the Internet

Apple® iOS AndroidTM

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with

R Model THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE COMPONENTS OF THE VEHICLE:

Symbols 6 Opening and closing 174 MBUX multimedia system 520

At a glance 72 Light and sight 266 Breakdown assistance 725

General notes 95 Driving and parking 311 Technical data 777

Display messages and warning/indicator

(/ page) Further information on a topic

# Observe environmental notes.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information

Quick start and Tips

Seats 9 MBUX Voice Assistant 17 New multimedia system features 24

Children in the vehicle 10 ENERGIZING Packages 18 At the filling station 32

DIGITAL LIGHT 11 Driving Assistance package 19 Preparing for a holiday 37

Touch-sensitive controls 12 Parking Package 20 Luggage and loading 43

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

High-voltage battery direct current charg‐

Connecting a mobile phone 16 Destination entry navigation 23 Expert tips 68

Adjusting the seats

1 Head restraint height

Children in the vehicle

# Approval categories for child restraint systems (/ page 155)

# Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

# Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems

# Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 167)

# Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING ADAPTIVE FUNCTIONS:

R Active headlamps (/ page 271)

# To activate or deactivate Digital Light:

# To activate or deactivate enhanced assistance functions:

Overview of touch-sensitive controls

1 Control panel: 3 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system

5 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof

Operating radio R Select è.

# To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

# Searching for a mobile phone:

# Authorising a mobile phone:

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

MBUX Voice Assistant

Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant

EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:

R To operate the phone: Call my father.

Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

# To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

# To start Power Nap:

# To start a training programme:

Driving Assistance package

# Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 431)

The following functions are included in the Driving Assistance Package,

# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 396)

# Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 403)